Part 9 — Housing and Small Buildings
Section 9.1.General
9.1.1.Application
(1) The application of this Part shall be as described in Subsection . of Division A.
(1) Signs shall conform to the requirements in Section 3.15.
(1) Self-service storage buildings shall conform to the requirements in Section 3.10.
(1) Tents shall conform to the requirements in Subsection .
(2) Air-supported structures shall conform to the requirements in Subsection .
(1) Where a building is constructed in close proximity to existing above ground electrical conductors, the requirements of Subsection . shall apply.
(1) The requirements of Subsection . apply to all food premises.
(1) In addition to all other requirements, a building in the following designated areas shall be designed and constructed so that the annual average concentration of radon 222 does not exceed 200 Bq/m3 of air and the annual average concentration of the short lived daughters of radon 222 does not exceed 0.02 working levels inside the building for, (a) the City of Elliot Lake in the Territorial District of Algoma,
(b) the Township of Faraday in the County of Hastings, and
(c) the geographic Township of Hyman in the Territorial District of Sudbury.
(1) Buildings constructed on flood plains shall,
(a) be designed and constructed in accordance with good engineering practice to withstand anticipated vertical and horizontal hydrostatic pressures acting on the structure, and
(b) incorporate floodproofing measures that will preserve the integrity of exits and means of eg ress during times of flooding.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2) and in Sentence .(2), a manufactured building is deemed to comply with this Code if it is designed and constructed in compliance with,
(a) CSA Z240.2.1, “Structural requirements for manufactured homes,” if the building is constructed in sections not wider than 4.88 m, or
(b) CSA A277, “Procedure for certification of prefabricated buildings, modules, and panels.”
(2) The requirements of this Code shall apply to,
(a) building components designed and constructed outside the place of manufacture, and
(b) site installation of such buildings.
(1) Public pools shall conform to the requirements of Section 3.11. and public spas shall conform to the requirements of Section 3.12.
(1) Shelf and rack storage systems shall conform to the requirements of Section 3.16.
Section 9.2.Definitions
9.2.1.General
(1) Words in italics are defined in Article . of Division A.
Section 9.3.Materials, Systems and Equipment
9.3.1.Concrete
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2) and Articles . and ., unreinforced and nominally reinforced concrete shall be designed, mixed, placed, cured and tested in accordance with the requirements for “R” class concrete stated in Section 9 of CSA A23. 1, “Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction.”
(2) Unreinforced and nominally reinforced site-batched concrete shall be designed, mixed, placed and cured in accordance with Articles . to .
(3) Except as provided in Sentence (4), Subsection . and Section 9.40., reinforced concrete shall be designed to conform to the requirements of Part 4.
(4) For flat insulating concrete form walls not exceeding 2storeys in building hei ght and having a maximum floor to floor height of 3 m, in buildings of light-frame construction, the concrete and reinforcing shall comply with Part 4 or
(a) the concrete shall conform to CSA A23.1, “Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction,” with a maximum aggregate size of 19 mm, and
(b) the reinforcing shall,
(i) conform to CSA G30.18, “Carbon steel bars for concrete reinforcement”,
(ii) have a minimum specified yield strength of 400 MPa, and
(iii) be lapped a minimum of 450 mm for 10M bars and 650 mm for 15M bars. (See also Articles . and . to .)
(1) Cement shall meet the requirements of CSA A3001, “Cementitious materials for use in concrete.”
(1) Concrete in contact with sulphate soil, which is deleterious to normal cement, shall conform to the requirements in Clause of CSA A23. 1, “Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction.”
(1) Aggregates shall
(a) consist of sand, gravel, crushed rock, crushed air-cooled blast furnace slag, expanded shale or expanded clay conforming to CSA A23.1, “Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction,” and
(b) be clean, well-graded and free of injurious amounts of organic and other deleterious material.
(1) Water shall be clean and free of injurious amounts of oil, organic matter, sediment or any other deleterious material.
(See also Article ., Sentence .(1) and Article .)
(1) Except as provided elsewhere in this Part, the compressive strength ofunreinforced concrete after 28 days shall be not less than,
(a) 32 MPa for garage floors, carport floors and all exterior flatwork,
(b) 20 MPa for interior floors other than those for garages and carports, and
(c) 15 MPa for all other applications.
(2) Site-batched concrete used for garage floors, carport floors and exterior flatwork shall have air entrainment of 5 to 8%.
(1) For pre-mixed concrete and for the site-batched concrete mixes described in Table ., the maximum ratio of water to cementing materials measured by weight shall not exceed
(a) 0.45 for garage floors, carport floors and all exterior flatwork,
(b) 0.65 for interior floors other than those for garages and carports, and
(c) 0.70 for all other applications.
(2) The size of aggregate in unreinforced site-batched concrete mixes referred to in Sentence (1) shall not exceed,
(a) 1/5 the distance between the sides of vertical forms, or
(b) 1/3 the thickness of flatwork.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) 1 part cementing material = 1 × 40 kg bag
(1) Admixtures shall conform to ASTM C260 / C260M, “ Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete,” or ASTM C494 / C494M, “Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete,” as applicable.
(1) When the air temperature is below 5°C, concrete shall be
(a) kept at a temperature of not less than 10 °C or more than 25°C while being mixed and placed, and
(b) maintained at a temperature of not less than 10 °C for 72 h after placing.
(2) No frozen material or ice shall be used in concrete described in Sentence (1).
9.3.2.Lumber and Wood Products
(1) Lumber for joists, rafters, trusses and beams and for the uses listed in Table . shall be identified by a grade stamp to indicate its grade as determined by the NLGA, “Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.” (See Note A- .(1))
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Note A-Table .
(1) Except for joists, rafters, trusses and beams, visually graded lumber shall conform to the grades in Table . (See Article . for joists, rafters and beams and Article . for trusses.)
(1) Machine stress rated lumber shall conform to the requirements of Subsection .
(1) OSB, waferboard and plywood used for roof sheathing, wall sheathing and subflooring shall be legibly identified on the face of the material indicating,
(a) the manufacturer of the material,
(b) the standard to which it is produced, and
(c) that the material is of an exterior type.
(1) Moisture content of lumber shall be not more than 19% at the time of installation.
(1) Lumber dimensions referred to in this Part are actual dimensions determined in conformance with CSA O141, “Softwood Lumber.”
(1) The thicknesses specified in this Part for plywood, hardboard, particleboard, OSB and waferboard shall be subject to the tolerances permitted in the standards referenced for these products unless specifically indicated herein.
(1) Joist, rafter, lintel and beam members up to 5% less than the actual Canadian standard sizes are permitted to be used provided the allowable spans for the grade and species of lumber under consideration are reduced 5% from those shown in the Span Tables for full size members. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) In localities where termites are known to occur,
(a) clearance between structural wood elements and the finished ground level directly below them shall be not less than 450 mm and, except as provided in Sentence (2), all sides of the supporting elements shall be visible to permit inspection, or
(b) structural wood elements, supported by elements in contact with the ground or exposed over bare soil, shall be pressure-treated with a chemical that is toxic to termites. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) In localities where termites are known to occur and foundations are insulated or otherwise finished in a manner that could conceal a termite infestation,
(a) a metal or plastic barrier shall be installed through the insulation and any other separation or finish materials above finished ground level to control the passage of termites behind or through the insulation, separation or finish materials, and
(b) all sides of the finished supporting assembly shall be visible to permit inspection.
(3) Structural wood elements shall be pressure-treated with a preservative to resist decay where the vertical clearance between structural wood elements and the finished ground level is less than 150 mm. (See Note A-.(3))
(3.1) In localities where termites are known to occur and where windows or other openings at or below grade contain wood elements, the bottom of window wells or adjacent ground shall be at least 150 mm below the nearest wood unless the wood is pressure-treated with a chemical toxic to termites.
(4) Structural wood elements used in retaining walls and cribbing shall be pressure-treated with a preservative to resist decay, where
(a) the retaining wall or cribbing supports ground that is critical to the stability of building foundat ions, or
(b) the retaining wall or cribbing is greater than 1.2 m in height. (See Note A-.(4))
(5) Where wood is required by this Article to be treated to resist termites or decay, such treatment shall be in accordance with Table 2, “Use Categories for Specific Products, Uses, and Exposures,” of CAN/CSA-O80.1, “Specification of treated wood,” as follows:
(a) Use Category 1 (UC1), where the wood member is used in
(i) interior construction,
(ii) above-ground applications, and
(iii) applications where the wood member remains dry,
(b) Use Category 2 (UC2), where the wood member is used in
(i) interior construction,
(ii) above-ground applications, and
(iii) applications where the wood member may be subjected to occasional sources of moisture,
(c) Use Category 3.2 (UC3.2), where the wood member is used in
(i) exterior construction,
(ii) above-ground applications, and
(iii) applications where the wood member is uncoated or is used in a configuration conducive to moisture accumulation,
(d) Use Category 4.1 (UC4.1), where
(i) the wood member is used in contact with the ground,
(ii) the wood member is used in contact with fresh water, or
(iii) the vertical clearance between the wood element and the finished ground level is less than 150 mm and the wood elements are not separated from permeable supporting materials by a moisture barrier, or
(e) Use Category 4.2 (UC4.2), where the wood member is used in critical structural components, including permanent wood foundations.
(6) Where wood is protected in accordance with UC1 or UC2 using an inorganic boron preservative, the wood shall be
(a) protected from direct exposure to water during and after the completion of construction, and
(b) separated from permeable supporting materials by a moisture barrier that is resistant to all expected mechanisms of deterioration in the service environment if the vertical clearance to the ground is less than 150 mm.
(7) Wood that is required by this Article to be treated to resist termites or decay shall be identified by a mark to indicate the type of preservative used and conformance to the relevant required Use Category.
9.3.3.Metal
(1) Minimum thicknesses for sheet metal material that are stated in this Part refer to the actual minimum base metal thicknesses measured at any point of the material, and in the case of galvanized steel described in Sentence .(1), include the thickness of the galvanizing coating unless otherwise indicated.
(1) Where sheet steel is required to be galvanized, it shall be metallic-coated with zinc or an alloy of 55% aluminum- zinc meeting the requirements of
(a) ASTM A653 / A653M, “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process,” or
(b) ASTM A792 / A792M, “Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.”
(2) Where galvanized sheet steel is intended for use in locations exposed to the weather or as a flashing material, it shall have a zinc coating not less than the G90 (Z275) coating designation or an aluminum-zinc alloy coating not less than the AZM150 coating designation, as referred to in Sentence (1).
Section 9.4.Structural Requirements
9.4.1.Structural Design Requirements and Application Limitations
(1) Subject to the application limitations defined elsewhere in this Part, structural members and their connections shall (a) conform to requirements provided elsewhere in this Part,
(b) be designed according to good engineering practice such as provided in the CWC 2014, “Engineering Guide for Wood Frame Construction,” or
(c) be designed according to Part 4 using the loads and deflection and vibration limits specified in,
(i) this Part, or
(ii) Part 4.
(2) Where floor framing is designed in accordance with Clause (1)(b) or (c) and where supporting wall framing and fastenings, or footings, are designed according to Clause (1)(a), the maximum specified live load on the floor according to Table . shall not exceed 2.4 kPa.
(3) Location-specific information for structural design, including snow and wind loads and seismic spectral response accelerations, shall be determined according to MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, “Climatic and Seismic Data.” (See Note A-.(3))
9.4.2.Specified Loads
(1) This Subsection applies to light-frame construction whose wall, floor and roof planes are generally comprised of frames of small repetitive structural members, and where
(a) the roof and wall planes are clad, sheathed or braced on at least one side,
(b) the small repetitive structural members are spaced not more than 600 mm o.c.,
(c) the clear span of any structural member does not exceed 12.2 m,
(d) the maximum deflection of the structural roof members conforms to Article .,
(e) the maximum total roof area, notwithstanding any separation of adjoining buildings by firewalls, is 4 550 m2, and
(f) for flat roofs, there are no significant obstructions on the roof, such as parapet walls, spaced closer than the distance calculated by Do = 10(Ho – 0.8 Ss / γ) where Do = minimum distance between obstructions, m, Ho = height of the obstruction above the roof, m, Ss = ground snow load, kPa, and γ = specific weight of snow taken as 4.0 kN/m3 or 0.43Ss + 2.2 kN/m3, whichever is lesser.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (4), specified snow loads shall be not less than those calculated using the following formula: S = CbSs + Sr where S = specified snow load, Cb = basic snow load roof factor, which is 0.45 where the entire width of a roof does not exceed 4.3 m and 0.55 for all other roofs, Ss = 1-in-50 year ground snow load in kPa, determined according to MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, “Climatic and Seismic Data,” and Sr = associated 1-in-50 year rain load in kPa, determined according to MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, “Climatic and Seismic Data.”
(2) In no case shall the specified snow load be less than 1 kPa.
(3) Bow string, arch or semi-circular roof trusses having an unsupported span greater than 6 m shall be designed in conformance with the snow load requirements in Subsection .
(4) Where the height of a roof step at the intersection of an upper level roof and a lower level roof is greater than 2 m, and the upper level roof has a slope less than 1 in 6 and an area greater than 600 m2, the specified snow load on the lower level roof shall be
(a) for distances from the roof step that are less than or equal to the drift length, xd, calculated in accordance with Sentence (5), not less than 1.5 times the specified snow load, S, calculated using the formula in Sentence (1) with Cb equal to 0.55, and
(b) for distances from the roof step that are greater than the drift length, xd, calculated in accordance with Sentence (5), as specified in Sentence (1).
(5) For the purposes of Sentence (4),the drift length, xd, in m, shall be calculated as follows: where h = height of the roof step, in m, and γ = specific weight of snow as specified in Clause .(1)(f).
(1) Balconies, decks and other accessible exterior platforms intended for an occupancy and subject to snow loads shall be designed to carry the specified roof snow load or 1.9 kPa, whichever is greater, where the platform, or each segregated area of the platform, serves a single dwelling unit. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Ceiling joists or truss bottom chords in residential attic or roof spaces having limited accessibility that precludes the storage of equipment or material shall be designed for a total specified load of not less than 0.35 kPa, where the total specified load is the sum of the specified dead load plus the specified live load of the ceiling. (See Note A-.(1))
9.4.3.Deflections
(1) The maximum deflection of structural members shall conform to Table .
(2) Dead loads need not be considered in computing deflections referred to in Sentence (1).
Table 9.4.3.1. Maximum Deflections Forming Part of Sentence 9.4.3.1.(1)
| Structural Members | Type of Ceiling Supported | Max. Allowable Deflection as an Expressed Ratio of t he Clear Span |
|---|---|---|
| Roof rafters, roof joists and roof beams | No ceiling | 1/180 |
| Other than plaster or gypsum board | 1/240 | |
| Plaster or gypsum board | 1/360 | |
| Ceiling joists | Other than plaster or gypsum board | 1/240 |
| Plaster or gypsum board | 1/360 | |
| Floor beams, floor joists and floor decking | All cases | 1/360 |
| Beams, joists and decking for balconies, decks and other accessible exterior platforms | Serving a single dwell ing unit | 1/240 |
| Other | 1/360 |
9.4.4.Foundation Conditions
(1) Footing sizes for shallow foundations shall be
(a) determined in accordance with Section 9.15., or
(b) designed in accordance with Section 4.2. using,
(i) the maximum allowable bearing pressures in Table ., or
(ii) allowable bearing pressures determined from subsurface investigation.
(2) The design procedures described in Section 4.2. are permitted to be used in lieu of the design procedures in this Subsection.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Note A-Table .
(3) The design procedures described in Section 4.2. shall be used where,
(a) deep foundations are used,
(b) the footing size falls outside the scope of this Section, or
(c) the foundation is constructed on peat, filled ground or on sensitive clays as described in Article .
(1) Where a soil or rock within a distance equal to twice the footing width below the bearing surface has a lower allowable bearing pressure than that at the bearing surface as shown in Article ., the design capacity of the foundation shall not be greater than would cause the weakest soil or rock to be stressed beyond its allowable bearing pressure.
(2) In calculating subsurface pressures referred to in Sentence (1), the loads from the footings shall be assumed to be distributed uniformly over a horizontal plane within a frustum extending downward from the footing at an angle of 60o to the horizontal.
(1) Where a foundation bears on gravel, sand or silt, and the water table is within a distance below the bearing surface equal to the width of the foundation, the allowable beari ng pressure shall be 50% of that determined in Article .
(2) Material that is susceptible to changes in volume due to freezing shall not be used as fill beneath floors-on-ground that will be subjected to freezing temperatures. (See also Article . and Note A-.(1))
(3) Except as provided in Sentence (4), fill beneath floors-on-ground shall be compacted.
(4) Fill beneath floors-on-ground need not be compacted where the material is clean coarse aggregate containing not more than 10% of material that will pass a 4 mm sieve.
(1) Except where constructed in accordance with Section 9.15., walls supporting drained earth shall be designed
(a) for a pressure equivalent to that exerted by a fluid with a density of not less than 480 kg/m3 and a depth equal to that of the retained earth, or
(b) in accordance with Section 4.2. so as to be able to resist the loads and effects described in Article .
(2) Walls supporting other than drained earth shall be designed
(a) for the pressure described in Clause (1)(a) plus the fluid pressure of the surcharge, or
(b) in accordance with Section 4.2. so as to be able to resist the loads and effects described in Article .
Section 9.5.Design of Areas, Spaces and
9.5.1.General
9.5.1.0A.Application
(1) Except as otherwise specified in this Part, the areas, dimensions and heights of rooms or spaces shall be measured between finished wall surfaces and between finished floor and ceiling surfaces.
(1) Minimum floor areas specified in this Section do not include closets or built-in bedroom cabinets unless otherwise indicated.
(1) Two or more areas may be considered as a combination room if the opening between the areas occupies the larger of 3 m2 or 40% or more of the wall measured on the side of the dependent area.
(2) Where the dependent area is a bedroom, direct passage shall be provided between the two areas.
(3) The opening required in Sentence (1) shall not contain doors or windows.
(1) Areas of rooms and spaces are permitted to be less than required in this Section provided it can be shown that the rooms and spaces are adequate for their intended use, such as by the provision of built-in furniture to compensate for reduced sizes.
9.5.2.Barrier-Free Design
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2) and Article ., every building shall be designed in conformance with Section 3.8.
(2) The requirements of Section 3.8. need not be provided for detached houses, semi-detached houses, houses with a secondary suite, duplexes, triplexes, row houses and boarding or rooming houses with fewer than eight boarders or roomers.
(1) Where a barrier-free path of travel required in Article . is provided to any storey above the first storey, the requirements in Article . shall apply.
(1) If wood wall studs or sheet steel wall studs enclose the main bathroom in a dwelling unit, reinforcement shall be installed to permit the future installation of the following:
(a) for a water closet, a grab bar described in Clauses .(3)(a) and a grab bar described in Clause .(3)(c), (b) for a shower, a grab bar described in Clause .(2)(g), and
(c) for a bathtub, a grab bar described in Clause .(7)(e). (See Note A-.(1))
9.5.3.Ceiling Heights
9.5.3A.1. Areas of Living Rooms and Spaces
9.5.3B.1. Area of Dining Rooms or Spaces
9.5.3C.1. Kitchen Areas
9.5.3D.2. Areas of Master Bedrooms
9.5.3E.1. Combined Living, Dining, Bedroom and Kitchen Spaces
9.5.3F.1. Space to Accommodate Fixtures
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), the ceiling heights and clear heights in rooms or spaces in residential occupancies and live / work units shall conform to Table .
(2) Ceiling heights in secondary suites shall be not less than 1.95 m.
(3) Clear heights under beams and ducting in secondary suites shall be not less than 1.85 m.
(4) Areas in rooms or spaces over which ceiling height and clear height are not less than the minimum specified in Table . or Sentence (2)or(3)shall be contiguous with the entry or entries to those rooms or spaces.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) Area of the space shall be measured at floor level.
(1) The ceiling height above and below a me zzanine floor assembly in all occupancies shall be not less than 2.1 m.
(1) The clear height in a storage garage shall be not less than 2 m.
9.5.4.Hallways
(1) The unobstructed width of a hallway within a dwelling unit shall be not less than 860 mm, except that the hallway width is permitted to be 710 mm where
(a) there are only bedrooms and bathrooms at the end of the hallway furthest from the living area, and
(b) a second exit is provided
(i) in the hallway near the end furthest from the living area, or
(ii) in each bedroom served by the hallway.
9.5.5.Doorway Sizes
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2) and Articles ., . and ., doorway openings within dwelling units and within houses with a secondary suite including their common spaces shall be designed to accommodate at least the door sizes given in Table . for swing-type and folding doors.
(2) Doorway openings within secondary suites shall be designed to accommodate swing-type and folding doors not less than 1 890 mm high where the ceiling height complies with Sentence .(2).
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Article .
(1) Doors to public water closet rooms shall be not less than 810 mm wide and 2 030 mm high.
(1) Where a barrier-free path of travel conforming to Section 3.8. is provided into a su ite of residential occupancy and where a bathroom within the suite is at the level of the suite entrance door, the doorway to such bathroom and to each bedroom at the same level as such bathroom shall have, when the door is in the open position, a clear width of not less than,
(a) 760 mm where the door is served by a corridor or space not less than 1 060 mm wide, and
(b) 810 mm where the door is served by a corridor or space less than 1 060 mm wide.
Section 9.6.Glass
9.6.1.General
(1) This Section applies to
(a) glass in
(i) interior doors and interior windows and their sidelights,
(ii) clothes closets,
(iii) site-built exterior windows, doors and skylights,
(iv) shower or bathtub enclosures,
(v) glazed panels and partitions, and
(b) the protection of glass.
(1) Glass shall conform to
(a) CAN/CGSB-12.1, “Safety Glazing,”
(b) CAN/CGSB-12.2-M, “Flat, Clear Sheet Glass,”
(c) CAN/CGSB-12.3-M, “Flat, Clear Float Glass,”
(d) CAN/CGSB-12.4-M, “Heat Absorbing Glass,”
(e) CAN/CGSB-12.8, “Insulating glass units,”
(f) CAN/CGSB-12.9, “Spandrel glass,”
(g) CAN/CGSB-12.10-M, “Glass, Light and Heat Reflecting,”
(h) CAN/CGSB-12.11-M, “Wired Safety Glass,” or
(i) ASTM E2190, “Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.”
(2) Mirrored glass doors are only permitted to be used at the entrance to clothes closets and shall conform to the requirements of CAN/CGSB-82.6-M, “Doors, Mirrored Glass, Sliding or Folding, Wardrobe.” (See Note A-.(2))
(3) Mirrored glass doors reinforced with a film backing shall meet the impact resistance requirements specified in CAN/CGSB-12.5-M, “Mirrors, Silvered.”
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), glass shall be designed in conformance with Article .
(2) Where the building has an essentially uniform distribution of paths for air leakage, including operable openings, but no large openings that would permit wind gusts to rapidly enter the bu ilding and the building is not in an exceptionally exposed location such as a hilltop, the maximum area of individual panes of glass for windows shall conform to
(a) Tables9..-Ato .-C, where the building has a height from grade to the uppermost roof of 12 m or less, and is located in a built-up area, no less than 120 m away from the boundary between this area and open terrain, or
(b) Tables .-D to .-F. (See Note A-.(2))
(3) The maximum area of individual panes of glass for doors shall conform to Table .-G.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .-A:
(1) The maximum hourly wind pressure with one chance in fifty of being exceeded in any one year, as provided in MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, “Climatic and Seismic Data.”
(2) Maximum glass area values apply to IG units of two identical lites (annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered) spaced at 12.7 mm.
Table .-B Maximum Glass Area for Windows in Areas for which the 1-in-50 Hourly Wind Pressure (HWP) is Less than 0.75 kPa(1) Forming Part of Clause .(2)(a)
[TABLE:1] Notes to Table .-B:
(1) The maximum hourly wind pressure with one chance in fifty of being exceeded in any one year, as provided in MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, “Climatic and Seismic Data.”
(2) Maximum glass area values apply to IG units of two identical lites (annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered) spaced at 12.7 mm.
Table .-C Maximum Glass Area for Windows in Areas for which the 1-in-50 Hourly Wind Pressure (HWP) is Less than 1.00 kPa(1) Forming Part of Clause .(2)(a)
[TABLE:2] Notes to Table .-C:
(1) The maximum hourly wind pressure with one chance in fifty of being exceeded in any one year, as provided in MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, “Climatic and Seismic Data.”
(2) Maximum glass area values apply to IG units of two identical lites (annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered) spaced at 12.7 mm.
Table .-D Maximum Glass Area for Windows in Areas for which the 1-in-50 Hourly Wind Pressure (HWP) is Less than 0.55 kPa – Open Terrain(1) Forming Part of Clause .(2)(b)
[TABLE:3] Notes to Table .-D:
(1) The maximum hourly wind pressure with one chance in fifty of being exceeded in any one year, as provided in MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, “Climatic and Seismic Data.”
(2) Maximum glass area values apply to IG units of two identical lites (annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered) spaced at 12.7 mm.
Table .-E Maximum Glass Area for Windows in Areas for which the 1-in-50 Hourly Wind Pressure (HWP) is Less than 0.75 kPa – Open Terrain(1) Forming Part of Clause .(2)(b)
[TABLE:4] Notes to Table .-E:
(1) The maximum hourly wind pressure with one chance in fifty of being exceeded in any one year, as provided in MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, “Climatic and Seismic Data.”
(2) Maximum glass area values apply to IG units of two identical lites (annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered) spaced at 12.7 mm.
Table .-F Maximum Glass Area for Windows in Areas for which the 1-in-50 Hourly Wind Pressure (HWP) is Less than 1.00 kPa – Open Terrain(1) Forming Part of Clause .(2)(b)
[TABLE:5] Notes to Table .-F:
(1) The maximum hourly wind pressure with one chance in fifty of being exceeded in any one year, as provided in MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, “Climatic and Seismic Data.”
(2) Maximum glass area values apply to IG units of two identical lites (annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered) spaced at 12.7 mm .
Table .-G Glass Area for Doors Forming Part of Sentence .(3)
[TABLE:6] Notes to Table .-G:
(1) See Note A-Table .-G.
(2) Not generally available.
(1) Glass sidelights greater than 500 mm wide that could be mistaken for doors, glass in storm doors and glass in sliding doors within or at every entrance to a dwelling unit and in public areas shall be
(a) safety glazing of the tempered or laminated type conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.1, “Safety Glazing,” or
(b) wired glass conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.11-M, “Wired Safety Glass.”
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (4), glass in entrance doors to dwelling units and in public areas, other than the entrance doors described in Sentence (1), shall be safety glazing or wired glass of the type described in Sentence (1) where the glass area exceeds 0.5 m2 and extends to less than 900 mm from the bottom of the door.
(3) Except as provided in Sentence (4), transparent panels that could be mistaken as a means of egress shall be protected by barriers or railings.
(4) Sliding glass partitions that separate a public corridor from an adjacent occupancy and that are open during normal working hours need not conform to Sentences (2), (3) and (5), except that such partitions shall be suitably marked to indicate their existence and position.
(5) Except as provided in Sentence (4), every glass or transparent door accessible to the public shall be equipped with hardware, bars or other permanent fixtures designed so that the existence and position of such doors is readily apparent.
(6) Glazing used for a shower or bathtub enclosure shall conform to Class A of CAN/CGSB-12.1, “Safety Glazing.”
Section 9.7.Windows, Doors and Skylights
9.7.1.General
(1) This Section applies to
(a) windows, doors and skylights separating conditioned space from unconditioned space or the exterior, and
(b) main entrance doors.
(2) For the purpose of this Section, the term “skylight” refers to unit skylights, roof windows and tubular daylighting devices.
(3) For the purpose of this Section, the term “doors” includes glazing in doors and sidelights for doors.
9.7.2.Required Windows, Doors and Skylights
(1) A door shall be provided at each entrance to a dwelling unit.
(2) Main entrance doors to dwelling units shall be provided with
(a) a door viewer or transparent glazing in the door, or
(b) a sidelight.
(1) Minimum sizes of doorways and doors within a barrier-free path of travel shall conform to Section 9.5.
(2) The protection of window and door openings to protect persons from falling through them shall conform to Article .
(3) Properties of windows and doors within exits shall conform to Section 9.9.
(4) Windows and doors installed to provide the required means of egress from bedrooms shall conform to Subsection .
(5) The location and protection of windows, doors and skylights in order to control the spread of fire shall conform to Subsection .
(6) Doors between dwelling units and attached garages shall conform to Article .
(7) The surface flame-spread rating for doors and skylights shall conform to Article .
(8) Windows and doors installed to provide the required access to a building for firefighting purposes shall conform to Subsection .
(9) Windows and skylights installed to provide required non-heating season ventilation shall conform to Article .
(1) Except as required in Article . and Sentence (3), the minimum window glass areas for rooms in buildings of residential occupancy or rooms that are used for sleeping shall conform to Table .
(2) The unobstructed glass area of a door or skylight is considered equivalent to that of a window.
(3) Work areas in live / work units shall conform to Clause .(2)(a).
(4) Where rooms with different requirements for window glass area are combined as described in Sentence .(1), the more restrictive requirement shall govern.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Subsection .
9.7.3.Performance of Windows, Doors and Skylights
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) to (4), windows, doors and skylights and their components separating conditioned space from unconditioned space or the exterior shall be designed, constructed and installed so that, when in the closed position, they
(a) resist the ingress of precipitation into interior space, (See Note A-.(1))
(b) resist wind loads,
(c) control air leakage,
(d) resist the ingress of insects and vermin,
(e) where required, resist forced entry, and
(f) are easily operable when not intended to be fixed.
(2) Skylights and their components shall be designed, constructed and installed so that, when in the closed position, they resist snow loads.
(3) Main entrance doors and their components shall be designed, constructed and installed so that, when in the closed position, they
(a) control air leakage,
(b) resist the ingress of insects and vermin,
(c) resist forced entry, and
(d) are easily operable.
(4) Storm doors, sliding doors and their components shall be designed, constructed and installed so that, when in the closed position, they
(a) resist wind loads,
(b) control air leakage to a minimum allowable 5 m3h/m and a maximum allowable 8.35 m3h/m,
(c) resist the ingress of insects and vermin, and
(d) are easily operable.
(5) Compliance with the performance requirements described in Sentences (1) to (4) shall be demonstrated by
(a) complying with the requirements in
(i) Subsection . or ., and
(ii) Subsection ., or
(b) design and construction conforming to Part 5.
(1) Windows, doors and skylights described in Clause .(1)(a) and their components shall be designed, constructed and installed to
(a) minimize surface condensation on the warm side of the component, and (See Note A-.(1)(a))
(b) ensure comfortable conditions for occupants.
(2) Compliance with the heat transfer performance requirements described in Sentence (1) shall be demonstrated by
(a) complying with the requirements in Article ., or
(b) design and construction conforming to Part 5.
(1) Metal frames and sash of windows, doors and skylights shall incorporate a thermal break.
(2) Windows and doors described in Sentence (1) do not require a thermal break where they are installed as (a) vehicular access doors,
(b) storm windows and doors, or
(c) windows and doors that are required to have afire-resistance rating.
(3) Windows, doors and skylights with or without storm doors or sash that are installed in buildings where the intended use of the interior space will not result in high moisture generation shall have a maximum thermal transmittance (U - value) or minimum temperature index (I) in accordance with Table .
(4) Windows, doors and skylights, with or without storm doors or sash that are installed in portions of buildings where the intended use of the interior space will result in high moisture generation shall be designed in conformance with Subsection 5.3. (See Note A-.)
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) U-values for specific products can be determined according to measures referenced in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440,
“NAFS-North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights.” Temperature index (I) is determined according to the physical test procedure given in CSA A440.2/A440.3, “Fenestration energy performance/User guide to CSA A440.2- 19, Fenestration energy performance.”
(2) There is no appropriate test procedure available for testing the condensation resistance of sloped glazing.
(3) Where the U-value in this Table differs from the U-value provided in MMA Supplementary Standard SB-10, “Energy Efficiency Requirements” or MMA Supplementary Standard SB-12, “Energy Efficiency for Housing”, the most restrictive U-value shall apply.
9.7.4.Manufactured Windows, Doors and Skylights
(1) This Subsection applies to windows, doors and skylights covered in the scope of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, “North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights” (Harmonized Standard).
(1) Manufactured and pre-assembled windows, doors and skylights and their installation shall conform to
(a) AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, “North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights” (Harmonized Standard),
(b) CSA A440S1, “Canadian Supplement to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-17, North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights,”
(c) the remainder of this Subsection, and
(d) the applicable requirements in Subsection . (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Performance grades for windows, doors and skylights shall be selected according to CSA A440S1, “Canadian Supplement to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-17, North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights” so as to be appropriate for the conditions and geographic location in which the window, door or skylight will be installed.
(2) Windows, doors and skylights shall conform to the performance grades selected under Sentence (1) when tested in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, “North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights” (Harmonized Standard).
(3) The minimum level of performance required for windows, doors and skylights shall be that of the Performance Class R.
(4) Exterior wood doors shall conform to CAN/CSA-O132.2 Series, “Wood Flush Doors,” and shall have legibly indicated on them
(a) the name of the manufacturer,
(b) the standard to which they were produced, and
(c) that they are of an exterior type.
9.7.5.Site-Built Windows, Doors and Skylights
(1) Materials, design, construction and installation of windows, doors and skylights that separate conditioned space from unconditioned space or the exterior but that are not within the scope of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, “North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights,” shall conform
(a) to
(i) the remainder of this Subsection or Subsection ., and
(ii) the applicable requirements in Subsection ., or
(b) to Part 5.
(2) Glass for site-built windows, doors, sidelights for doors, and skylights shall comply with Section 9.6.
(1) Except for exterior doors to garages and to other ancillary spaces, this Article applies to
(a) swinging entrance doors to dwelling units,
(b) swinging doors between dwelling uni ts and attached garages or other ancillary spaces, and
(c) swinging doors that provide access directly or indirectly from a storage garage to a dwelling unit. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Doors, frames and hardware that conform to a security level of at least Grade 10 as described in the Annex to ASTM F476, “Standard Test Methods for Security of Swinging Door Assemblies,” are not required to conform to Sentences (3) to (7). (See Note A-.(2))
(3) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), wood doors as described in Sentence (1) shall
(a) be solid core or stile-and-rail type,
(b) be not less than 45 mm thick, and
(c) if of the stile-and-rail type, have a panel thickness of not less than 19 mm, with a total panel area not more than half of the door area.
(4) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), doors described in Sentence (1) shall be provided with
(a) a deadbolt lock with a cylinder having no fewer than 5 pins, and
(b) a bolt throw not less than 25 mm long, protected with a solid or hardened free-turning ring or beveled cylinder housing. (See Article .)
(5) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), an inactive leaf in double doors used in locations specified in Sentence (1) shall be provided with heavy-duty bolts top and bottom having an engagement of not less than 15 mm.
(6) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), hinges for doors described in Sentence (1) shall be fastened
(a) to wood doors with wood screws not less than 25 mm long and to wood frames with wood screws such that at least 2 screws per hinge penetrate not less than 30 mm into solid wood, or
(b) to metal doors and metal frames with machine screws not smaller than No. 10 and not less than 10 mm long. (See Note A-.(6))
(7) Strikeplates for deadbolts described in Sentence (4) shall be fastened
(a) to wood frames with wood screws that penetrate not less than 30 mm into solid wood, or
(b) to metal frames with machine screws not smaller than No. 8 and not less than 10 mm long. (See Note A-.(6))
(8) Except for storm doors or screen doors, doors described in Sentence (1) that swing outward shall be provided with hinges or pins so that the doors cannot be removed when they are in the closed position. (See Note A-.(8))
(9) Solid blocking shall be provided on both sides at the lock height between the jambs for doors described in Sentence (1) and the structural framing so that the jambs will resist spreading by force.
(1) In dwelling units, windows, any part of which is located within 2 m of adjacent ground level, shall conform to the requirements for resistance to forced entry as described in Clause of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, “North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights.” (See Note A-.(1))
9.7.6.Installation
(1) The installation of windows, doors and skylights shall conform to CSA A440.4, “Window, door, and skylight installation,” except that
(a) shims used to support windows, doors and skylights are permitted to be made of treated plywood, and
(b) protection from precipitation for walls incorporating windows or doors and for roofs incorporating skylights, and the interfaces of these walls with windows or doors and of roofs with skylights, shall also conform to Section 9.27.
(2) The installation of manufactured and pre-assembled windows, doors and skylights and the field assembly of manufactured window and door combination units shall conform to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(3) Windows, doors and skylights shall be sealed to air barriers.
(1) The sealing compound used to seal the glass component of an insulating glazing unit to the sash component shall be compatible with the sealing compound used to edge seal the glass component.
(2) Flashing used to protect openings shall conform to Articles . and .
(3) Sealants shall be applied between window frames or trim and the exterior cladding or masonry in conformance with Subsection .
(4) All unfinished portions ofthe frame and other components of aluminum windows, doors or skylights in contact with the edges of masonry, concrete, stucco or plaster shall be protected with an alkali-resistant coating.
Section 9.8.Stairs, Ramps, Handrails and
9.8.1.Application
(1) This Section applies to the design and construction of interior and exterior stairs, steps, ramps, landings, handrails and guards.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (3), stairs, ramps, landings, handrails and guards in a garage that serves a single dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite shall conform to the requirements for stairs, ramps, landings, handrails and guards within a dwelling unit.
(1) Where a stair, ramp or landing forms part of an exit, the appropriate requirements in Sections 9.9. and 9.10. shall also apply.
(1) Escalators and moving walks shall conform to the appropriate requirements in Part 3.
9.8.2.Stair Dimensions
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2) and Article ., required exit stairs and public stairs serving buildings of residential occupancy shall have a width of not less than 900 mm.
(2) Exit stairs serving a single dwelling unit or a house with a seco ndary suite including their common spaces shall have a width of not less than 860 mm.
(3) Except as provided in Article ., required exit stairs and public stairs serving buildings of other than residential occupancy shall have a width of not less than the greater of
(a) 900 mm, or
(b) 8 mm per person based on the occupant load limits specified in Table .
(4) Except as provided in Article ., at least one stair between each floor level within a dwelling unit, and exterior stairs serving a single dwelling unit except required exit stairs, shall have a width of not less than 860 mm.
(1) The clear height over stairs shall be measured vertically, over the clear width of the stair, from a straight line tangent to the tread and landing nosings to the lowest point above. (See Note A-.)
(2) Except as provided in Sentences (3) and (4) and Article ., the clear height over stairs shall not be less than 2 050 mm.
(3) Except as provided in Article ., the clear height over stairs serving a single dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces shall not be less than 1 950 mm.
(4) The clear height over stairs that are located under beams and ducting in secondary suites shall not be less than 1 850 mm.
9.8.3.Stair Configurations
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), stairs shall consist of
(a) straight flights,
(b) curved flights, or
(c) spiral stairs.
(2) Stairs within dwelling units and houses with a secondary suite, including their common spaces, shall consist of (a) straight flights,
(b) except as provided in Sentence (4),curved flights,
(c) except as provided in Sentence .(2), spiral stairs, (d) flights with rectangular treads and winders, or
(e) flights with a mix of rectangular and tapered treads.
(3) Curved flights in exits shall comply with Sentence .(2).
(4) Spiral stairs shall comply with Article .
(1) Except for stairs within a dwelling unit, at least three risers shall be provided in interior flights.
(1) The vertical height of any flight of stairs shall not exceed 3.7 m.
9.8.4.Step Dimensions (See Note A-9.8.4.)
(1) Except as provided in Article ., the rise, which is measured as the vertical nosing-to-nosing distance, shall conform to Table .
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) Private stairs are:
(a) interior stairs within a house with a secondary suite or an individual dwelling unit,
(b) exterior stairs serving a house with a secondary suite or an individual d welling unit, and
(c) exterior stairs serving a garage that serves a house with a secondary suite or an individual dwelling unit.
(2) Public stairs are all stairs not described as service stairs or private stairs.
(3) Service stairs are stairs that serve areas used only as service rooms or service spac es.
(4) Stairs to unoccupied attic space are stairs that serve attics containing no storage or living space.
(1) The run for rectangular treads shall conform with Table .
(2) The depth of a rectangular tread shall be not less than its run and not more than its run plus 25 mm.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2) and Articles . and ., tapered treads shall have a run that
(a) is not less than 150 mm at the narrow end of the tread, and
(b) complies with the dimensions for rectangular treads stated in Table . when measured at a point 300 mm from the centre line of the handrail at the narrow end of the tread.
(2) Tapered treads in required exit stairs shall conform to the requirements in Article .
(3) The depth of a tapered tread shall be not less than its run at any point and not more than its run at any point plus 25 mm.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), risers shall be of uniform height in any one flight with a maximum tolerance of
(a) 5 mm between adjacent treads or landings, and
(b) 10 mm between the tallest and shortest risers in a flight.
(2) Except for required exit stairs, where the top or bottom riser in a stair adjoins a sloping finished walking surface such as a garage floor, driveway or sidewalk, the height of the riser across the stair shall vary by not more than 1 in 12.
(3) Rectangular treads shall have a uniform run with a maximum tolerance of
(a) 5 mm between adjacent treads, and
(b) 10 mm between the deepest and shallowest treads in a flight.
(4) Tapered treads in a flight shall have a uniform run in accordance with the construction tolerances stipulated in Sentence (3) when measured at a point 300 mm from the centre line of the handrail as described in Sentence .(5).
(5) The slope oftreads shall not exceed 1 in 50.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2) and Article ., where a flight of stairs consists of both tapered treads and rectangular treads, all the treads shall have a uniform run when measured at a point 300 mm from the centre line of the inside handrail.
(2) Where tapered treads are located at the bottom of a mixed-tread flight, the run of the tapered treads when measured at a point 300 mm from the centre line of the inside handrail is permitted to exceed the run of the rectangular treads.
(1) Stairs within dwelling units are permitted to contain winders that converge to a centre point provided
(a) the winders turn through an angle of not more than 90°,
(b) individual treads turn through an angle of not less than 30° or not more than 45°, and
(c) adjacent winders turn through the same angle.
(2) Where more than one set of winders described in Sentence (1) is provided in a single stairway between adjacent floor levels, such winders shall be separated in plan by at least 1 200 mm.
(1) Spiral stairs shall have
(a) handrails on both sides, the outer handrail being not less than 1 070 mm high,
(b) a clear width not less than 660 mm between handrails,
(c) risers that are not more than 240 mm high,
(d) treads that
(i) are a minimum of 190 mm deep at a point 300 mm from the centre line of the handrails at the narrower edge, (ii) have a consistent angle and uniform dimension, and
(iii) turn in the same direction, and
(e) not less than 1 980 mm clear height.
(2) Spiral stairs conforming to Sentence (1) are permitted to be used as the only means of egress where they serve not more than 3 persons.
(3) Except as permitted by Sentence (2), spiral stairs shall not serve as an exit.
(1) Except as permitted by Sentence (2), the top of the nosings of stair treads shall have a rounded or beveled edge extending not less than 6 mm and not more than 14 mm measured horizontally from the front of the nosing.
(2) If resilient material is used to cover the nosing of a stair tread, the minimum extension of the rounded or beveled edge required by Sentence (1) is permitted to be reduced to 3 mm.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), stairs shall have no open risers.
(2) Open risers are permitted in
(a) interior and exterior stairs that serve a single dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite,
(b) fire escape stairs,
(c) stairs that are principally used for maintenance,
(d) stairs that serve service rooms, and
(e) stairs that serve industrial occupancies other than storage garages.
(1) Interior stairways extending through the roof of a building shall be protected from ice and snow.
9.8.5.Ramps
(1) This Subsection applies to pedestrian ramps except ramps in a ba rrier-free path of travel.
(2) Ramps in a barrier-free path of travel shall conform to the requirements in Article .
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), ramps shall not be less than 1 100 mm wide.
(2) Ramps serving a single dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces shall be not less than 860 mm wide
(1) Except as permitted by Sentence (2), the clear height over ramps shall be not less than 2 050 mm.
(2) The clear height over ramps serving a single dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces shall be not less than 1 950 mm.
(1) The slope of ramps shall be not more than
(a) 1 in 10 for exterior ramps,
(b) 1 in 10 for interior ramps serving residential occupancies,
(c) 1 in 6 for industrial occupancies, and
(d) 1 in 8 for all other occupancies.
(1) Where the slope of the ramp is greater than 1 in 12, the maximum rise between floors or landings shall be 1 500 mm.
9.8.6.Landings
(1) This Subsection applies to landings, except landings for ramps in a barrier-free path of travel.
(2) Landings for ramps in a barrier-free path of travel shall conform to the requirements in Article .
(3) Finished floors, and ground surfaces with a slope not exceeding 1 in 50, at the top and bottom of stairs or ramps shall be considered as landings.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) to (4) and Sentence .(2), a landing shall be provided
(a) at the top and bottom of each flight of interior and exterior stairs, including stairs in garages,
(b) at the top and bottom of every ramp with a slope greater than 1 in 50, and
(c) where a doorway opens onto a stair or ramp.
(2) Where a door at the top of a stair within a dwelling unit swings away from the stair, no landing is required between the doorway and the stair. (See Note A-.(2))
(3) A landing may be omitted at the top of an exterior flight serving a secondary entrance to a single dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite, provided
(a) the stair does not contain more than three risers,
(b) the principal door is a sliding door or swings away from the stair, and
(c) only a storm or screen door, if any, swings over the stair and is equipped with hardware to hold it open.
(3.1) Sentence (3) does not apply to an exterior stair serving a secondary entrance to a house with a secondary suit e that is also a main entrance to a dwelling unit in the house.
(4) A landing may be omitted at the bottom of an exterior stair or ramp provided there is no obstruction, such as a gate or door, within the lesser of the width of the stair or ram p or
(a) 900 mm for stairs or ramps serving a single dwelling unit, and
(b) 1 100 mm for stairs or ramps not serving a single dwelling unit.
(See Note A-.) (See also Articles . and . regarding landings in exits)
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) to (7), landings shall be at least as wide and as long as the width of the stair or ramp in which they occur.
(2) Where the landing in a stairway or ramp does not turn or turns less than 90°, the length of the landing need not be more than the lesser of
(a) the required width of the stair or ramp, or
(b) 1 100 mm.
(3) The length of a landing shall be measured perpendicular to the nosings of adjacent steps or to the end of the ramp, at a distance equal to half the length required in Sentence (2) from the narrow edge of the landing.
(4) Where stair flights or ramps of different widths adjoin a single landing, the minimum width of the landing shall be
(a) where one or more of the stair or ramp widths do not exceed their respective required widths, not less than the greater required stair or ramp width, or
(b) where all of the widths ofthe stairs or ramps exceed their respective required widths, not less than the lesser actual stair or ramp width.
(5) Where a door swings toward a stair, the full arc of the swing shall be over the landing.
(6) The slope of landings shall not exceed 1 in 50.
(7) Where a doorway or stairway opens onto the side of a ramp, the landing shall extend for a distance of not less than 300 mm on either side of the doorway or stairway, except on a side abutting an end wall.
(1) Except as permitted by Sentence (2), the clear height over landings shall be not less than 2 050 mm.
(2) The clear height over landings serving a single dw elling unit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces shall be not less than 1 950 mm.
9.8.7.Handrails
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) to (4), handrails shall be installed on stairs and ramps in conformance with Table .
(2) Where a stair or ramp is required to be at least 2 200 mm wide due to the occupant load, a handrail shall be installed such that no position on the stair or ramp is more than 825 mm from a handrail. (See Note A-.(2))
(3) Handrails are not required for stairs and ramps serving a single dwelling unit, where
(a) interior stairs have not more than 2 risers,
(b) exterior stairs have not more than 3 risers, or
(c) ramps rise not more than 400 mm.
(4) Only one handrail is required on exterior stairs having more than 3 risers provided such stairs serve not more than one dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite.
(5) Except for stairs with winders, where a flight of stairs within a dwelling unit consists of tapered treads, or a mix of tapered treads and rectangular treads, one handrail shall be installed along the narrow end of the treads.
Table 9.8.7.1. Number of Sides of Stair or Ramp Required to Have a Handrail Forming Part of Sentence 9.8.7.1.(1)
| Location of Stair or Ramp | Handrails Serving Stairs | Handrails Serving Ra mps | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Stairs < 1 100 mm Wide | Stairs ≥ 1 100 mm Wide | Ramps < 1 100 mm Wide | Ramps ≥ 1 100 mm Wide | ||
| Straight | Curved | All | Straight or Curved | All | |
| Number of Sides Required to hav e a Handrail | |||||
| Within a dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 2 |
| All other locations | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (3),required handrails shall be continuously graspable throughout the length of
(a) ramps, and
(b) flights of stairs, from the bottom riser to the top riser.
(2) Except for stairs or ramps serving a single dwelling u nit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces, at least one required handrail shall be continuous throughout the length of the stair or ramp, including at the landing except where interrupted by doorways. (See Note A-.(11))
(3) For stairs or ramps serving a single d welling unit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces, a handrail is permitted to start from a newel post or volute installed on the bottom tread.
(1) Handrails shall be terminated in a manner that will not obstruct pedestrian travel or create a hazard. (See Note A- .(1))
(2) Except for stairs and ramps serving only one dwel ling unit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces, at least one handrail at the sides of a stair or ramp shall extend horizontally not less than 300 mm beyond the top and bottom of each flight or ramp. (See Note A-.(2))
(1) The height of handrails on stairs and ramps shall be measured vertically from the top of the handrail to
(a) a straight line drawn tangent to the tread nosings ofthe stair served by the handrail, or
(b) the surface of the ramp, floor or landing served by the handrail.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), Clause .(1)(e) and Sentence .(1), required handrails shall be 865 mm to 1 070 mm high.
(3) Handrails installed in addition to required handrails need not comply with Sentence (2).
(1) The clearance between a handrail and any surface behind it shall be not less than
(a) 60 mm, if the surface behind the handrail is rough or abrasive, or
(b) 50 mm, in all other cases.
(2) All handrails shall be constructed so as to be continually graspable along their entire length with no obstruction on or above them to break a handhold. (See Note A-.(2))
(1) Handrails and projections below handrails, including handrail supports and stair stringers, shall not project more than 100 mm into the required width of a stair or ramp. (See also Articles . and .)
(1) Handrails and their supports shall be designed and constructed to withstand the following loads, which need not be considered to act simultaneously:
(a) a concentrated load of not less than 0.9 kN applied at any point and in any direction for all handrails, and
(b) for handrails other than those serving a single dwelling unit, a uniform load of not less than 0.7 kN/m.
(2) Where exterior or interior handrails serving a single dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces are attached to wood studs or blocking, the attachment shall be deemed to comply with Sentence (1), where
(a) the attachment points are spaced not more than 1.2 m apart measured on the horizontal plane,
(b) the first attachment point at either end is located not more than 300 mm from the end of the handrail, and
(c) the fasteners consist of no fewer than 2 No. 8 wood screws at each point, penetrating not less than 32 mm into solid wood.
9.8.8.Guards
(1) Except as provided in Sentence(2)and except at the leading edge at the top of a flight, every surface to which access is provided, including but not limited to flights of steps and ramps, exterior landings, porches, balconies, mezzanines, galleries and raised walkways, shall be protected by a guard on each side that is not protected by a wall for the length where the difference in elevation is more than 600 mm between the walking surface and the adjacent surface within 1.2 m.
(2) Guards are not required
(a) at loading docks,
(b) at floor pits in repair garages, or
(c) where access is provided for maintenance purposes only.
(3) Doors in buildings of residential occupancy, where the finished floor on one side of the door is more than 600 mm above the floor or other constructed surface or ground level on the other side of the door, shall be protected by
(a) a guard, or
(b) a mechanism capable of controlling the free swinging or sliding of the door so as to limit any clear unobstructed opening to not more than 100 mm.
(4) Except as provided in Sentence (5), openable windows in buildings of residential occupancy shall be protected by (a) a guard, or
(b) a mechanism that can only be released with the use of tools or special knowledge to control the free swinging or sliding operation of the openable part of the window so as to limit any clear unobstructed opening to not more than 100 mm measured either vertically or horizontally. (See Note A-.(4))
(5) Windows need not be protected in accordance with Sentence (4), where the bottom edge of the openable portion of the window is located
(a) more than 900 mm above the finished floor, or
(b) less than 1 800 mm above the floor or ground on the other side of the window. (See Note A-.(4))
(6) Except as provided in Sentence (7), glazing installed over stairs, ramps and landings that extends to less than 1 070 mm above the surface of the treads, ramp or landing shall be
(a) protected by guards in accordance with this Subsection, or
(b) non-openable and designed to withstand the specified lateral loads for guards as provided in Article .
(7) In dwelling units, glazing installed over stairs, ramps and landings that extends to less than 900 mm above the surface of the treads, ramp or landing shall be
(a) protected by guards in accordance with this Subsection, or
(b) non-openable and designed to withstand the specified lateral loads for guards as provided in Article .
(8) Glazing installed in public areas that extends to less than 1 m from the floor and is located above the second storey in buildings of residential occupancy shall be
(a) protected by guards in accordance with this Subsection, or
(b) non-openable and designed to withstand the specified lateral loads for guards as provided in Article .
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2), (3), (5) and (6), guards shall be designed to resist the specified loads prescribed in Table .
(2) The size of the opening between any two adjacent vertical elements within a guar d shall not exceed the limits required by Sentence .(1) when each of these elements is subjected to a specified live load of 0.1 kN applied in opposite directions in the in-plane direction of the guard so as to produce the most critical effect.
(3) For guards within dwelling units and within houses with a secondary suite including their common spaces and for exterior guards serving not more than two dwelling units, where the width and spacing of balusters are such that three balusters can be engaged by a load imposed over a 300 mm width, the load shall be imposed so as to engage three balusters.
(4) None of the specified loads specified in Table . need be considered to act simultaneously.
(5) For guards within dwelling units and within houses with a secondary suite including their common spaces and for exterior guards serving not more than two dwelling units, Table . need not apply where the guard construction used has been demonstrated to provide effective performance.
(6) Guards constructed in accordance with the requirements in MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-7, “Guards for Housing and Small Buildings” shall be deemed to satisfy the requirements of Sentence (1).
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) The load that creates the most critical condition shall apply.
(2) See Sentence (3).
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) to(3. 1), all guards shall be not less than 1 070 mm high.
(2) All guards within dwelling units or within houses with a secondary suite including their common spaces shall be not less than 900 mm high.
(3) Exterior guards serving not more than one dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces shall be not less than 900 mm high where the walking surface served by the guard is not more than 1 800 mm above the finished ground level.
(3.1) The height of guards for exterior stairs and landings more than 10 m above adjacent ground level shall be not less than 1 500 mm.
(4) The height of guards for flights of steps shall be measured vertically from the top of the guard to a line drawn through the tread nosing served by the guard.
(1) Except for floors of garages referred to in Section 9.35., where garage floors or ramps are 600 mm or more above the adjacent ground or floor level, every opening through a garage floor and the perimeter of floors and ramps that have no exterior walls shall be provided with
(a) a continuous curb not less than 140 mm in height, and
(b) a guard not less than 1 070 mm above the floor level.
(2) Vehicle guardrails shall be designed and constructed to withstand the loading values stipulated in Sentence .(1). (See Note A-. and .(1))
(1) Except as permitted in Sentences(3)and (4), openings through guards shall be of a size that prevents the passage of a spherical object having a diameter of 100 mm. (See Note A-.(1) and (3))
(2) Except for guards that serve industrial occupancie s, the triangular openings formed by stair risers, stair treads and the bottom element of a required guard shall be of a size that prevents the passage of a 150 mm diam sphere.
(3) Except where they serve storage garages, guards in industrial occupancies are permitted to consist of
(a) a top railing, and
(b) one or more horizontal intermediate rails spaced such that the size of the openings through the guar d prevents the passage of a spherical object having a diameter of 535 mm. (See Note A-.(1) and (3))
(4) Openings through any guard that is not required by Article . and that serves an occupancy other than industrial occupancy, shall be of a size that
(a) prevents the passage of a spherical object having a diameter of 100 mm, or
(b) permits the passage of a spherical object having a diameter of 200 mm. (See Note A-.(4))
(1) Guards required by Article ., except those in industrial occupancies and where it can be shown that the location and size of openings do not represent a hazard, shall be designed so that no member, attachment or opening located between 140 mm and 900 mm above the floor or walking surface protected by the guard will facilitate climbing. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Glass in guards shall be
(a) safety glass of the laminated or tempered type conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.1, “Safety Glazing,” or
(b) wired glass conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.11-M, “Wired Safety Glass.”
9.8.9.Construction
(1) Except as specified in Articles . and ., stairs and ramps shall be designed for strength and rigidity under uniform loading criteria to support specified loads of
(a) 1.9 kPa for stairs and ramps serving not more than one dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces, and
(b) 4.8 kPa for other stairs and ramps.
(1) Exterior concrete stairs with more than 2 risers and 2 treads shall be
(a) supported on unit masonry or concrete walls or piers not less than 150 mm in cross-section, or
(b) cantilevered from the main foundation wall.
(2) Stairs described in Sentence (1), when cantilevered from the foundat ion wall, shall be constructed and installed in conformance with Subsection .
(3) The depth below ground level for foundations for exterior steps shall conform to the requirements in Section 9.12.
(1) Exterior wood steps shall not be in direct contact with the ground unless suitably treated with a wood preservative.
(1) Wooden stair stringers shall
(a) have a minimum effective depth of 90 mm, measured perpendicularly to the bottom of the stringer at the point of minimum cross-section, and an overall depth of not less than 235 mm,
(b) be supported and secured top and bottom,
(c) be not less than 25 mm actual thickness if supported along their length and 38 mm actual thickness if unsupported along their length, and
(d) except as permitted in Sentence (2), be spaced not more than 900 mm o.c. in stairs serving not more than one dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces, and 600 mm o.c. in other stairs.
(2) For stairs serving not more than one dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces, where risers support the front portion of the tread, the space between stringers shall be not more than 1 200 mm.
(1) Stair treads of lumber, plywood or O-2 grade OSB within dwelling units shall be not less than 25 mm actual thickness, except that, if open risers are used and the distance between stringers exceeds 750 mm, the treads shall be not less than 38 mm actual thickness.
(2) Stair treads of plywood or OSB, that are not continuously supported by the riser shall have their face grain or direction of face orientation at right angles to the stringers.
(0.1) Except as required by Sentence (2), the finish for treads, landings and ramps shall be
(a) wear-resistant,
(b) slip-resistant, and
(c) smooth, even and free from open defects.
(1) The finish for treads and landings of interior stairs in dwelling units, other than stairs to unfinished basements, shall consist of hardwood, vertical grain softwood, resilient flooring or other material providing equivalent performance.
(2) Treads and landings of interior and exterior stairs and ramps, other than those within dwelling units or within houses with a secondary suite including their common spaces, shall have a slip-resistant finish or be provided with slip-resistant strips that extend not more than 1 mm above the surface.
(3) Stairs and ramps, except those serving a house wit h a secondary suite, an individual dwelling unit, service rooms or service space s, shall have a colour contrast or a distinctive visual pattern to demarcate
(a) the leading edge of the treads,
(b) the leading edge of the landing, and
(c) the beginning and end ofa ramp.
(4) Except for stairs serving a house with a s econdary suite, an individual dwelling unit, service rooms or service spaces, a tactile attention indicator conforming to Article . shall be installed
(a) at the top of the stairs, starting one tread depth back from the edge of the top stair, and
(b) at the leading edge of landings where a doorway opens onto stairs, starting one tread depth back from the edge of the landing.
9.8.10.Cantilevered Precast Concrete Steps
(1) Exterior concrete steps and their anchorage system that are cantilevered from a foundation wall shall be designed and installed to support the loads to which they may be subjected.
(1) Cantilevered concrete steps referred to in Article . shall be anchored to concrete foundation walls not less than 200 mm thick.
(1) Suitable precautions shall be taken during backfilling and grading operations to ensure that subsequent freezing of the soil will not cause uplift forces on the underside of cantilevered concrete steps to the extent that the steps or the walls to which they are attached will be damaged.
Section 9.9.Means of Egress
9.9.1.General
(1) Stairways, handrails and guards in a means of egress shall conform to the requirements in Section 9.8. as well as to the requirements in this Section.
(1) In addition to the fire protection requirements provided in Subsection ., flame-spread ratings,fire-resistance ratings and fire-protection ratings for means of egress shall conform to Section 9.10.
(1) The occupant load of a floor area or part ofa floor area shall be based on
(a) two persons per sleeping room or sleeping area in a dwelling unit or suite, and
(b) for occupancies other than as described in Clause (a), the number of persons
(i) for which the area is designed, or
(ii) determined from Table .
9.9.2.Types and Purpose of Exits
(1) Except as otherwise provided in this Section, an exit from any floor area shall be one of the following used singly or in combination:
(a) an exterior doorway,
(b) an exterior passageway,
(c) an exterior ramp,
(d) an exterior stairway,
(e) a fire escape,
(f) a horizontal exit,
(g) an interior passageway,
(h) an interior ramp, or
(i) an interior stairway.
(2) Fire escapes shall only be used as exits on existing buildings and shall be designed and installed in conformance with Subsection .
(2.1) Fire escapes shall not be installed on any new building.
(3) Where a horizontal exit is used, it shall conform to Sentence .(1) and Article .
(1) An exit shall be designed for no purpose other than for exiting, except that an exit may also serve as an access to a floor area.
(1) Elevators, slide escapes or windows shall not be considered as part of a required means of egress.
(2) Except for floor areas of mercantile occupancy, casement windows not less than 1 060 mm high, 560 mm wide, with a sill height not more than 900 mm above the inside floor, are permitted to be considered part ofa required means of egress to provide access to fire escapes, when fire escapes are permitted.
(1) Except for doors serving a single dwelling un it or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces, at least one door at every principal entrance to a building providing access from the exterior at ground level shall be designed in accordance with the requirements for exits.
(1) Except for curved stairs, the front edge of stair treads in exits and access to exits shall be at right angles to the direction of exit travel.
(1) Treads and landings of exterior exit stairs that serve a hotel shall be designed to be free from ice and snow accumulation.
9.9.3.Dimensions of Means of Egress
(1) This Subsection applies to every means of egress except
(a) exits that serve not more than one dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces, and
(b) access to exits within dwelling units and within houses with a seco ndary suite including their common spaces.
(1) Except for doors and corridors, the width of every exit facility shall be not less than 900 mm. (See Article . for doors, Article . for stairs, and Article . for ramps.)
(1) The width of every public corridor, corridor used by the public, and exit corridor shall be not less than 1 100 mm. (See also Subsection . for obstructions in corridors.)
(1) Except for stairways, doorways and storage garages, the minimum clear height in exits and access to exits shall be 2.1 m. (See Article . for stairs, Article . for ramps, Article . for landings and Article . for doorways.)
(2) The clear height in exits and access to exits in a storage garage shall be not less than 2 m.
9.9.4.Fire Protection of Exits
(1) Except as provided in Articles . and ., this Subsection applies to the fire protection of all exits except exits serving not more than one dwe lling unit.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (5) and Article ., every exit other than an exit doorway shall be separated from each adjacent floor area or from another exit by afire separation having afire-resistance rating not less than that required for the floor assembly above the floor area.
(2) Where there is no floor assembly above, the fire-resistance rating required in Sentence (1) shall not be less than that required by Subsection . for the floor assembly below, but in no case shall the fire-resistan ce rating be less than 45 min.
(3) Afire separation common to 2 exits shall be smoke-tight and not be pierced by doorways, duct work, piping or any other opening that may affect the continuity of the separation.
(4) Afire separation that separates an exit from the remainder of the building shall have no openings except those for electrical wiring, noncombustibl e conduit and noncombust ible piping that serve only the exit, and for standpipes, sprinkler piping, exit doorways and wired glass and glass block permitted in Article .
(5) The requirements in Sentence (1) do not apply to an exterior exit passageway provided the passageway has at least 50% of its exterior sides open to the outdoors and is served by an exit stair at each end of the passageway.
(1) This Article applies to wired glass in doors, and wired glass or glass block in sidelights, where these are installed in fire separations between exit enclosures and floor areas.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), the combined area of glazing in doors and sidelights shall not exceed 0.8 m².
(3) Where an exit enclosure connects with a floor area through an enclosed vestibule or corridor separated from the floor area by fire separations having not less than a 45 min fire-resistance rati ng, the glazed areas described in Sentence (1) need not be limited as required in Sentence (2).
(1) Where an unenclosed exterior exit stair or ramp provides the only means of egress from a suite, and is exposed to fire from openings in the exterior walls of another fire compartment, or another dwelling unit, ancillary space or common space in a house with a secondary suite, the openings in the exterior walls of the building shall be protected with wired glass in fixed steel frames or glass block conforming to Articles . and . when the openings in the exterior walls of the building are within 3 m horizontally and less than 10 m below or less than 5 m above the exit stair or ramp.
(1) Either openings in exterior walls of an exit or openings in adjacent exterior walls of the building the exit serves shall be protected with wired glass in fixed steel frames or glass block installed in accordance with Articles . and
(1) This Article applies to
(a) exit doors serving other than an individual dwelling unit, and
(b) exit doors serving an individual dwel ling unit where there is no second and separate exit from the dwelling unit.
(2) Where an exterior exit door described in Sentence (1) in one fire compartment is within 3 m horizontally of an unprotected opening in another fire compartment and the exterior walls of these fire compartments intersect at an exterior angle of less than 135°, the opening shall be protected with wired glass in fixed steel frames or glass block conforming to Articles . and . or with a rated closure conforming to Table . with respect to the rating of the fire separation between the two compartments.
(1) Notwithstanding the requirements of Sentences .(1), .(1) and Article ., where a suite of Group D or E occupancy is located partly on the first storey and partly on the second storey or partly on the second storey and partly on the third storey, stairways serving the suite need not be constructed as exit stairs provided
(a) the building is not greater than 3 storeys in building height,
(b) the suite is separated from other occupancies by afire separation having afire- resistance rating of not less than 45 min,
(c) the area occupied by the suite is not greater than 100 m² per storey, other than the exit level storey,
(d) the maximum travel distance from any point in the suite to an exterior exit is not greater than 25 m,
(e) the floor assemblies have afire-resistance ratin g of not less than 45 min or are of noncombustible construction, (f) the basement and first storey are separated by afire separation having afire-resistance rating of not less than 45 min, and
(g) a smoke alarm is installed on each floor of the suite, including the basement, in accordance with Subsection .
9.9.5.Obstructions and Hazards in Means of Egress
(1) This Subsection applies to obstructions and hazards in every means of egress except those within a dwelling unit or serving not more than one dwelli ng unit.
(1) Where a corridor contains an occupancy, the occupancy shall not reduce the unobstructed width of the corridor to less than the required width of the corridor.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), obstructions located within 1 980 mm of the floor shall not project horizontally more than 100 mm into exit passageways, corridors used by the public or public corridors in a manner that would create a hazard for visually impaired persons travelling adjacent to walls.
(2) The horizontal projection of an obstruction referred to in Sentence (1) is permitted to exceed 100 mm where the obstruction extends to less than 680 mm above the floor. (See Note A-.(2) and (3))
(1) Except as permitted in Subsection . and Article ., no fixture, turnstile or construction shall project within the required width of an exit.
(1) No obstructions such as posts or turnstiles shall be placed so as to restrict the width of a required means of egress from a floor area or part ofa floor area to less than 750 mm unless an alternate unobstructed means of egress is provided adjacent to and plainly visible from the restricted egress.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), no obstructions, such as counter gates, that do not meet the requirements for exit doors, shall be placed in a required means of egress from a floor area or part of a floor area unless an alternate unobstructed means of egress is provided adjacent to and plainly visible from the restricted egress.
(3) Obstructions, such as counter gates, that do not satisfy Sentence (2), are permitted to be placed in a required means of egress from a part of a floor area in mercantile occupancies and busin ess and personal services occupancies, provided that the part of the floor area served by the obstructed means of egress is not generally accessible to the public.
(1) No mirror shall be placed in or adjacent to any exit so as to confuse the direction of exit, and no mirror or draperies shall be placed on or over exit doors.
(1) Fuel-fired appliances shall not be installed in an exit or corridor serving as an access to exit.
(1) Service rooms containing equipment subject to possible explosion, such as boilers designed to operate at a pressure in excess of 100 kPa, and certain types of refrigerating and transformer equipment, shall not be located under required exits.
(1) Except in houses with a secondary suite, ancillary rooms such as storage rooms, washrooms, toilet rooms, laundry rooms and service rooms shall not open directly into an exit.
9.9.6.Doors in a Means of Egress
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (4), swinging doors in their swing shall conform to Sentences (2) and (3)
(a) at exit doors,
(b) at doors that open into or are located within a public corridor, and
(c) at doors that open into or are located within another facility that provides access to exit from a suite.
(2) When fully open, doors described in Sentence (1) shall not decrease the required exit width by more than
(a) 100 mm in exit corridors, and
(b) 50 mm for other exit facilities.
(3) The swing of doors described in Sentence (1) shall not reduce the width of the path of travel to less than
(a) the required exit width in exit corridors and passageways, and
(b) 750 mm on exit stairs or landings.
(4) Doors serving a single dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite need not comply with Sentences (2) and (3).
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), the clear opening height of doorways shall be not less than 2 030 mm high at
(a) exit doors,
(b) doors that open into or are located within a public corridor, and
(c) doors that open into or are located within another facility that provides access to exit from a suite.
(2) The clear opening height under door closers and other devices in doorways described in Sentence (1) shall be not less than 1 980 mm.
(3) Doorways serving a single dwelling unit or a house with a se condary suite need not comply with Sentences (1) and
(2). (See also Article .)
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (4), the clear opening width of doorways shall comply with Sentence (2) at
(a) exit doors, and
(b) doors that open into or are located within a public corridor or other facility that provides access to exit from a suite.
(2) Doorways described in Sentence (1) shall be
(a) not less than 800 mm wide where there is only one door leaf,
(b) not less than 800 mm wide where multiple-leaf doors are installed with only one active leaf having a latching mechanism described in Article ., and
(c) not less than 1 210 mm wide where multiple-leaf doors are installed with two active leaves.
(3) In doorways described in Sentence (1) that have multiple-leaf doors installed,
(a) no active leaf shall be less than 810 mm wide where only one leafis active, and
(b) no single leaf shall be less than 610 mm wide where two leaves are active.
(4) Doorways serving a single dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite need not comply with Sentence (2). (See also Article .)
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (4) and (5), required exit doors and doors in required means of egress, except doors in means of egress within dwellin g units, shall swing on the vertical axis.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (5), breakaway sliding doors, installed as required exit doors or required doors in means of egress, shall be identified as swinging doors by means of a label or decal affixed to the door.
(3) Revolving doors shall comply with Article .
(4) Movable partitions used to separate a public corri dor from an adjacent business and personal services occupancy or a mercantile occupancy need not conform to Sentence (1), provided the partitions are not located in the only means of egress. (See Note A-.(3))
(5) Exit doors need not conform to Sentence (1) or (2), where
(a) the doors serve accessory buildings where life safety is not adversely affected,
(b) the doors serve storage garages or other accessory bui ldings serving not more than one dwelling unit, or
(c) the doors
(i) serve storage suites of not more than 28 m2 in gross area that are in warehousing buildings of not more tha one storey, and
(ii) open directly to the exterior at ground level.
(1) Except as permitted by Sentence (1.1) and except for doors serving single dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite, exit doors that are required to swing shall swing in the direction of exit travel.
(1.1) An exit door need not swing in the direction of exi t travel where it serves
(a) a room, suite or floor area having an occupant load of not more than 60 persons, or
(b) as part ofa means of egress from more than one floor area and the f loor areas so served have a total occupant load of not more than 60 persons..
(2) Doors that open onto a corridor or other facility that provides access to exit from a room or suite having an occupant load of more than 60 persons shall swing on the vertical axis in the direction of exit travel.
(3) Doors that divide a corridor that is not wholly contained within a suite shall swing in the direction of exit travel.
(4) Where a pair of doors is installed in a corridor that provides access to exit in both directions, the doors shall
(a) swing in opposite directions, with the door on the right hand-side swinging in the direction of exit travel, or
(b) swing in both directions.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), the distance between a stair riser and the leading edge of a door during its swing, except for doors serving a single dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite, shall be not less than 300 mm.
(2) Where there is a danger of blockage from ice or snow, an exit door, including doors serving a single dwelling unit, may open onto not more than one step, provided the riser of such a step does not exceed 150 mm.
(1) Principal entrance doors, exit doors and doors to sui tes, including exterior doors of dwelling units, and other doors in an access to exit shall
(a) be openable from the inside or in travelling to an exit without requiring keys, special devices or specialized knowledge of the door-opening mechanism, or
(b) be controlled by electromagnetic locking mechanisms in accordance with Sentence .(5).
(2) Except for doors serving a single dwell ing unit or a house with a secondary suite, and doors to accessory buildings and to garages serving a single dwelling unit, door release hardware on doors in a means of egress shall be operable with one hand and the door shall be openable with not more than one releasing operation. (See also Sentence .(4) and Note A-.(4))
(3) Door release hardware on doors in a means of egress shall be installed 900 mm to 1 100 mm above the finished floor.
(4) Except for hotels, a door opening onto a public corridor that provides access to exit from suites shall be designed not to lock automatically when such doors are equipped with an automatic self-closing device. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Except as required by Sentence .(7), every exit door, except doors serving a single dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite, shall be designed and installed so that when the latch is released the door will open in the direction of exit travel under a force of not more than 90 N applied to the door release hardware. (See Sentence .(8) for door opening forces in a barrier-free path of travel.)
9.9.7.Access to Exits
Contained Open Spaces
(1) An access to exit shall be provided from every roof intended for occu pancy and from every podium, terrace, platform or contained open space.
(2) Where a roof is intended for an occupant load of more than 60 persons, at least 2 separate means of egress shall be provided from the roof to stairs designed in conformance with the requirements for exit stairs and located remote from each other.
(3) Where a podium, terrace, platform or contained open space is provided, egress requirements shall conform to the appropriate requirements for rooms or suites in Article .
(1) Except as required in Sentence .(1), each suite in a floor area occupied by more than one suite shall have (a) an exterior exit doorway,
(b) a doorway to a public corridor, or
(c) a doorway to an exterior passageway.
(2) Except as provided in Sentences .(1) and .(2), from the point where a doorway described in Clause(1)(b) or (c) enters the public corridor or exterior passageway, it shall be possible to go in opposite directions to each of 2 separate exits.
(1) A dead-end public corridor is permitted in an occupancy shown in Table ., where
(a) the dead-end corridor
(i) does not exceed the distance of travel measured from the most remote point of the dead-end to a point where it is possible to go in opposite directions to each of two separate exits, and
(ii) is provided with doors equipped with self-closing devices, or
(b) there is a second and separate egress doorway from each room or suite not leading into the dead-end corridor.
(2) Dead-end public corridors in r esidential occupancies and business and personal services occupancies shall contain only suite door openings arranged so that not more than two such doors have to be passed to reach the nearest exit.
(3) The area of wired glass in doors required by Sentence (2) shall not exceed 645 cm².
Table 9.9.7.3. Dead-End Public Corridors Forming Part of Sentence 9.9.7.3.(1)
| Occupancy | Maximum Length of Dead-End Public Corridor , m | Maximum Occupant Load or Suites Served by Dead-End Public Corridor |
|---|---|---|
| Group C | 6 | 4 suites |
| Group D | 6 | 30 |
| Group E | 9 | 30 |
| Group F | 9 | 30 |
(1) Except for dwelling units, at least two egress doors shall be provided where
(a) the area of a room or suite exceeds 200 m² in a Group D, E, F2 and F3 occupancy, or 150 m² in a Group C occupancy, or
(b) the distance measured from any point within a room or suite to the nearest egress door exceeds 25 m.
(2) Doors required in Sentence (1) shall be spaced so that in the event one door is made inaccessible by a fire within such a room or suite, the other door will provide safe egress.
(1) Required access to exit from suites shall not be through any other dwelling unit, service room or other occupancy.
(1) Except for dwelling units, the travel distance from any point within the room or suite to the nearest egress door shall not exceed the maximum travel distance in Article .
9.9.8.Exits from Floor Areas
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), for the purposes of this Subsection, travel distance means the distance from any point in the fl oor area to an exit measured along the path of exit travel.
(2) Where a room or suite is separated from the remainder of the floor area by afire separation having afire-resistance rating of at least 45 min or, in a sprinklered building, by afire separation which is not required to have afire-resistance rating, the travel distance may be measured from an egress door of the room or suite to the nearest exit.
(3) Where a public corridor is not less than 9 m wide and conforms to Subclauses .(1)(d)(i) to (d)(iv), the travel distance may be determined in accordance with those Subclauses.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3) and Subsection ., at least 2 exits shall be provided from every floor area, spaced so that the travel distance to the nearest exit is not more than
(a) 40 m in the case of business and person al services occupancies,
(b) 45 m for all occupancies where the floor area is sprinklered, and
(c) 30 m for all other occupancies.
(2) Except as provided in Subsection ., a single exit is permitted from each storey in buildings of 1 and 2 storeys in building height provided the floor area and travel distance requirements conform to those required in Article . and the total occupant load served by an exit facility does not exceed 60 persons.
(3) In boarding, lodging or rooming houses,
(a) where sleeping accommodation is provided for not more than eight persons, a single exit is permitted from each floor area, or
(b) where sleeping accommodation is not provided in the basement, a single exit is permitted from the basement floor area.
(1) Where more than one exit is required from a floor area, each exit shall be considered as contributing not more than half the required exit width.
(1) Where more than one exit is required from a floor area, at least 2 exits shall be independent of each other and be placed remote from each other along the path of travel between them. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Not more than one exit from a floor area is permitted to lead through a lobby.
(2) The lobby referred to in Sentence (1) shall be not more than 4.5 m above grade, and the path of travel through the lobby to the outdoors shall not exceed 15 m.
(3) The lobby referred to in Sentence (1) shall conform in all respects to the requirements for exits, except that rooms other than service rooms, storage rooms and rooms of residential or industrial occupancy are permitted to open directly onto such lobby.
(3.1) Except as provided in Sentence (6), an exit is permitted to lead through a lobby referred to in Sentence (1) provided the lobby is not located within an interconnected floor space other than as described in Sentence .(6).
(4) Where the lobby referred to in Sentence (1) and adjacent occupancies that are permitted to open into the lobby are sprinklered, the fire separation between such occupancies and the lobby need not have afire-resistance rating. (See Note A-.(2)(e))
(5) Passenger elevators are permitted to open onto the lobby referred to in Sentence (1) provided the elevator doors are designed to remain closed except while loading and unloading passengers.
(6) An exit that serves a hotel is permitted to lead through a lobby referred to in Sentence (1) provided the lobby is not located within an interconnected floor space.
(1) Except as provided by Sentences (2) and (3), the space above a mezzanine shall be served by at least two means of egress leading to exits accessible at the mezzanine level on the same basis as floor are as.
(2) One means of egress from a mezzanine is permitted, where
(a) the mezzanine is not required to terminate at a vertical fire separation, as permitted by Sentence .(2),
(b) the occupant load of the mezzanine is not more than 60,
(c) the area of the mezzanine does not exceed the area limits of Clause .(1)(a), and
(d) the distance limits of Clause .(1)(b) measured along the path of travel, are not exceeded from any point on the mezzanine to
(i) an egress door serving the space that the mezzanine overlooks if the space is served by a single egress door, or
(ii) an egress stairway leading to an access to exit in the space below if that space is required to be served by two or more egress doorways in conformance with Sentence .(1).
(3) One of the means of egress from a mezzanine that is not required to terminate at a fire separation as permitted by Sentence .(2) and that exceeds the limits of Sentence (2), is permitted to lead through the room in which the mezzanine is located provided all other means of egress from that mezzanine lead to exits accessible at the mezzanine level.
(4) Except as provided in Sentence (2), the maximum travel distance from any point on a mezzanine to the nearest exit shall be not more than
(a) 40 m in a business and personal services occupancy,
(b) 45 m in a floor area that is sprinklered throughout, provided it does not contain a high-hazard industrial occupancy, or
(c) 30 m in any floor area not referred to in Clause (a) or (b).
9.9.9.Egress from Dwelling Units
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), every dwelling unit containing more than 1 storey shall have exits or egress doors located so that it shall not be necessary to travel up or down more than 1 storey to reach a level served by
(a) an egress door to a public corridor, enclosed exit stair or exterior passageway, or
(b) an exit doorway not more than 1.5 m above adjacent ground level.
(2) Where a dwelling unit is not located above or below another suite, the travel limit from a floor level in the dwelling unit to an exit or egress door may exceed 1 storey where that floor level is served by an openable window or door
(a) providing an unobstructed opening of not less than 1 m in height and 0.55 m in width, and
(b) located so that the sill is not more than
(i) 1 m above the floor, and
(ii) 7 m above adjacent ground level.
(3) The travel limit from a floor level in a dwelling unit to an exit or egress door may exceed 1 storey where that floor level has direct access to a balcony.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence .(1) and except for dwelling units in a house with a secondary suite, where an egress door from a dwelling unit opens onto a public corridor or exterior passageway it shall be possible from the location where the egress door opens onto the corridor or exterior passageway to go in opposite directions to 2 separate exits unless the dwelling unit has a second and separate m eans of egress.
(1) Except for dwelling units in a house with a seco ndary suite, a dwelling unit shall be provided with a second and separate means of egress where an egress door from the dwelling unit opens onto
(a) an exit stairway serving more than one suite,
(b) apublic corridor
(i) serving more than one suite, and
(ii) served by a single exit,
(c) an exterior passageway
(i) serving more than one suite,
(ii) served by a single exit stairway or ramp, and
(iii) more than 1.5 m above adjacent ground level, or
(d) a balcony
(i) serving more than one suite,
(ii) served by a single exit stairway or ramp, and
(iii) more than 1.5 m above adjacent ground level.
(2) Where a dwelling unit is located above another dwel ling unit or common space in a house with a secondary suite, the upper dwelling unit shall be provided with as second and separate means of egress where an egress door from that dwelling unit opens onto an exterior passageway that
(a) has a floor assembly with afire-resistance rating less than 45 min,
(b) is served by a single exit stairway or ramp, and
(c) is located more than 1.5 m above adjacent ground level.
9.9.10.Egress from Bedrooms
(1) Except where a door on the same floor level as the bedroom provides direct access to the exterior, every floor level containing a bedroom in a suite shall be provided with at least one outside window that
(a) is openable from the inside without the use of tools,
(b) provides an individual, unobstructed open portion having a minimum area of 0.35 m² with no dimension less than 380 mm, and
(c) maintains the required opening described in Clause (b) without the need for additional support. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Except for basement areas, the window required in Sentence (1) shall have a maximum sill height of 1 000 mm above the floor. (See Note A-.(2))
(3) Where a window required in Sentence (1) opens into a window well, a clearance of not less than 550 mm shall be provided in front of the window. (See Note A-.(3))
(4) Where the sash of a window referred to in Sentence (3) swings towards the window well, the operation of the sash shall not reduce the clearance in a manner that would restrict escape in an emergency.
(5) Where a protective enclosure is installed over the window well referred to in Sentence (3), the enclosure shall be openable from the inside without the use of keys, tools or special knowledge of the opening mechanism.
(6) When sliding windows are used, the minimum dimension described in Sentence (1) shall apply to the openable portion of the window.
(7) Where the sleeping area within a live / work unit is on a mezzanine with no obstructions more than 1 070 mm above the floor, the window required in Sentence (1) may be provided on the main level of the live/wor k unit provided the mezzanine is not more than 25% of the area of the live / work unit or 20 m2, whichever is less, and an unobstructed direct path of travel is provided from the mezzanine to this window.
9.9.11.Signs
(1) This Subsection applies to all exits except those serving not more than one dwelling unit or a house with a secondary suite.
(1) Exits shall be located so as to be clearly visible or their locations shall be clearly indicated.
(2) Where an exit door leading directly to the outside is subject to being obstructed by a parked vehicle or storage because of its location, a visible sign prohibiting such obstructions shall be permanently mounted on the exterior side of the door.
(1) Except as required in Sentence (7), every exit door shall have an exit sign placed over it or adjacent to it if the exit serves
(a) a building that is 3 storeys in building height,
(b) a building having an occupant load of more than 150, or
(c) a room or floor area that has a fire escape as part of a required means of egress.
(2) Except as required in Sentence (6), every exit sign shall
(a) be visible on approach to the exit,
(b) consist of a green pictogram and a white or lightly tinted graphical symbol meeting the colour specifications referred to in ISO 3864-1, “Graphical symbols – Safety colours and safety signs – Part 1: Design principles for safety signs and safety markings,” and
(c) conform to ISO 7010, “Graphical symbols – Safety colours and safety signs – Registered safety signs,” for the following symbols: (See Note A-.(2)(c))
(i) E001 emergency exit left,
(ii) E002 emergency exit right,
(iii) E005 90-degree directional arrow, and
(iv) E006 45-degree directional arrow.
(3) Internally illuminated exit signs shall be continuously illuminated, and
(a) where illumination of the sign is powered by an electrical circuit, be constructed in conformance with CSA C22.2 No. 141, “Emergency lighting equipment,” or
(b) where illumination of the sign is not powered by an electrical circuit, be
(i) constructed in conformance with CAN/ULC-S572, “Standard for Photoluminescent and Self-Luminous Exit Signs and Path Marking Systems,” and
(ii) labelled in accordance with the time duration for which they have been tested and listed.
(4) Externally illuminated exit signs shall be continuously illuminated at all times by a light fixture supplied by an electrical circuit.
(5) The circuitry serving lighting for externally and internally illuminated exit signs shall
(a) serve no equipment other than emergency lighting in the area where the exit signs are installed, and
(b) be connected to an emergency power supply as described in Sentences .(2), (3) and (7).
(6) An exit sign conforming to Clauses (2)(b) and (c) with an arrow or other indicator pointing at the direction of egress shall be provided where no exit is visible from
(a) apublic corridor,
(b) a corridor used by the public, or
(c) a principal route serving an open floor area having an occupant load of more than 150.
(7) Except for s uite doors opening directly to the exterior, every exit serving a hotel shall have an exit sign placed over it or adjacent to it.
(1) In buildings that are 3 storeys in building height, any part ofan exit ramp or stairway that continues up or down past the lowest exit level shall be clearly marked to indicate that it does not lead to an exit if the portion below exit level may be mistaken as the direction of exit travel.
(1) Arabic numerals indicating the assigned floor number shall be
(a) except in hotels, mounted permanently on the stair side of the wall at the latch side of doors to exit stair shafts, (b) in hotels, mounted permanently on each side of the exit doors to the exit stair shaft,
(c) not less than 60 mm high, raised approximately 0.8 mm above the surface,
(d) located 1 500 mm from the finished floor and not more than 300 mm from the door, and
(e) contrasting in colour with the surface on which they are applied. (See Note A-.(1)(e))
9.9.12.Lighting
(1) This Subsection applies to the lighting of all means o f egress except those within dwelling units or a house with a secondary suite.
(1) Every exit, public corridor or corridor providing access to exit for the public shall be equipped to provide illumination to an average level of not less than 50 lx at floor or tread level and at all points such as angles and intersections at changes of level where there are stairs or ramps.
(2) The minimum value of the illumination required by Sentence (1) shall be not less than 10 lx.
(1) Emergency lighting shall be provided in
(a) exits,
(b) principal routes providing access to exit in an open floor area,
(c) corridors used by the public,
(d) underground walkways, and
(e) public corridors.
(2) Emergency lighting required in Sentence (1) shall be provided from a source of energy separate from the electrical supply for the building.
(3) Lighting required in Sentence (1) shall be designed to be automatically actuated for a period of at least 30 min when the electric lighting in the affected area is interrupted.
(4) Illumination from lighting required in Sentence (1) shall be provided to average levels of not less than 10 lx at floor or tread level.
(5) The minimum value of the illumination required by Sentence (4) shall be not less than 1 1x.
(6) Where incandescent lighting is provided, lighting equal to 1 W/m² of floor area shall be considered to meet the requirement in Sentence (4).
(7) Where self-contained emergency lighting units are used, they shall conform to CSA C22.2 No. 141, “Emergency lighting equipment.”
Section 9.10.Fire Protection
9.10.1.Definitions and Application
(1) For the purposes of this Section, roofs with slopes of 60 ° or more to the horizontal and that are adjacent to a room or space intended for occupancy shall be considered as a wall.
(1) Where life safety and fire protection systems and systems with fire protection and life safety functions are integrated with each other, they shall be tested as a whole in accordance with CAN/ULC-S1001, “Standard for Integrated Systems Testing of Fire Protection and Life Safety Systems,” to verify that they have been properly integrated. (See Note A- .(1))
(2) Sentence (1) does not apply to a building that contains only dwelling units and has no dwelling unit above another dwelling unit.
(1) Tents, air-supported structures, transformer vaults, walkways, elevators and escalators shall conform to Part 3.
(2) Where rooms or spaces are intended for an assembly occupancy, such rooms or spaces shall conform to Part 3.
(3) Basements containing more than 1 storey or exceeding 600 m2 in area shall conform to Part 3.
(4) Where rooms or spaces are intended for the storage, manufacture or use of hazardous or explosive material, such rooms or spaces shall conform to Part 3.
(5) Reserved.
(6) Openings through floors that are not protected by shafts or closures shall be protected in conformance with Subsection . (See also Sentence .(1))
(7) Chutes and shafts shall conform to Subsection . except where they are entirely contained within a dwelling unit.
(8) Sprinkler systems shall be designed, constructed and installed in conformance with Articles . to . and . (See Note A-.(8) and (9))
(9) Standpipe and hose systems shall be designed, constructed and installed in conformance with Articles . to . and . (See Note A-.(8) and (9))
(10) Fire pumps shall be installed in conformance with Articles . and .
(11) Where fuel-fired appliances are installed on a roof, such appliances shall be installed in conformance with Article .
(1) In kitchens containing commercial cooking equipment used in processes producing grease-laden vapours, the equipment shall be designed and installed in conformance with Article . (See Note A-.(1))
9.10.2.Occupancy Classification
(1) Every building or part ofit shall be classified according to its major occupancy as belonging to one of the groups or divisions described in Table .
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Note A-.(1).
(1) Except as permitted in Article ., in any building containing more than one major occupancy in which one major occupancy is located entirely above another, the requirements of Article . for each portion of the buil ding containing a major occupancy shall be applied to that portion as if the entire building was of that major occupancy.
(1) In a building containing more than one major occupancy, where the aggregate area of all major occupancies in a particular group or division does not exceed 10% of the floor area on the storey on which they are located, they need not be considered as major occupancies for the purposes of Articles . and . provided they are not classified as Group F, Division 2 occupancies.
9.10.3.Ratings
(1) Where afire-resistance rat ing or a fire-protection rating is required in this Section for an element of a building, such rating shall be determined in conformance with
(a) the test methods described in Part 3,
(b) MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-2, "Fire Performance Ratings," or
(c) MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-3, "Fire and Sound Resistance Tables." (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Where aflame-spread rating is required in this Section for an element of a building, such rating shall be determined in accordance with the test methods described in Part 3, or in accordance with MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-2,
“Fire Performance Ratings.”
(2) Unless the flame-spread rating is referred to in this Part as a “surface flame-spread rating”, it shall apply to any surface of the element being considered that would be exposed by cutting through it as well as to the exposed surface of the element.
(1) Floor, roof and ceiling assemblies shall be rated for exposure to fire on the underside.
(2) Exterior walls shall be rated for exposure to fire from inside the building, except that such walls need not comply with the temperature rise limitations required by the standard tests referred to in Article . if such walls have a limiting distance of not less than 1.2 m, and due allowance is made for the effects of heat radiation in accordance with the requirements in Part 3.
(3) Firewalls and interior vertical fire separa tions required to have fire-resistance ratings shall be rated for exposure to fire on each side.
(1) Where a ceiling construction has a suspended membrane ceiling with lay-in panels or tiles that contribute to the required fire-resistance rating, hold down clips or other means shall be provided to prevent the lifting of such panels or tiles in the event of a fire.
9.10.4.Building Size Determination
(1) Except as required by Sentences (2)and9..(1),the space above a mezzanine is permitted to be excluded from the calculation of building height, provided
(a) the aggregate area of mezzanines that are not superimposed does not exceed 10% of the floor area of the building in which they are located, and
(b) the area of mezzanine in a suite does not exceed 10% of the area of that suite on the storey on which it is located.
(2) Except as required by Sentence .(1),the space above a mezzanine is permitted to be excluded from the calculation of building height, provided
(a) the aggregate area of mezzanines that are not superimposed does not exceed 40% of the open area of the room in which they are located, and (See Note A-.(3)(a))
(b) except as permitted in Sentence (3),the space above the mezza nine floor is used as an open area without partitions or subdividing walls higher than 1 070 mm above the mezzanine floor.
(3) The space above a mezzanine conforming to Sentence (2)is permitted to include an enclosed space whose area does not exceed 10% of the open area of the room in which the mezzanine is located, provided the enclosed space does not obstruct visual communication between the open space above the mezzanine and the room in which it is located.
(4) For the purpose of determining occupant load, the areas of mezzanines that are not considered as store ys shall be added to the floor area of the storey on which they are located. (See Note A-.(4))
(5) Platforms and catwalks intended solely for periodic inspection and maintenance need not be considered as floor assemblies or mezzanines for the purpose of calculating building height, provided
(a) they are not used for storage, and
(b) they are constructed with noncombustible materials, unless the building is permitted to be of combu stible construction.
(1) Where more than one level of mezzanine is provided in a storey, each level additional to the first shall be considered as a storey.
(1) Where a basement is used primarily as a storage garage, the basement is permitted to be considered as a separate building for the purposes of this Section provided the floor above the basement and the exterior walls of the basement above the adjoining ground level are constructed as fire separations of masonry or concrete having afire-resistance rating of not less than 2 h.
(1) Rooftop enclosures provided for elevator machinery, stairways or se rvice rooms, used for no purpose other than for service to the building, shall not be considered as a storey in calculating the building height.
9.10.5.Permitted Openings in Wall and Ceiling Assemblies
(1) Except as permitted in Sentences (2) and (3), a membrane forming part ofan assembly required to have afire- resistance rating shall not be pierced by openings into the assembly unless the assembly has been tested and rated for such openings.
(2) A wall or ceiling membrane forming part ofan assembly required to have afire-resistan ce rating is permitted to be pierced by openings for electrical and similar service outlet boxes, provided such outlet boxes and the penetrations conform to Article .
(2.1) Where boxes referred to in Sentence (2) are located on both sides of walls required to provide afire-resistance rating, they shall be offset where necessary to maintain the integrity of the fire separation.
(3) A membrane ceiling forming part ofan assembly assigned afire-resistance rating on the basis of Table 2 of MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-3, “Fire and Sound Resistance Tables,” is permitted to be pierced by openings leading to ducts within the ceiling space provided the ducts, the amount of openings and their protection conform to Sentence
9.10.6.Construction Types
(1) Where a building or part of a building is required to be of noncombustible construction, combustible elements shall be limited in conformance with the requirements in Subsection .
(1) Heavy timber construction shall be considered to have a 45 min fire-resistance rating when it is constructed in accordance with the requirements for heavy timber construction in Article .
9.10.7.Steel Members
(1) Except as permitted in Article ., structural steel members used in construction required to have afire-resistance rating shall be protected to provide the required fire-resistance rating.
9.10.8.Fire-Resistance and Combustibility in Relation to Occupancy, Height and Supported Elements
(1) Except as otherwise provided in this Subsection, the fire-resistance ratings of floors and roofs shall conform to Table . (See Subsection . for mixed occupancies and Subsection . for construction camps.)
Table 9.10.8.1. Fire Resistance Ratings for Floors and Roofs Forming Part of Sentence 9.10.8.1.(1)
| Major Occupancy | Maximum Building Height , Storeys | Minimum Fire-Resistance Rating by Building Eleme nt, min | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Floors Except Floors over Crawl Spaces | Mezzanine Floors | Roofs | ||
| Residential (Group C) | 3 | 45 | 45 | — |
| All other occupancies | 2 | 45 | — | — |
| 3 | 45 | 45 | 45 |
(1) Except for roofs that support an occupancy, the requirements in Table . for roof assemblies to have afire-resistance rating are permitted to be waived in sprinklered buildings where
(a) the sprinkler system is electrically supervised in conformance with Sentence .(3), and
(b) the operation of the sprinkler system will cause a signal to be transmitted to the fire department in conformance with Sentence .(4).
(1) Except as otherwise provided in this Subsection, all loadbearing walls, columns and arches in the storey immediately below a floor or roof assembly shall have afire- resistance rating of not less than that required for the supported floor or roof assembly.
(2) Light-frame walls, columns, arches and beams as well as lo adbearing steel elements that support floors between dwelling units in a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces shall be protected by not less than 15.9 mm thick Type-X gypsum board. (See Note A-.(2))
(1) Where an assembly is required to be of noncombustible construction and to have afire-resistanc e rating, it shall be supported by noncombustible construction.
(1) Construction supporting a service room need not conform to Article .
(1) Mezzanines required to be counted as storeys in Articles . and . shall be constructed in conformance with the requirements for “Floors Except Floors over Crawl Spaces” in Table .
(1) Where a portion of a roof supports an occupancy, that portion shall be constructed as a fire separation having afire- resistance rating conforming to the rating for “Floors Except Floors over Crawl Spaces” in Table .
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), the floor assembly of every exterior passageway used as part of a means of egress shall have afire-resistance rating of not less than 45 min or be of noncombustible construction.
(2) No fire-resistance rating is required for floors of exterior passageways serving buildings of Group D, E or F major occupancy that are not more than 2 storeys in building height.
(3) No fire-resistance rating is required for floors of exterior passageways serving
(a) a house with a secondary suite, or
(b) a single dwelling unit where no suite is located above or below the dwelling unit. (See also Sentence .(2))
(1) Where a crawl space exceeds 1.8 m in height or is used for any occupancy or as aplenum in combustible construction or for the passage of flue pipes, it shall be considered as a basement in applying the requirements in Article .
(1) Table . does not apply to
(a) a dwelling unit that has no other dw elling unit above or below it,
(b) houses with a secondary suite, where the floor framing is protected on the underside by a continuous smoke-tight barrier of not less than 15.9 mm thick Type X gypsum board, or
(c) a dwelling unit that is not above or below another major occupancy.
(1) The fire-resistance ratings of floors, roofs, loadbearing walls, columns and arches need not conform to this Subsection if such assemblies conform in all respects to the appropriate requirements in Section 3.2.
9.10.9.Fire Separations and Smoke-tight Barriers between Rooms and Spaces within Buildings
(1) This Subsection applies to
(a) fire separations required between rooms and spaces in buildings, and
(b) smoke-tight barriers required in houses with a secondary suite including their common spaces.
(1) Except as permitted in Article ., a wall or floor assembly required to be afire separation shall be constructed as a continuous barrier against the spread of fire and retard the passage of smoke.
(2) Except as permitted in Article ., a wall or floor assembly required to be a smoke-tight barrier shall be constructed as a continuous barrier against the spread of smoke. (See Note A-.(2) and (3))
(3) Except as provided in Sentence (6), the continuity of afire separation where it abuts another fire separation or smoke-tight barrier, a floor, a ceiling, or a roof shall be maintained by afirestop that, when subjected to the fire test method in CAN/ULC-S115, “Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems,” has an FT rating not less than the fire- resistance rating for the abutting fire separation. (See Note A-.(2) and (3)) (See also Note A-.(2))
(4) Except as provided in Sentence (6), joints located in a horizontal plane between a floor and an exterior wall shall be sealed by afirestop that, when subjected to the fire test method in ASTM E2307, “Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barriers Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-storey Test Apparatus,” has an F rating not less than the fire-resistance rating for the horizontal fire separation.
(5) Except as provided in Sentence (6), all gypsum board joints in the assemblies described in Sentences(1)and (2) shall conform to CSA A82.31-M, “Gypsum Board Application,” to maintain the integrity of the smoke-tight barrier over the entire surface.
(6) Joints between ceilings and walls, between floors and walls, and between walls at corners need not comply with Sentences (3) to(5)where such joints consist of gypsum board that is attached to framing members and arranged so as to restrict the passage of flame and smoke through the joints.
(1) Except as permitted in Articles . to ., openings in required fire separations shall be protected with closures conforming to Subsection .
(1) Except as permitted in Sentences (2) to (4), all floor assemblies shall be constructed as fire separations.
(2) Floor assemblies contained within dwelling units and within houses with a secondary suite need not be constructed as fire separations.
(3) Floor assemblies for which no fire-resistance rating is required by Subsection . and floors of mezzanines not required to be counted as storeys in Articles . and . need not be constructed as fire separations.
(4) Where a crawl space is not required by Article . to be constructed as a basement, the floor above it need not be constructed as a fire separa tion.
(1) Except as permitted in Article ., interconnected floor spaces shall conform to the requirements of Subsection .
(1) Except as required by Sentence (2) and Articles . and . and as permitted by Article ., penetrations ofa required fire separ ation or a membrane forming part of an assembly required to be afire separation shall be
(a) sealed by afirestop that, when subjected to the fire test method in CAN/ULC-S115, “Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems,” has an F rating not less than the required fire-resistance rating for the fire separation,
(b) tightly fitted or cast in place, provided the penetrating item is made of steel, ferrous, copper, concrete or masonry, or
(c) sealed to maintain the integrity of the fire separation. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Penetrations of a firewall shall be sealed at the penetration by afirestop that, when subjected to the fire test method in “CAN/ULC-S115, “Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems,” has an FT rating not less than the fire- resistance rating for the fire separation.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and(5), piping for drain, waste, vent and central vacuum systems that is not located in a vertical shaft is permitted to penetrate afire s eparation required to have afire-resistance rating or a membrane that forms part of an assembly required to have afire-resistance rating, provided the penetration is protected in accordance with Clause .(1)(a) or(b).
(2) Drain piping leading directly from a water closet through a concrete floor slab is permitted to penetrate a horizontal fire separation or a membrane that contributes to the required fire-resistance rating of a horizontal fi re separation, provided
(a) the piping is noncombustible and the penetration is protected in accordance with Sentence .(1), or
(b) the piping is combustible and the penetration is sealed by afirestop conforming to Clause .(1)(a).
(3) Combustible drain, waste and vent piping is permitted on one side of a vertical fire separation, provided it is not located in a vertical shaft.
(4) In buildings containing two dwelling units only, combustible drain, waste and vent piping is permitted on one side of a horizontal fire separ ation.
(5) Water distribution piping is permitted to partly or wholly penetrate afire separation required to have afire- resistance rating, provided
(a) the piping is noncombustible and the penetration is protected in accordance with Sentence .(1), or
(b) the piping is combustible and is not located in a vertical shaft, and the penetration is sealed by afirestop conforming to Clause .(1)(a).
(1) Except as provided in Sentences(2)to (5), outlet boxes are permitted to penetrate the membrane of an assembly required to have afire-resistance rating, provided they are sealed at the penetration by afirestop that, when subjected to the fire test method in CAN/ULC-S115, “Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems,” has an FT rating not less than the fire-resistance rating of the fire separation. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Except as provided in Sentence .(2),noncombustible outlet boxes that penetrate afire separation or a membrane forming part ofan assembly required to have afi re-resistance rating need not conform to Sentence (1), provided
(a) they do not exceed
(i) 0.016 m2 in area, and
(ii) an aggregate area of 0.065 m2 in any 9.3 m2 of surface area, and
(b) the annular space between the membrane and the noncombustible outlet boxes does not exceed 3 mm.
(3) Except as provided in Sentence .(2), combustible outlet boxes that penetrate afire separation or a membrane forming part ofan assembly required to have afire-resistance rating need not conform to Sentence (1), provided
(a) the outlet boxes are
(i) separated from the remainder of the space within the assembly by an enclosure of not more than 0.3 m2 in area made of fire block material conforming to Article ., or (See Note A-.(3)(a)(i))
(ii) located in a space within the assembly that is filled with preformed fibre insulation processed from rock or slag conforming to CAN/ULC-S702.1, “Standard for Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings, Part 1: Material Specification,” and having a mass per unit area of not less than 1.22 kg/m2 of wall surface such that the exposed sides and back of the outlet box are encapsulated by the noncombustible insulation, and
(b) the outlet boxes do not exceed an aggregate area of 0.016 m2 in any individual enclosure as described in Subclause (a)(i)or any individual insulated space as described in Subclause (a)(ii).
(4) Noncombustible outlet boxes conforming to Sentence (2)are permitted to be located on opposite sides of a vertical fire separation having afire-resistance rating and need not conform to Sentence (1),provided they are
(a) separated from each other by a horizontal distance of not less than 600 mm,
(b) separated from each other and the remainder of the wall space by an enclosure conforming to Subclause (3)(a)(i), or
(c) located in an insulated wall space in accordance with Subclause (3)(a)(ii).
(5) Combustible outlet boxes conforming to Sentence (3) are permitted to be located on opposite sides of a vertical fire separation having afire-resistance rating and need not conform to Sentence (1).
(6) Service equipment is permitted to penetrate a horizontal fire separation conforming to Sentence .(2), provided the penetration is sealed by
(a) afirestop that, when subjected to the fire test method in CAN/ULC-S115, “Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems,” has an FT rating not less than the required fire-resistance rating for the fire separation,
(b) afirestop conforming to Clause .(1)(a), where the service equipment is located entirely within the cavity of a wall assembly above and below the horizontal fire separation having a required fire-resistance rating, or
(c) afirestop conforming to Clause .(1)(a), where the penetration is
(i) contained within the concealed space of a floor or ceiling assembly having afire-resistance rating,
(ii) located above a ceiling membrane providing a horizontal fire separation, or
(iii) contained within a horizontal service space conforming to Sentence .(2) that is directly above or below a floor or ceiling.
(1) Combustible totally enclosed raceways that are embedded in a concrete floor slab are permitted in an assembly required to have afire-resistance rating, provided the concrete cover between the raceway and the bottom of the slab is not less than 50 mm.
(2) Totally enclosed raceways are permitted to penetrate afire separation, provided they are sealed at the penetration by afirestop conforming to Clause .(1)(a).
(3) Sprinkler piping is permitted to penetrate afire separation, provided the fire compartments on each side of the fire separation are sprinklered.
(4) Sprinklers are permitted to penetrate afire separation or a membrane forming part ofan assembly required to have a fire-resistance rating without having to meet the firestop requirements of Article . and Clause .(6)(a), provided the annular space created by the penetration of a fire sprinkler is covered by a metal escutcheon plate in accordance with NFPA 13, “Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.”
(5) Fire dampers are permitted to penetrate afire separation or a membrane forming part ofan assembly required to have afire-resistance rating without having to meet the firestop requirements of Sentence .(1), provided the fire damper is
(a) installed in conformance with NFPA 80, “Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives,”
(b) specifically designed with afirestop, or
(c) provided in conformance with Sentence .(3). (See also Note A-.(1).)
(1) Combustible construction that abuts on or is supported by a noncombustible fire separ ation shall be constructed so that its collapse under fire conditions will not cause collapse of the fire separation.
(1) Where pockets for the support of beams or joists are formed in a masonry or concrete fire separation, the remaining total thickness of solid masonry and/or grout and/or concrete shall be not less than the required equivalent thickness shown for Type S monolithic concrete in Table . of MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-2, “Fire Performance Ratings,” for the required fire-resistance rating.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), a h orizontal service space or other concealed space located above a required vertical fire separation shall be divided at the fire separation by an equivalent fire separation within the space.
(2) Where a horizontal service space or other concealed space is located above a required vertical fire separation other than a vertical shaft, such space need not be divided as required in Sentence (1) provided the construction between such space and the space below is constructed as a fire separation having afire-resistance rating not less than that required for the vertical fire separation, except that where the vertical fire separation is not required to have afire-resistance rating greater than 45 min, the fire-r esistance rating of the ceiling is permitted to be reduced to 30 min.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (4), residential occupancies shall be separated from all other major occupancies by afire separation having afire-resistance rating of not less than 1 h.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), a major occupan cy classified as a residential occupancy, including live/work units, shall be separated from other major occupancies classified as mercantile or medium haza rd industrial occupancies by afire separation having afire-resistan ce rating of not less than 2 h.
(3) Where not more than two dwelling units or live/work uni ts are located in a building containing a mercantile occupancy, such mer cantile occupancy shall be separated from the dwelling units or live/work units by afire separation having not less than 1 h fire-resistance rating.
(4) The requirement for fire separations between major occupancies in Sentence (1) is waived for the occupancies allowed within live/work units.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), not more than one suite of residenti al occupancy shall be contained within a building classified as a Group F, Division 2 major occupancy.
(2) Except where a Group F Division 2 major occupancy is directly related to live/work units, not more than one suite of residential occupancy shall be contained within a building classified as Group F, Division 2 major occupancy.
(1) Except as required in Article . and as permitted by Sentence (2), each suite in other than business and personal services occupancies shall be separated from adjoining suites by afire separation having afire-resistance rati ng of not less than 45 min.
(2) In sprinklered buildings, suites of business and personal services occupancy and mercantile occupancy that are served by public corridors conforming with Clause .(4)(b) are not required to be separated from each other by fire separations.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3) and Article ., suites in residential occupancies shall be separated from adjacent rooms and suites by afire separation having afire-resistance rating of not less than 45 min.
(2) Sleeping rooms in boarding, lodging or rooming houses where sleeping accommodation is provided for not more than 8 boarders or lodgers need not be separated from the remainder of the floor area as required in Sentence (1) where the sleeping rooms form part of the proprietor's residence and do not contain cooking facilities.
(3) Except as provided in Sentences (4) and (5), dwelling units that contain 2 or more storeys including basements shall be separated from the remainder of the building by afire separation having afire-resistance rating of not less than 1 h. (See Note A-.(1))
(4) Walls and floor-ceiling framing in a house with a secondary suite that separate dwelling units from each other or dwelling units from ancillary spaces and common spaces need not comply with Sentence (1), where the walls and floor- ceiling framing are protected by a continuous smoke-tight barrier of not less than 15.9 mm thick Type X gypsum board installed on
(a) both sides of walls, and
(b) the underside of floor-ceiling framing.
(5) The fire-resistance rating of the fire separation required in Sentence (4) is permitted to be waived where the house with a secondary suite is sprinklere d.
(1) Except as otherwise required by this Part and as provided in Sentences (2) to(5),public corridors shall be separated from the remainder of the building by afire separation having not less than a 45 min fire-resi stance rating.
(2) In other than residential occupancies, no fire-resistance rati ng is required for fire separations between a public corridor and the remainder of the bu ilding if
(a) the floor area is sprinklered,
(b) the sprinkler system is electrically supervised in conformance with Sentence .(3), and
(c) the operation of the sprinkler system will cause a signal to be transmitted to the fire department in conformance with Sentence .(4).
(3) In other than residential occupancies, no fir e separation is required between a public corridor and the remainder of the building if
(a) the floor area is sprinklered,
(b) the sprinkler system is electrically supervised in conformance with Sentence .(3),
(c) the operation of the sprinkler system will cause a signal to be transmitted to the fire department in conformance with Sentence .(4), and
(d) the corridor exceeds 5 m in width.
(4) Where a public corridor is located in a house with a secondary suite, a continuous smoke-tight barrier of not less than 15.9 mm thick Type X gypsum board shall be installed on
(a) both sides of walls separating the corridor from the remainder of the building, and
(b) the underside of floor-ceiling framing separating the corridor from the remainder of the build ing.
(5) No fire separation is required in a sprinklered floor area between a public corri dor and a space containing plumbing fixtures required by Article . and Section 9.31., provided
(a) the space and the public corridor are separated from the remainder of the storey by afire separation having afire- resistance rating not less than that required between the public corridor and the remainder of the storey, and
(b) the plumbing fixtures are not located within a dwelling unit or suite.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), a storage garage shall be separated from other occupancies by afire separation having not less than a 1.5 h fire-resistance rating.
(2) Except as permitted in Sentence (3), storage garage s containing 5 motor vehicles or fewer shall be separated from other occupancies by afire separation of not less than 1 h.
(3) Where a storage garage serves only the dwelling unit to which it is attached or in which it is built, it shall be considered as part of that dwelling unit and the fire separation required in Sentence (2) need not be provided between the garage and the dwelling unit.
(4) Except as provided in Sentence (5), where a storage garage is attached to or built into a building of residential occupancy
(a) an air barrier system conforming to Subsection . shall be installed between the garage and the remainder of the building to provide an effective barrier to gas and exhaust fumes, and
(b) every door between the garage and the remainder of the building shall conform to Article . (See Note A-.(4))
(5) Where membrane materials are used to provide the required airtightness in the air barrier syst em, all joints shall be sealed and structurally supported.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), a repair garage shall be separated from other occupancies by afire separation having afire-resistance rating of not less than 2 h.
(2) Ancillary spaces directly serving a repair garage, including waiting rooms, reception rooms, tool and parts storage areas and supervisory office space, need not be separated from the repair garage but shall be separated from other occupancies as required in Sentence (1).
(3) The fire separation referred to in Sentence (1) shall have afire-resistance rating of not less than 1 h, where
(a) the building is not more than one storey in building height,
(b) the building is operated as a single suite, and
(c) the only occupancy other than the repair garage is a mercantile occup ancy.
(4) Except as provided in Sentence (5), where a building containing a repair garage also contains a dwelling unit, an air barrier system conforming to Subsection . shall be installed between the dwel ling unit and the suite containing the garage to provide an effective barrier to gas and exhaust fumes. (See Note A-.(4))
(5) Where membrane materials are used to provide the required airtightness in the air barrier syst em, all joints shall be sealed and structurally supported.
(1) Where a vertical service space contains an exhaust duct that serves more than one fire compartment, the duct shall have a fan located at or near the exhaust outlet to ensure that the duct is under negative pressure.
(2) Individual fire compartments referred to in Sentence (1) shall not have fans that exhaust directly into the duct in the vertical service space.
(1) Except as permitted by Sentence .(1), a central vacuum system shall serve not more than one suite.
9.10.10.Service Rooms
(1) This Subsection applies to service rooms in all buildings except rooms located within a dwelling unit.
(1) The fire-resistance rating requirements in this Subsection do not apply to the floor assembly immediately below a service room.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2) and Articles . and ., service rooms shall be separated from the remainder of the building by afire separation having afire-resistance rating of not less than 1 h when the floor area containing the service room is not sprink lered.
(2) Where a room contains a limited quantity of service equipment and the service equipment does not constitute a fire hazard, the requirements in Sentence (1) shall not apply.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3) and Article ., fuel-fired appliances shall be located in a service room separated from the remainder of the building by af ire separation having not less than a 1 h fire-resistance rating.
(2) Except as required in the appliance installation standards referenced in Sentences .(1) and .(1), fuel- fired space-heating appliances, space-cooling appliances and service water heaters need not be separated from the remainder of the building as required in Sentence (1), (a) where the appliances serve
(i) not more than one room or suite, or
(ii) a building with a building area of not more than 400 m2 and a building height of not more than 2 storeys, or
(b) where the appliances
(i) serve a house with a secondary suite including their common spaces, and
(ii) are located in a service room where both sides of any wall assemblies and the underside of any floor-ceiling framing separating this room from both dwelling units or their common spaces are protected by a continuous smoke-tight barrier consisting of not less than 15.9 mm thick Type X gypsum board.
(3) Sentence (1) does not apply to fireplaces and cooking appliances.
(1) Service rooms containing incinerators shall be separated from the remainder of the building by afire separation having afire-resistance rating of not less than 2 h.
(2) The design, construction, installation and alteration of each indoor incinerator shall conform to NFPA 82, “ Standard on Incinerators and Waste and Linen Handling Systems and Equipment.”
(3) Every incinerator shall be connected to a chimney flue conforming to the requirements in Section 9.21. and serving no other appliance.
(4) An incinerator shall not be located in a room with other fuel-fired appliances.
(1) Rooms for the temporary storage of combustible refuse and materials for recycling in all occupancies or for public storage in residential occupancies shall be separated from the remainder of the building by afire separation having not less than a 1 h fire-resistance rating, except that afire separation with afire-resistance ra ting of not less than 45 min is permitted where
(a) the fire-resist ance rating of the floor assembly is not required to exceed 45 min, or
(b) the room is sprinklered.
(1) Where a generator intended to supply emergency power for lighting, fire safety and life safety systems is located in a building, it shall be located in a room that,
(a) is separated from the remainder of the building by afire separation with afire- resistance rating not less than
(i) 1 h, if the floor assembly is not required to have afire-resistance rating of more than 1 h, and
(ii) 2 h, if the floor assembly is required to have afire-resistance rating of more than 1 h, and
(b) contains only the generating set and equipment that is related to the emergency power supply system.
9.10.11.Firewalls
(1) Except as provided in Articles ., a party wall on a property line shall be constructed as a firewall.
(1) A party wall on a property line of a building of residential occu pancy need not be constructed as a firewall, provided it is constructed as a fire separation having not less than a 1 h fire-resistance rating, where the party wall separates
(a) two dwelling units where there is no dwelling unit above another dwelling unit,
(b) a dwelling unit and a house with a secondary s uite including their common spaces, or
(c) two houses with a secondary suite including their common spaces.
(2) Reserved.
(3) The wall described in Sentence (1) shall provide continuous protection from the top of the footings to the underside of the roof deck.
(4) Any space between the top of the wall described in Sentence (1) and the roof deck shall be tightly filled with mineral wool or noncombustible material.
(1) Where firewalls are used, the requirements in Part 3 shall apply.
(1) Where a garage is detached from the dwelling unit it serves but attached to another garage on the adjacent property, the party wall so formed shall be constructed as a fire separation having afire-resistance rati ng of not less than 45 min.
9.10.12.Prevention of Fire Spread at Exterior Walls and Between Storeys
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2) and in Articles . and ., the portions ofa floor area or mezzanine that do not terminate at an exterior wall, a firewall or a vertical shaft, shall terminate at a vertical fire separation having a fire-resistance rating not less than that required for the floor assembly that terminates at the separation.
(2) A mezzanine need not terminate at a vertical fire separation where the mezzanine is not required to be considered as a storey in Articles . and .
(1) Where a wall in a building is exposed to a fire hazard from an adjoining roof of a separate fire comp artment that is not sprinklered in the same building, the roof shall contain no skylights within a horizontal distance of 5 m of the windows in the exposed wall.
(1) Except as provided in Article ., where exterior walls of a building meet at an external angle of 135° or less, the horizontal distance from an unprotected opening in one exterior wall to an unpr otected opening in the other exterior wall shall be not less than 1.2 m, where these openings are
(a) in different fire compartments, or
(b) in different dwelling units, ancillary spaces or common spaces in a house with a secondary suite.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), the exterior wall of each fire compartment referred to in Sentence (1)within the 1.2 m distance shall have afire-resistance rating not less than that required for the interior vertical fire separation between the compartment and the remainder of the building.
(3) Where interior walls between dwelling units, ancillary spaces or common spaces in a house with a secondary suite are not constructed as fire separations, the exterior wall of each dwelling unit, ancillary space or common space referred to in Sentence (1)within the 1.2 m distance shall be finished on the interior with not less than 15.9 mm thick Type X gypsum board.
(1) This Article applies to the portion of any soffit enclosing a projection that is
(a) less than 2.5 m vertically above a window or door, and
(b) less than 1.2 m from either side of the window or door. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Except as provided in Sentences (4) and (5), the construction described in Sentence (1)shall have no unprotected openings and shall be protected in accordance with Sentence (3), where the soffit encloses
(a) a common attic or roof space that spans more than 2 suites of residential occupancy and projects beyond the exterior wall of the building,
(b) a floor space where an upper storey projects beyond the exterior wall of a lower storey and
(i) afire separation is required at the floor between the two, or
(ii) the floor separates dwelling units from each other or a dwelling unit from an ancillary space or a common space in a house with a secondary suite, or
(c) a floor space where an upper storey projects beyond the exterior wall of a lower storey, and the projection is continuous across
(i) a vertical fire separation separating two suites, or
(ii) a wall separating dwelling units from each other or a dwelling unit from an ancillary space or a common space in a house with a secondar y suite.
(3) Protection required by Sentence (2) shall be provided by
(a) noncombustible material having a minimum thickness of 0.38 mm and a melting point not below 650°C,
(b) not less than 12.7 mm thick gypsum soffit board or gypsum wallboard installed according to CSA A82.31-M, “Gypsum Board Application,”
(c) not less than 11 mm thick plywood,
(d) not less than 12.5 mm thick OSB or waferboard, or
(e) not less than 11 mm thick lumber. (See Note A-.(3))
(4) In the case ofa soffit described in Sentence (1) that is at the edge of an attic or roof space, and completely separated from the remainder of the attic or roof space by fire blocks, the requirements in Sentence (2) do not apply.
(5) Where all suites spanned by a common attic or roof space or situated above or below the projecting floor are sprinklered, the requirements in Sentence (2) do not apply provided that all rooms, including closets and bathrooms, having openings in the wall beneath the soffit are sprinklered, notwithstanding any exceptions in the sprinkler standards referenced in Article .
9.10.13.Doors, Dampers and Other Closures in Fire Separations
(1) Except as provided in Article ., openings in required fire separations shall be protected with a closure conforming to Table . and shall be installed in conformance with NFPA 80, “Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives,” unless otherwise specified in this Part. (See also Article .)
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Article .
(1) A 45 mm thick solid core wood door is permitted to be used where a minimum fire-protection rating of 20 min is permitted or between a public corridor and a suite provided the door conforms to CAN/ULC-S113, “Standard Specification for Wood Core Doors Meeting the Performance Required by CAN/ULC-S104 for Twenty Minute Fire Rated Closure Assemblies.” (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Doors described in Sentence (1) shall have not more than a 6 mm clearance beneath and not more than 3 mm at the sides and top.
(1) Doors required to provide a 20 min fire-protection rating or permitted to be 45 mm solid core wood shall be mounted in a wood frame of at least 38 mm thickness where the frame has not been tested and rated.
(1) Doors forming part of an exit or a public means of egress shall conform to Subsection . in addition to this Subsection.
(1) Wired glass conforming to Article . that has not been tested in accordance with Article . is permitted as a closure in a vertical fire separatio n required to have afire-resistance rating of not more than 1 h provided such glass is not less than 6 mm thick and is mounted in conformance with Sentence (2).
(2) Wired glass described in Sentence (1) shall be mounted in fixed steel frames having a metal thickness of not less than 1.35 mm and a glazing stop of not less than 20 mm on each side of the glass.
(3) Individual panes of glass described in Sentence (1) shall not exceed 0.8 m² in area or 1.4 m in height or width, and the area of glass not structurally supported by mullions shall not exceed 7.5 m².
(1) Steel door frames forming part of a closure in a fire separation, including anchorage requirements, shall conform to CAN/ULC-S105, “Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the Performance Required by CAN/ULC-S104.”
(1) Glass block that has not been tested in accordance with Article . is permitted as a closure in a fire separation required to have afire-resistance ratin g of not more than 1 h.
(1) The size of an opening in an interior fire separation, even where protected with a closure, shall not exceed 11 m², with no dimension greater than 3.7 m, if a fire compartment on either side of the fire separation is not sprinklered.
(2) The size of an opening in an interior fire separation, even where protected with a closure, shall not exceed 22 m², with no dimension greater than 6 m, when the fire compartments on both sides of the fire separation are sprinklered.
(1) Every swing type door in a fire separation shall be equipped with a latch.
(1) Except as described in Sentence (2), every door in a fire separation shall have a self-closing device.
(2) Self-closing devices are not required between public corridors and suites in business and personal services occupancies, except in dead-end corridors or a corridor that serves a hotel.
(1) Where hold-open devices are used on doors in required fire separations, they shall be installed in accordance with Article .
(1) Swing-type doors shall open into service rooms containing fuel-fired equipment where such doors lead to public corridors or rooms used for assembly but shall swing outward from such rooms in all other cases.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentences (2) to (5), .(3) and9..(5), a duct that penetrates an assembly required to be afire separation with af ire-resistance rating shall be equipped with afire damper in conformance with Articles . and .
(2) Afire damper is not required where a noncombustible branch duct pierces a required fire separation provided the duct
(a) has a melting point not below 760°C,
(b) has a cross-sectional area less than 130 cm², and
(c) supplies only air-conditioning units or combined air-conditioning and heating units discharging air at not more than 1.2 m above the floor.
(3) Afire damper is not required where a noncombustible branch duct pierces a required fire separation around an exhaust duct riser in which the air flow is upward provided
(a) the melting point of the branch duct is not below 760 °C,
(b) the branch duct is carried up inside the riser at least 500 mm, and
(c) the exhaust duct is under negative pressure as described in Article .
(4) Noncombustible ducts that penetrate afire separation separating a vertical service space from the remainder of the building need not be equipped with afire damper at the fire separation provided
(a) the ducts have a melting point above 760 °C, and
(b) each individual duct exhausts directly to the outside at the top of the vertical service space.
(5) A duct serving commercial cooking equipment and piercing a required fire separation need not be equipped with a fire damper at the fire separat ion.
(1) Fire stop flaps in ceiling membranes required in Sentence .(3) shall
(a) conform to CAN/ULC-S112.2, “Standard Method of Fire Test of Ceiling Firestop Flap Assemblies,” and
(b) activate at a temperature approximately 30°C above the normal maximum temperature that occurs in the ducts, whether the air duct system is operating or shut down.
(1) A door between an attached or built-in garage and a dwelling unit shall be tight-fitting and weather-stripped to provide an effective barrier against the passage of gases and exhaust fumes and shall be fitted with a self-closing device.
(2) A doorway between an attached or built-in garage and a dwelling unit shall not be located in a room intended for sleeping.
(1) Where a door is installed so that it may damage the integrity of afire separation if its swing is unrestricted, door stops shall be installed to prevent such damage.
9.10.14.Spatial Separation Between Buildings
(1) This Subsection applies to buildings other than those to which Subsection . applies.
(2) This Subsection does not apply to a house with a secondary suite.
(1) The area of an expos ing building face shall be
(a) taken as the exterior wall area facing in one direction on any side of a building, and
(b) calculated as,
(i) the total area measured from the finished ground level to the uppermost ceiling, or
(ii) the area for each fire compartment, where a building is divided into fire c ompartments by fire separations with fire-resistance ratings not less than 45 min.
(2) For the purpose of using Table .-A to determine the maximum aggregate area of unprotected openings permitted in an irregularly-shaped or skewed exterior wall, the location of the exposing building face shall be taken as a vertical plane located so that there are no unprotected openings between the vertical plane and the line to which limiting distance is measured. (See Note A-.(4))
(3) For the purpose of using Table . to determine the required type of construction, cladding and fire-resistance rating for an irregularly-shaped or skewed exterior wall,
(a) the exposing building face is permitted to be divided into any number of portions and the fire-resistance rating, type of cladding and percentage of unprotected openings limitations is permitted to be determined individually for each portion based on the limiting distance for each portion so divided,
(b) the exposing building face shall be taken as the projection of the exterior wall onto a vertical plane located so that no portion of the exterior wall of the building is between the vertical plane and the line to which the limiting dista nce is established in Clause (a), and
(c) for the purpose of determining the actual area of unprotected openings permitted in an exterior wall, the unprote cted openings shall be projected onto the vertical plane established in Clause (b).
(4) The required limiting distance for an exposing building face is permitted to be measured to a point beyond the property line that is not the centre line of a street, lane or public thoroughfare if
(a) the owners of the properties on which the limiting distance is measured and the municipality enter into an agreement in which such owners agree that,
(i) each owner covenants that, for the benefit of land owned by the other covenantors, the owner will not construct a building on his or her property unless the limiting distance for exposing building faces in respect of the proposed construction is measured in accordance with the agreement,
(ii) the covenants contained in the agreement are intended to run with the lands, and the agreement shall be binding on the parties and their respective heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,
(iii) the agreement shall not be amended or deleted from title without the consent of the municipality, and
(iv) they will comply with such other conditions as the municip ality considers necessary, including indemnification of the municipality by the other parties, and
(b) the agreement referred to in Clause (a) is registered against the title of the properties to which it applies.
(5) Where an agreement referred to in Sentence (4) is registered against the title of a property, the limiting distance for exposing building faces in respect of the construc tion of any buildings on the property shall be measured to the point referred to in the agreement.
(1) Where there is no fire department or where a fire department is not organized, trained and equipped to meet the needs of the community, the required limiting distance determined from Sentences .(2), (5) and (6) and Sentence .(6), shall be doubled for a building that is not sprinklered.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (6) to (10) and Sentence .(1), the maximum aggregate area of unprotected openings in an exposin g building face shall
(a) conform to Table .,
(b) conform to Subsection ., or
(c) where the limiting distance is not less than 1.2 m, be equal to or less than
(i) the limiting distance squared, for residential occupancies, business and personal services occupancies and low-hazard industrial occupancies, and
(ii) half the limiting distance squared, for mercantile occupancies and medium-hazard industrial occupancies.
Table 9.10.14.4. Maximum Aggregate Area of Unprotected Openings in Exterior Walls Forming Part of Sentence 9.10.14.4.(1)
| Occupancy Classification of Building | Maximum Total Area of Exposing Building Face , m² | Maximum Aggregate Area of Unprotected Open ings , % of Exposing Building Face Area | |||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Limiting Distance , m | |||||||||||||||
| Less than 1.2 | 1.2 | 1.5 | 2 | 2.5 | 3 | 4 | 6 | 8 | 10 | 12 | 16 | 20 | 25 | ||
| Residential , business and personal services , and low-hazard industrial | 10 | 0 | 8 | 12 | 21 | 33 | 55 | 96 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| 15 | 0 | 8 | 10 | 17 | 25 | 37 | 67 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| 20 | 0 | 8 | 10 | 15 | 21 | 30 | 53 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| 25 | 0 | 8 | 9 | 13 | 19 | 26 | 45 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| 30 | 0 | 7 | 9 | 12 | 17 | 23 | 39 | 88 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| 40 | 0 | 7 | 8 | 11 | 15 | 20 | 32 | 69 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| 50 | 0 | 7 | 8 | 10 | 14 | 18 | 28 | 57 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| 100 | 0 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 11 | 13 | 18 | 34 | 56 | 84 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| Over 100 | 0 | 7 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 12 | 19 | 28 | 40 | 55 | 92 | 100 | 100 | |
| Mercantile and medium-hazard industrial | 10 | 0 | 4 | 6 | 10 | 17 | 25 | 48 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| 15 | 0 | 4 | 5 | 8 | 13 | 18 | 34 | 82 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| 20 | 0 | 4 | 5 | 7 | 11 | 15 | 27 | 63 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| 25 | 0 | 4 | 5 | 7 | 9 | 13 | 22 | 51 | 94 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| 30 | 0 | 4 | 4 | 6 | 9 | 12 | 20 | 44 | 80 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| 40 | 0 | 4 | 4 | 6 | 8 | 10 | 16 | 34 | 61 | 97 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| 50 | 0 | 4 | 4 | 5 | 7 | 9 | 14 | 29 | 50 | 79 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| 100 | 0 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 9 | 17 | 28 | 42 | 60 | 100 | 100 | 100 | |
| Over 100 | 0 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 10 | 14 | 20 | 27 | 46 | 70 | 100 |
(2) Except as provided in Sentence .(1), openings in a wall having a limiting distance of less than 1.2 m shall be protected by closures, of other than wired glass or glass block, whose fire protec tion rating is in conformance with the fire-resistance ratin g required for the wall.
(3) Reserved.
(4) Reserved.
(5) Reserved.
(6) The maximum aggregate area of unprotected openings is permitted to be up to twice the area determined according to Sentence (1), where the unprotected openings are glazed with
(a) wired glass in steel frames as described in Article ., or
(b) glass blocks, as described in Article .
(7) Where the building is sprinklered, the maximum aggregate area of unprotected openings is permitted to be up to twice the area determined according to Sentence (1), provided all rooms, including closets and bathrooms, that are adjacent to the exposing bu ilding face and that have unprotected openings are sprinklered, notwithstanding any exemptions in the sprinkler standards referenced in Article .
(8) The maximum aggregate area of unprotected openings in an exp osing building face of a storage garage need not comply with Sentence (1), where
(a) all storeys are constructed as open-air storeys, and
(b) the storage garage has a limiting distance of not less than 3 m.
(9) The maximum aggregate area of unprotected openings in an exposing building face of a storey that faces a street and is the same level as the street need not comply with Sentence (1) where the limiting distance is not less than 9 m.
(10) Except as provided in Sentence (11), for garages or accessory building s that serve a single dwelling unit only and are detached from any building, the maximum aggregate area of glazed openings shall comply with the requirements for unprotected opening s.
(11) The limits on the area of glazed openings need not apply to the exposing building face of a detached garage or accessory building facing a dwelling unit, where
(a) the detached garage or accessory building serves only one dwelling unit,
(b) the detached garage or accessory buildin g is located on the same property as that dwelling unit, and
(c) the dwelling unit served by the detached garage or accessory build ing is the only major occupancy on the property.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (4) to (14), each exposing building face and any exterior wall located above an exposing building face that encloses an attic or roof space shall be constructed in conformance with Table . and Subsection . (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Cladding on exposing building faces and exterior walls located above exposing building faces need not conform to the type of cladding required by Table . where
(a) the exposing building face is constructed with no unprotected openings,
(b) the limiting distance is not less than 0.6 m, and
(c) the cladding
(i) conforms to Subsection .,
(ii) is installed without furring members over not less than 12.7 mm thick gypsum sheathing or over masonry,
(iii) has aflame-spread rating not more than 25 when tested in accordance with Sentence .(2), and
(iv) is not more than 2 mm in thickness exclusive of fasteners, joints and local reinforcements.
Table 9.10.14.5. Minimum Construction Requirements for Exposing Building Faces Forming Part of Sentence 9.10.14.5.(1)
| Occupancy Classification of Building | Maximum Area of Unprotected Openings Permitted , % of Exposing Building Face Area | Minimum Required Fire - Resistance Rating | Type of Construction Required | Type of Cladding Required |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Residential , business and personal services, and low-hazard industrial | 0 - 10 | 1 h | Noncombustible | Noncombustible |
| >10 but ≤25 | 1 h | Combustible or noncombustible | Noncombustible | |
| >25 but <100 | 45 min | Combustible or noncombustible | Combustible or noncombustible | |
| Mercantile and medium- hazard industrial | 0 - 10 | 2 h | Noncombustible | Noncombustible |
| >10 but ≤25 | 2 h | Combustible or noncombustible | Noncombustible | |
| >25 but <100 | 1 h | Combustible or noncombustible | Combustible or noncombustible |
(3) Reserved.
(4) Except as provided in Sentence (5), where a garage or accessory building serves one dwelling unit only and is detached from any building, the expos ing building face
(a) need not conform to the minimum required fire-resistance rating stated in Table ., where the limiting distance is 0.6 m or more,
(b) shall have afire-resistance rating of not less than 45 min where the limiting distance is less than 0.6 m, and
(c) need not conform to the type of cladding and type of construction required by Table ., regardless of the limiting distance.
(5) The requirements regarding f ire-resistance rating, type of construction and type of cladding need not apply to the exposing building face of a detached garage or accessory building facing a dwelling unit, where
(a) the detached garage or accessory building serves only one dwelling unit,
(b) the detached garage or accessory buildin g is located on the same property as that dwelling unit, and
(c) the dwelling unit served by the detached garage or accessory buildi ng is the only major occupancy on the property.
(6) Except for buildings containing one or two dwelling units only , combustible projections on the exterior of a wall that are more than 1 m above ground level and that could expose an adjacent building to fire spread shall not be permitted within
(a) 1.2 m of a property line or the centre line of a public way, or
(b) 2.4 m of a combustible projection on another building on the same property.
(7) Reserved.
(8) Reserved.
(9) Reserved.
(10) Reserved.
(11) Reserved.
(12) Where roof soffits project to less than 1.2 m from the property line, the centre line of a public way, or an imaginary line between two building s or fire compartments on the same property, they shall
(a) have no openings, and
(b) be protected by
(i) not less than 0.38 mm thick sheet steel,
(ii) unvented aluminum conforming to CAN/CGSB-93.2-M, “Prefinished Aluminum Siding, Soffits, and Fascia, for Residential Use,”
(iii) not less than 12.7 mm thick gypsum soffit board or gypsum ceiling board installed according to CSA A82.31- M, “Gypsum Board Application,”
(iv) not less than 11 mm thick plywood,
(v) not less than 12.5 mm thick OSB or waferboard, or
(vi) not less than 11 mm thick lumber. (See Note A-.(2))
(13) Heavy timber and steel columns need not conform to the requirements of Sentence (1) provided the limiting distance is not less than 3 m.
(14) Non-loadbearing wall components need not have a minimum fire-resistance rating, where the building
(a) is 1 storey in building height,
(b) is of noncombustible construction,
(c) is classified as low-hazard industrial occupancy and is used only for low fire load occupancies such as power generating plants or plants for the manufacture or storage of noncombustible materials, and
(d) has a limiting distance of 3 m or more.
(1) An opening in an exposing building face not more than 130 cm2 shall not be considered an unprotected opening.
9.10.15.Spatial Separation Between Houses
(1) This Subsection applies to
(a) buildings that contain only dwelling units and have no dwellin g unit above another dwelling unit, and
(b) houses with a secondary suite including their common spaces. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) The area of an expos ing building face shall be
(a) taken as the exterior wall area facing in one direction on any side of a building, and
(b) calculated as
(i) the total area measured from the finished ground level to the uppermost ceiling,
(ii) the area for each fire compartment, where a building is divided into fire c ompartments by fire separations with fire-resistance ratings not less than 45 min, or
(iii) where Table . is used to determine the maximum aggregate area of glazed openings, the area of any number of individual portions ofthe exposing building face. (See Note A-.(2))
(2) Reserved.
(3) For the purpose of using Table . to determine the maximum aggregate area of glazed openings in an irregularly shaped or skewed exterior wall, the location of the exposing building face shall be taken as a vertical plane located so that there are no glazed openings between the vertical plane and the line to which the limiting distance is measured. (See Note A-.(4))
(4) In determining the required cladding-sheathing assembly and fire-resistance rating for an irregularly shaped or skewed exterior wall, the location of the exposing building face shall be taken as a vertical plane located so that no portion of the actual exposi ng building face is between the vertical plane and the line to which the limiting distance is measured. (See Article . and Note A-.(4).)
(5) The required limiting distance for an exposing building face is permitted to be measured to a point beyond the property line that is not the centre line of a street, lane or public thoroughfare if,
(a) the owners of the properties on which the limiting distance is measured and the mun icipality enter into an agreement in which such owners agree that,
(i) each owner covenants that, for the benefit of land owned by the other covenantors, the owner will not construct a building on his or her property unless the limiting distance for exposing building faces in respect of the proposed construction is measured in accordance with the agreement,
(ii) the covenants contained in the agreement are intended to run with the lands, and the agreement shall be binding on the parties and their respective heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,
(iii) the agreement shall not be amended or deleted from title without the consent of the municipality, and
(iv) they will comply with such other conditions as the municip ality considers necessary, including indemnification of the municipality by the other parties, and
(b) the agreement referred to in Clause (a) is registered against the title of the properties to which it applies.
(6) Where an agreement referred to in Sentence (5) is registered against the title of a property, the limiting distance for exposing building faces in respect of the constr uction of any buildings on the property shall be measured to the point referred to in the agreement.
(1) Where there is no fire department or where a fire department is not organized, trained and equipped to meet the needs of the community, the required limiting distance determined from Sentences .(2) and (5) and Sentence
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (6) to (9), the maximum area of glazed openings in an exposing build ing face shall
(a) conform to Table .,
(b) conform to Subsection . as if the glazed openings were unprotected openings, or
(c) where the limiting distance is not less than 1.2 m, be equal to or less than the limiting distance squared.
(2) Where the limits on the area of glazed openings are determined for individual portions ofthe exposing building face, as described in Subclause .(1)(b)(iii), the maximum aggregate area of glazed openings for any portion shall be determined using the values in Table . corresponding to
(a) the maximum total area of exposing building face, which is equal to the sum ofall portions ofthe exposing building face, and
(b) the limiting distance of each portion. (See Note A-.(2))
(3) Reserved.
(4) Reserved.
(5) Reserved
Table 9.10.15.4. Maximum Area of Glazed Openings in Exterior Walls of Houses Forming Part of Subclause 9.10.15.2.(1)(b)(iii) and Sentences 9.10.15.4.(1) and (2)
| Maximum Total Area of Exposing Building Face , m² | Maximum Aggregate Area of Glazed Opening s, % of Exposing Building Face Area | |||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Limiting Distance , m | ||||||||||||||
| Less than 1.2 | 1.2 | 1.5 | 2 | 2.5 | 3 | 4 | 6 | 8 | 10 | 12 | 16 | 20 | 25 | |
| 10 | 0 | 8 | 12 | 21 | 33 | 55 | 96 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| 15 | 0 | 8 | 10 | 17 | 25 | 37 | 67 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| 20 | 0 | 8 | 10 | 15 | 21 | 30 | 53 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| 25 | 0 | 8 | 9 | 13 | 19 | 26 | 45 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| 30 | 0 | 7 | 9 | 12 | 17 | 23 | 39 | 88 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| 40 | 0 | 7 | 8 | 11 | 15 | 20 | 32 | 69 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| 50 | 0 | 7 | 8 | 10 | 14 | 18 | 28 | 57 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| 100 | 0 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 11 | 13 | 18 | 34 | 56 | 84 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| Over 100 | 0 | 7 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 12 | 19 | 28 | 40 | 55 | 92 | 100 | 100 |
(6) The limits on the area of glazed openings shall not apply to the exposing building face of a dwelling unit facing a detached garage or accessory building, where
(a) the detached garage or accessory building serves only one dwelling unit,
(b) the detached garage or accessory buildin g is located on the same property as that dwelling unit, and
(c) the dwelling unit served by the detached garage or accessory build ing is the only major occupancy on the property.
(7) The maximum aggregate area of glazed openings in an exposing building face is permitted to be up to twice the area determined in accordance with Sentence (1), where
(a) the glazed openings consist of glass blocks, as described in Article ., or
(b) the building is sprinklered, provided all rooms, including closets, bathrooms and attached garages, that are adjacent to the exposing building f ace and that have glazed openings are sprinklered, notwithstanding any exemptions in the sprinkler standards referenced in Article .
(8) Except as provided in Sentence (9), openings in a wall having a limiting distance of less than 1.2 m shall be protected by closures, of other than wired glass or glass block, whose fire-protection rating is in conformance with the fire-resistance ratin g required for the wall.
(9) An opening in an exposing building face not more than 130 cm2 need not be protected by a closure.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (1.1), (2), (4) and (6), each exposing building face and any exterior wall located above an exposing building face that encloses an attic or roof space shall be constructed in conformance with Subsection .,
(a) for the exposing building face as a whole, or
(b) for any number of separate portions ofthe exposing building face.
(1.1) Sentence (1) does not apply where
(a) the limiting distance is not less than 1.2 m,
(b) the limiting distance is less than 1.2 m but not less than 0.6 m, provided that the exposing building face has afire-resistance rating of not less than 45 min, or
(c) the limiting distance is less than 0.6 m, provided that the e xposing building face has afire-resistance rating of not less than 45 min and is clad with noncombust ible material.
(2) Except as provided in Sentences (4) and (5), where the limiting distance is less than 0.6 m, the exposing buildi ng face and exterior walls located above the exposing building face that enclose an attic or roof space shall have afire- resistance rating of not less than 45 min, and
(a) the cladding shall be metal or noncom bustible cladding installed in accordance with Section 9.20., 9.27. or 9.28., (See Note A-.(1)),
(b) the cladding shall
(i) conform to Subsection .,
(ii) be installed without furring members over gypsum sheathing at least 12.7 mm thick or over masonry,
(iii) has aflame-spread rating not more than 25 when tested in accordance with Sentence .(2), and
(iv) not exceed 2 mm in thickness exclusive of fasteners, joints and local reinforcements, or
(c) the wall assembly shall comply with Clause .(1)(b) when tested in conformance with CAN/ULC-S134, “Standard Method of Fire Test of Exterior Wall Assemblies.力
(3) Reserved.
(4) The requirements for fire-resistance rating and type of cladding-sheathing assembly shall not apply to the exposing building face or projections from an exposing building face of a dwelling unit facing a detached garage or accessory building, or a garage or accessory building facing a dwelling unit, where
(a) the detached garage or accessory building serves only one dwelling unit,
(b) the detached garage or accessory building is located on the same property as that dwelling unit, and
(c) the dwelling unit served by the detached garage or accessory building is the only major occupancy on the property.
(5) Exceptfor buildings containing 1 or 2 dwellingunits only,combustible projections on the exterior of a wall that are more than 1 m above ground level and that could expose an adjacent building to fire spread shall not be permitted within
(a) 1.2 m of a property line or the centre line of a public way, or
(b) 2.4 m of a combustible projection on another building on the same property.
(6) Reserved.
(7) Reserved.
(8) Reserved.
(9) Reserved.
(10) Reserved.
(11) Reserved.
(12) Reserved.
(13) Heavy timber and steel columns need not conform to the requirements of Sentence (1) provided the limiting di stance is not less than 3 m.
9.10.16.Fire Blocks
(1) Concealed spaces in interior walls, ceilings, floors and crawl spaces shall be separated by fire b locks from concealed spaces in exterior walls and attic or roof spaces.
(2) Reserved.
(3) Fire blocks shall be provided at all interconnections between concealed vertical and horizontal spaces in interior coved ceilings, drop ceilings and soffits where the exposed construction materials within the concealed spaces have a surface flame-spread rating greater than 25.
(4) Fire blocks shall be provided at the top and bottom of each run of stairs where they pass through a floor containing concealed space in which the exposed construction materials within the space have a surface flame-spread rating greater than 25.
(5) Where not sprinklered, concealed spaces of combus tible construction created by a ceiling, roof space or unoccupied attic space shall be separated by fire blocks into compartments
(a) not more than 60 m in greatest dimension, and
(b) where such space contains exposed construction materials having a surface flame-spread rating greater than 25, not more than 300 m2 in area.
(6) No dimension of the compartment described in Clause (5)(b) shall exceed 20 m.
(7) Concealed spaces in mansard or gambrel style roofs, exterior cornices, balconies and canopies of combustible construction in which the exposed construction materials within the space have a surface flame-s pread rating exceeding 25 shall have vertical fire blocks at intervals of not more than 20 m and at points where such concealed spaces extend across the ends of required vertical fire separations.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), fire blocks shall be provided to block off concealed spaces within wall assemblies, including spaces created by furring,
(a) at each floor level,
(b) at each ceiling level where the ceiling contributes to part of the required fire-resistance rating, and
(c) at other locations within the wall, so that the distance between fire blocks does not exceed 20 m horizontally and 3 m vertically.
(2) Fire blocks described in Sentence (1)are not required, provided
(a) the insulated wall assembly contains not more than one concealed air space whose horizontal thickness is not more than 25 mm,
(b) the exposed construction materials within the space are noncombustible, or
(c) the exposed construction materials within the space, including insulation, but not including wiring, piping or similar services, have aflame-spread ra ting of not more than 25, or
(d) the concealed wall space is filled with insulation.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentences (2) and (3), f ire blocks shall be constructed of materials that will remain in place and prevent the passage of flames for not less than 15 min when subjected to the standard fire exposure in CAN/ULC- S101,“Standard Method of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials.力
(2) Fire blocks are deemed to comply with Sentence (1) if they are constructed of not less than,
(a) 0.38 mm sheet steel,
(b) 12.7 mm gypsum board,
(c) 12.5 mm plywood, OSB or waferboard, with joints having continuous supports,
(d) two layers of lumber, each not less than 19 mm thick, with joints staggered, or
(e) 38 mm lumber.
(3) In a building permitted to be of combustible construction, semi-rigid fibre insulation board produced from glass, rock or slag, is permitted to be used to block the vertical space in a double-frame wall assembly formed at the intersection of the floor assembly and the walls, provided the width of the vertical space does not exceed 25 mm and the insulation board
(a) has a density not less than 45 kg/m3,
(b) is securely fastened to one set of studs,
(c) extends from below the bottom of the top plates in the lower storey to above the top of the bottom plate in the upper storey, and
(d) completely fills the portion of the vertical space between the headers and between the wall plates. (See Note A-.(8))
(1) Where fire blocks are pierced by pipes, ducts or other elements, the effectiveness of the fire blocks shall be maintained around such elements.
9.10.17.Flame Spread Limits
(1) Except as otherwise provided in this Subsection, the exposed surface of every interior wall and ceiling, including skylights and glazing, shall have a surface flame-spread rating of not more than 150.
(2) Except as permitted in Sentence (3), doors need not conform to Sentence (1) provided they have a surface flame-spread rating of not more than 200.
(3) Doors within dwelling units, other than garage doors, need not conform to Sentences (1) and (2).
(1) At least 90% of the exposed surface of every ceiling in an exit or ceiling that is not spri nklered in a public corridor shall have a surface flame-spread rating of not more than 25.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), at least 90% of the exposed surfaces of every wall in an exit shall have a surface flame-spread rating of not more than 25.
(2) At least 75% of the wall surface of a lobby used as an exit in Article . shall have a surface flame-spread rating of not more than 25.
(1) Where an exterior exit passageway provides the only means of egress from the rooms or suites it serves, the wall and ceiling finishes of that passageway, including the soffit beneath and the guard on the passageway, shall have a surface flame-spread rating of not more than 25, except that up to 10% of the total wall area and 10% of the total ceiling area is permitted to have a surface flame- spread rating of not more than 150.
(1) At least 90% of the total wall surface in any public corridor that is not sprinklered shall have a surface flame-spread rating of not more than 75, or at least 90% of the upper half of such walls shall have a surface flame-spread rating of not more than 25. (See Article .)
(1) Skylights, glazing, combustible doors, and combustible light diffusers and lenses shall not be considered in the calculation of wall and ceiling areas in this Subsection.
(1) Where a public corridor or a corridor used by the public contains an occupancy, the interior finish materials used on the walls or ceiling of such occupancy shall have a surface flame-spread rating in conformance with that required for public corridors.
(1) Light diffusers and lenses having flame-spread ratings that exceed those permitted for the ceiling finish, shall conform to the requirements of Sentence .(1).
(1) Individual combustible skylights in corridors required to be separated from the remainder of the building by fire separations shall not exceed 1 m² in area and shall be spaced not less than 1.2 m apart.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), foamed plastics that form part of a wall or ceiling assembly shall be protected from adjacent space in the building, other than adjacent concealed spaces within attic or roof spaces, crawl spaces, wall assemblies and ceiling assemblies
(a) by one of the interior finishes described in Subsections . to .,
(b) provided the building does not contain a Group C major occupancy, by sheet metal that
(i) is mechanically fastened to the supporting assembly independent of the insulation,
(ii) is not less than 0.38 mm thick, and
(iii) has a melting point not less than 650 °C, or
(c) any thermal barrier that meets the requirements of Sentence .(2). (See Note A-.(1)(c))
(2) A walk-in cooler or freezer consisting of factory-assembled wall, floor or ceiling panels containing foamed plastics is permitted to be used, provided the panels
(a) are protected on both sides by sheet metal not less than 0.38 mm thick having a melting point not less than 650°C, (b) do not contain an air space, and
(c) have aflame-spread rating, determined by subjecting a sample panel with an assembled joint typical of field installation to the applicable test described in Subsection ., that is not more than that permitted for the room or space in which they are located or that they bound.
(3) Thermosetting foamed plastic insulation having aflam e-spread rating of not more than 200 is permitted to be used in factory-assembled doors in storage garages serving buildings of residential occupancy provided that
(a) the insulation is covered on the interior with a metallic foil,
(b) the assembly has a surface flame-spread rating of not more than 200, and
(c) the assembly incorporates no air spaces.
(1) The interior finish of walls and ceilings in bathrooms within suites of residential occupancy shall have a surface flame-spread rating of not more than 200.
(1) Where a covering or a lining is used with a duct, such lining or covering shall have aflame-spre ad rating conforming to Article . or .
9.10.18.Alarm and Detection Systems
(1) Where access is provided through a firewall, the requirements in this Subsection shall apply to the floor areas on both sides of the firewall as if they were in the same b uilding.
(1) Reserved.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (5), a fire alarm system shall be installed
(a) in every building that contains more than 3 storeys, including storeys below the first storey,
(b) where the total occupant load exceeds 300, or
(c) when the occupant load for any major occupancy in Table . is exceeded.
(3) Reserved.
(4) Reserved.
(5) A fire alarm system is not required in a residential occupancy where an exi t or public corridor serves not more than 4 suites or where each suite has direct access to an exterior exit facility leading to ground level.
Table 9.10.18.2. Maximum Occupant Load for Buildings Without Fire Alarm Systems Forming Part of Sentence 9.10.18.2.(2)
| Major Occupancy Classification | Occupant Load Above which Fire Alarm System is Requ ired |
|---|---|
| Residential | 10 ( sleeping accommodation ) |
| Business and personal services , mercantile | 150 above or below the first storey |
| Low- or medium-hazard in dustrial | 75 above or below the first storey |
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), and as required by this Subsection, where fire alarm, fire detection and smoke detection devices and systems are installed, these devices and systems and their installation shall conform to Subsection ., . and . (See Note A-.(1)
(2) The following Articles in Subsection . regarding fire alarm systems do not apply to Part 9 buildings: Articles ., ., ., ., ., . and .
(1) Where a fire alarm system is required, every public corridor in buildings of residential occu pancy and every exit stair shaft shall be provided with smoke detectors.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), ifa fire alarm system is required in a building that is not sprinklered,fire detectors shall be installed in the following spaces:
(a) storage rooms not within dwelling units,
(b) service rooms not within dwelling u nits,
(c) janitors’ rooms,
(d) rooms in which hazardous substances are to be used or stored, (See Note A-.(1))
(e) elevator hoistways, chutes and dumbwaiter shafts, and
(f) laundry rooms in buildings of residential occupancy, except those within dwelling units.
(3) Except as required in Sentence (4), heat detectors and smoke detectors described in Sentence (2), are not required in dwelling units or in sprinklered buildings in which the sprinkler system is electrically supervised and equipped with a water flow alarm.
(4) Where a fire alarm system is required in a hotel, heat detectors shall be installed in every room in a suite and in every room not located in a suite in a floor area containing a hotel, other than washrooms within a suite, saunas, refrigerated areas and swimming pools.
(1) Except for a recirculating air system serving not more than one dwelling unit, where a fire alarm system is required to be installed, every recirculating air handling system shall be designed to prevent the circulation of smoke upon a signal from a duct-type smoke detector where such system supplies more than one suite on the same floor or serves more than 1 storey.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), where a vertical fire separation having afire-resistance rating of at least 1 h separates a portion of a building from the remainder of the building and there are no openings through the fire separation other than those for piping, tubing, wiring and conduit, the requirements for fire alarm and detection systems may be applied to each portion so separated as if it were a separate building.
(2) The permission in Sentence (1) to consider separated portions of a building as separate buildings does not apply to service rooms and storage rooms.
(1) Central vacuum cleaning systems serving more than one suite or storey in a building equipped with a fire alarm system shall be designed to shut down upon activation of the fire alarm system.
(1) A fire alarm system is not required in a storage garage conforming to Article . provided there are no other occupancies in the build ing.
(1) If a fire alarm system is required in a building containing a hotel, a single stage fire alarm system shall be provided.
(1) Where fire protection and life safety systems, and systems with fire protection and life safety functions, are integrated with each other, the systems shall be tested as a whole in accordance with CAN/ULC-S1001, “Integrated Systems Testing of Fire Protection and Life Safety Systems,” to verify that the systems have been properly integrated.
(2) Sentence (1) does not apply to a building that contains only dwelling units and has no dwelling unit above another dwelling unit.
9.10.19.Smoke Alarms
(1) Except as permitted by Article ., smoke alarms conforming to CAN/ULC-S531, “Standard for Smoke Alarms,” shall be installed in
(a) each dwelling unit,
(b) each sleeping room not within a dwelling unit, and
(c) ancillary spaces and common spaces not in dwelling u nits in a house with a secondary suite.
(2) Smoke alarms required in Sentence (1) shall have a visual signalling component conforming to the requirements in . (Light, Color and Pulse Characteristics) of NFPA 72, “National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.”
(3) The visual signalling component required in Sentence (2) need not
(a) be integrated with the smoke alarm provided it is interconnected to it,
(b) be on battery backup, or
(c) have synchronized flash rates, when installed in a house with a secondary suite or an individual dwelling unit.
(4) The luminous intensity for visual signalling components required in Sentence (2) that are installed in sleeping rooms shall be a minimum of 175 cd.
(1) The sound patterns of smoke alarms shall
(a) meet the temporal patterns of alarm signals, or (See Note A-.(2))
(b) be a combination of temporal pattern and voice relay.
(1) Except as permitted in Article ., within dwelling units, sufficient smoke alarms shall be installed so that (a) there is at least one smoke alar m installed on each storey, including basements, and
(b) on any storey of a dwelling unit containing sleeping rooms, a smoke alarm is installed
(i) in each sleeping room, and
(ii) in a location between the sleeping rooms and the remainder of the storey, and if the sleeping rooms are served by a hallway, the smoke alarm shall be located in the hallway. (See Note A-.(1))
(1.1) Except as permitted in Article ., within a house with a secondary suite that contains an interior shared means of egress or common area, a smoke alarm shall be installed in each shared means of egress and common area.
(2) A smoke alarm required in Sentences (1) and (1.1) shall be installed in conformance with CAN/ULC-S553, “Standard for Installation of Smoke Alarms.”
(3) Smoke alarms required in Article . and Sentences (1) and (1.1) shall be installed on or near the ceiling.
(4) A smoke alarm required in Sentences (1) and (1.1) shall have a visual signalling component conforming to the requirements in . (Light, Color and Pulse Characteristics) of NFPA 72, “National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.”
(5) The visual signalling component required in Sentence (4) need not
(a) be integrated with the smoke alarm provided it is interconnected to it,
(b) be on battery backup, or
(c) have synchronized flash rates, when installed in a house with a secondary suite or an individual dwelling unit.
(6) The luminous intensity for visual signalling components required in Sentence (4) that are installed in sleeping rooms shall be a minimum of 175 cd.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), smoke alarms described in Sentence .(1) and .(1.1) shall
(a) be installed with permanent connections to an electrical circuit, (See Note A-.(9)(a))
(b) have no disconnect switch between the overcurrent device and the smoke alarm, and
(c) in case the regular power supply to the smoke alar m is interrupted, be provided with a battery as an alternative power source that can continue to provide power to the smoke alarm for a period of not less than 7 days in the normal condition, followed by 4 minutes of alarm.
(2) Where the building is not supplied with electrical power, smoke alarms are permitted to be battery-operated.
(3) Suites of residential occupancy are permitted to be equipped with smoke detectors in lieu of smoke alarms, provided the smoke detectors
(a) are capable of independently sounding audible signals with a sound pressure level between 75 dBA and 110 dBA within the individual suites,(See also Note A-.(4))
(b) except as permitted in Sentence (4), are installed in conformance with CAN/ULC-S524, “Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems,” and
(c) form part of the fire alarm system. (See Note A-.(10))
(4) Smoke detectors permitted to be installed in lieu of smo ke alarms as stated in Sentence (3) are permitted to sound localized alarms within individual suites, and need not sound an alarm throughout the rest ofthe building.
(1) Where more than one smoke alarm is required in a dwelling unit, the smoke alarms shall be wired so that the activation of one alarm will cause all alarms within the dwelling u nit to sound.
(2) Smoke alarms in a house with a secondary suite shall be wirelessly interconnected or interconnected by hard-wiring so that the activation of any one smoke alarm causes all smoke alarms within the house with a seconda ry suite to sound. (See Note A-.(2))
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), a manually operated device shall be incorporated within the circuitry of a smoke alarm installed in a dwelling unit so that the signal emitted by the sm oke alarm can be silenced for a period of not more than 10 min, after which the smoke alarm will reset and sound again if the level of smoke in the vicinity is sufficient to re- actuate it.
(2) Suites of residential occupancy equipped with smoke detectors installed to CAN/ULC-S524, “Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems,” which are part of the fire alarm system in lieu of smoke alarms as permitted in Sentence .(3), need not incorporate the manually operated device required in Sentence (1).
(1) Where instructions are necessary to describe the maintenance and care required for smoke alarms to ensure continuing satisfactory performance, they shall be posted in a location where they will be readily available to the occupants for reference.
(1) Except where a fire alarm system is installed or required in a building, smoke detectors forming part of a residential fire warning system installed in conformance with CAN/ULC-S540 “Standard for Residential Fire and Life Safety Warning Systems: Installation, Inspection, Testing and Maintenance,” are permitted to be installed in lieu of all smoke alarms required by Articles . and ., provided that the fire warning system
(a) is capable of sounding audible signals in accordance with Articles . and .,
(b) is powered in accordance with Article ., and
(c) is equipped with a silencing device conforming to Article .
9.10.20.Firefighting
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (3), a window or access panel providing an opening not less than 1 100 mm high and 550 mm wide and having a sill height of not more than 900 mm above the floor shall be provided on the second and third storeys of every building in at least one wall facing on a street if such storeys are not spri nklered.
(2) Access panels required in Sentence (1) shall be readily openable from both inside and outside or be glazed with plain glass.
(3) Access panels required in Sentence (1) need not be provided in
(a) buildings containing only dwelling units where there is no dwelling unit above another dwelling unit, or b) houses with a secondary suite.
(1) Except in basements in houses with a secondary suite or basements serving not more than one dwelling unit, each basement that is not sprinklered that exceeds 25 m in length or width shall be provided with direct access to the outdoors to at least one street.
(2) Access required in Sentence (1) may be provided by a door, window or other means that provides an opening not less than 1 100 mm high and 550 mm wide, the sill height of which shall not be more than 900 mm above the floor.
(3) Access required in Sentence (1) may also be provided by an interior stair accessible from the outdoors.
(1) Access for fire department equipment shall be provided to each building by means ofa street, private roadway or yard. (See Notes A-.(1) and A-.(1))
(2) Where access to a building as required in Sentence (1) is provided by means ofa roadway or yard, the design and location of such roadway or yard shall take into account connection with public thoroughfares, weight of firefighting equipment, width of roadway, radius of curves, overhead clearance, location of fire hydrants, location of fire department connections and vehicular parking.
(1) Portable extinguishers shall be installed in all buildings, except within dwelling units, in conformance with the provisions of the Fire Code made under the Fire Protection and Prevention Act, 1997.
(1) Equipment forming part ofa fire protection system that may be adversely affected by freezing temperatures and that is located in an unheated area shall be protected from freezing.
9.10.21.Fire Protection for Construction Camps
(1) Except as provided in Articles . to ., camps for housing of workers in construction camps shall conform to Subsections . to .
(1) Except for sleeping rooms within dwelling units, sleeping rooms in a building in a camp for housing of workers shall be separated from each other and from the remainder of the building by afire separation having not less than a 30 min fire-resistance rating.
(1) Except in a dwelling unit, a floor assembly in a building in a camp for housing of workers separating the first storey and the second storey shall be constructed as a fire separation having not less than a 30 min fire-resistance rating.
(1) Walkways of combustible construction connecting buildings shall be separated from each connected building by a fire separation having not less than a 45 min fire-resistanc e rating.
(1) Buildings in a camp for housing of workers shall be separated from each other by a distance of not less than 10 m unless otherwise permitted in Subsection .
(1) Except in dwelling units and except as provided in Sentence (2), the surface flame-spread rating of wall and ceiling surfaces in corridors and walkways, exclusive of doors, shall not exceed 25 over not less than 90% of the exposed surface area and not more than 150 over the remaining surface area.
(2) Except within dwelling units, corridors that provide access to exit from sleeping rooms and that have afire- resistance rating of not less than 45 min shall have aflam e-spread rating conforming to the appropriate requirements in Subsection .
(1) Except in dwelling units, corridors providing access to exit from sleeping rooms in every bui lding in a camp for housing of workers with sleeping accommodation for more than 10 persons shall have a smoke detector connected to the building alarm system.
(1) Each building in a camp for housing of workers shall be provided with portable fire extinguishers in conformance with the provisions of the Fire Code made under the Fire Protection and Prevention Act, 1997.
(1) Every building in a camp for housing of workers providing sleeping accommodation for more than 30 persons shall be provided with a hose station that is protected from freezing and equipped with a hose of sufficient length so that every portion of the building is within the range of a hose stream.
(2) Hose stations required in Sentence (1) shall be located near an exit.
(3) Hoses referred to in Sentence (1) shall be not less than 19 mm inside diam and shall be connected to a central water supply or to a storage tank having a capacity of not less than 4 500 L with a pumping system capable of supplying a flow of not less than 5 L/s at a gauge pressure of 300 kPa.
9.10.22.Fire Protection for Gas, Propane and Electric Cooktops and Ovens (See Note A-9.10.22.)
(1) Reserved.
(2) Clearances for and protection around gas, propane and electric ranges shall be not less than those provided in Articles . and .
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), framing, finishes and cabinetry installed directly above the location of the cooktop shall be not less than 750 mm above the level of cooktop burners or elements.
(2) The vertical clearance described in Sentence (1) for framing, finishes and cabinets located directly above the location of the cooktop is permitted to be reduced to 600 mm above the level of the elements or burners provided the framing, finishes and cabinets
(a) are noncombustible, or
(b) are protected by a metal hood that projects 125 mm beyond the framing, finishes and cabinets.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), combustible wall framing, finishes or cabinets within 450 mm of the area where the cooktop is to be located shall be protected above the level of the heating elements or burners by
(a) gypsum board not less than 9.5 mm thick, or
(b) any material providing afire-resistance rating of not less than 10 min and a flame-spread rating of not more than 25.
(2) Countertop splash boards or back plates that extend above the level of the heating elements or burners need not be protected as described in Sentence (1).
(3) Except for cabinetry described in Article ., cabinetry located not less than 450 mm above the level of the heating elements or burners need not be protected as described in Sentence (1).
Section 9.11.Sound Transmission
9.11.1.Protection from Airborne Noise
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (3), a dwelling unit and a suite in hotels shall be separated from every other space in a building in which noise may be generated by
(a) a separating assembly and adjoining constructions, which, together, provide an apparent sound transmission class (ASTC) rating of not less than 47, or
(b) a separating assembly that provides a so und transmission class (STC) rating of at least 50 and adjoining constructions that conforms to Article . (See Note A-.)
(2) Reserved.
(3) Construction separating a dwelling unit or suite in a hotel from an elevator shaft or refuse chute shall have an STC rating of not less than 55.
(1) The STC ratings shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E413, “Classification for Rating Sound Insulation,” using the results from measurements carried out in accordance with ASTM E90, “ Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.”
(2) The ASTC ratings shall be
(a) determined in accordance with ASTM E413, “Classification for Rating Sound Insulation,” using the results from measurements carried out in accordance with ASTM E336, “Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Attenuation between Rooms in Buildings,” or
(b) calculated in accordance with Article . or Article .
(1) Compliance with the required STC ratings shall be demonstrated through
(a) measurements carried out in accordance with Sentence .(1), or
(b) the construction of separating assemblies conforming to Table 1 or 2 of MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-3, “Fire and Sound Resistance Tables,” as applicable.
(2) Compliance with the required ASTC ratings shall be demonstrated through
(a) measurements or calculations carried out in accordance with Sentence .(2), or
(b) the construction of separating assemblies conforming to Table 1 or 2 of MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-3,
“Fire and Sound Resistance Tables,” as applicable, that have an STC rating of not less than 50 in conjunction with flanking assemblies constructed in accordance with Article . (See Note A-.(2)(b))
(1) This Article applies where the required protection is provided in accordance with Clause .(1)(b) and compliance is demonstrated in accordance with Clause .(2)(b).
(2) Flanking wall assemblies connected to a separating floor or ceiling assembly shall be constructed with
(a) concrete or concrete block having a mass per area greater than 200 kg/m2, or (b) gypsum board finish that
(i) is supported on wood or steel framing, and
(ii) ends or is interrupted where it meets the structure of the separating floor or ceiling assembly.
(3) Flanking wall and ceiling assemblies connected to a separating wall assembly shall be constructed with
(a) concrete or concrete block having a mass per area greater than 300 kg/m2, or
(b) gypsum board finish that
(i) is supported on wood or steel framing, and
(ii) ends or is interrupted where it meets the structure of the separating wall assembly or, for double-stud walls, where it meets the space between the two lines of studs.
(4) Flanking floor assemblies connected to a separating wall assembly shall be
(a) constructed
(i) with concrete having a mass per area greater than 300 kg/m2, or
(ii) in accordance with Section 9.16., or
(b) supported on joists or trusses that are not continuous across the junction and are covered with floor treatments in accordance with Table . for the applicable wall construction.
Table 9.11.1.4. Floor Treatments for Flanking Wood-Framed Floor Assemblies in Horizontally Adjoining Spaces Forming Part of Sentence 9.11.1.4.(4)
| Type of Separating Wa ll Assembly with STC ≥ 50 from MMAH Supplementary Sta ndard SB-3, “Fire and Sound Resistance Tables” | Minimum Requirements for Floor Treatmen ts Applied over Subfloor of Wood-Framed Flanking Floor Assemblies on Both Sides of Floor/Wall Junct ion |
|---|---|
| W5, W6, W10, W12 ( staggered studs ) | • wood strip flooring not less than 16 mm thick aligned parallel to separating wall, or • one layer OSB or plywood not less than 15.5 mm thick plus finish ed flooring, or • one additional material layer plus finished flooring having a combined mass per area not less than 8 kg /m² (1) |
| W4, W11 ( staggered studs ) | • one layer of OSB or plywood not less than 12.5 mm thick plus hardw ood strip flooring not less than 19 mm thick aligned para llel to separating wall, or • one additional material layer plus finished flooring having a combined mass per area not less than 16 kg /m² (1) |
| W8, W9 ( staggered studs ) | • concrete or gypsum concrete topping not less than 19 mm thick bonded to the subfloor plus finished floori ng, or • one additional material layer plus finished flooring having a combined mass per area not less than 32 kg /m² (1) |
Table . (Cont’d) Floor Treatments for Flanking Wood-Framed Floor Assemblies in Horizontally Adjoining Spaces Forming Part of Sentence .(4)
[TABLE:1] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Note A-Table .
Section 9.12.Excavation
9.12.1.General
(1) The topsoil and vegetable matter in all unexcavated areas under a building shall be removed.
(2) In localities where termite infestation is known to be a problem, all stumps, roots and other wood debris shall be removed from the soil to a depth of not less than 300 mm in unexcavated areas under a bu ilding.
(3) The bottom of every excavation shall be free of all organic material.
(1) Excavations shall be kept free of standing water.
(1) The bottom of excavations shall be kept from freezing throughout the entire construction period.
(1) Every excavation shall be undertaken in such a manner to prevent damage to adjacent property, existing structures, utilities, roads and sidewalks at all stages of construction.
(2) Material shall not be placed nor shall equipment be operated or placed in or adjacent to an excavation in a manner that may endanger the integrity of the excavation or its supports.
9.12.2.Depth
(1) Excavations for foundations shall extend to undisturbed soil.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (4) to (7), the minimum depth of foundations below finished ground level shall conform to Table .
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) Foundation not insulated to reduce heat loss through the footings.
(2) Including foundations insulated to reduce heat loss through the footings.
(3) Good soil drainage to not less than the depth of frost penetration.
(4) See Note A-Table .
(2) Where a foundation is insulated in a manner that will reduce the heat flow to the soil beneath the footings, the foundation depth shall conform to that required for fo undations containing no heated space. (See Note A-.(2))
(3) The minimum depth of foundation s for exterior concrete steps with more than 2 risers shall conform to Sentences (1), (2) and (5).
(4) Concrete steps with 1 and 2 risers are permitted to be laid on ground level.
(5) The foundation depths required in Sentence (1) are permitted to be decreased where experience with local soil conditions shows that lesser depths are satisfactory, or where the foundation is designed for lesser depths.
(6) The foundation depths required in Sentence (1) do not apply to foundation s for
(a) buildings
(i) that are not of masonry or masonry veneer construction, and
(ii) whose superstructure conforms with the requirements of the deformation resistance test in CSA Z240.2.1, “Structural requirements for manufactured homes,” or
(b) accessory buildings
(i) that are not of masonry or masonry veneer construction,
(ii) not more than 1 storey in building height,
(iii) not more than 55 m² in building area, and
(iv) where the distance from finished ground to the underside of the floor joists is not more than 600 mm.
(7) The foundation depths required by Sentence (1) do not apply to foundations for decks and other accessible exterior platforms
(a) of not more than 1 storey,
(b) not more than 55 m² in area,
(c) where the distance from finished ground to the underside of the floor joists is not more than 600 mm,
(d) not supporting a roof, and
(e) not attached to another structure, unless it can be demonstrated that differential movement will not adversely affect the performance of that structure.
9.12.3.Backfill
(1) Backfill shall be placed to avoid damaging the foundation wall, the drainage tile, drainage layer, externally applied thermal insulation, waterproofing and dampproofing of the wall.
(1) Backfill shall be graded to prevent drainage towards the foundation after settling.
(1) Backfill that is within 600 mm of the foundation shall be free of deleterious debris and boulders larger than 250 mm diam. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Except as permitted in Sentence (3), backfill shall not contain pyritic material or material that is susceptible to ice lensing in concentrations that will damage the building to a degree that would adversely affect its stability or the performance of assemblies separating dissimilar environments. (See Note A-.(1))
(3) Backfill with material of any concentration that is susceptible to ice lensing is permitted where foundation walls are
(a) cast-in-place concrete,
(b) concrete block insulated on the exterior, or
(c) concrete block protected from the backfill by a material that serves as a slip plane. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Where the height of foundation wall is such that lateral support is required, or where the required concrete strength of the wall has not been reached, the wall shall be braced or laterally supported before backfilling.
9.12.4.Trenches Beneath Footings
(1) The soil in trenches beneath footings for sewers and watermains shall be compacted by tamping up to the level of the footing base, or shall be filled with concrete having a strength not less than 10 MPa to support the footing.
Section 9.13.Dampproofing, Waterproofing and
9.13.1.General
(1) This Section presents measures to control the ingress of water, moisture and soil gas.
(2) Subsection . applies to below-ground walls and floors-on-ground where drainage is provided in accordance with Section 9.14. over and along the entire below-ground portion of the foundation wall.
(3) Subsection . applies to below-ground walls, floors-on-ground and roofs of underground structures that are subject to hydrostatic pressure.
(4) Subsection . applies to walls, roofs and floors that are in contact with the ground.
9.13.2.Dampproofing
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (4) and Article ., where the exterior finished ground level is at a higher elevation than the ground level inside the founda tion walls, exterior surfaces of foundation walls below ground level shall be dampproofed.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3) and Article ., floors-on-ground shall be dampproofed.
(3) Floors in garages, floors in unenclosed portions of buildings and floors installed over granular fill in conformance with Article . need not be dampproofed.
(4) Dampproofing in Sentence (1) is not required where the exterior surfaces of foundation walls below ground level are waterproofed.
(1) Materials installed to provide required dampproofing shall be
(a) capable of protecting assemblies against moisture transfer from the ground,
(b) compatible with adjoining materials, and
(c) resistant to mechanisms of deterioration that may reasonably be expected, given the nature, function and exposure of the materials.
(2) Except as otherwise specified in this Section, materials used for exterior dampproofing shall
(a) conform to one of the following standards:
(i) ASTM D1227 / D1227M, “Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing,” Type III, Class I,
(ii) ASTM D4479 / D4479M, “Asphalt Roof Coatings-Asbestos-Free,” Type III,
(iii) CAN/CGSB-51.34-M, "Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction," or
(iv) CAN/CSA-A123.4, "Asphalt for Constructing Built-Up Roof Coverings and Waterproofing Systems," or
(b) have a water vapour permeance of not more than 43 ng/(Pa×s×m2) when tested in accordance with Procedure A (wet cup) of ASTM E96 / E96M, “Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials,” and consist of one of the following material types:
(i) a vapour-resistant coating,
(ii) a cold-fluid-applied or hot-rubberized bituminous dampproofing membrane,
(iii) a liquid-applied or spray-applied asphalt-based emulsion dampproofing, or
(iv) a Type III hot-applied asphalt.
(1) The area in which dampproofing is to be carried out shall be kept free of water during the application and curing of the dampproofing system.
(2) The surface to be dampproofed shall be prepared in accordance with the instructions of the dampproofing material manufacturer.
(3) Where the dampproofing material is to be applied on insulating concrete form (ICF) walls, the instructions of the ICF wall manufacturer shall be followed.
(4) Unit masonry walls to be dampproofed shall be parged on the exterior face below ground level with not less than 6 mm of mortar conforming to Section 9.20. coved over the footing.
(5) Concrete walls to be dampproofed shall have holes and recesses sealed with cement mortar or a mastic or sealant that is suitable for vertical applications and compatible with the dampproofing material.
(6) The surface required to be dampproofed shall be clean and dry and free of ice, snow, frost, dust, dirt, oil, grease, cracks, projections, depressions, loose particles and debris that could be detrimental to the performance of the membrane to be applied.
(1) Exterior dampproofing shall be applied from finished ground level to the top of the exterior of the footing.
(2) Unless otherwise stated in this Subsection, dampproofing shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions with regard to
(a) surface priming,
(b) conditions during application,
(c) application quantity and rate, and
(d) curing times.
(3) Joints, cracks and penetrations shall be sealed to maintain the continuity of the dampproofing, where the dampproofing material is not capable of bridging such discontinuities.
(1) The interior surface of fou ndation walls below ground level shall be protected by means that minimize the ingress of moisture from the foundation wall into interior spaces, where
(a) a separate interior finish is applied to a concrete or unit masonry wall that is in contact with the soil, or
(b) wood members are placed in contact with such walls for the installation of insulation or finish.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), where the protection of interior finishes required in Sentence (1) consists of membranes or coatings,
(a) the membrane or coating shall extend from the basement floor surface up to the highest extent of the interior insulation or finish, but not higher than the exterior finished ground level, and
(b) no membrane or coating with a permeance less than 170 ng/(Pa×s×m2) shall be applied to the interior surface of the foundation wall above ground level between the insulation and the found ation wall.
(3) Where insulation functions as both moisture protection for interior finishes and as a vapour barrier in accordance with Subsection ., it shall be applied over the entire interior surface of the foundation wall.
(1) Where dampproofing is installed below the floor, it shall consist of
(a) polyethylene not less than 0.15 mm thick with joints lapped not less than 100 mm,
(b) Type S roll roofing with joints lapped not less than 100 mm, or
(c) rigid extruded/expanded polystyrene with sealed or shiplapped joints that has
(i) sufficient compressive strength to support the floor assembly, and
(ii) a water vapour permeance complying with Clause .(2)(a). (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Where dampproofing is installed between a floor-on-ground and a finished floor, it shall consist of
(a) rigid extruded/expanded polystyrene with sealed or shiplapped joints that has
(i) sufficient compressive strength to support the floor assembly, and
(ii) a water vapour permeance complying with Clause .(2)(b), or
(b) polyethylene not less than 0.05 mm thick with joints lapped not less than 100 mm.
(1) Preserved wood foundation walls shall be dampproofed as described in CSA S406, “Specification of permanent wood foundations for housing and small buildings.”
9.13.3.Waterproofing
(1) Where hydrostatic pressure occurs, waterproofing is required for assemblies separating interior space from the ground to prevent the ingress of water into building assemblies and interior spaces.
(2) Waterproofing is required for roofs of underground structures to prevent the ingress of water into building assemblies and interior spaces.
(1) Materials installed to provide required waterproofing shall be
(a) compatible with adjoining materials, and
(b) resistant to mechanisms of deterioration that may reasonably be expected, given the nature, function and exposure of the materials.
(2) Materials used for exterior waterproofing shall conform to
(a) ASTM D1227 / D1227M, “Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing,” in which case, they shall be installed in accordance with Sentence .(3),
(b) ASTM D3019 / D3019M, “Standard Specification for Lap Cement Used with Asphalt Roll Roofing, Non-Fibered, and Fibered,” where non-fibered and non-asbestos-fibered (Types I and III) asphalt roll roofing are permitted,
(c) ASTM D4479 / D4479M, “Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings-Asbestos-Free,” in which case, they shall be installed in accordance with Sentence .(3) and with reinforcing material,
(d) ASTM D4637 / D4637M, “Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used In Single-Ply Roof Membrane,”
(e) ASTM D4811 / D4811M, “Standard Specification for Nonvulcanized (Uncured) Rubber Sheet Used as Roof Flashing,”
(f) ASTM D6878 / D6878M, “Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing,”
(g) CGSB 37-GP-9Ma, “Primer, Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asphalt Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing,” where a primer is required,
(h) CAN/CGSB-37.50-M, “Hot-Applied, Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and Waterproofing,”
(i) CAN/CGSB-37.54, “Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing and Waterproofing Membrane,”
(j) CGSB 37-GP-56M, “Membrane, Modified, Bituminous, Prefabricated, and Reinforced for Roofing”,
(k) CAN/CGSB-37.58-M, “Membrane, Elastomeric, Cold-Applied Liquid, for Non-Exposed Use in Roofing and Waterproofing,”
(l) CAN/CSA-A123.2, “Asphalt-Coated Roofing Sheets,”
(m) CAN/CSA-A123.4, “Asphalt for Constructing Built-Up Roof Coverings and Waterproofing Systems,” in which case, they shall be installed with reinforcing material, or
(n) CSA A123.17, “Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.”
(1) Surfaces to be waterproofed shall be prepared in accordance with the instructions of the waterproofing material manufacturer.
(2) Where the waterproofing material is to be applied on ICF walls, the instructions ofthe ICF wall manufacturer shall be followed.
(3) Unit masonry walls that are to be waterproofed shall be parged on exterior surfaces below ground level with not less than 6 mm of mortar conforming to Section 9.20. coved over the footing.
(4) Concrete walls that are to be waterproofed shall have all holes and recesses sealed with mortar or waterproofing material.
(5) Surfaces required to be waterproofed shall be clean and dry and free of ice, snow, frost, dust, dirt, oil, grease, cracks, projections and depressions, loose particles and debris that could be detrimental to the performance of the waterproofing material.
(1) Unless otherwise stated in this Subsection, waterproofing shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions with regard to
(a) surface priming,
(b) conditions during application,
(c) the required number of layers of reinforcing fabric on foundations, footings, floors, walls and structural slabs,
(d) application quantity and rate, and
(e) curing times.
(2) Waterproofing shall be continuous across joints and at junctions between different building elements.
(3) The waterproofed surface shall be protected with a suitable material to minimize mechanical damage during backfilling.
(4) The area in which the waterproofing is to be carried out shall be kept free of water during the application and curing of the waterproofing system.
(1) Basement floors-on-ground to be waterproofed shall have a system of membrane waterproofing provided between 2 layers of concrete, each of which shall be not less than 75 mm thick, with the floor membrane made continuous with the wall membrane to form a complete seal.
9.13.4.Soil Gas Control (See Note A-9.13.4.)
(1) This Subsection applies to
(a) wall, roof and floor assemblies separating conditioned space from the ground, and
(b) the rough-in to allow the future protection of conditioned space that is separated from the ground by a wall, roof or floor assembly.
(2) This Subsection addresses the leakage of soil gas from the ground into the building.
(3) In areas of the province where radon gases are known to be a problem, the b uilding shall be designed and constructed to meet the radon limitations in Article .
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (1.1), all wall, roof and floor assemblies in contact with the ground shall be constructed to resist the leakage of soil gas from the ground into the building in accordance with Subsection . or MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-9, “Requirements for Soil Gas Control.”
(1.1) Construction to resist leakage of soil gas into the building is not required for garages and unenclosed portions of buildings.
(1.2) Where polyethylene is used to provide a barrier to soil gas ingress through floors-on-ground, it shall conform to CAN/CGSB‑51.34‑M, “Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet, for Use in Building Construction.”
(2) Unless the space between the air barrier system and the ground is designed to be accessible for the future installation of a subfloor depressurization system, dwelling units and buildings containing residential occupancies shall be provided with the rough-in for a radon extraction system conforming to Article .
(3) Where buildings are used for occupancies other than those described in Sentence (2), protection from radon ingress and the means to address high radon concentrations in the future shall conform to
(a) Article ., or
(b) Parts 5 and 6. (See Article . and .) (See Note A-.(3))
(See Note A-.)
(1) Floors-on-ground shall be provided with a rough-in for subfloor depressurization consisting of
(a) a gas-permeable layer, an inlet and an outlet as described in Sentence (2), or
(b) clean granular material and a pipe as described in Sentence (3).
(2) The rough-in referred to in Clause (1)(a)shall include
(a) a gas-permeable layer installed in the space between the air barrier and the ground to allow the depressurization of that space,
(b) an inlet that allows for the effective depressurization of the gas-permeable layer, and (See Note A-.(2)(b) and
(3)(b)(i))
(c) an outlet in the con ditioned space that
(i) permits connection to depressurization equipment,
(ii) is sealed to maintain the integrity of the air bar rier system, and
(iii) is clearly labeled to indicate that it is intended only for the removal of radon from below the floor-on-ground.
(3) The rough-in referred to in Clause (1)(b)shall include
(a) clean granular material installed below the floor-on-ground in accordance with Sentence .(1), and
(b) pipe not less than 100 mm in diameter installed through the floor, such that
(i) its bottom end opens into the granular layer required in Clause (a) at or near the centre of the floor and not less than 100 mm of granular material projects beyond the terminus of the pipe measured along its axis, (See Note A-.(2)(b) and (3)(b)(i))
(ii) its top end permits connection to depressurization equipment and is provided with an airtight cap, and
(iii) the pipe is clearly labeled near the cap and, if applicable, every 1.8 m and at every change in direction to indicate that it is intended only for the removal of radon from below the floor-on-ground.
Section 9.14.Drainage
9.14.1.Scope
(1) This Section applies to subsurface drainage and to surface drainage.
(1) Drainage for crawl spaces shall conform to Section 9.18.
(1) Drainage requirements beneath floors-on-ground shall conform to Section 9.16.
9.14.2.Foundation Drainage
(1) Unless it can be shown to be unnecessary, drainage shall be provided at the bottom of every foundation wall that contains the building interior.
(1.1) Except as provided in Sentences (3) and (4), where the insulation on a foundation wall extends to more than 900 mm below the adjacent exterior ground level
(a) a drainage layer shall be installed adjacent to the exterior surface of a foundation wall consisting of
(i) not less than 19 mm mineral fibre insulation with a density of not less than 57 kg/m3, or
(ii) not less than 100 mm of free draining granular material, or
(b) a system shall be installed that can be shown to provide equivalent performance to that provided by the materials described in Clause (a). (See Note A-.(1.1))
(2) Where mineral fibre insulation, crushed rock backfill or other drainage layer medium is provided adjacent to the exterior surface of a foundation wall,
(a) the insulation, backfill or other drainage layer medium shall extend to the footing level to facilitate drainage of ground water to the foundation drainage system, and (See Note A-.(1.1))
(b) any pyritic material in the crushed rock shall be limited to a concentration that will not damage the building to a degree that would adversely affect its stability or the performance of assemblies separating dissimilar environments. (See Note A-.(1)) (See Sentence .(2))
(3) Except when the insulation provides the drainage layer required in Clause (2)(a), when exterior insulation is provided, the drainage layer shall be installed on the exterior face of the insulation.
(4) The drainage layer required in Sentence (2) is not required
(a) when the foundation wall is not required to be dampproofed, or
(b) when the foundation wall is waterproofed.
(5) Where drainage is required in Sentence (1), the drainage shall conform to Subsection . or .
9.14.3.Drainage Tile and Pipe
(1) Drain tile and drain pipe for foundation drainage shall conform to
(a) ASTM C4, “Standard Specification for Clay Drain Tile and Perforated Clay Drain Tile,”
(b) ASTM C412M, “Standard Specification for Concrete Drain Tile,”
(c) ASTM C444M, “Perforated Concrete Pipe,”
(d) ASTM C700, “Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength and Perforated,”
(e) BNQ 3624-115, “Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings for Soil and Foundation Drainage,”
(f) CAN/CSA-B182.1, “Plastic drain and sewer pipe and pipe fittings,” or
(g) CAN/CSA-G401, “Corrugated steel pipe products.”
(1) Drain tile or pipe used for foundation drainage shall be not less than 100 mm in diam.
(1) Drain tile or pipe shall be laid on undisturbed or well-compacted soil so that the top of the tile or pipe is below the bottom of the floor slab or the ground cover of the crawl space.
(2) Drain tile or pipe with butt joints shall be laid with 6 mm to 10 mm open joints.
(3) The top half of joints referred to in Sentence (2) shall be covered with sheathing paper, 0.10 mm polyethylene or No. 15 asphalt or tar-saturated felt.
(4) The top and sides of drain pipe or tile shall be covered with not less than 150 mm of crushed stone or other coarse clean granular material containing not more than 10% of material that will pass a 4 mm sieve.
9.14.4.Granular Drainage Layer
(1) Granular material used to drain the bottom of a foundation shall consist of a continuous layer of crushed stone or other coarse clean granular material containing
(a) not more than 10% of material that will pass a 4 mm sieve, and
(b) no pyritic material in a concentration that would adversely affect its stability or the performance of assemblies separating dissimilar environments.
(1) Granular material described in Article . shall be laid on undisturbed or compacted soil to a minimum depth of not less than 125 mm beneath the footing of the building and extend not less than 300 mm beyond the outside edge of the footings.
(1) The bottom of an excavation drained by a granular layer shall be graded so that the entire area described in Article . is drained to a sump conforming to Article .
(1) Where because of wet site conditions soil becomes mixed with the granular drainage material, sufficient additional granular material shall be provided so that the top 125 mm are kept free of soil.
9.14.5.Drainage Disposal
(1) Foundation drains shall drain to a sewer, drainage ditch or dry well.
(1) Where a sump pit is provided it shall be
(a) not less than 750 mm deep,
(b) not less than 0.25 m2 in area, and
(c) provided with a cover.
(2) Covers for sump pits shall be designed
(a) to resist removal by children, and
(b) to be airtight in accordance with Sentence .(7)
(3) Where gravity drainage is not practical, an automatic sump pump shall be provided to discharge the water from the sump pit described in Sentence (1) into a sewer, drainage ditch or dry well.
(1) Dry wells may be used only when located in areas where the natural groundwater level is below the bottom of the dry well.
(2) Dry wells shall be not less than 5 m from the building foundation and located so that drainage is away from the building.
9.14.6.Surface Drainage
(1) The building shall be located or the building site graded so that water will not accumulate at or near the building and will not adversely affect adjacent properties.
(1) Surface drainage shall be directed away from the location of a water supply well or leaching bed.
(1) Every window well shall be drained to the footing level or other suitable location.
(1) Where runoff water from a driveway is likely to accumulate or enter a garage, a catch basin shall be installed to provide adequate drainage.
(1) Downspouts shall conform to Article .
Section 9.15.Footings and Foundations
9.15.1.Application
(i) on stable soils with an allowable bearing pressure of 75 kPa or greater, and
(ii) for buildings of light-frame or flat insulating concrete form construction that are not more than 2 storeys in building height, with a maximum floor-to-floor height of 3 m.
(2) Foundations for applications other than as described in Sentence (1) shall be designed in accordance with Section 9.4.
(3) Where a foundation is erected on filled ground, peat or sensitive clay, the footing sizes shall be designed in conformance with Section 4.2.
(4) For the purpose of Sentence (3), sensitive clay means the grain size of the majority of the particles is smaller than 0.002 mm, including leda clay.
(1) Buildings erected on permafrost shall have foundations designed by a designer competent in this field in accordance with the appropriate requirements of Part 4.
(1) Where the superstructure of a detached building conforms to the requirements of the deformation resistance test in CSA Z240.2.1, “Structural requirements for manufactured homes,” the foundation shall be constructed in conformance with,
(a) the remainder of this Section, or
(b) CSA Z240.10.1, “Site preparation, foundation, and installation of buildings. ”
9.15.2.General
(1) Concrete shall conform to Section 9.3.
(1) Concrete block shall conform to CSA A165.1, “Concrete block masonry units,” and shall have a compressive strength over the average net cross-sectional area of the block of not less than 15 MPa.
(2) Mortar, grout, mortar joints, corbelling and protection for unit masonry shall conform to Section 9.20.
(3) For concrete block foundation walls required to be reinforced,
(a) mortar shall be Type S, conforming to CAN/CSA-A179, “Mortar and grout for unit masonry,”
(b) grout shall be coarse, conforming to CAN/CSA-A179, “Mortar and grout for unit masonry,” and
(c) placement of grout shall conform to CAN/CSA-A371, “Masonry construction for buildings.”
(1) Where pier type foundations are used, the piers shall be designed to support the applied loads from the superstructure.
(2) Where piers are used as a foundation system in a building of 1 storey in buildin g height, the piers shall be installed to support the principal framing members and shall be spaced not more than 3.5 m apart along the framing, unless the piers and their footings are designed for larger spacings.
(3) The height of piers described in Sentence (2) shall not exceed 3 times their least dimension at the base of the pier.
(4) Where concrete block is used for piers described in Sentence (2), they shall be laid with cores placed vertically, and where the width of the building is 4.3 m or less, placed with their longest dimension at right angles to the longest dimension of the building.
(1) Foundations of wood-frame construction shall conform to
(a) CSA S406, “Specification of permanent wood foundations for housing and small buildings,” or
(b) Part 4. (See Note A-.(1))
9.15.3.Footings
(1) Footings shall be provided under walls, pilasters, columns, piers, fireplaces and chimneys that bear on soil or rock, except that footings may be omitted under piers or monolithic concrete walls if the safe loadbearing capacity of the soil or rock is not exceeded.
(1) Footings shall rest on undisturbed soil, rock or compacted granular fill.
(2) Granular fill shall not contain pyritic material in a concentration that would adversely affect its stability or the performance of assemblies separating dissimilar environments. (See also Article . and Note A-.(1))
(1) Except as provided in Sentence .(2), the minimum footing width or area requirements provided in Articles . to . shall apply to footings, where
(a) the footings support
(i) foundation walls of masonry, concrete, or flat insulating concrete form walls,
(ii) above ground walls of masonry, flat insulating concrete form walls or light wood-frame construction, and
(iii) floors and roofs of light wood-frame construction,
(b) the span of supported joists does not exceed 4.9 m, and
(c) the specified live load on any floor supported by the footing does not exceed 2.4 kPa. (See Table .)
(2) Except as provided in Sentence .(2), where the span of the supported joists exceeds 4.9 m, footings shall be designed in accordance with Section 4.2.
(3) Where the specified live load exceeds 2.4 kPa footings shall be designed in accordance with Section 4.2.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3) and in Articles . to ., the minimum footing width or area shall comply with Table .
(2) Where the supported joist span exceeds 4.9 m in buildings with light wood-frame walls, floors and roofs, strip footing widths shall be determined according to
(a) Section 4.2., or
(b) the following formula: W = w × [ ∑ sjs / (storeys× 4.9)] where W = minimum footing width, w = minimum width of footings supporting joists not exceeding 4.9 m, as defined by Table ., Σ sjs = sum of the supported joist spans on each storey bearing on an exterior wall whose load is transferred to the footing, or sum of half of the supported joist spans on each storey bearing on both sides of an interior wall whose load is transferred to the footing, and storeys= number of st oreys supported by the footing. (See Note A-.(2))
(3) Where a foundation rests on gravel, sand or silt in which the water table level is less than the width of the footings below the bearing surface,
(a) the footing width for walls shall be not less than twice the width required by Sentences (1) and (2), and Articles . and ., and
(b) the footing area for columns shall be not less than twice the area required by Sentences (1) and (2) and Article .
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Sentence .(1).
(2) See Sentences .(1).
(3) See Sentence .(1).
(1) The strip footing widths for exterior walls shown in Table . shall be increased by
(a) 65 mm for each storey of masonry veneer over wood-frame construction supported by the foundation wall,
(b) 130 mm for each storey of masonry construction supported by the foundation wall, and
(c) 150 mm for each storey of flat insulating concrete form wall construction supported by the foundation wall.
(1) The minimum strip footing widths for interior loadbearing masonry walls shown in Table . shall be increased by 100 mm for each storey of masonry construction supported by the footing.
(2) Footings for interior non-loadbearing masonry walls shall be not less than 200 mm wide for walls up to 5.5 m high and the width shall be increased by 100 mm for each additional 2.7 m of height.
(1) The footing area for column spacings other than shown in Table . shall be adjusted in proportion to the distance between columns.
(1) Footing thickness shall be not less than the greater of
(a) 100 mm, or
(b) the width of the projection of the footing beyond the supported element.
(1) Where step footings are used,
(a) the vertical rise between horizontal portions shall not exceed 600 mm, and
(b) the horizontal distance between risers shall be not less than 600 mm.
9.15.4.Foundation Walls
(1) Flat wall insulating concrete form units shall conform to CAN/ULC-S717.1, “Standard for Flat Wall Insulating Concrete Form (ICF) Units – Material Properties.”
(1) Except as required in Sentence (2), the thickness of fou ndation walls made ofunreinforced concrete block, concrete core in flat wall insulating concrete forms or solid concrete and subject to lateral earth pressure shall conform to
(2) The concrete core in flat insulating concrete form foundation walls shall be not less than the greater of
(a) 150 mm, or
(b) the thickness of the concrete in the wall above.
(2.1) Foundation walls made of flat insulating concrete form units shall be laterally supported at the top and at the bottom.
(3) The thickness and reinforcing of foundation walls made of reinforced concrete block and subject to lateral earth pressure shall conform to Table .-B and Sentences (4) to (7), where
(a) the walls are laterally supported at the top,
(b) average stable soils are encountered, and
(c) wind loads on the exposed portion of the foundation are no greater than 0.70 kPa.
(4) For concrete block walls required to be reinforced, continuous vertical reinforcement shall
(a) be provided at wall corners, wall ends, wall intersections, at changes in wall height, at the jambs of all openings and at movement joints,
(b) extend from the top of the footing to the top of the foundation wall, and
(c) where foundation walls are laterally supported at the top, have not less than 50 mm embedment into the footing, if the floor slab does not provide lateral support at the wall base.
(5) For concrete block walls required to be reinforced, a continuous horizontal bond beam containing not less than one 15M bar shall be installed
(a) along the top of the wall,
(b) at the sill and head of all openings greater than 1.20 m in width, and
(c) at structurally connected floors.
(6) In concrete block walls required to be reinforced, all vertical bar reinforcement shall be installed along the centre line of the wall.
(7) In concrete block walls required to be reinforced, ladder- or truss-type lateral reinforcement not less than 3.8 mm in diameter (No. 9 ASWG) shall be installed in the bed joint of every second masonry course.
Table .-A Thickness of Solid Concrete, Concrete Core in Flat Wall Insulating Concrete Form and Unreinforced Concrete Block Foundation Walls Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .-A:
(1) See Article .
(2) See Article .
(3) See Note A-Table .-A.
(4) See Table .-B.
Table .-B Reinforced Concrete Block Foundation Walls Laterally Supported at the Top(1) Forming Part of Sentence .(3)
[TABLE:1] Notes to Table .-B:
(1) See Article .
(2) See Article .
(3) No reinforcement required.
(1) Sentences (2) to (4) pertain to lateral support for walls described in Sentence .(1).
(2) Foundation walls shall be considered to be laterally supported at the top if
(a) such walls support a solid masonr y superstructure or flat insulating concrete form wall,
(b) the floor joists are embedded in the top of the foundation walls,
(c) the floor system is anchored to the top of the foundation walls with anchor bolts, in which case the joists may run either parallel or perpendicular to the foundation walls, or
(d) they extend from the footing to no more than 300 mm above the finished ground level and are backfilled on both sides such that the difference in elevation between the finished ground levels on either side of the wall is no more than 150 mm.
(3) Unless the wall around an opening is reinforced to withstand earth pressure, the portion of the foundation wall beneath an opening shall be considered laterally unsupported if
(a) the opening is more than 1.2 m wide, or
(b) the total width of the openings in the foundation wall constitutes more than 25% of the length of the wall.
(4) For the purposes of Sentence (3), the combined width of the openings shall be considered as a single opening if the average width is greater than the width of solid wall between them.
(5) Flat insulating concrete form foundation walls shall be considered to be laterally supported at the top if the floor joists are installed according to Article .
(1) Flat insulating concrete form foundation walls shall be considered to be laterally supported at the bottom where the foundation wall
(a) supports backfill not more than 1.2 m in height,
(b) is supported at the footing by a shear key and at the top by the ground floor framing, or
(c) is dowelled to the footing with not less than
(i) 15M bars spaced not more than 1.2 m o.c., or
(ii) 10M bars spaced not more than 600 mm o.c.
(1) Horizontal reinforcement in flat insulating concrete form foundation walls shall
(a) consist of
(i) one 10M bar placed not more than 300 mm from the top of the wall, and
(ii) 10M bars spaced not more than 600 mm o.c., and
(b) be located
(i) in the inside half of the wall section, and
(ii) with a minimum cover of 30 mm from the inside face of the concrete.
(2) Vertical reinforcement in flat insulating concrete form foundation walls shall be
(a) provided in accordance with
(i) Table .-A for 150 mm walls,
(ii) Table .-B for 190 mm walls, and
(iii) Table .-C for 240 mm walls,
(b) located in the inside half of the wall section with a minimum cover of 30 mm from the inside face of the concrete wall, and
(c) where interrupted by wall openings, be placed not more than 600 mm from each side of the openings.
(3) Cold joints in flat insulating concrete form foundation walls shall be reinforced with at least one 15M bar spaced not more than 600 mm o.c. and embedded not less than 300 mm on both sides of the joint.
(4) Reinforcing around openings in flat insulating concrete form foundation walls shall comply with Article . or .
Table 9.15.4.5.-A Vertical Reinforcement for 150 mm Flat Insulating Concrete Form Foundation Walls Forming Part of Sentence 9.15.4.5.(2)
| Maximum Height of Finished Ground Above Finished Basement Floor, m | Minimum Vertical Reinforcement | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Maximum Unsupported Basement Wall Height | |||
| 2.44 m | 2.75 m | 3.00 m | |
| 1.35 | 10 M at 400 mm o .c. | 10 M at 400 mm o .c. | 10 M at 400 mm o .c. |
| 1.60 | 10 M at 400 mm o .c. | 10 M at 380 mm o .c. | 10 M at 380 mm o .c. |
| 2.00 | 10 M at 380 mm o .c. | 10 M at 380 mm o .c. | 10 M at 380 mm o .c. |
| 2.20 | 10 M at 250 mm o .c. | 10 M at 250 mm o .c. | 10 M at 250 mm o .c. |
| 2.35 | n/a | 10 M at 250 mm o .c. | 10 M at 250 mm o .c. |
| 2.60 | n/a | 10 M at 250 mm o .c. | 10 M at 250 mm o .c. |
| 3.00 | n/a | n/a | 10 M at 250 mm o .c. |
Table .-B Vertical Reinforcement for 190 mm Flat Insulating Concrete Form Foundation Walls Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
| Maximum Height of Finished Ground Above Finished Basement Floor, m | Minimum Vertical Reinforcement | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Maximum Unsupported Basement Wall Height | |||
| 2.44 m | 2.75 m | 3.00 m | |
| 2.20 | none required | 10 M at 400 mm o .c. | 10 M at 400 mm o .c. |
| 2.35 | n/a | 10 M at 300 mm o .c. | 10 M at 300 mm o .c. |
| 2.60 | n/a | 10 M at 300 mm o .c. | 15 M at 400 mm o .c. |
| 3.00 | n/a | n/a | 15 M at 400 mm o .c. |
Table .-C Vertical Reinforcement for 240 mm Flat Insulating Concrete Form Foundation Walls Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
| Maximum Height of Finished Ground Above Finished Basement Floor, m | Minimum Vertical Reinforcement | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Maximum Unsupported Basement Wall Height | |||
| 2.44 m | 2.75 m | 3.00 m | |
| 2.20 | none required | none required | none required |
| 2.60 | n/a | 15 M at 400 mm o .c. | 15 M at 400 mm o .c. |
| 3.00 | n/a | n/a | 15 M at 400 mm o .c. |
(1) Exterior foundation walls shall extend not less than 150 mm above finished ground level.
(1) Where the top of a foundation wall is reduced in thickness to permit the installation of floor joists, the reduced section shall be not more than 350 mm high and not less than 90 mm thick.
(2) Where the top of a foundation wall is reduced in thickness to permit the installation of a masonry exterior facing, the reduced section shall be
(a) not less than 90 mm thick, and
(b) tied to the facing material with metal ties conforming to Sentence .(3) spaced not more than
(i) 200 mm o.c. vertically, and
(ii) 900 mm o.c. horizontally.
(3) The space between wall and facing described in Sentence (2) shall be filled with mortar.
(1) Corbelling of masonry foundation walls supporting cavity walls shall conform to Article .
(1) Crack control joints shall be provided in foundation walls more than 25 m long at intervals of not more than 15 m.
(2) Joints required in Sentence (1) shall be designed to resist moisture penetration and shall be keyed to prevent relative displacement of the wall portions adjacent to the joint.
(1) Interior masonry foundation walls not subject to lateral earth pressure shall conform to Section 9.20.
9.15.5.Support of Joists and Beams on Masonry Foundation Walls
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), foundation walls of hollow masonry units supporting floor joists shall be capped with
(a) not less than 50 mm of concrete,
(b) solid masonry units that are 100% solid and not less than 50 mm high, or
(c) semi-solid or hollow solid masonry units that have the top course completely filled with mortar, grout or concrete.
(2) Capping required in Sentence (1) need not be provided
(a) in localities where termites are not known to occur,
(b) when the joists are supported on a wood plate not less than 38 mm by 89 mm, and
(c) when the siding overlaps the foundation wall not less than 12 mm.
(1) Not less than a 190 mm depth of solid masonry shall be provided beneath beams supported on masonry.
(2) Where the beam referred to in Sentence (1) is supported below the top of the foundation walls, the ends of such beams shall be protected from the weather.
(1) Pilasters shall be provided under beams that frame into unit masonry foundation walls 140 mm or less in thickness.
(2) Pilasters required in Sentence (1) shall be not less than 90 mm by 290 mm and shall be bonded or tied into the wall.
(3) The top 200 mm of pilasters required in Sentence (1) shall be solid masonry with the cells of hollow or semi-solid units filled with mortar, grout or concrete.
9.15.6.Parging and Finishing of Masonry Foundation Walls
(1) Concrete block foundation walls shall be parged on the exterior face below ground level as required in Section 9.13.
(1) Exterior surfaces of concrete block foundation walls above ground level shall have tooled joints, or shall be parged or otherwise suitably finished.
(1) All form ties shall be removed at least flush with the concrete surface.
Section 9.16.Floors-on-Ground
9.16.1.Scope
(1) This Section applies to floors supported on ground or granular f ill and that do not provide structural support for the superstructure.
(1) Floors-on-ground that support loads from the superstructure shall be designed in conformance with Part 4.
(1) All spaces within dwelling units, except crawl spaces, shall be provided with a floor-on-ground, where
(a) access is provided to the space, and
(b) a floor supported by the structure is not provided.
(1) Dampproofing and waterproofing shall conform to Section 9.13.
9.16.2.Material Beneath Floors
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), not less than 100 mm of coarse clean granular material containing not more than 10% of material that will pass a 4 mm sieve shall be placed beneath floors-on-ground. (See also Subsection . and Note A-.)
(2) Granular material need not be installed under
(a) slabs in garages, carports or accessory buildings, or
(b) buildings of industria l occupancy where the nature of the process contained therein permits or requires the use of large openings in the building envelope even during the winter.
(1) Material that is susceptible to changes in volume due to variations in moisture content or chemical-microbiological oxidation shall not be used as fill beneath floors-on-ground in a concentration that will damage the building to a degree that would adversely affect its stability or the performance of assemblies. (See also Article . and Note A-
9.16.3.Drainage
(1) Except as provided in Article . or where it can be shown to be unnecessary, ingress of water underneath a floor-on-ground shall be prevented by grading or drainage.
(1) Where groundwater levels may cause hydrostatic pressure beneath a floor-on-ground, the floor-on-ground shall be
(a) a poured concrete slab, and
(b) designed to resist such pressures.
(1) When floor drains are required (See Section 9.31.), the floor surface shall be sloped so that no water can accumulate.
9.16.4.Concrete
(1) The finished surface of concrete floor slabs shall be trowelled smooth and even.
(2) Dry cement shall not be added to the floor surfaces to absorb surplus water.
(1) When a topping course is provided for a concrete floor slab, it shall consist of 1 part cement to 2.5 parts clean, well graded sand by volume, with a water/cement ratio approximately equal to that of the base slab.
(2) When concrete topping is provided it shall not be less than 20 mm thick.
(1) Concrete slabs shall be not less than 75 mm thick exclusive of concrete topping. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) A bond-breaking material shall be placed between the slab and footings or rock.
9.16.5.Wood
(1) Floors-on-ground constructed of wood shall conform to CSA S406, “Specification of permanent wood foundations for housing and small buildings.”
Section 9.17.Columns
9.17.1.Scope
(1) This Section applies to columns used to support
(a) beams carrying loads from not more than 2 wood-frame floors where
(i) the supported length of joists bearing on such beams does not exceed 5 m, and
(ii) the live load on any floor does not exceed 2.4 kPa, (See Table .)
(b) beams or header joists carrying loads from not more than 2 levels of wood-frame balconies, decks or other accessible exterior platforms, or 1 level plus the roof, where
(i) the supported length of joists bearing on such beams or joists does not exceed 5 m,
(ii) the sum of the specified snow and occupancy loads does not exceed 4.8 kPa for the determination of load on platform-type constructions, and (See Sentence .(1))
(iii) the platform serves only a single suite of residential occupa ncy, or
(c) carport roofs. (See Section 9.35.)
(2) Columns for applications other than as described in Sentence (1) shall be designed in accordance with Part 4.
9.17.2.General
(1) Columns shall be centrally located on a footing conforming to Section 9.15.
(1) Columns shall be securely fastened to the supported member to reduce the likelihood of lateral differential movement between the column and the supported member. (See also Article .)
(2) Except as permitted by Sentence (3), columns shall be laterally supported to resist racking
(a) directly, or
(b) by connection to the supported members. (See Note A-.(2))
(3) Columns need not be provided with lateral support as described in Sentence (2), where
(a) the length of the columns are not more than 600 mm measured from the finished ground to the underside of the supported member, and
(b) the columns support a deck with no superstructure.
9.17.3.Steel Columns
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), steel pipe columns shall have an outside diameter of not less than 73 mm and a wall thickness of not less than 4.76 mm.
(2) Columns of sizes other than as specified in Sentence (1) are permitted to be used where the loadbearing capacities are shown to be adequate.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), steel columns shall be fitted with not less than 100 mm by 100 mm by 6.35 mm thick steel plates at each end, and where the column supports a wooden beam, the top plate shall extend across the full width of the beam.
(2) The top plate required in Sentence (1) need not be provided where a column supports a steel beam and provision is made for the attachment of the column to the beam.
(1) Exterior steel columns susceptible to corrosion shall be treated on the outside surface with at least one coat of rust-inhibitive paint.
(1) Where the imposed load does not exceed 36 kN, adjustable steel columns shall conform to CAN/CGSB-7.2, “Adjustable Steel Columns.”
(2) Adjustable steel columns other than those described in Sentence (1) shall be designed in accordance with Part 4.
9.17.4.Wood Columns
(1) The width or diameter of a wood column shall be not less than the width of the supported member.
(2) Except as provided in Article ., columns shall be not less than 184 mm for round columns and 140 mm by 140 mm for rectangular columns, unless calculations are provided to show that lesser sizes are adequate.
(1) Wood columns shall be either solid, glued-laminated or built-up.
(2) Built-up columns shall consist of not less than 38 mm thick full-length members
(a) bolted together with not less than 9.52 mm diam bolts spaced not more than 450 mm o.c., or
(b) nailed together with not less than 76 mm nails spaced not more than 300 mm o.c.
(3) Glued-laminated columns shall conform to Section 4.3.
(1) Wood columns shall be separated from concrete in contact with the ground by 0.05 mm polyethylene film or Type S roll roofing.
(1) Where termites are known to exist, exterior wood columns, such as porch supports, shall be
(a) pressure-treated with a chemical that is toxic to such termites, in accordance with Article ., or
(b) supported on non-cellulosic material extending not less than 150 mm above the finished ground and shall be located not less than 50 mm from the exterior wall of an adjacent building.
9.17.5.Unit Masonry Columns
(1) Unit masonry columns shall be built of masonry units
(a) conforming to CSA A165.1, “Concrete block masonry units,” and
(b) having a compressive strength over the net area of the block of not less than 15 MPa.
(1) Unit masonry columns shall be not less than 290 mm by 290 mm or 240 mm by 380 mm in size.
9.17.6.Solid Concrete Columns
(1) Concrete shall conform to Section 9.3.
(1) Concrete columns shall be not less than 200 mm by 200 mm for rectangular columns and 230 mm diam for circular columns.
Section 9.18.Crawl Spaces
9.18.1.General
(1) In this Section, a crawl space refers to an enclosed space between the underside of a floor assembly and the ground cover directly below, with a clearance less than 1 800 mm in height.
(1) Foundations enclosing crawl spaces shall conform to Section 9.15.
(1) Crawl spaces shall be considered to be heated where the space
(a) is used as a warm air plenum,
(b) contains heating ducts or heating pipes that are not sealed and insulated to minimize heat loss to the space, or (c) is not separated from heated space in accordance with Section 9.25.
(2) Heating of heated crawl spaces shall conform to Section 9.33.
(3) Insulation, an air barrier system and a vapour ba rrier shall be installed in the walls of heated crawl spaces in accordance with Section 9.25.
9.18.2.Access
(1) An access opening of not less than 500 mm by 700 mm shall be provided to each crawl space where the crawl space serves a single dwelling unit, and not less than 550 mm by 900 mm for other crawl spaces.
(2) Access openings shall be fitted with a door or hatch, except when the crawl space is heated and the access opening into the crawl space is from an adjacent heated space.
9.18.3.Ventilation
(1) Unheated crawl spaces shall be ventilated by natural or mechanical means.
(2) Where an unheated crawl space is ventilated by natural means, ventilation shall be provided to the outside air by not less than 0.1 m² of unobstructed vent area for every 50 m² of floor area.
(3) Vents shall be
(a) uniformly distributed on opposite sides of the bu ilding, and
(b) designed to prevent the entry of snow, rain and insects.
(1) Heated crawl spaces shall be ventilated in accordance with Section 9.32.
9.18.4.Clearance (See also Article 9.3.2.9.)
(1) Where equipment requiring service such as plumbing cleanouts, traps and burners is located in crawl spaces, an access way with a height and width of not less than 600 mm shall be provided from the access door to the equipment and for a distance of 900 mm on the side or sides of the equipment to be serviced.
9.18.5.Drainage
(1) Except where it can be shown to be unnecessary, the ingress of water into a crawl space shall be controlled by grading or drainage.
(2) Drainage of foundation walls shall conform to Article .
(3) Drainage of the ground cover or floor-on-ground in the crawl space shall conform to Subsection .
(4) Drains shall conform to Section 9.14.
9.18.6.Ground Cover
(1) Where a crawl space is unheated, a ground cover shall be provided consisting of not less than
(a) 50 mm of asphalt,
(b) 100 mm of 15 MPa Portland cement concrete,
(c) Type S roll roofing, or
(d) 0.10 mm polyethylene.
(2) Joints in sheet-type ground cover required in Sentence (1) shall be lapped not less than 100 mm and weighted down.
(1) Where a crawl space is heated, a ground cover consisting of not less than 0.15 mm polyethylene sheet conforming to CAN/CGSB-51.34-M, “Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet, for Use in Building Construction,” shall be installed as part of an air barrier system in accordance with Subsection .
(2) The ground cover required in Sentence (1) shall have its joints lapped not less than 300 mm, and
(a) be sealed and evenly weighted down, or
(b) be covered with concrete not less than 50 mm thick.
(3) The perimeter of the ground cover required in Sentence (1) shall be sealed to the foundation wall. (See Notes A- ., A-. and ., and A-.(2) and (3))
(4) All penetrations ofthe ground cover required in Sentence (1) shall be sealed against air leakage. (See Subsection .)
9.18.7.Fire Protection
(1) Only crawl spaces under 1-storey portions of dwelling units shall be used as warm air plenums.
(2) Enclosing material in crawl spaces described in Sentence (1), including insulation, shall have a surface flame-spread rating not greater than 150.
(3) Combustible ground cover used as enclosing material in Sentence (2) shall be covered with noncombustible material. (See Note A-.(3) and (4))
(4) Noncombustible material described in Sentence (3) shall
(a) extend not less than 300 mm beyond the projection of a register opening, and
(b) have turned-up edges. (See Note A-.(3) and (4))
Section 9.19.Roof Spaces
9.19.1.Venting
(1) Except where it can be shown to be unnecessary, where insulation is installed between a ceiling and the underside of the roof sheathing, a space shall be provided between the insulation and the sheathing, and vents shall be installed to permit the movement of air from the space to the exterior. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), the unobstructed vent area shall be not less than 1/300 of the insulated ceiling area.
(2) Where the roof slope is less than 1 in 6 or in roofs that are constructed with roof joists, the unobstructed vent area shall be not less than 1/150 of the insulated ceiling area.
(3) Required vents may be roof type, eave type, gable-end type or any combination thereof, and shall be distributed
(a) uniformly on opposite sides of the buil ding,
(b) with not less than 25% of the required openings located at the top of the space, and
(c) with not less than 25% of the required openings located at the bottom of the space.
(4) Except where each roof joist space referred to in Sentence (2) is separately vented, roof joist spaces shall be interconnected by installing purlins not less than 38 mm by 38 mm on the top of the roof joists.
(5) Vents shall comply with CAN3-A93-M, “Natural Airflow Ventilators for Buildings.”
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), where venting is provided to a roof joist space, not less than 63 mm of space shall be provided between the top of the insulation and the underside of the roof sheathing.
(2) Where venting is provided at the junction of sloped roofs and exterior walls and where preformed baffles are used to contain the insulation, the baffles shall
(a) provide an unobstructed air space, between the insulation and the underside of the roof sheathing, that is
(i) not less than 25 mm in dimension, and
(ii) of sufficient cross area to meet the attic or roof space venting requirements of Article ., and
(b) extend vertically not less than 50 mm above the top of the insulation.
(3) Ceiling insulation shall be installed in a manner that will not restrict the free flow of air through roof vents or through any portion of the attic or roof space.
(1) The lower portion of a mansard or gambrel style roof need not be ventilated.
(2) The upper portion of roofs described in Sentence (1) shall be ventilated in conformance with Articles . to .
9.19.2.Access
(1) Every attic or roof space shall be provided with an access hatch where the attic or roof space
(a) measures not less than
(i) 10 m² in area,
(ii) 1 000 mm in length or width, and
(iii) 600 mm in height over at least the area described in Subclauses (i) and (ii), or
(b) contains a fuel-fired appliance. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) The hatch required in Sentence (1) shall be not less than 550 mm by 900 mm except that, where the hatch serves not more than one dwelling unit, the hatch may be reduced to 0.32 m2 in area with no dimension less than 500 mm. (See
Note A-.(2))
(3) Hatchways to attic or roof spaces shall be fitted with doors or covers.
Section 9.20.Masonry and Insulating Concrete
9.20.1.Application
(i) have a maximum floor-to-floor height of 3 m,
(ii) are erected in buildings not more than 2 sto reys in building height, and
(iii) are erected in locations where the seismic spectral response acceleration, Sa(0.2), is not greater than 0.4. (See Note A-.)
(2) For walls other than those described in Sentence (1), or where the masonry walls or insulating concrete form walls not in contact with the ground are designed for specified loads on the basis of ultimate and serviceability limit states, Subsection . shall apply.
(1) In locations where the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is greater than 0.55, loadbearing elements of masonry buildings more than 1 storey in building height shall be reinforced with not less than the minimum amount of reinforcement as required by Subsection .
(2) In locations where the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is greater than 0.35, but less than or equal to 0.55, loadbearing elements of masonry buildings3 storeys in building height shall be reinforced with not less than the minimum amount of reinforcement as required by Subsection .
9.20.2.Masonry Units
(1) Masonry units shall comply with
(a) ASTM C73, “Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Brick (Sand-Lime Brick),”
(b) ASTM C126, “Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units,”
(c) ASTM C212, “Standard Specification for Structural Clay Facing Tile,”
(d) CAN/CSA-A82 “Fire masonry brick made from clay or shale,”
(e) CSA A165.1, “Concrete block masonry units,”
(f) CSA A165.2, “Concrete brick masonry units,” or
(g) CSA A165.3, “Prefaced concrete masonry units.”
(1) Used bricks shall be free of old mortar, soot or other surface coating and shall conform to Article .
(1) Glass blocks shall not be used as loadbearing units or in the construction of fireplaces or chimneys.
(1) Masonry made with cellular concrete shall not be used in contact with the soil or exposed to the weather.
(1) Stone shall be sound and durable.
(1) Concrete blocks exposed to the weather shall have density and water absorption characteristics conforming to concrete types A, B, C, or D described in CSA A165.1, “Concrete block masonry units.”
(1) The compressive strength of concrete blocks shall conform to Table .
Table 9.20.2.7. Compressive Strength of Concrete Blocks Forming Part of Sentence 9.20.2.7.(1)
| Type of Unit | Minimum Compressive Strength Over Net Area, MPa | |
|---|---|---|
| Exposed to Weather | Not Exposed to Weather | |
| Solid or hollow conc rete blocks | 15 | 10 |
| Solid loadbearing cellular bloc ks | Not permitted | 5 |
| Solid non- loadbearing cellular blocks | Not permitted | 2 |
9.20.3.Mortar
(1) Cementitious materials and aggregates for mortar and grout shall comply with CAN/CSA-A179, “Mortar and grout for unit masonry.”
(2) Water and aggregate shall be clean and free of significant amounts of deleterious materials.
(3) Lime used in mortar shall be hydrated.
(4) If lime putty is used in mortar, it shall be made by slaking quicklime in water for not less than 24 h or soaking hydrated lime in water for not less than 12 h.
(1) Mortar types shall be in accordance with Table .-A.
(2) Mortar for glass block masonry shall be
(a) Type S Portland cement-lime where exposed to the exterior, or
(b) Type S or N where protected from the exterior.
(3) Mortar shall be mixed within the proportion limits provided in Table .-B, with sufficient water to bring the mixture to a consistency adequate for laying masonry units.
(4) Grout shall be mixed within the proportion limits provided in Table .-C, with sufficient water to provide a suitable flow to fill all voids completely, without excessive segregation or bleeding.
(5) Except as provided in Sentence (6), mortar shall be used and placed in final position
(a) within 1.5 h after mixing when the air temperature is 25°C or higher, or
(b) within 2.5 h after mixing when the air temperature is less than 25 °C.
(6) Mortar and grout containing a set-control admixture shall be manufactured off-site in a batching plant and shall be used and placed in final position within a time not exceeding the useful life stipulated by the manufacturer.
(7) Grout used for reinforced masonry shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of CAN/CSA-A371, “Masonry construction for buildings.”
Table 9.20.3.2.-A Mortar Use Forming Part of Sentence 9.20.3.2.(1)
| Location | Building Element | Mortar Type |
|---|---|---|
| Exterior, Above Ground | Loadbearing walls and columns | S |
| Non- loadbearing walls and columns | N or S | |
| Parapets, chimneys and masonry veneer | N or S | |
| Exterior, At or Belo w Ground | Foundation walls and chimneys | S |
| Interior | Loadbearing walls and columns | N |
| Non- loadbearing walls and columns | N |
Table .-B Mortar Mix Proportions (by Volume) Forming Part of Sentence .(3)
| Mortar Type | Portland Cement | Lime | Masonry Cement Type N | Masonry Cement Type S | Fine Aggregate ( damp , loose - state sand ) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| S | 1 | ½ | — | — | 3½ to 4½ |
| — | — | — | 1 | 2¼ to 3 | |
| ½ | — | 1 | — | 3½ to 4½ | |
| N | 1 | 1 | — | — | 4½ to 6 |
| — | — | 1 | — | 2¼ to 3 |
Table .-C Grout Mix Proportions (by Volume) Forming Part of Sentence .(4)
| Portland Cement | Lime | Fine Aggregate (sand) | Coarse Aggregate |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 0 to 1/10 | 2¼ to 3 times the sum of the cement and lime volumes | 1 to 2 times the sum of the cement and lime volumes |
9.20.4.Mortar Joints
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), mortar joint thickness for burned clay brick and concrete masonry units shall be 10 mm.
(2) Permitted tolerances in head and bed joints shall be not more than -5 mm to +10 mm.
(1) Hollow masonry units shall be laid with mortar applied to head and bed joints of both inner and outer face shells.
(2) Vertically aligned webs of hollow masonry units shall be laid in a full bed of mortar
(a) under the starting course,
(b) in all courses of columns, and
(c) where adjacent to cells or cavities that are to be filled with grout.
(3) Except for head joints left open for weep holes and ventilation, solid masonry units shall be laid with full head and bed joints.
9.20.5.Masonry Support
(1) All masonry shall be supported on masonry, concrete or steel, except that masonry veneer walls may be supported on foundations of wood frame constructed in conformance with Sentence .(1). (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Every masonry wall shall be at least as thick as the wall it supports, except as otherwise permitted in Article .
(1) Masonry over openings shall be supported by steel, reinforced concrete lintels or masonry arches designed to support the imposed loads.
(2) Except as provided in Sentences (3) and (5), steel angle lintels supporting masonry above openings shall conform to Table .-A.
(3) Steel angle lintels supporting masonry veneer above openings shall conform to Table .-B.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .-A:
(1) The figures in the Table indicating wall thickness and angle cross-section are in mm.
(2) fs = 138 MPa., Deflection maximum = 1/700 span.
(3) See Sentence .(3. 1).
(4) Omit floor load in lintel when distance to bottom of floor construction is greater than width of opening.
(5) Interior and exterior angles in 200 mm walls and interior angles in 300 mm walls are bolted together when clear span is over 1 800 mm.
(6) When masonry lighter than brick is used over interior angles floor load may be increased by the difference in weight per square metre times the width of the opening. Not generally available.
(7) Interior angles have been designed for floor load plus brick masonry of height equal to width of opening.
Table .-B Maximum Allowable Spans for Steel Lintels Supporting Masonry Veneer, m Forming Part of Sentence .(3)
| Minimum Angle Size, mm | Maximum Allowable Spans, m | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Vertical Leg | Horizontal Leg | Thickness | 70 mm Brick | 90 mm Brick | 100 mm Stone |
| 89 | 76 | 6.4 | 2.55 | — | — |
| 89 | 89 | 6.4 | 2.59 | 2.47 | 2.30 |
| 102 | 89 | 6.4 | 2.79 | 2.66 | 2.48 |
| 127 | 89 | 7.9 | 3.47 | 3.31 | 3.08 |
| 127 | 89 | 11 | 3.64 | 3.48 | 3.24 |
| 127 | 89 | 13 | 3.82 | 3.59 | 3.33 |
| 152 | 89 | 11 | 4.06 | 3.82 | 3.54 |
| 152 | 89 | 13 | 4.32 | 4.07 | 3.77 |
| 152 | 102 | 13 | 4.37 | 4.12 | 3.82 |
| 178 | 102 | 11 | 4.57 | 4.30 | 3.99 |
| 178 | 102 | 13 | 4.87 | 4.59 | 4.25 |
(3.1) Steel lintels described in Sentences (2) and (3) shall
(a) have even and level bearing and shall have not less than 150 mm length of bearing at end supports, and (b) bear on masonry, concrete or steel.
(4) Steel angle lintels supporting masonry shall be prime painted or otherwise protected from corrosion.
(5) Steel beams supporting masonry veneer and wood stud walls above openings shall conform to Table .-C.
(6) Steel beams described in Sentence (5) shall be supported at each end by a steel column, and have a minimum 6 mm plate welded to the flange to support the masonry veneer.
Table .-C Maximum Allowable Spans for Steel Beams Supporting Masonry Veneer, m(1)(2)(3) Forming Part of Sentence .(5)
[TABLE:2] Notes to Table .-C:
(1) These spans assume that the beam supports the veneer, a wood stud wall and a maximum specified roof live load of 2.3 kN/m.
(2) Where the steel beam carries floor loads or larger roof loads, refer to Article .
(3) See Note A-Table .-C.
9.20.6.Thickness and Height
(1) Masonry exterior walls, other than cavity walls, in 1-storey buildings and the top storeys of 2- and 3-storey buildings shall be not less than 140 mm thick, provided the walls are not more than 2.8 m high at the eaves and 4.6 m high at the peaks of gable ends.
(2) The exterior walls of the bottom storeys of 2-storey buildings, and exterior walls of the bottom 2 storeys of 3-storey buildings shall be not less than 190 mm thick.
(3) In exterior walls composed of more than one wythe, each wythe shall be not less than 90 mm thick.
(1) Cavity walls shall be made with not less than 90 mm wide units if the joints are raked and not less than 75 mm wide units if the joints are not raked.
(2) The width of a cavity in a cavity wall shall be not less than 50 mm and not greater than 150 mm.
(3) The minimum thickness of cavity walls above the supporting base shall be 230 mm for the top 7.6 m and 330 mm for the remaining portion, except that where 75 mm wide units are used, the wall height above the top of the foundation wall shall not exceed 6 m.
(1) The thickness of loadbearing interior walls shall be determined on the basis of the maximum lateral support spacing as provided in Sentences .(2) and (3).
(2) The thickness of interior non-loadbearing walls shall be
(a) determined on the basis of the maximum lateral support spacing as provided in Sentences .(2) and (3), and
(b) in any case, not less than 65 mm.
(1) Except for masonry veneer where each masonry unit is supported individually by the structural backing, masonry veneer shall consist of solid masonry units not less than 70 mm thick.
(2) Veneer described in Sentence (1) over wood-frame walls shall have not less than a 25 mm air space behind the veneer.
(3) Masonry veneer less than 90 mm thick shall have unraked joints.
(4) Masonry veneer shall conform to Subsection . where the masonry units are required to be individually supported by the structural backing.
(1) The height of parapet walls above the adjacent roof surface shall be not more than 3 times the parapet wall thickness.
(2) A parapet wall shall be solid masonry that extends from the top of the parapet wall to not less than 300 mm below the adjacent roof level.
(3) Where semi-solid or hollow units are used in a parapet wall, the cells of those units shall be filled with mortar, grout or concrete.
(1) Slab and panel facings of precast concrete and natural or artificial stone shall conform to Subsection .
9.20.7.Chases and Recesses
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence .(2) and Article ., the depth of any chase or recess shall not exceed one-third the thickness of the wall, and the width of the chase or recess shall not exceed 500 mm.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2) and Article ., no chase or recess shall be constructed in any wall 190 mm or less in thickness.
(2) Recesses may be constructed in 190 mm walls provided they do not exceed 100 mm in depth, 750 mm in height and 500 mm in width.
(1) Chases and recesses shall be not less than
(a) 4 times the wall thickness apart, and
(b) 600 mm away from any pilaster, cross wall, buttress or other vertical element providing required lateral support for the wall.
(1) Chases or recesses that do not conform to the limits specified in Articles . to . shall be considered as openings, and any masonry supported above such a chase or recess shall be supported by a lintel or arch as provided in Article .
(1) Chases and recesses shall not be cut into walls made with hollow units after the masonry units are in place.
9.20.8.Support of Loads
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), loadbearing walls of hollow masonry units supporting roof or floor framing members shall be capped with not less than 50 mm of solid masonry or have the top course filled with concrete.
(2) Capping required in Sentence (1) may be omitted where the roof framing is supported on a wood plate not less than 38 mm by 89 mm.
(1) Floor joists supported on cavity walls shall be supported on solid masonry units not less than 57 mm high.
(2) Floor joists described in Sentence (1) shall not project into the cavity.
(3) Roof and ceiling framing members bearing on cavity walls shall be supported on
(a) solid masonry units not less than 57 mm high that bridge the full thickness of the wall, or
(b) a wood plate not less than 38 mm thick, bearing not less than 50 mm on each wythe.
(1) The bearing area under beams and joists shall be sufficient to carry the supported load.
(2) In no case shall the minimum length of end bearing of beams supported on masonry be less than 90 mm.
(3) The length of end bearing of floor, roof or ceiling joists supported on masonry shall be not less than 40 mm.
(1) Beams and columns supported on masonry walls shall be supported on pilasters where the thickness of the masonry wall or wythe is less than 190 mm.
(2) Not less than 190 mm depth of solid masonry or concrete shall be provided under the beam or column referred to in Sentence (1).
(3) Pilasters required in Sentence (1) shall be bonded or tied to masonry walls.
(4) Concrete pilasters required in Sentence (1) shall be not less than 50 mm by 300 mm.
(5) Unit masonry pilasters required in Sentence (1) shall be not less than 100 mm by 290 mm.
(1) Masonry veneer of solid masonry units resting on a bearing support shall not project more than one-third of the thickness of the veneer. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Where the masonry veneer described in Sentence (1) is rough stone masonry,
(a) the projection shall be measured as the average projection of the units, and
(b) the thickness of the veneer shall be measured as the average thickness of the veneer.
9.20.9.Bonding and Tying
(1) Vertical joints in adjacent masonry courses shall be offset unless each wythe of masonry is reinforced with the equivalent of not less than 2 corrosion-resistant steel bars of 3.76 mm diam placed in the horizontal joints at vertical intervals not exceeding 460 mm.
(2) Where joints in the reinforcing referred to in Sentence (1) occur, the bars shall be lapped not less than 150 mm.
(1) Except as provided in Article . regarding masonry veneer, masonry walls that consist of 2 or more wythes shall have the wythes bonded or tied together with masonry bonding units as described in Article . or with metal ties as described in Article .
(1) Where wythes are bonded together with masonry units, the bonding units shall comprise not less than 4% of the wall surface area.
(2) Bonding units described in Sentence (1) shall be spaced not more than 600 mm vertically and horizontally in the case of brick masonry and 900 mm o.c. in the case of block or tile.
(3) Units described in Sentence (1) shall extend not less than 90 mm into adjacent wythes.
(1) Where 2 or more wythes are tied together with metal ties of the individual rod type, the ties shall conform to the requirements in Sentences (3) to (6).
(2) Other ties may be used where it can be shown that such ties provide walls that are at least as strong and as durable as those made with the individual rod type.
(3) Metal ties of the individual rod type shall
(a) be corrosion-resistant,
(b) have a minimum cross-sectional area of not less than 17.8 mm², and
(c) have not less than a 50 mm portion bent at right angles at each end.
(4) Metal ties of the individual rod type shall
(a) extend from within 25 mm of the outer face of the wall to within 25 mm of the inner face of the wall,
(b) be completely embedded in mortar except for the portion exposed in cavity walls, and
(c) be staggered from course to course.
(5) Where 2 or more wythes in walls other than cavity walls and masonry veneer/masonry backing walls are tied together with metal ties of the individual rod type, the space between wythes shall be completely filled with mortar.
(6) Ties described in Sentence (5) shall be
(a) located within 300 mm of openings and spaced not more than 900 mm apart around openings, and
(b) spaced not more than 900 mm apart horizontally and 460 mm apart vertically at other locations.
(7) Except as required in Sentences (8) and (9), where the inner and outer wythes of cavity walls are tied with individual wire ties, the ties shall be spaced not more than 900 mm apart horizontally and 400 mm apart vertically.
(8) Within 100 mm of the bottom of each floor or roof assembly where the cavity extends below the assemblies, the ties described in Sentence (7) shall be spaced not more than 600 mm apart horizontally.
(9) Within 300 mm ofany openings, the ties described in Sentence (7) shall be spaced not more than 900 mm apart.
(1) Masonry veneer 70 mm or more in thickness and resting on a bearing support shall be tied to masonry backing or to wood framing members with straps that are
(a) corrosion-resistant,
(b) not less than 0.76 mm thick,
(c) not less than 22 mm wide,
(d) shaped to provide a key with the mortar,
(e) pre-bent during manufacture to a right angle within 6 mm of the fastener hole,
(f) fastened with
(i) corrosion-resistant wood screws conforming to Sentence .(3) that have a minimum diameter of 4.16 mm (No. 8) and a wood penetration of not less than 38 mm, or
(ii) corrosion-resistant common spiral nails conforming to Sentence .(1) that are not less than 76 mm long and have a wood penetration of not less than 63 mm, and
(g) spaced in accordance with Table .
Table 9.20.9.5. Veneer Tie Spacing Forming Part of Sentence 9.20.9.5.(1)
| Maximum Vertical Spacing, mm | Maximum Horizontal Spacing , mm |
|---|---|
| 400 | 800 |
| 500 | 600 |
| 600 | 400 |
(2) Where hot-dipped, zinc-coated straps are used to meet the requirements of Sentence (1), they shall be pre-bent and pre-drilled or pre-punched prior to hot-dip, zinc-coated galvanizing.
(3) Masonry veneer individually supported by masonry or wood-frame backing shall be secured to the backing in conformance with Subsection .
(4) The straps described in Sentence (1) may be installed against one of the sheathings listed in Table .-A provided that
(a) the tie is in contact with the exterior surface of the sheathing, and
(b) the sheathing beneath the tie is not compressed.
(1) Glass block shall have horizontal joint reinforcement of two corrosion-resistant bars of not less than 3.76 mm diam or expanded metal strips not less than 75 mm wide
(a) spaced at vertical intervals of not more than 600 mm for units 190 mm or less in height, and
(b) installed in every horizontal joint for units higher than 190 mm.
(2) Reinforcement required in Sentence (1) shall be lapped not less than 150 mm.
9.20.10.Lateral Support
(1) Masonry walls shall be laterally supported by floor or roof construction or by intersecting masonry walls or buttresses.
(2) The spacing of supports required in Sentence (1) shall be not more than
(a) 20 times the wall thickness for all loadbearing walls and exterior non-loadbearing walls, and
(b) 36 times the wall thickness for interior non-loadbearing walls.
(3) In applying Sentence (2), the thickness of cavity walls shall be taken as the greater of
(a) two-thirds ofthe sum of the thicknesses of the wythes, or
(b) the thickness of the thicker wythe.
(4) Floor and roof structural elements providing lateral support for walls as required in Sentence (1) shall be constructed to transfer lateral loads to walls or buttresses approximately at right angles to the laterally supported walls.
9.20.11.Anchorage of Roofs, Floors and Intersecting Walls
(1) Where required to receive lateral support (See Subsection .), masonry walls shall be anchored to each floor or roof assembly at maximum intervals of 2 m, except that anchorage to floor joists not more than 1 m above grade may be omitted.
(2) Anchors required in Sentence (1) shall be corrosion-resistant and be not less than the equivalent of 40 mm by 4.76 mm thick steel straps.
(3) Anchors required in Sentence (1) shall be shaped to provide a mechanical key with the masonry and shall be securely fastened to the horizontal support to develop the full strength of the anchor.
(4) When joists are parallel to the wall, anchors required in Sentence (1) shall extend across not less than 3 joists.
(1) Where required to provide lateral support, intersecting walls shall be bonded or tied together.
(2) Where bonding is used to satisfy the requirements of Sentence (1), 50% of the adjacent masonry units in the intersecting wall, distributed uniformly over the height of the intersection, shall be embedded in the laterally supported wall.
(3) Where tying is used to satisfy the requirements of Sentence (1), the ties shall be
(a) corrosion-resistant metal,
(b) equivalent to not less than 4.76 mm by 40 mm steel strapping,
(c) spaced not more than 800 mm o.c. vertically, and
(d) shaped at both ends to provide sufficient mechanical key to develop the strength of the ties.
(1) Wood-frame walls shall be tied to intersecting masonry walls with not less than 4.76 mm diam corrosion-resistant steel rods spaced not more than 900 mm o.c. vertically.
(2) Ties required in Sentence (1) shall be anchored to the wood framing at one end and shaped to provide a mechanical key at the other end to develop the strength of the tie.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), roof systems of wood-frame construction shall be tied to exterior masonry walls by not less than 12.7 mm diam anchor bolts,
(a) spaced not more than 2.4 m apart,
(b) embedded not less than 90 mm into the masonry, and
(c) fastened to a rafter plate of not less than 38 mm thick lumber.
(2) The roof system described in Sentence (1) is permitted to be anchored by nailing the wall furring strips to the side of the rafter plate.
(1) Cornices, sills or other trim of masonry material which project beyond the wall face shall have not less than 65% of their mass, but not less than 90 mm, within the wall or shall be adequately anchored to the wall with corrosion-resistant anchors.
(1) Where anchor bolts are to be placed in the top of a masonry pier, the pier shall conform to the requirements of Sentence .(4) and shall be capped with concrete or reinforced masonry not less than 200 mm thick.
9.20.12.Corbelling
(1) All corbelling shall consist of solid masonry units.
(2) The units referred to in Sentence (1) shall be corbelled so that the horizontal projection of any unit does not exceed 25 mm and the total projection does not exceed one-third of the total wall thickness.
(1) Cavity walls of greater thickness than the foundation wall on which they rest shall not be corbelled but may project 25 mm over the outer face of the foundation wall disregarding parging.
(2) Where the foundation wall referred to in Sentence (1) is unit masonry, it is permitted to be corbelled to meet flush with the inner face of a cavity wall provided
(a) the projection of each course does not exceed half the height or one-third the thickness of the corbelled unit, and
(b) the total corbel does not exceed one-third of the foundation wall thickness. (See Note A-.(2))
(1) Masonry veneer resting on a bearing support shall not project more than 25 mm beyond the supporting base where the veneer is not less than 90 mm thick, and 12 mm beyond the supporting base where the veneer is less than 90 mm thick.
(2) In the case of rough stone veneer, the projection, measured as the average projection of the stone units, shall not exceed one-third the bed width beyond the supporting base.
9.20.13.Control of Rainwater Penetration
(1) Materials used for flashing shall conform to Table .
(2) Aluminum flashing in contact with masonry or concrete shall be effectively coated or separated from the masonry or concrete by an impervious membrane.
Table 9.20.13.1. Flashing Materials Forming Part of Sentence 9.20.13.1.(1)
| Material | Minimum Thickness, mm | |
|---|---|---|
| Exposed Flashing | Concealed Flashing | |
| Aluminum | 0.48 | — |
| Copper | 0.46 | 0.46 |
| Copper or aluminum laminated to felt or kr aft paper | — | 0.05 |
| Galvanized steel | 0. 33 | 0.33 |
| Lead sheet | 1.73 | 1.73 |
| Polyethylene | — | 0.50 |
| Roll roofing, Type S | — | standard |
| Zinc | 0.46 | 0.46 |
(1) Fastening devices for flashing shall be corrosion-resistant and, where metal flashing is used, shall be compatible with the flashing with respect to galvanic action.
(1) Flashing shall be installed in masonry and masonry veneer walls
(a) beneath jointed masonry window sills,
(b) over the back and top of parapet walls,
(c) over the heads of glass block panels,
(d) beneath weep holes, and
(e) over the heads of window or door openings in exterior walls when the vertical distance between the top ofa window or door frame and the bottom edge of the eave exceeds one-quarter of the horizontal eave overhang.
(2) Throughwall flashing shall be provided in a masonry veneer wall such that any moisture that accumulates in the air space will be directed to the exterior of the building.
(1) When installed beneath jointed masonry window sills and jointed masonry copings or over the heads of openings, flashing shall extend from the front edge of the masonry up behind the sill or lintel.
(2) A flashing may be omitted when the masonry at the sill of a wall opening or the top ofa wall is protected by an impervious non-jointed masonry coping that conforms to Article .
(1) Flashing beneath weep holes in cavity walls and masonry veneer/masonry backing walls shall
(a) be bedded not less than 25 mm in the inside wythe,
(b) extend to not less than 5 mm beyond the outer face of the build ing element below the flashing, and
(c) be installed with a nominally horizontal slope toward the outside wythe.
(1) Flashing beneath weep holes in masonry veneer over masonry backing walls shall conform to the flashing requirements for cavity walls and masonry veneer/masonry backing walls in Article .
(2) Flashing beneath weep holes in masonry veneer over wood frame walls shall be installed so that it extends from a point not less than 5 mm beyond the outer face of the building element below the flashing to a point 150 mm up the wood-frame wall.
(3) Where the frame wall is sheathed with a sheathing membrane, a non-wood-based rigid exterior insulating sheathing or a semi-rigid insulating sheathing with an integral sheathing membrane, the flashing shall be installed behind the sheathing membrane or insulating sheathing.
(4) Flashing described in Sentence (2) is permitted to conform to the requirements for concealed flashing in Table .
(1) Joints in flashing shall be made watertight.
(1) Weep holes spaced not more than 800 mm apart shall be provided at the bottom of
(a) cavities in cavity walls, and
(b) cavities or air spaces in masonry veneer walls.
(2) The cavities or air spaces described in Sentence (1) shall include those above lintels over window and door openings required to be flashed in conformance with Article .
(3) The weep holes required in Sentence (1) shall be in a location such that any water that collects in the cavity or space will be directed to the exterior of the building.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (3), where the interior finish of the exterior walls of a building is a type that may be damaged by moisture, exterior masonry walls, other than cavity walls or walls that are protected for their full height by a roof of a carport or porch, shall be
(a) parged on the interior surface, and
(b) covered with No. 15 breather-type asphalt-saturated paper conforming to CAN/CGSB-51.32-M, “Sheathing, Membrane, Breather Type,” and shall be lapped not less than 100 mm at the joints.
(2) In situations described in Sentence (1), flashing shall be provided where water will accumulate, to lead it to the exterior.
(3) Where insulation effectively limits the passage of water vapour and is applied by a waterproof adhesive or by mortar directly to the masonry, the requirements for sheathing paper do not apply. (See Note A-.(3))
(1) Cavity walls shall be constructed so that mortar droppings are prevented from forming a bridge to allow the passage of rainwater across the cavity.
(1) The junction of door and window frames with masonry shall be caulked in conformance with Subsection .
(1) Except for wall openings located less than 150 mm above ground level, where a concealed flashing is not installed beneath window and door sills, such sills shall be provided with an outward slope and a drip located not less than 25 mm from the wall surface.
9.20.14.Protection During Work
(1) Mortar and masonry shall be maintained at a temperature not below 5°C during installation and for not less than 48 h after installation.
(2) No frozen material shall be used in mortar mix.
(1) The top surface of uncompleted masonry exposed to the weather shall be completely covered with a waterproofing material when construction is not in progress.
9.20.15.Reinforcement for Earthquake Resistance
(1) Where reinforcement is required in this Section, masonry walls shall be reinforced horizontally and vertically with steel having a total cross-sectional area of not less than 0.002 times the horizontal cross-sectional area of the wall, so that not less than one-third of the required steel area is installed either horizontally or vertically and the remainder in the other direction.
(1) Where reinforcement for masonry is required in this Section, it shall be installed in conformance with the requirements for reinforced masonry as contained in CAN/CSA-A371, “Masonry construction for buildings.”
9.20.16.Corrosion Resistance
(1) Carbon steel connectors required to be corrosion-resistant shall be galvanized to at least the minimum standards in Table .
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) ASTM A123 / A123M does not apply to metal less than 0.76 mm thick. Galvanizing coatings may be interpolated for thicknesses between 3.18 mm and 0.76 mm.
9.20.17.Above-Ground Flat Insulating Concrete Form Walls
(1) The thickness of concrete in flat insulating concrete form walls not in contact with the ground shall be
(a) not less than 140 mm, and
(b) constant for the entire height of the wall.
(1) Horizontal reinforcement in above-grade flat insulating concrete form walls shall
(a) consist of
(i) one 10M bar placed not more than 300 mm from the top of the wall, and
(ii) 10M bars spaced not more than 600 mm o.c., and
(b) be placed in the middle third of the wall section.
(2) Vertical reinforcement in above-grade flat insulating concrete form walls shall
(a) consist of 10M bars spaced not more than 400 mm o.c., and
(b) be placed in the middle third of the wall section.
(3) Vertical reinforcement required by Sentence (2) and interrupted by wall openings shall be placed not more than 600 mm from each side of the opening.
(1) No openings shall occur within 1 200 mm of interior and exterior corners of exterior non-loadbearing flat insulating concrete form walls.
(2) Portions of walls over openings in non-loadbearing flat insulating concrete form walls shall have a minimum depth of concrete of not less than 200 mm across the width of the opening.
(3) Openings more than 600 mm but not more than 3 000 mm in width in non-loadbearing flat insulating concrete form walls shall be reinforced at the top and bottom with one 10M bar.
(4) Openings more than 3 000 mm in width in non-loadbearing flat insulating concrete form walls shall be reinforced on all four sides with two 10M bars.
(5) Reinforcing bars described in Sentences (3) and (4) shall extend 600 mm beyond the edges ofthe opening.
(6) The cumulative width of openings in non-loadbearing flat insulating concrete form walls shall be not more than 70% of the length of any wall.
(1) No openings shall occur within 1 200 mm of interior and exterior corners of exterior loadbearing flat insulating concrete form walls.
(2) In loadbearing flat insulating concrete form walls, lintels shall be provided over all openings wider than 900 mm.
(3) Lintels described in Sentence (2) shall be constructed in accordance with Span Table .-A, .-B or
(1) Floor joists supported on the side of flat insulating concrete form walls shall be supported with joist hangers secured to wood ledger boards.
(2) The ledger boards referred to in Sentence (1) shall be not less than
(a) 38 mm thick, and
(b) the depth of the floor joists.
(3) Anchor bolts shall be used to secure ledger boards to flat insulating concrete form walls and shall be
(a) embedded in the wall to a depth not less than 100 mm, and
(b) spaced in accordance with Table .
(4) Floor joists and building frames supported on the top of flat insulating concrete form walls shall be anchored in conformance with Article .
Table 9.20.17.5. Maximum Anchor Bolt Spacing for the Connection of Floor Ledgers to Flat Insulating Concrete Form Walls Forming Part of Sentence 9.20.17.5.(3)
| Maximum Clear Floor Span , m | Maximum Anchor Bolt Spacing, mm | |
|---|---|---|
| Staggered 12.7 mm Diameter Anchor Bolts | Staggered 16 mm Diameter Anchor Bolts | |
| 2.44 | 450 | 500 |
| 3.00 | 400 | 450 |
| 4.00 | 300 | 400 |
| 5.00 | 275 | 325 |
(1) Roof framing supported on the top of flat insulating concrete form walls shall be fixed to the top plates, which shall be anchored to the wall with anchor bolts
(a) not less than 12.7 mm in diameter, and
(b) spaced not more than 1 200 mm o.c.
(2) The anchor bolts described in Sentence (1) shall be placed in the centre of the flat insulating concrete form wall and shall be embedded no less than 100 mm into the concrete.
(3) Attachment of roof framing to wood top plates shall be in accordance with Table .
(1) Above-ground flat insulating concrete form walls shall be protected from precipitation and damage in conformance with Section 9.27.
Section 9.21.Masonry and Concrete Chimneys
9.21.1.General
(1) This Section applies to,
(a) rectangular masonry or concrete chimneys not more than 12 m in height serving fireplaces or serving appliances having a combined total rated heat output of 120 kW or less, and
(b) flue pipes serving solid fuel-burning applianc es.
(2) Reserved.
(3) Except as provided in Sentence .(1), chimneys(other than those described in Sentence (1) and Sentence
(1) The walls of any chimney or flue pipe shall be constructed so as to be smoke- and flame-tight.
(1) Factory-built chimneys serving solid fuel-burning appliances, and their installation, shall conform to CAN/ULC- S629, “Standard for 650oC Factory-Built Chimneys.” (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Flue pipes serving solid fuel-burning stoves, cooktops and space heaters shall conform to CSA B365, “Installation code for solid-fuel-burning appliances and equipment.”
9.21.2.Chimney Flues
(1) A chimney flue that serves a fireplace or incinerator shall not serve any other appliance.
(2) A chimney flue that serves a solid fuel-burning appliance shall not be connected to a natural gas- or propane-fired appliance.
(3) A chimney flue that serves a solid fuel-burning appliance shall not be connected to an oil-burning appliance unless the solid fuel-burning appliance is listed for such installation and the installation of both appliances meets their respective installation requirements.
(1) Except as required in Article ., two or more fuel-burning appliances are permitted to be connected to the same chimney flue provided adequate draft is maintained for the connected appliances and the connections are made as described in Sentences (2) and (3).
(2) Where 2 or more fuel-burning appliances are connected to the same chimney flue, the appliances must be located on the same storey.
(3) The connection referred to in Sentence (2) for a solid fuel-burning appliance shall be made below connections for appliances burning other fuels.
(1) Chimney flues shall not be inclined more than 45o to the vertical.
(1) Except for chimneys serving fireplaces, the size of a chimney flue shall conform to the requirements of the solid fuel- burning appliance installation standards referenced in Sentence .(1) and Article .
(2) Where a chimney flue serves only one solid fuel-burning appliance, the flue area shall be at least equal to that of the flue pipe connected to it.
(1) The size of a chimney flue serving a masonry fireplace shall conform to Table .-A or Table .-B.
Table 9.21.2.5.-A Diameter of Round Flues for Fireplace Chimneys Forming Part of Sentence 9.21.2.5.(1)
| Fireplace Opening , m² | Chimney Height , m | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 3.0 to 4.5 | > 4.5 to 5.9 | > 5.9 to 8.9 | > 8.9 to 12 | |||||
| Flue Diameter, mm | ||||||||
| Min . | Max . | Min . | Max . | Min . | Max . | Min . | Max . | |
| Up to 0.150 | 110 | 170 | 100 | 160 | 90 | 150 | 90 | 150 |
| 0.151 to 0.250 | 150 | 210 | 130 | 190 | 130 | 190 | 120 | 180 |
| 0.251 to 0.350 | 180 | 240 | 160 | 220 | 150 | 210 | 140 | 200 |
| 0.351 to 0.500 | 220 | 280 | 200 | 260 | 190 | 250 | 170 | 230 |
| 0.501 to 0.650 | 260 | 320 | 230 | 290 | 220 | 280 | 200 | 260 |
| 0.651 to 0.800 | 290 | 350 | 260 | 320 | 240 | 300 | 220 | 280 |
| 0.801 to 1.00 | 330 | 390 | 290 | 350 | 270 | 330 | 250 | 310 |
| 1.01 to 1.20 | 360 | 420 | 320 | 380 | 300 | 360 | 270 | 330 |
| 1.21 to 1.40 | 390 | 450 | 350 | 410 | 330 | 390 | 300 | 360 |
| 1.41 to 1.60 | 420 | 480 | 380 | 440 | 350 | 410 | 320 | 380 |
| 1.61 to 1.80 | — | — | 400 | 460 | 370 | 430 | 340 | 400 |
| 1.81 to 2.00 | — | — | — | — | 400 | 460 | 360 | 420 |
| 2.01 to 2.20 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 380 | 440 |
Table .-B Rectangular Flue Sizes for Fireplace Chimneys Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
| Fireplace Opening , m² | Chimney Height , m | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 3.0 to 4.5 | > 4.5 to 5.9 | > 5.9 to 8.9 | > 8.9 to 12 | |||||
| Flue Size , mm | ||||||||
| Min . | Max . | Min . | Max . | Min . | Max . | Min . | Max . | |
| Up to 0.150 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 200 | 100 × 200 | 100 × 200 | 100 × 200 | 100 × 200 | 100 × 200 | 100 × 200 |
| 0.151 to 0.250 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 200 |
| 0.251 to 0.350 | 200 × 300 | 200 × 300 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 300 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 200 |
| 0.351 to 0.500 | 300 × 300 | 300 × 300 | 200 × 300 | 200 × 300 | 200 × 300 | 200 × 300 | 200 × 200 | 200 × 300 |
| 0.501 to 0.650 | 300 × 300 | 300 × 400 | 300 × 300 | 300 × 300 | 300 × 300 | 300 × 300 | 200 × 300 | 200 × 300 |
| 0.651 to 0.800 | 300 × 400 | 300 × 400 | 300 × 300 | 300 × 400 | 300 × 300 | 300 × 300 | 300 × 300 | 300 × 300 |
| 0.801 to 1.00 | 400 × 400 | 400 × 400 | 300 × 400 | 300 × 400 | 300 × 400 | 300 × 400 | 300 × 300 | 300 × 300 |
| 1.01 to 1.20 | 400 × 400 | 400 × 400 | 400 × 400 | 400 × 400 | 300 × 400 | 300 × 400 | 300 × 400 | 300 × 400 |
| 1.21 to 1.40 | — | — | 400 × 400 | 400 × 400 | 400 × 400 | 400 × 400 | 300 × 400 | 300 × 400 |
| 1.41 to 1.60 | — | — | — | — | 400 × 400 | 400 × 400 | 400 × 400 | 400 × 400 |
| 1.61 to 1.80 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 400 × 400 | 400 × 400 |
| 1.81 to 2.00 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 400 × 400 | 400 × 400 |
(1) The width of an oval chimney flue shall be not less than two-thirds its breadth.
9.21.3.Chimney Lining
(1) Every masonry or concrete chimney shall have a lining of clay, concrete, firebrick or metal.
(1) Joints of chimney liners shall be sealed to provide a barrier to the passage of flue gases and condensate into the cavity between the liner and the surrounding masonry.
(2) Joints of clay, concrete or firebrick chimney liners shall be struck flush to provide a straight, smooth, aligned chimney flue.
(1) Clay liners shall conform to CAN/CSA-A324-M, “Clay Flue Liners.”
(2) Liners referred to in Sentence (1) shall be not less than 15.9 mm thick and shall be capable of resisting, without softening or cracking, a temperature of 1 100°C.
(1) Firebrick liners shall conform to ASTM C27, “Standard Classification of Fireclay and High Alumina Refractory Brick.”
(2) Firebrick liners shall be laid with high temperature cement mortar conforming to CAN/CGSB-10.3, “Air Setting Refractory Mortar.”
(1) Concrete flue liners shall conform to Clause . of CAN/CSA-A405-M, “Design and Construction of Masonry Chimneys and Fireplaces.”
(1) Metal liners shall be constructed of not less than 0.3 mm thick stainless steel.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence .(3), metal liners referred to in Sentence (1) shall only be used in chimneys serving gas- or oil-burning appliances. (See Note A-.(2))
(1) Chimney liners shall be installed when the surrounding masonry or concrete is placed.
(1) A space not less than 10 mm wide shall be left between a chimney liner and the surrounding masonry.
(2) The space required in Sentence (1) shall not be filled with mortar.
(1) Chimney liners used in chimneys for solid fuel-burning appliances shall be laid in a full bed of
(a) high temperature cement mortar conforming to CAN/CGSB-10.3, “Air Setting Refractory Mortar,” or
(b) mortar consisting of 1 part Portland cement to 3 parts sand by volume.
(2) Chimney liners used in chimneys for oil- or gas-burning appliances shall be laid in a full bed of mortar consisting of 1 part Portland cement to 3 parts sand by volume.
(1) Chimney liners shall extend from a point not less than 200 mm below the lowest flue pipe connection to a point not less than 50 mm or more than 100 mm above the chimney cap. See Note A-.(2).)
9.21.4.Masonry and Concrete Chimney Construction
(1) Unit masonry shall conform to Section 9.20.
(1) Concrete shall conform to Section 9.3.
(1) Footings for masonry chimneys and concrete chimneys shall conform to Section 9.15.
(1) A chimney flue shall extend not less than
(a) 900 mm above the highest point at which the chimney comes in contact with the roof, and
(b) 600 mm above the highest roof surface or structure within 3 m of the chimney. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), chimneys shall be braced in accordance with Subsection . to provide lateral stability under wind loads.
(2) A chimney need not be laterally braced provided
(a) no horizontal outside dimension is less than 400 mm, and
(b) the chimney extends not more than 3.6 m above a roof or the masonry wall of which it forms a part. (See Note A-.(2))
(1) The top ofa chimney shall have a waterproof cap of reinforced concrete, masonry or metal.
(2) The cap required in Sentence (1) shall slope from the lining and be provided with a drip not less than 25 mm from the chimney wall.
(3) Cast-in-place concrete caps shall be separated from the chimney liner by a bond break and be sealed at that location.
(4) Jointed precast concrete or masonry chimney caps shall have flashing installed beneath the cap extending from the liner to the drip edge.
(1) Except for a chimney flue constructed to serve a masonry fireplace, a cleanout opening with a metal frame and tight- fitting metal door shall be installed near the base of the chimney flue.
(1) The walls ofa masonry chimney shall be built of solid masonry units not less than 70 mm thick.
(1) Flue liners in the same chimney shall be separated by not less than 70 mm of masonry or concrete exclusive of liners where clay liners are used, or 90 mm of firebrick where firebrick liners are used.
(2) Flue liners referred to in Sentence (1) shall be installed to prevent significant lateral movement.
(1) Junctions with adjacent materials shall be adequately flashed to shed water.
9.21.5.Clearance from Combustible Construction
(1) The clearance between masonry or concrete chimneys and combustible framing material shall be not less than,
(a) 50 mm for interior chimneys, and
(b) 12 mm for exterior chimneys. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) A clearance of not less than 150 mm shall be provided between a cleanout opening and combustible material.
(3) Combustible flooring, subflooring and ceiling finishes shall have not less than a 12 mm clearance from masonry or concrete chimneys.
(1) All spaces between masonry or concrete chimneys and combustibl e material shall be sealed top or bottom with noncombustible material.
(1) Joists or beams may be supported on masonry walls which enclose chimney flues provided the combustible members are separated from the flue by not less than 290 mm of solid masonry.
Section 9.22.Fireplaces
9.22.1.General
(1) Except when otherwise specifically stated herein, this Section applies to masonry fireplaces constructed on-site.
(1) Except as otherwise stated in this Section, unit masonry shall conform to Section 9.20. and concrete to Section 9.3.
(2) Masonry above openings shall be supported by steel lintels conforming to Sentence .(2), reinforced concrete or a masonry arch.
(1) Footings for masonry and concrete fireplaces shall conform to Section 9.15.
(0.1) Every solid fuel-fired fireplace, including a factory-built fireplace, shall have a supply of combustion air from outdoors in accordance with Sentences (0.2) to (1).
(0.2) The combustion air shall be supplied by a noncombustible and corrosion-resistant supply duct.
(0.3) The supply duct shall have
(a) a diameter of not less than 100 mm or equivalent area, and
(b) an exterior intake for entry of air from the outdoors.
(0.4) The supply duct shall contain a tight-fitting damper that shall be located close to the interior outlet and be operable from the room containing the fireplace.
(0.5) The operating mechanism shall clearly indicate the actual position of the damper.
(0.6) The interior outlet shall
(a) be located as close as possible to the opening in the face of the fireplace, and
(b) be designed to prevent embers from entering the supply duct.
(1) Where a supply of combustion air is provided directly to the fire chamber of a fireplace, including a factory-built fireplace, the installation shall comply with the “Outdoor Air Supply” requirements provided in CAN/CSA-A405-M, “Design and Construction of Masonry Chimneys and Fireplaces.”
9.22.2.Fireplace Liners
(1) Except where a fireplace is equipped with a steel liner, every fireplace shall have a firebrick liner.
(1) Fireplace liners shall be not less than
(a) 50 mm thick for the sides and back, and
(b) 25 mm thick for the floor.
(2) Firebrick liners shall be laid with high temperature cement mortar conforming to CAN/CGSB-10.3, “Air Setting Refractory Mortar.”
(3) Joints between a firebrick liner and the adjacent backing masonry shall be offset.
(1) Steel liners for fireplaces shall conform to CAN/ULC-S639M, “Standard for Steel Liner Assemblies for Solid-Fuel Burning Masonry Fireplaces,” and shall be installed in accordance with the installation instructions in that standard.
9.22.3.Fireplace Walls
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), the thickness of the back and sides of a fireplace, including the thickness of any firebrick liner, shall be not less than 190 mm where a metal liner or a firebrick liner less than 51 mm thick is used.
(2) When a steel fireplace liner is used with an air circulating chamber surrounding the firebox, the back and sides of the fireplace shall consist of
(a) solid masonry units not less than 90 mm thick, or
(b) hollow masonry units not less than 190 mm thick.
9.22.4.Fire Chamber
(1) The distance from the back of the fire chamber to the plane of the fireplace opening shall be not less than 300 mm.
9.22.5.Hearth
(1) Except as required in Sentence (2), fireplaces shall have a noncombustible hearth extending not less than 400 mm in front of the fireplace opening measured from the facing, and not less than 200 mm beyond each side of the fireplace opening.
(2) Where the fire chamber floor is elevated more than 150 mm above the hearth, the dimension of the hearth measured perpendicular to the plane of the fireplace opening shall be increased by not less than
(a) 50 mm for an elevation above 150 mm and not more than 300 mm, and
(b) an additional 25 mm for every 50 mm in elevation above 300 mm.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), the fire chamber floor and hearth shall be supported on a reinforced concrete slab not less than 100 mm thick at its supports and, if cantilevered, not less than 50 mm thick at its unsupported edge.
(2) A hearth for a fireplace with an opening raised not less than 200 mm from a combustible floor is permitted to be supported on that floor provided the requirements of Clauses . to . of CAN/CSA-A405-M, “Design and Construction of Masonry Chimneys and Fireplaces,” are followed.
9.22.6.Damper
(1) The throat of every fireplace shall be equipped with a metal damper sufficiently large to cover the full area of the throat opening.
9.22.7.Smoke Chamber
(1) The sides of the smoke chamber connecting a fireplace throat with aflue shall not be sloped at an angle greater than 45° to the vertical.
(1) The thickness of masonry walls surrounding the smoke chamber shall be not less than 190 mm at the sides, front and back, except that the portions ofthe back exposed to the outside may be 140 mm thick.
9.22.8.Factory-Built Fireplaces
(1) Factory-built fireplaces and their installation shall conform to CAN/ULC-S610, “Standard for Factory-Built Fireplace Systems.”
9.22.9.Clearance of Combustible Material
(1) Combustible material shall not be placed on or near the face of a fireplace within 150 mm of the fireplace opening, except that where the combustibl e material projects more than 38 mm out from the face of the fireplace above the opening, such material shall be not less than 300 mm above the top of the opening.
(1) Metal exposed to the interior of a fireplace such as the damper control mechanism shall have not less than a 50 mm clearance from any combustible material on the face of the fireplace where such metal penetrates through the face of the fireplace.
(1) Not less than a 100 mm clearance shall be provided between the back and sides ofa fireplace and combustible framing, except that a 50 mm clearance is permitted where the fireplace is located in an exterior wall.
(2) Not less than a 50 mm clearance shall be provided between the back and sides of the smoke chamber of a fireplace and combustible framing, except that a 25 mm clearance is permitted where the fireplace is located in an exterior wall.
(1) The clearance of combustible material above heat-circulating duct outlets from those outlets shall be not less than
(a) 300 mm where the combustible material projects not less than 38 mm from the face, and
(b) 150 mm where the projection is less than 38 mm.
9.22.10.Fireplace Inserts and Hearth-Mounted Stoves
(1) Fireplace inserts and hearth-mounted stoves vented through the throat of a fireplace shall conform to ULC-S628, “Standard for Fireplace Inserts.”
(1) The installation of fireplace inserts and hearth-mounted stoves vented through the throat of a fireplace shall conform to CSA B365, “Installation Code for Solid-Fuel-Burning Appliances and Equipment.”
(2) Fireplace inserts and hearth-mounted stoves vented through the throat of a fireplace described in Sentence (1) may be installed in existing fireplaces only ifa minimum thickness of 190 mm of solid masonry is provided between the smoke chamber and any existing combustible materials, unless the insert is listed for lesser clearances.
(3) A fireplace insert installed in a masonry fireplace shall have
(a) a listed metal chimney liner installed from the insert collar to the top of the chimney, or
(b) a direct sealed connection to the chimney flue where such provision is part ofan insert conforming to Sentence .(1).
Section 9.23.Wood-Frame Construction
9.23.1.Application
(1) This Section applies to constructions where wall, floor and roof planes are generally comprised of lumber frames of small repetitive structural members, or engineered components, and where
(a) roof and wall planes are clad, sheathed or braced on at least one side,
(b) the small repetitive structural members are spaced not more than 600 mm o.c.,
(c) the constructions do not serve as foundations,
(d) the specified live load on supported subfloors and floor framing does not exceed 2.4 kPa, and
(e) the span ofany structural member does not exceed 12.20 m. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Where the conditions in Sentence (1) are exceeded for wood construction, the design of the framing and fastening shall conform to Subsection .
9.23.2.General
(1) All members shall be so framed, anchored, fastened, tied and braced to provide the necessary strength and rigidity.
(1) Ends of wood joists, beams and other members framing into masonry or concrete shall be treated to prevent decay where the bottom of the member is at or below ground level, or a 12 mm air space shall be provided at the end and sides of the member.
(2) Air spaces required in Sentence (1) shall not be blocked by insulation, vapour barriers or airtight materials.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), wood framing members that are not pressure-treated with a wood preservative and that are supported on concrete in contact with the ground or fill shall be separated from the concrete by not less than 0.05 mm polyethylene film or Type S roll roofing.
(2) Dampproofing material referred to in Sentence (1) is not required where the wood member is at least 150 mm above the ground.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (3), connectors in contact with preservative-treated wood shall be made of
(a) hot-dipped, zinc-coated galvanized steel with a coating weight not less than Z550 conforming to ASTM A653 / A653M, “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process,”
(b) a material that provides an equivalent level of corrosion protection to that provided by the material described in Clause (a), or
(c) stainless steel.
(2) Fasteners used to attach the connectors referred to in Sentence (1) shall be made of
(a) galvanized steel coated with zinc in accordance with ASTM A153 / A153M, “Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware,” or
(b) a material that provides an equivalent level of performance and is compatible with the connector.
(3) Connectors and fasteners that are in contact with wood that has been treated with a disodium octaborate tetrahydrate (SBX (DOT)) or zinc borate preservative and is installed in a dry interior environment are permitted to be made of uncoated carbon steel. (See Note A-.(3))
(1) Lumber shall conform to the appropriate requirements in Subsection .
9.23.3.Fasteners and Connectors
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2) and unless otherwise indicated, nails specified in this Section shall be common steel wire nails or common spiral nails, conforming to
(a) ASTM F1667, “Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes and Staples,” or
(b) CSA B111, “Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.”
(2) Nails used to comply with Table . shall have a diameter not less than that stated in Table . (See Note A-.(2))
(3) Wood screws specified in this Section shall conform to ANSI/ASME B18.6.1., “Wood Screws (Inch Series)”. (See Note A-.(3))
Table 9.23.3.1. Diameter of Nails Forming Part of Sentence 9.23.3.1.(2)
| Minimum Length of Nails, mm | Minimum Diameter of Nails, mm |
|---|---|
| 57 | 2.87 |
| 63 | 3.25 |
| 76 | 3.66 |
| 82 | 3.66 |
| 101 or greater | 4.88 |
(1) All nails shall be long enough so that not less than half their required length penetrates into the second member.
(1) Splitting of wood members shall be minimized by staggering the nails in the direction of the grain and by keeping nails well in from the edges. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), nailing of framing shall conform to Table .
(2) Where the bottom wall plate or sole plate of an exterior wall is not nailed to joists or blocking in conformance with Table ., the exterior wall is permitted to be fastened to the floor framing by
(a) having plywood, OSB or waferboard sheathing extend down over floor framing and fastened to the floor framing by nails or staples conforming to Article ., or
(b) tying the wall framing to the floor framing by 50 mm wide galvanized-metal strips
(i) 50 mm wide,
(ii) not less than 0.41 mm thick,
(iii) spaced not more than 1.2 m apart, and
(iv) fastened at each end with at least two 63 mm nails.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Article . for requirements on the nailing of top plates in braced wall bands.
(2) See Sentence .(2).
(3) See Sentence .(3).
(4) See Sentence .(3).
(5) Where heavyweight construction is used in the roof of the space, at least 8 nails are required. (See Note A-.(1)(a)(i))
(1) Except as required by Sentences (2) to (4), fastening of sheathing and subflooring shall conform to Table . - A.
Table 9.23.3.5.-A Fasteners for Subflooring and for Sheathing where the 1-in-50 HWP < 0.8 kPa and Sa(0.2) ≤ 0.70 Forming Part of Sentence 9.23.3.5.(1)
| Element | Minimum Length of Fastener s, mm | Minimum Number or Maximum Spacing of Fasteners | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Common or Spiral Nails | Ring Thread Nails or Screws | Roofing Nails | Staples | ||
| Board lumber 184 mm or less wide | 51 | 45 | n/a | 51 | 2 per support |
| Board lumber more than 184 mm wide | 51 | 45 | n/a | 51 | 3 per support |
| Fibreboard sheathing up to 13 mm thick | n/a | n/a | 44 | 28 | 150 mm o .c. along edges and 300 mm o .c. along intermediate supports |
| Gypsum sheathing up to 13 mm thick | n/a | n/a | 44 | n/a | |
| Plywood , OSB or waferboard up to 10 mm thick | 51 | 45 | n/a | 38 | |
| Plywood , OSB or waferboard over 10 mm and up to 20 mm thick | 51 | 45 | n/a | 51 | |
| Plywood , OSB or waferboard over 20 mm and up to 25 mm thick | 57 | 51 | n/a | n/a |
(2) Fastening of roof sheathing and sheathing in required braced wall panels shall conform to Table .-B, where
(a) the 1-in-50 hourly wind pressure (HWP) is equal to or greater than 0.8 kPa and less than 1.2 kPa and the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is not more than 0.90, or
(b) the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is greater than 0.70 and not more than 0.90.
(3) Fastening of roof sheathing and sheathing in required braced wall panels shall conform to Table .-C, where
(a) the 1-in-50 hourly wind pressure (HWP) is equal to or greater than 0.8 kPa and less than 1.2 kPa and the spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is not more than 1.8, or
(b) the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is greater than 0.90 and not more than 1.8.
(4) Fastening of sheathing shall conform to Part 4,
(a) where the 1-in-50 hourly wind pressure is equal to or greater than 1.2 kPa, or
(b) for required braced wall panels, where the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is greater than 1.8.
(5) Staples shall not be less than 1.6 mm in diameter or thickness, with not less than a 9.5 mm crown driven with the crown parallel to framing.
Table .-B Fasteners for Sheathing where 0.8 kPa ≤ 1-in-50 HWP < 1.2 kPa and Sa(0.2) ≤ 0.90 or where 0.70 < Sa(0.2) ≤ 0.90 Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
[TABLE:1] Notes to Table .-B:
(1) See Note A-Table .-B.
Table .-C Fasteners for Sheathing where 0.8 kPa ≤ 1-in-50 HWP < 1.2 kPa and Sa(0.2) ≤ 1.8 or where 0.90 < Sa(0.2) ≤ 1.8 Forming Part of Sentence .(3)
[TABLE:2] Notes to Table .-C:
(1) See Note A-Table .-B.
(6) Roofing nails for the attachment of fibreboard or gypsum sheathing shall not be less than 3.2 mm in diameter with a minimum head diameter of 11.1 mm.
(7) Flooring screws shall not be less than 3.2 mm in diameter.
(7.1) Where roof sheathing supports are spaced at more than 400 mm o.c., the maximum spacing of fasteners for roof sheathing shall be 150 mm along edges and intermediate supports.
(8) The edges of sheathing in a braced wall panel shall be supported and fastened to wood blocking where
(a) the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is greater than 1.2, or
(b) the braced wall panel supports more than a roof of lightweight construction.
9.23.4.Maximum Spans
(1) Spans provided in this Subsection for joists, beams and lintels supporting floors shall apply only where
(a) the floors serve residential areas as described in Table ., or
(b) the uniformly distributed live load on the floors does not exceed that specified for residential areas as described in Table .
(2) Spans for joists, beams and lintels supporting floors shall be determined according to Subsection . where the supported floors
(a) serve other than residential areas, or
(b) support a uniform live load in excess of that specified for residential areas.
(1) Except as required in Sentence (2) and Article ., spans for wood joists and rafters shall conform to the spans shown in Span Tables .-A to -G for the uniform live loads shown in the Tables. (See Article
(1) The spans for steel beams with laterally supported top flanges shall conform to Table . for floors and Span Tables .-A to .-J for roofs and floors. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Beams described in Sentence (1) shall at least meet the requirements for Grade 350 W steel in CSA G40.21, “Structural quality steel.”
(3) A beam may be considered to be laterally supported if
(a) the wood joists bear on its top flange at intervals of 600 mm or less over its entire length,
(b) the load being applied to this beam is transmitted through the joists, and
(c) 19 mm by 38 mm wood strips in contact with the top flange are nailed on both sides of the beam to the bottom of the joist supported.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Note A-Table .
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), where a floor is required to support a concrete topping, the joist spans shown Span Table .-A or the spacing of the members shall be reduced to allow for the loads due to the topping.
(2) Where a floor is required to support a concrete topping, joist spans are permitted to be selected from Span Table
(1) Where a roof is required to support an additional uniform dead load from roofing materials such as concrete roofing tile, or materials other than as specified in Section 9.26., such as clay roofing tiles, the additional load shall be allowed for by reducing
(a) the spans for roof joists and rafters in Span Tables .-D to .-G, or the spacing of the members, and
(b) the spans for ridge beams and lintels in Span Tables .-L and .-A to .-D. (See Note A-.)
9.23.5.Notching and Drilling
(1) Holes drilled in roof, floor or ceiling framing members shall be not larger than one-quarter the depth of the member and shall be located not less than 50 mm from the edges, unless the depth of the member is increased by the size of the hole.
(1) Floor, roof and ceiling framing members are permitted to be notched provided the notch is located on the top of the member within half the joist depth from the edge of bearing and is not deeper than one-third the joist depth, unless the depth of the member is increased by the size of the notch.
(1) Wall studs shall not be notched, drilled or otherwise damaged so that the undamaged portion of the stud is less than two-thirds the depth of the stud if the stud is loadbearing or 40 mm if the stud is non-loadbearing, unless the weakened studs are suitably reinforced.
(1) Top plates in walls shall not be notched, drilled or otherwise weakened to reduce the undamaged width to less than 50 mm unless the weakened plates are suitably reinforced.
(1) Roof truss members shall not be notched, drilled or otherwise weakened unless such notching or drilling is allowed for in the design of the truss.
9.23.6.Anchorage
(1) Except as required by Sentence .(1), building frames shall be anchored to the foundation unless a structural analysis that considers wind and earthquake loads and lateral earth pressures shows that anchorage is not required
(2) Except as provided in Sentences (3) to (6), anchorage shall be provided by
(a) embedding the ends of the first floor joists in concrete, or
(b) fastening the sill plate to the foundation with not less than 12.7 mm diam anchor bolts spaced not more than 2.4 m o.c.
(3) For buildings with 2 or more floors supported by frame walls that are in areas where the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is not greater than 0.70 or the 1-in-50 hourly wind pressure (HWP) is equal to or greater than 0.80 kPa but not greater than 1.20 kPa, anchorage shall be provided by fastening the sill plate to the foundation with not less than two anchor bolts per braced wall panel, where all anchor bolts used are
(a) not less than 15.9 mm in diameter, located within 0.5 m of the end of the foundation, and spaced not more than 2.4 m o.c, or
(b) not less than 12.7 mm in diameter, located within 0.5 m of the end of the foundation, and spaced not more than 1.7 m o.c.
(4) For buildings supported by frame walls that are in areas where the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is greater than 0.70 but not greater than 1.8 and the 1-in-50 hourly wind pressure (HWP) is not greater than 1.20 kPa, anchorage shall be provided by fastening the sill plate to the foundation with not less than two anchor bolts per bra ced wall panel located within 0.5 m of the end of the foundation and spaced in accordance with Table .
(5) Anchor bolts referred to in Sentences (2) to (4) shall be
(a) fastened to the sill plate with nuts and washers,
(b) embedded not less than 100 mm in the foundation, and
(c) so designed that they may be tightened without withdrawing them from the foundation. Table9.. Anchor Bolt Spacing where the 1-in-50 HWP ≤ 1.20 kPa and 0.70 < Sa(0.2) ≤ 1.8 Forming Part of Sentence .(4)
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Note A-.(1)(a)(i).
(2) All constructions include support of a roof load in addition to the indicated number of floors.
(6) Where the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is greater than 1.8 or the 1-in-50 hourly wind pressure is equal to or greater than 1.2 kPa, anchorage shall be designed according to Part 4.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), exterior columns and posts shall be anchored to resist uplift and lateral movement.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), where columns or posts support balconies, decks, verandas and other exterior platforms, and the distance from finished ground to the underside of the joists is not more than 600 mm,
(a) the columns or posts shall be anchored to the foundation to resist uplift and lateral movement, or
(b) the supported joists or beams shall be directly anchored to the ground to resist uplift.
(3) Anchorage is not required for platforms described in Sentence (2) that
(a) are not more than 1 storey in height,
(b) are not more than 55 m² in area,
(c) do not support a roof, and
(d) are not attached to another structure, unless it can be demonstrated that differential movement will not adversely affect the performance of the structure to which the platform is attached.
(1) Buildings not more than 4.3 m wide and not more than 1storey in building he ight that are not anchored in accordance with Sentence .(1)shall be anchored in conformance with the requirements of CSA Z240.10.1, “Site preparation, foundation,and installation of buildings.”
9.23.7.Sill Plates
(1) Where sill plates provide bearing for the floor system, they shall be not less than 38 mm by 89 mm material.
(1) Sill plates shall be
(a) levelled by setting them on a full bed of mortar, or
(b) laid directly on the foundation where the top of the found ation is level. (See also Article .)
(2) The joint between the sill plate for exterior walls and the foundation shall be sealed in accordance with Subsection .
9.23.8.Beams to Support Floors
(1) Beams shall have even and level bearing and the bearing at end supports shall be not less than 89 mm long, except as stated in the notes to Span Tables .-H to .-K. .
(1) Exterior steel beams shall be shop primed with rust-inhibitive paint.
(1) Where a beam is made up of individual pieces of lumber that are nailed together, the individual members shall be 38 mm or greater in thickness and installed on edge.
(2) Except as permitted in Sentence (3), where individual members ofa built-up beam are butted together to form a joint, the joint shall occur over a support.
(3) Where a beam is continuous over more than one span, individual members are permitted to be butted together to form a joint at or within 150 mm of the end quarter points of the clear spans, provided the quarter points are not those closest to the ends of the beam.
(4) Members joined at quarter points shall be continuous over adjacent supports.
(5) Joints in individual members of a beam that are located at or near the end quarter points shall not occur in adjacent members at the same quarter point and shall not reduce the effective beam width by more than half.
(6) Not more than one butt joint shall occur in any individual member of a built-up beam within any one span.
(7) Except as provided in Sentence (8), where 38 mm members are laid on edge to form a built-up beam, individual members shall be nailed together with a double row of nails not less than 89 mm in length, spaced not more than 450 mm apart in each row with the end nails located 100 mm to 150 mm from the end of each piece.
(8) Where 38 mm members in built-up wood beams are not nailed together as provided in Sentence (7), they shall be bolted together with not less than 12.7 mm diam bolts equipped with washers and spaced not more than 1.2 m o.c., with the end bolts located not more than 600 mm from the ends of the members.
9.23.9.Floor Joists
(1) Except when supported on ribbon boards, floor joists shall have not less than 38 mm length of end bearing.
(2) Ribbon boards referred to in Sentence (1) shall be not less than 19 mm by 89 mm lumber let into the studs.
(1) Floor joists may be supported on the tops of beams or may be framed into the sides of beams.
(2) When framed into the side ofa wood beam, joists referred to in Sentence (1) shall be supported on
(a) joist hangers or other acceptable mechanical connectors, or
(b) not less than 38 mm by 64 mm ledger strips nailed to the side of the beam, except that 38 mm by 38 mm ledger strips may be used provided each joist is nailed to the beam by at least four 89 mm nails, in addition to the nailing for the ledger strip required in Table .
(3) When framed into the side ofa steel beam, joists referred to in Sentence (1) shall be supported on the bottom flange of the beam or on not less than 38 mm by 38 mm lumber bolted to the web with not less than 6.3 mm diam bolts spaced not more than 600 mm apart.
(4) Joists referred to in Sentence (3) shall be spliced above the beam with not less than 38 mm by 38 mm lumber at least 600 mm long to support the flooring.
(5) Not less than a 12 mm space shall be provided between the splice required in Sentence (4) and the beam to allow for shrinkage of the wood joists.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence .(1), bottoms of floor joists shall be restrained from twisting at each end by toe-nailing to the supports, end-nailing to the header joists or by providing continuous strapping, blocking between the joists or cross-bridging near the supports.
(1) Header joists around floor openings shall be doubled when they exceed 1.2 m in length.
(2) The size of header joists exceeding 3.2 m in length shall be determined by calculations.
(1) Trimmer joists around floor openings shall be doubled when the length of the header joist exceeds 800 mm.
(2) When the header joist exceeds 2 m in length the size of the trimmer joists shall be determined by calculations.
(1) When tail joists and header joists are supported by the floor framing, they shall be supported by suitable joist hangers or nailing in accordance with Table .
(1) Non-loadbearing walls parallel to the floor joists shall be supported by joists beneath the wall or on blocking between the joists.
(2) Blocking referred to in Sentence (1) for the support of non-loadbe arin g walls shall be
(a) not less than 38 mm by 89 mm lumber, and
(b) except as required for the fastening of walls constructed with required braced wall panels, spaced not more than 1.2 m apart.
(3) Except as provided in Sentence (6),non-loadbearing interior walls at right angles to the floor joists are not restricted as to location.
(4) Loadbearing interior walls parallel to floor joists shall be supported by beams or walls of sufficient strength to safely transfer the design loads to the vertical supports.
(5) Unless the joist size is designed to support such loads, loadbearing interior walls at right angles to floor joists shall be located
(a) not more than 900 mm from the joist support where the wall does not support a floor, and
(b) not more than 600 mm from the joist support where the wall supports one or more floors.
(6) Loadbearing and non-loadbearing walls constructed with required braced wall panels shall be continuously supported by floor joists, blocking or rim joists to allow for the required fastening. (See Table .)
(1) Floor joists supporting roof loads shall not be cantilevered more than 400 mm beyond their supports where 38 mm by 184 mm joists are used and not more than 600 mm beyond their supports where 38 mm by 235 mm or larger joists are used.
(2) The cantilevered portions referred to in Sentence (1) shall not support floor loads from other storeys unless calculations are provided to show that the design resistances ofthe cantilevered joists are not exceeded.
(3) Where cantilevered floor joists described in Sentences(1)and (2) are at right angles to the main floor joists, the tail joists in the cantilevered portion shall extend inward away from the cantilever support a distance equal to not less than 6 times the length of the cantilever, and shall be end nailed to an interior doubled header joist in conformance with Table .
9.23.10.Wall Studs
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), the size and spacing of studs shall conform to Table .
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Article .
(2) Studs for walls not listed in Table . and supporting roof loads shall conform to Span Tables .-A to
(0.1) Except as provided in Sentence (0.2), each exterior wall in each storey shall be braced with at least one diagonal brace conforming to Sentence (0.3).
(0.2) Bracing is not required where the walls
(a) have an interior finish conforming to the requirements of Section 9.29., or
(b) where the walls are
(i) clad with panel-type siding,
(ii) diagonally sheathed with lumber, or
(iii) sheathed with plywood, OSB, waferboard, gypsum or fibreboard sheathing.
(0.3) Where bracing is required, it shall
(a) consist of not less than 19 mm by 89 mm wood members,
(b) be applied to the studs at an angle of approximately 45 ° to the horizontal, and
(c) extend the full height of the wall on each storey.
(0.4) Bracing described in Sentence (0.3) shall be nailed to each stud and wall plate by at least two 63 mm nails.
(1) Where loadbearing interior walls are not finished in accordance with Sentence (0.2), blocking or strapping shall be fastened to the studs at mid-height to prevent sideways buckling.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentences (2) and (3), all studs shall be placed at right angles to the wall face.
(2) Studs on the flat are permitted to be used in gable ends of roofs that contain only unfinished space or in non- loadbearing interior walls within the limits described in Article .
(3) Wall studs that support only a load from an attic not accessible by a stairway are permitted to be placed on the flat within the limits permitted in Article . provided
(a) the studs are clad on at least one side with plywood, OSB or waferboard sheathing fastened to the face of the studs with a structural adhesive, and
(b) the portion of the roof supported by the studs does not exceed 2.1 m in width.
(1) Wall studs shall be continuous for the full storey height except at openings and shall not be spliced except by finger- jointing with a structural adhesive. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Corners and intersections shall be designed to provide adequate support for the vertical edges of interior finishes, sheathing and cladding materials, and in no instance shall exterior corners be framed with less than the equivalent of two studs.
(2) Where the vertical edges of interior finishes at wall intersections are supported at vertical intervals by blocking or furring, the vertical distance between such supports shall not exceed the maximum distance between supports specified in Section 9.29.
(1) Where the lintel spanning the opening is more than 3 m long, studs shall be tripled on each side of the opening so that
(a) the two inner studs on each side extend from the bottom of the supported lintel to the top of the bottom wall plate, and
(b) the outer stud on each side extends from the bottom of the top wall plate to the bottom wall plate.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3),where the lintel spanning the opening is not more than 3 m long, studs shall be doubled on each side of the opening so that
(a) the inner studs on each side extend from the bottom of the supported lintel to the top of the bottom wall plate, and
(b) the outer stud on each side extends from the bottom of the top wall plate to the bottom wall plate.
(3) Single studs are permitted to be used on either side of openings
(a) in non-loadbearing interior walls not required to have fire-resistance ratings, provided the studs extend from the top wall plate to the bottom wall plate, or
(b) in loadbearing or non-loadbearing interior or exterior walls, provided
(i) the opening is less than and within the required stud spacing, and
(ii) no 2 such openings of full stud-space width are located in adjacent stud spaces. (See Note A-.(3))
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), stud posts shall be designed in accordance with Part 4.
(2) The number of studs in a wall directly below a girder truss or roof beam shall conform to Tables -A to
9.23.11.Wall Plates
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), wall plates shall be
(a) not less than 38 mm thick, and
(b) not less than the required width of the wall studs.
(2) In non-loadbearing walls and in loadbearing walls where the studs are located directly over framing members, the bottom wall plate may be 19 mm thick.
(1) A bottom wall plate shall be provided in all cases.
(2) The bottom plate in exterior walls shall not project more than one-third the plate width over the support.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentences (2) to (4), at least 2 top plates shall be provided in loadbearing walls.
(2) A single top plate is permitted to be used in a section of a loadbearing wall containing a lintel provided the top plate forms a tie across the lintel.
(3) A single top plate is permitted to be used in loadbe aring walls where the concentrated loads from ceilings, floors and roofs are not more than 50 mm to one side of the supporting studs and in all non-loadbearing walls.
(4) The top plates need not be provided in a section of loa dbearing wall containing a lintel provided the lintel is tied to the adjacent wall section with not less than
(a) 75 mm by 150 mm by 0.91 mm thick galvanized steel, or
(b) 19 mm by 89 mm by 300 mm wood splice nailed to each wall section with at least three 63 mm nails.
(1) Joints in the top plates of loadbearing walls shall be staggered not less than one stud spacing.
(2) The top plates in loadbearing walls shall be lapped or otherwise tied at corners and intersecting walls in accordance with Sentence (4).
(3) Joints in single top plates used with loadbearing walls shall be tied in accordance with Sentence (4).
(4) Ties referred to in Sentences (2) and (3) shall be the equivalent of not less than 75 mm by 150 mm by 0.91 mm thick galvanized steel nailed to each wall with at least three 63 mm nails.
(5) Where the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is greater than 0.70 but not more than 1.8, doubled top plates in braced wall bands shall be fastened on each side of a splice with 76 mm long common steel wire nails or spiral nails in accordance with Table .
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Note A-.(1)(a)(i).
(2) All constructions include support of a roof load in addition to the number of floors indicated.
9.23.12.Framing Over Openings
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), openings in non-loadbearing walls shall be framed with not less than 38 mm material the same width as the studs, securely nailed to adjacent studs.
(2) Openings for doors in non-loadbearing walls required to be fire separations with afire-resistance rating shall be framed with the equivalent of at least two 38 mm thick members that are the same width as the wall plates.
(1) Openings in loadbearing walls greater than the required stud spacing shall be framed with lintels designed to carry the superimposed loads to adjacent studs. (See Note A-.(3))
(2) Except as provided in Sentence .(2), where 2 or more members are used in lintels, they shall be fastened together with not less than 82 mm nails in a double row, with nails not more than 450 mm apart in each row.
(3) Lintel members are permitted to be separated by filler pieces.
(1) Spans and sizes of wood lintels shall conform to the spans shown in Span Tables .-L and .-A to
9.23.13.Bracing to Resist Lateral Loads Due to Wind and Earthquake
(See Note A-.)
(1) This Article applies in locations where the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is not more than 0.70 and the 1-in- 50 hourly wind pressure is less than 0.80 kPa.
(2) Bracing to resist lateral loads shall be designed and constructed as follows:
(a) exterior walls shall be
(i) clad with panel-type cladding in accordance with Section 9.27.,
(ii) sheathed with plywood, OSB, waferboard, fibreboard, gypsum board or diagonal lumber sheathing complying with Subsection . and fastened in accordance with Table .-A, or
(iii) finished on the interior with a panel-type material in accordance with the requirements of Section 9.29., or
(b) in accordance with
(i) Articles . to9..,
(ii) Part 4, or
(iii) good engineering practice such as that provided in CWC 2014,“Engineering Guide for Wood Frame Construction.力
(1) Except as provided in Article ., this Article applies in locations where
(a) the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is greater than 0.70 but not more than 1.8 and
(i) the lowest exterior frame wall supports not more than 1 floor in buildings of heavy construction, or (See Note A-.(1)(a)(i))
(ii) the lowest exterior frame wall supports not more than 2 floors in other types of construction, and
(b) the 1-in-50 hourly wind pressure is less than 1.20 kPa.
(2) Bracing to resist lateral loads shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
(a) Articles9.. to9..,
(b) Part 4, or
(c) good engineering practice such as that provided in CWC 2014,“Engineering Guide for Wood Frame Construction.力
(1) Except as provided in Articles . and ., this Article applies in locations where
(a) the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is
(i) greater than 1.8,
(ii) greater than 0.70 and the lowest exterior frame wall supports more than 2 floors in buildings of light construction, or
(iii) greater than 0.70 and the lowest exterior frame wall supports more than 1 floor in buildings of heavy construction, or
(b) the 1-in-50 hourly wind pressure is equal to or greater than 1.20 kPa.
(2) Bracing to resist lateral loads shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
(a) Part 4, or
(b) good engineering practice such as that provided in CWC 2014,“Engineering Guide for Wood Frame Construction.力
(1) Braced wall band s shall
(a) be full storey height,
(b) be not more than 1.2 m wide,
(c) lap at both ends with another braced wall band,
(d) be aligned with braced wall bands on storeys above and below, and
(e) conform to the spacing and dimensions given in Table .
(2) The perimeter of the building shall be located within braced wall bands.
(3) For split-level buildi ngs, a braced wall band shall be located where there is a change in floor level greater than the depth of one floor joist.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) to (5) and Article ., braced wall panels shall
(a) be located within braced w all bands,
(b) extend, as applicable, from the top of the supporting footing, slab or subfloor to the underside of the floor, ceiling or roof framing above, and
(c) conform to the spacing and dimensions given in Table .
(2) In basements or crawl spaces where the perimeter foundation walls extend from the footings to the underside of the supported floor, braced wall bands constructed with braced wall panels shall be spaced not more than
(a) 15 m from the perimeter foundation walls,
(b) 15 m from interior fou ndation walls, and
(c) 15 m from adjacent braced wall bands constructed with braced wall panels. (See Note A-.(2))
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Note A-Table .
(2) All constructions include support of a roof load in addition to the indicated number of floors.
(3) See Article . for alternative methods of compliance.
(4) See Sentence .(1) for overall limit on application to heavy construction.
(3) Portions ofthe perimeter of a single open or enclosed space need not comply with Sentence (1),where
(a) the roof of the space projects not more than
(i) 3.5 m from the face of the framing of the nearest parallel braced w all band, and
(ii) the perpendicular plan dimension,
(b) that portion of the perimeter structure does not support a floor,
(c) the roof of the space is
(i) integral with the roof of the rest ofthe buildin g with framing members not more than 400 mm o.c. where roof sheathing edges are not supported on blocking and not more than 600 mm o.c. where roof sheathing edges are supported on blocking securely fastened between framing members, or
(ii) constructed with roof framing not more than 400 mm o.c. where roof sheathing edges are not supported on blocking and not more than 600 mm o.c. where roof sheathing edges are supported on blocking securely fastened between framing members, and fastened to the wall framing, and (See Table . and Article . for balloon framing)
(d) the end-joists or end-rafters for the roof of the space are fastened to a 3-ply, 38 mm × 140 mm built-up column or a 5-ply, 38 mm × 89 mm built-up column that is integral with the wall framing. (See Note A-.(3))
(4) Walls in detached garages and in accessory buildings serving a single dwelling unit, and the front wall of attached garages serving a single dwelling unit need not comply with Sentence (1)where these walls do not support a floor.
(5) Braced wall panels in the braced wall band at the front of an attached garage serving a single dwelling unit need not comply with Sentence (1),provided
(a) the maximum spacing between the front of the garage and the back wall of the garage does not exceed 7.6 m,
(b) there is not more than one floor above the garage,
(c) not less than 50% of the length of the back wall of the garage is constructed of braced wall panels, and
(d) not less than 25% of the length of the side walls is constructed of braced wall panels.
(1) Required braced wall panels shall be
(a) clad with panel-type cladding complying with Section 9.27. and Table .,
(b) sheathed with plywood, OSB, waferboard or diagonal lumber sheathing complying with Subsection . and Table ., and fastened in accordance with Article ., or
(c) finished on the interior with a panel-type material in accordance with the requirements of Section 9.29. and Table .
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Sentences (5) and (6).
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), required interior braced wall panels shall be
(a) sheathed or finished on both sides with a wood-based material, or
(b) finished on both sides with gypsum board.
(3) Required interior braced wall panels of wood-based material may be sheathed on one side only, provided
(a) the sheathing material is plywood, OSB or waferboard, and
(b) the maximum spacing of fasteners along the edge is half of the maximum spacing shown in Table .-B.
(4) For stacked braced wall bands, where the construction of any one braced wall panel is required to be of a wood- based material, a wood-based material shall be installed in all the required braced wall panels in that braced wall band.
(5) Gypsum board interior finish shall not be considered as an acceptable sheathing material to provide the required bracing in exterior walls. (See Note A-.(5) and (6))
(6) At braced wall band spacing intervals of not more than 15 m, braced wall panels shall be constructed with OSB, plywood or diagonal lumber. (See Note A-.(5) and (6))
(1) Except as provided in Sentences(2)and(3),one exterior wall of the uppermost storey in each orthogonal direction may be set back from the exterior wall of the storey below, provided the adjacent interior braced wall band of the storey below the setback
(a) is spaced not more than 10.6 m from the exterior wall of the storey below the setback wall,
(b) consists of braced wall panels that are constructed of a wood-based material in conformance with Sentence .(2),
(c) extends to the foundation, and
(d) is not taken into consideration when providing braced wall panels constructed of a wood-based material at spacing intervals of not more than 15 m as per Sentence .(6).
(2) Where the exterior wall of the uppermost storey is set back from the exterior wall of the storey below, the roof and floor space supporting the setback wall shall be sheathed with a wood-based material between the exterior wall of the storey below the setback and the adjacent interior braced wall bands of the storey below the setback.
(3) Where the exterior wall of the uppermost storey is set back from the exterior wall of the storey below, the exterior walls perpendicular to the setback wall shall
(a) have their top plate connected with nails that are spaced at no greater than half the spacing required in Table ., and
(b) have their top plate splices fastened with twice the number of nails specified in Sentences .(4) and (5).
(4) The maximum distance between adjacent required braced wall panels in a braced wall band, measured from the edge of the panels, may be increased to 7.3 m provided that, throughout the height of the building, the length of any braced wall panel within the braced wall band is not less than 1.2 m.
(5) The maximum spacing between the centre lines of required braced wall bands given in Table . may be increased from 7.6 m to no more than 10.6 m, provided that the interior braced wall band whose spacing is being increased is replaced with an interior braced wa ll band that
(a) consists of braced wall panels that are constructed of a wood-based material in conformance with Sentence .(2),
(b) extends to the foundation, and
(c) is not taken into consideration when providing braced wall panels constructed of a wood-based material at spacing intervals no greater than 15 m as per Sentence .(6).
(6) For each orthogonal direction of the building, the length of required braced wall panels of one exterior wall given in Table . may be reduced from 40% to no less than 25% of the length of the braced wall band, provided an additional parallel and adjacent interior braced wall band is constructed that
(a) is spaced not more than 10.6 m from the exterior wall,
(b) consists of braced wall panels that are constructed of a wood-based material in conformance with Sentence
9.23.14.Roof and Ceiling Framing
(1) Roof rafters and joists and ceiling joists shall be continuous or shall be spliced over vertical supports that extend to suitable bearing.
(1) Roof and ceiling framing members shall be doubled on each side of openings greater than 2 rafter or joist spacings wide.
(1) The length of end bearing of joists and rafters shall be not less than 38 mm.
(1) Rafters shall be located directly opposite each other and tied together at the peak, or may be offset by their own thickness if nailed to a ridge board not less than 17.5 mm thick.
(2) Except as permitted in Sentence (3), framing members shall be connected by gusset plates or nailing at the peak in conformance with Table .
(3) Where the roof framing on opposite sides of the peak is assembled separately, such as in the case of factory-built houses, the roof framing on opposite sides is permitted to be fastened together with galvanized-steel strips not less than 200 mm by 75 mm by 0.41 mm thick spaced not more than 1.2 m apart and nailed at each end to the framing by at least two 63 mm nails.
(1) Rafters shall be shaped at supports to provide even bearing surfaces and supported directly above the exterior walls.
(1) Hip and valley rafters shall be not less than 50 mm greater in depth than the common rafters and not less than 38 mm thick, actual dimension.
(1) Ceiling joists and collar ties of not less than 38 mm by 89 mm lumber are permitted to be assumed to provide intermediate support to reduce the span for rafters and joists where the roof slope is 1 in 3 or greater.
(2) Collar ties referred to in Sentence (1) more than 2.4 m long shall be laterally supported near their centres by not less than 19 mm by 89 mm continuous members at right angles to the collar ties.
(3) Dwarf walls and struts are permitted to be used to provide intermediate support to reduce the span for rafters and joists.
(4) When struts are used to provide intermediate support, they shall be not less than 38 mm by 89 mm material extending from each rafter to a loadbearing wall at an angle of not less than 45° to the horizontal.
(5) When dwarf walls are used for rafter support, they shall be framed in the same manner as loadbearing walls and securely fastened top and bottom to the roof and ceiling framing to prevent overall movement.
(6) Solid blocking shall be installed between floor joists beneath dwarf walls referred to in Sentence (5) that enclose finished rooms.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (4), roof rafters and joists shall be supported at the ridge of the roof by
(a) a loadbearing wall extending from the ridge to suitable bearing, or
(b) a ridge beam supported by not less than 89 mm length of bearing.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), the ridge beam referred to in Sentence (1) shall conform to the sizes and spans shown in Span Table .-L, provided
(a) the supported rafter or joist length does not exceed 4.9 m, and
(b) the roof does not support any concentrated loads.
(3) The ridge beam referred to in Sentence (1) need not comply with Sentence (2) where
(a) the beam is of not less than 38 mm by 140 mm material, and
(b) the beam is supported at intervals not exceeding 1.2 m by not less than 38 mm by 89 mm members extending vertically from the ridge to suitable bearing.
(4) When the roof slope is 1 in 3 or steeper, ridge support need not be provided when the lower ends of the rafters are adequately tied to prevent outward movement.
(5) Ties required in Sentence (4) are permitted to consist of tie rods or ceiling joists forming a continuous tie for opposing rafters and nailed in accordance with Table .
(6) Except as permitted in Sentence (7), ceiling joists referred to in Sentence (5) shall be tied to the base of every rafter.
(7) Where ceiling joists referred to in Sentence (5) are raised above the base of the rafters, the connections between the rafters and the ceiling joists shall be designed in accordance with Clause .(1)(b) or (c).
(8) Ceiling joists referred to in Sentence (5) that are spliced to make a continuous joist shall be fastened together at each splice with at least one more nail than required for the rafter-to-joist connection shown in Table .
(9) Members referred to in Sentences (6) and (8) are permitted to be fastened together either directly or through a gusset plate.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) Nails with a diameter less than 3.66 mm are permitted to be used, provided the minimum number of nails stated in the Table is modified as follows: • For a nail diameter greater than or equal to 2.86 mm and less than 3.25 mm, add 3 nails to the minimum number of nails, up to a maximum of 10 nails. • For a nail diameter greater than or equal to 3.25 mm and less than 3.66 mm, add 2 nails to the minimum number of nails, up to a maximum of 10 nails. Where more than 10 nails are required, the connections between the rafters and the ceiling joists shall be designed in accordance with Clause .(1)(b) or (c).
(2) The minimum number of nails stated in the Table is applicable to Spruce-Pine-Fir, Douglas Fir-Larch and Hem-Fir members. For Northern Species members, add 2 nails to the minimum number of nails, up to a maximum of 10 nails. Where more than 10 nails are required, the connections between the rafters and the ceiling joists shall be designed in accordance with Clause .(1)(b) or (c).
(3) To accommodate nail spacing, not less than 38 mm × 140 mm joists shall be used where 6 or more nails are required, and not less than 38 mm × 184 mm joists shall be used where 8 or more nails are required.
(4) The minimum number of nails in the Table is applicable for a maximum roof dead load of 0.5 kPa.
(5) The connections between the rafters and the ceiling joists shall be designed in accordance with Clause .(1)(b) or (c).
(1) Roof joists supporting a finished ceiling, other than plywood, OSB or waferboard, shall be restrained from twisting along the bottom edges by means of furring, blocking, cross bridging or strapping conforming to Article .
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), ceiling joists supporting part of the roof load from the rafters shall be not less than 25 mm greater in depth than required for ceiling joists not supporting part of the roof load.
(2) When the roof slope is 1 in 4 or less, the ceiling joist sizes referred to in Sentence (1) shall be determined from Span Tables .-C to .-F and .-L for roof joists.
(1) Roof Wood roof trusses shall be designed in accordance with good engineering practice such as that described in TPIC 2019, “Truss Design Procedures and Specifications for Light Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses.”
(2) The joint connections used in trusses described in Sentence (1) shall be designed in conformance with the requirements in Subsection . (See Note A-.(2))
(3) All member bracing shall be installed as per the truss design drawings, and continuous lateral bracing shall be adequately anchored to the roof and ceiling diaphragms at intervals no greater than 6.10 m o.c.
9.23.15.Subflooring
(1) Subflooring shall be provided beneath finish flooring where the finish flooring does not have adequate strength to support the design loads. (See Subsection .)
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), wood-based panels for subfloors shall conform to
(a) CSA O121, “Douglas fir plywood,”
(b) CSA O151, “Canadian softwood plywood,”
(c) CSA O153, “Poplar plywood,”
(d) CSA O325, “Construction sheathing,” or
(e) CSA O437.0, “OSB and Waferboard.”
(2) Particleboard subflooring may be used only where a building is constructed in a factory so that the subfloor will not be exposed to the weather.
(3) Subflooring described in Sentence (2) shall conform to grade D-2 or D-3 in ANSI A208.1, “Particleboard.”
(4) Subflooring described in Sentence (2) shall have its upper surface and all edges treated to restrict water absorption where the subfloor is used in bathrooms, kitchens, laundry rooms or other areas subject to periodic wetting. (See Note A- .(4))
(1) Where the edges of panel-type subflooring are required to be supported (See Sentence .(2)), such support shall consist of tongue-and-groove panel edges or not less than 38 mm by 38 mm blocking securely nailed between framing members.
(1) Plywood subflooring shall be installed with the surface grain at right angles to the joists and with joints parallel to floor joists staggered.
(2) OSB subflooring conforming to CSA O325, “Construction sheathing,” or to O-1 and O-2 grades in CSA O437.0,
“OSB and Waferboard,” and waferboard subflooring conforming to R-1 grade in CSA O437.0 shall be installed so that the direction of face orientation is at right angles to the joists and the joints parallel to the floor joists are staggered. (See Note A-.(2))
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), subfloors shall conform to Table .-A or .-B.
Table 9.23.15.5.-A Thickness of Subflooring Forming Part of Sentences 9.23.15.5.(1) and 9.23.16.7.(1)
| Maximum Spacing of Supports, mm | Minimum Thickness, mm | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Plywood and OSB , O-2 Grade | OSB , O-1 Grade , and Waferboard , R-1 Grade | Particleboard | Lumber | |
| 400 | 15.5 | 15.9 | 15.9 | 17.0 |
| 500 | 15.5 | 15.9 | 19.0 | 19.0 |
| 600 | 18.5 | 19.0 | 25.4 | 19.0 |
Table .-B Rating for Subfloor when Applying CSA O325 Forming Part of Sentences .(1) and .(1)
| Maximum Spacing of Supports, mm | Panel Mark | |
|---|---|---|
| Subfloor | Subfloor Used with Panel-T ype Underlay | |
| 400 | 1F16 | 2F16 |
| 500 | 1F20 | 2F20 |
| 600 | 1F24 | 2F24 |
(2) Where the finished flooring consists of not less than 19 mm matched wood strip flooring laid at right angles to joists spaced not more than 600 mm o.c., subflooring shall be permitted to consist of not less than
(a) 12.5 mm thick plywood,
(b) 12.5 mm thick OSB conforming to O-2 grade,
(c) 12.7 mm thick OSB conforming to O-1 grade,
(d) 12.7 mm thick waferboard conforming to R-1 grade, or
(e) OSB conforming to 2R32 / 2F16 grade.
(3) Except where the flooring consists of ceramic tiles applied with adhesive, where a separate panel-type underlay or concrete topping is applied to a subfloor on joists spaced not more than 400 mm o.c., the subfloor is permitted to consist of not less than
(a) 12.5 mm thick plywood,
(b) 12.5 mm thick OSB conforming to O-2 grade,
(c) 12.7 mm thick OSB conforming to O-1 grade,
(d) 12.7 mm thick waferboard conforming to R-1 grade, or
(e) OSB conforming to 2R32 / 2F16 grade.
(1) When resilient flooring is applied directly to an OSB, waferboard, particleboard or plywood subfloor, the subfloor shall be fastened to the supports with annular grooved nails.
(1) Lumber subflooring shall be laid at an angle of not less than 45° to the joists.
(2) Lumber subflooring shall be fully supported at the ends on solid bearing.
(3) Lumber for subflooring shall be of uniform thickness and not more than 184 mm wide.
9.23.16.Roof Sheathing
(1) Except where the 1-in-50 hourly wind pressure is less than 0.8 kPa and the seismic spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is less than or equal to 0.70, continuous lumber or panel-type roof sheathing shall be installed to support the roofing.
(1) Wood-based panels used for roof sheathing shall conform to the requirements of
(a) CSA O121, “Douglas fir plywood,”
(b) CSA O151, “Canadian softwood plywood,”
(c) CSA O153, “Poplar plywood,”
(d) CSA O325, “Construction sheathing,” or
(e) CSA O437.0, “OSB and Waferboard.”
(1) Plywood roof sheathing shall be installed with the surface grain at right angles to the roof framing.
(2) OSB roof sheathing conforming to CSA O325, “Construction sheathing,” or to O-1 and O-2 grades as specified in CSA O437.0, “OSB and Waferboard,” shall be installed with the direction of face orientation at right angles to the roof framing members. (See Note A-.(2))
(1) Panel-type sheathing board shall be applied so that joints perpendicular to the roof ridge are staggered where
(a) the sheathing is applied with the surface grain parallel to the roof ridge, and
(b) the thickness of the sheathing is such that the edges are required to be supported.
(2) A gap of not less than 2 mm shall be left between sheets of plywood, OSB or waferboard.
(1) Lumber roof sheathing shall not be more than 286 mm wide and shall be applied so that all ends are supported with end joints staggered.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), where panel-type roof sheathing requires edge support, the support shall consist of metal H clips or not less than 38 mm by 38 mm blocking securely nailed between framing members.
(2) The supports referred to in Sentence (1) are not required when tongued-and-grooved edged panel-type sheathing board is used.
(1) The thickness or rating of roofsheathing on a flat roof used as a walking deck shall conform to either Table
9.23.17.Wall Sheathing
(1) Exterior walls and gable ends shall be sheathed when the exterior cladding requires intermediate fastening between supports or if the exterior cladding requires solid backing.
(1) Where wall sheathing is required for the purpose of complying with this Section, it shall conform to Table .-A or Table .-B. (See also Article .)
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .-A:
(1) See also Sentences .(2) and (3).
(2) The flame-spread rating of gypsum board shall be determined in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102, “Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.”
Table .-B Rating For Wall Sheathing When Applying CSA O325 Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
| Maximum Spacing of Supports, mm | Panel Mark |
|---|---|
| 400 | W16 |
| 500 | W20 |
| 600 | W24 |
(1) Gypsum sheathing, rigid insulation and fibreboard shall not be used for the attachment of siding materials.
(2) Nails used in attaching the materials listed in Sentence (1) shall be not less than 3.2 mm diam with a minimum head diameter of 11 mm.
(1) Lumber wall sheathing shall be applied so that all ends are supported.
(2) Where lumber wall sheathing is required to provide bracing according to Article ., it shall be applied with end joints staggered.
(1) A gap of not less than 2 mm shall be left between sheets of plywood, OSB, waferboard or fibreboard.
(1) Where the bottom portions of mansard style roofs are vented, the vertical framing members behind the sloping portions shall be considered on the same basis as exterior wall studs and shall conform to the appropriate requirements in Articles . to .
Section 9.24.Sheet Steel Stud Wall Framing
9.24.1.General
(1) This Section applies to sheet steel studs for use in non-loadbearing exterior and interior walls.
(2) Where loadbearing steel studs are used, they shall be designed in conformance with Part 4.
(1) Steel studs and runners shall conform to AISI S201, “North American Standard for Cold Formed Steel Framing – Product Data 2012 Edition.”
(1) Metal thickness specified in this Section shall be the minimum base steel thickness exclusive of coatings.
(1) Screws for the application of cladding, sheathing or interior finish materials to steel studs, runners and furring channels shall conform to
(a) ASTM C954, “Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness,” or
(b) ASTM C1002, “Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.”
(1) Cladding or sheathing, and interior finish shall be installed on steel stud framing and shall be fastened with screws
(a) spaced at the appropriate spacing described in Section 9.29., and
(b) penetrating not less than 10 mm through the metal.
9.24.2.Size of Framing
(1) Except as required in Articles . and ., the size and spacing of steel studs for non-loadbearing interior walls shall conform to Table .
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) The values in the Table are based on a single layer of 12.7 mm gypsum panel sheathing installed on each side of the studs. Where one side is not accessible, gypsum panels on only one side will suffice. The values are also based on attaching gypsum panel sheathing using screws not smaller than No. 6 spaced at a maximum of 300 mm at edges and at intermediate supports.
(1) Except as required in Article ., steel studs in non-loadbearing interior walls shall have a metal thickness of not less than 0.46 mm.
(1) Runners for interior and exterior non-loadbearing walls shall have a thickness not less than the thickness of the corresponding studs and shall have not less than 30 mm flanges.
(1) Where openings for doors in non-loadbearing fire separations required to have afire-r esistance rating do not exceed 1 200 mm in width,
(a) the width of steel studs shall be not less than 63 mm, and
(b) the metal thickness shall be not less than 0.46 mm.
(2) Where openings described in Sentence (1) exceed 1 200 mm in width,
(a) the width of steel studs shall be not less than 91 mm, and
(b) the metal thickness shall be not less than 0.85 mm.
(3) The distance to the first stud beyond the jamb of any door opening in a fire separation required to have afire- resistance rating shall not exceed 400 mm.
(4) Where the distance between the framing over the opening referred to in Sentence (3) and the top runner exceeds 400 mm in such walls, intermediate support shall be installed at intervals of not more than 400 mm above the opening.
(1) The size and spacing of non-loadbearing steel studs for exterior walls shall conform to Table .
Table 9.24.2.5. Size and Spacing of Steel Studs for Non-Loadbearing Exterior Walls Forming Part of Sentence 9.24.2.5.(1)
| Minimum Stud Size, mm | Minimum Metal Thickness, mm | Maximum Stud Length , m | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Spacing of Studs | ||||
| 300 mm o .c. | 400 mm o .c. | 600 mm o .c. | ||
| 30 × 91 | 0.53 | 3.0 | 2.4 | — |
| 30 × 91 | 0.69 | 3.3 | 2.7 | 2.4 |
| 30 × 91 | 0.85 | 3.6 | 3.0 | 2.7 |
| 30 × 91 | 1.0 | 4.0 | 3.3 | 3.0 |
9.24.3.Installation
(1) Runners shall be provided at the tops and bottoms of walls.
(2) Runners required in Sentence (1) shall be securely attached to the building at approximately 50 mm from the ends, and at intervals of not more than 600 mm o.c. for interior walls and 300 mm o.c. for exterior walls.
(3) Fasteners used for attachment described in Sentence (2) shall consist of the equivalent of 63 mm nails or 25 mm screws.
(4) Studs at openings and which are not full wall height shall be supported by a runner at the ends of the studs, securely fastened to the full length studs at the sides of the opening.
(1) Steel studs used in walls required to have afire-resistance rating shall be installed so that there is not less than a 12 mm clearance between the top of the stud and the top of the runner to allow for expansion in the event of fire.
(2) Except as provided in Article ., studs in walls referred to in Sentence (1) shall not be attached to the runners in a manner that will prevent such expansion.
(3) Framing above doors with steel door frames in non-loadbearing fire separations required to have afire-resistance rating shall consist of 2 runners on the flat fastened back to back. (See Note A-.(3))
(4) The lower runner required in Sentence (3) shall be cut through the flanges and be bent at each end to extend upwards at least 150 mm and fastened to the adjacent studs.
(1) Steel studs shall be installed with webs at right angles to the wall face and, except at openings, shall be continuous for the full wall height.
(1) Corners and intersections of walls shall be constructed to provide support for the cladding materials.
(1) Studs shall be doubled on each side of every opening where such openings involve more than one stud space, and shall be tripled where the openings in exterior walls exceed 2.4 m in width.
(2) Studs described in Sentence (1) shall be fastened together by screws, crimping or welding to act as a single structural unit in resisting transverse loads.
(1) Studs shall be attached to runners by screws, crimping or welding around wall openings, and elsewhere where necessary to keep the studs in alignment during construction.
(2) Where clearance for expansion is required in Article ., attachment required in Sentence (1) shall be applied between studs and bottom runners only.
(1) Openings for fire dampers in non-loadbearing fire separations required to have afire-resistance rating shall be framed with double studs on each side of the opening.
(2) The sill and header for openings described in Sentence (1) shall consist of a runner track with right angle bends made on each end so as to extend 300 mm above the header or below the sill and fastened to the studs.
(3) The openings described in Sentence (1) shall be lined with a layer of gypsum board not less than 12.7 mm thick fastened to stud and runner webs.
Section 9.25.Heat Transfer, Air Leakage and
9.25.1.General
(1) This Section is concerned with heat, air and water vapour transfer and measures to control condensation.
(2) All walls, ceilings and floors separating conditioned space from unconditioned space, the exterior air or the ground shall be
(a) provided with
(i) thermal insulation conforming to Subsection .,
(ii) an air barrier system conforming to Subsection ., and
(iii) a vapour barrier conforming to Subsection ., and
(b) constructed in such a way that the properties and relative position of all materials conform to Subsection . (See Note A-.(2))
(3) Insulation and sealing of heating and ventilating ducts shall conform to Sections 9.32., 9.33.
9.25.2.Thermal Insulation
(1) All walls, ceilings and floors separating heated space from unheated space, the exterior air or the exterior soil shall be provided with sufficient thermal insulation to prevent moisture condensation on their room side during the winter and to ensure comfortable conditions for the occupants. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Except as required in Sentence (2), thermal insulation shall conform to the requirements of
(a) ASTM C726, “Standard Specification for Mineral Wool Roof Insulation Board,”
(b) CAN/CGSB-51.25-M, “Thermal Insulation, Phenolic, Faced,”
(c) CGSB 51-GP-27M, “Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Loose Fill,”
(d) CAN/ULC-S701.1, “Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene Boards,”
(e) CAN/ULC-S702.1, “Standard for Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings, Part 1: Material Specification,”
(f) CAN/ULC-S703, “Standard for Cellulose Fibre Insulation (CFI) for Buildings,”
(g) CAN/ULC-S704.1, “Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate, Boards, Faced,”
(h) CAN/ULC-S705.1, “Standard for Thermal Insulation-Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density-Material – Specification,” or
(i) CAN/ULC-S706.1, “Standard for Wood Fibre Insulating Boards for Buildings.”
(2) The flame-spread rating requirements contained in the standards listed in Sentence (1) shall not apply. (See Note A- .(2))
(3) Insulation in contact with the ground shall be inert to the action of soil and water and be such that its insulative properties are not significantly reduced by moisture.
(4) Type 1 expanded polystyrene insulation as described in CAN/ULC-S701.1, “Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene Boards,” shall not be used as roof insulation applied above the roofing membrane.
(1) Insulation shall be installed so that there is a reasonably uniform insulating value over the entire face of the insulated area.
(2) Insulation shall be applied to the full width and length of the space between furring or framing.
(3) Except where the insulation provides the principal resistance to air leakage, thermal insulation shall be installed so that at least one face is in full and continuous contact with an element with low air permeance. (See Note A-.(3))
(4) Insulation shall be installed over the full height of foundation walls enclosing abasement or heated crawl space.
(5) Insulation around concrete slabs-on-ground shall be located so that heat from the building is not restricted from reaching the ground beneath the perimeter, where exterior walls are not supported by footings extending below frost level.
(6) Where insulation is exposed to the weather and subject to mechanical damage, it shall be protected with not less than
(a) 6 mm preservative-treated plywood, or
(b) 12 mm cement parging on wire lath applied to the exposed face and edge.
(7) Except as permitted in Sentence (7.1), insulation and vapour barrier located in areas where it may be subject to mechanical damage shall be protected by a covering such as gypsum board, plywood, particleboard, OSB, waferboard or hardboard.
(7.1) In unfinished basements, the protection required in Sentence (7) need not be provided for mineral fibre insulation, provided it is covered with a membrane which complies with the requirements of Section .
(8) Insulation in factory-built buildings shall be installed so that it will not become dislodged during transportation.
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) to (6), loose-fill insulation shall be used on horizontal surfaces only.
(2) Where loose-fill insulation is installed in an unconfined sloped space, such as an attic space over a sloped ceiling, the supporting slope shall not be more than
(a) 4.5 in 12 for mineral fibre or cellulose fibre insulation, and
(b) 2.5 in 12 for other types of insulation.
(3) Loose-fill insulation is permitted to be used in wood-frame walls of existing buildings. (See Note A-.(3))
(4) Where blown-in insulation is installed in above-ground or below-ground wood-frame walls of new buildings,
(a) the density of the installed insulation shall be sufficient to preclude settlement,
(b) the insulation shall be installed behind a membrane that will permit visual inspection prior to installation of the interior finish,
(c) the insulation shall be installed in a manner that will not interfere with the installation of the interior finish, and
(d) no water shall be added to the insulation, unless it can be shown that the added water will not adversely affect other materials in the assembly.
(5) Water repellent loose-fill insulation is permitted to be used between the outer and inner wythes of masonry cavity walls. (See Note A-.(5))
(6) Where soffit venting is used, measures shall be taken
(a) to prevent loose-fill insulation from blocking the soffit vents and to maintain an open path for circulation of air from the vents into the attic o r roof space, and
(b) to minimize airflow into the insulation near the soffit vents to maintain the thermal performance of the material. (See Article .)
(1) Spray-applied polyurethane insulation shall be installed in accordance with CAN/ULC-S705.2, “Standard for Thermal Insulation – Spray-Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density – Application.”
9.25.3.Air Barrier Systems
(1) Wall, ceiling and floor assemblies that separate conditioned spa ce from unconditioned space or from the ground shall be constructed so as to include an air bar rier system that will provide a continuous barrier to air leakage
(a) from the interior of the building into wall, floor, attic or roof spaces sufficient to prevent excessive moisture condensation in such spaces during the winter, and
(b) from the exterior or the ground inward sufficient to
(i) prevent moisture condensation on the room side during winter,
(ii) ensure comfortable conditions for the occupants, and
(iii) minimize the ingress of soil gas. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) The continuity of the air barrier system shall extend throughout the basement.
(1) Sheet and panel type materials intended to provide the principal resistance to air leakage shall have an air leakage characteristic not greater than 0.02 L/(s.m2) measured at an air pressure differential of 75 Pa.
(2) Where polyethylene sheet is used to provide the airtightness in the air barrier system, it shall conform to CAN/CGSB-51.34-M, “Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction.”
(1) Where the air barrier system consists of an air-impermeable panel-type material, all joints shall be sealed to prevent air leakage.
(2) Where the air barrier system consists of flexible sheet material, all joints shall be
(a) sealed with compatible material such as tape or flexible sealant, or
(b) except as required by Sentence (2.1), lapped not less than 100 mm and clamped, such as between framing members, furring or blocking, and rigid panels.
(2.1) Where an air barrier system consisting of flexible sheet material is installed at locations where it is not supported by an interior finish, such as a behind a bathtub, shower enclosure or fireplace, the continuity of the air barrier shall be maintained by sealing its joints.
(3) Where an interior wall meets an exterior wall, ceiling, floor or roof required to be provided with air barrier protection, the air barrier system shall extend across the intersection and shall be sealed in accordance with Sentences (1) and (2).
(4) Where an interior wall projects through a ceiling or extends to become an exterior wall, spaces in the wall shall be blocked to provide continuity across those spaces with the air barrier system in the abutting walls or ceiling by
(a) sealing each air barrier to the blocking, or
(b) wrapping each air barrier around the transition and sealing in accordance with Sentences (1) and (2).
(5) Where an interior floor projects through an exterior wall to become an exterior floor,
(a) the air barrier of the wall under the floor shall be continuous with or sealed to the subfloor or the air barrier on the underside of the floor,
(b) the air barrier of the wall above the floor shall be continuous with or sealed to the subfloor or the air barrier on the top of the floor, and
(c) the spaces between floor joists shall be blocked and sealed.
(5.1) Where a header wrap is used as an air barrier, it shall be sealed or lapped to the wall air barrier above and below in accordance with Sentences (1) and (2).
(6) Penetrations ofthe air barrier system, such as those created by the installation of electrical wiring, electrical boxes, piping or ductwork, shall be sealed to maintain the integrity of the air bar rier system over the entire surface.
(6.1) Where an interior air barrier is penetrated by doors, windows and other fenestration, the air barrier shall be sealed to the door frame or window frame with
(a) compatible tape, or
(b) spray foam insulation.
(6.2) Where an exterior air barrier is penetrated by doors, windows and other fenestration, the air barrier shall be sealed to the door frame or window frame with
(a) compatible flexible flashing material,
(b) caulking, or
(c) spray foam insulation.
(7) Where access hatches and sump pit covers are installed through assemblies constructed with an air barrier system, they shall be weatherstripped around their perimeters to prevent air leakage.
(8) Clearances between chimneys or gas vents and the surrounding construction that would permit air leakage from within the building into a wall or attic or roof space shall be sealed by n oncombustible material to prevent such leakage and shall be sealed to the air barrier with tape or another compatible material, and to the vent with high temperature caulking in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
(9) Reserved.
(10) Sump pit covers shall be sealed to maintain continuity of the air barrier system.
(1) A vapour barrier used as an air barrier shall comply with the requirements of this Subsection.
9.25.4.Vapour Barriers
(1) Thermally insulated wall, ceiling and floor assemblies shall be constructed with a vapour barrier so as to provide a barrier to diffusion of water vapour from the interior into wall spaces, floor spaces or attic or roof spaces.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), vapour barriers shall have a permeance not greater than 60 ng/(Pa×s×m2) measured in accordance with ASTM E96 / E96M, “Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials,” using the desiccant method (dry cup).
(2) Thermally insulated founda tion wall assemblies are permitted to be constructed with variable-permeance vapour barriers having a permeance not greater than 60 ng/(Pa×s×m2) using the desiccant method (dry cup) and greater than 300 ng/(Pa×s×m2) using the water method (wet cup) measured in accordance with ASTM E96 / E96M, “Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.” (See Note A-.(2))
(3) Where the intended use of the interior space will result in high moisture generation, the assembly shall be designed according to Part 5. (See Note A-.(3))
(4) Where polyethylene is installed to serve only as the vapour barrier, it shall comply with Clause 4.4, Thermal Stability, and Clause 5.7, Oxidative Induction Time, of CAN/CGSB-51.34-M, “Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction.”
(5) Membrane-type vapou r barriers other than polyethylene shall conform to the requirements of CAN/CGSB-51.33- M, “Vapour Barrier, Sheet, Excluding Polyethylene, for Use in Building Construction.”
(6) Membrane-type vapour barriers other than polyethylene that are susceptible to deterioration under prolonged exposure to direct ultraviolet radiation shall
(a) be covered, or
(b) only be installed in locations that are not exposed to direct ultraviolet radiation after the completion of construction. (See Note A-.(6))
(7) Where a coating is applied to gypsum board to function as the vapour barrier, the permeance of the coating shall be determined in accordance with CAN/CGSB-1.501-M, “Method for Permeance of Coated Wallboard.”
(8) Where insulation functions as the vapour barrier, it shall be sufficiently thick so as to meet the requirement of Sentence (1).
(1) Products installed to function as the vapour barrier shall protect the warm side of wall, ceiling and floor assemblies.
(2) Where different products are used for the vapour barrier and the insulation, the vapour barrier shall be installed sufficiently close to the warm side of the insulation to prevent condensation at design conditions. (See Notes A-
9.25.5.Properties and Position of Materials in the Building Envelope
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) to (4), sheet and panel-type materials incorporated into assemblies described in Article . shall conform to Article . where
(a) the material has
(i) an air leakage characteristic less than 0.1 L/(s×m2) at 75 Pa, and
(ii) a water vapour permeance less than 60 ng/(Pa×s×m2) when measured in accordance with ASTM E96 / E96M, “Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials,” using the desiccant method (dry cup), and (See Note A-.(1)(a)(ii))
(b) the intended use of the interior space where the materials are installed will not result in high moisture generation. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Where the intended use of the interior space will result in high moisture generation, the assembly shall be designed according to Part 5.
(3) Wood-based sheathing materials not more than 12.5 mm thick and complying with Article . need not comply with Sentence (1). (See Note A-.(3))
(4) Where a material has a water vapour permeance not less than 30 ng/(Pa×s×m2) and a thermal resistance not less than 0.7 (m2 ×K)/W and the heating degree-days of the building location are less than 6000, the assembly need not comply with Sentence (1).
(1) Sheet and panel-type materials described in Article . shall be installed
(a) on the warm face of the assembly, (See also Article .)
(b) at a location where the ratio between the total thermal resistance of all materials outboard of its innermost impermeable surface and the total thermal resistance of all materials inboard of that surface is not less than that required by Table ., or
(c) outboard of an air space that is vented to the outdoors.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, “Climatic and Seismic Data.”
(2) For walls, the air space described in Clause (1)(c) shall be drained and ventilated and shall be not less than 10 mm deep behind the cladding, over the full height and width of the wall.
Section 9.26.Roofing
9.26.1.General
(1) For the purpose of this Section, the term “roof” shall mean sloped or near-horizontal assemblies that protect the spaces beneath them, including platforms that effectively serve as roofs with respect to the accumulation or drainage of precipitation. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) For the purpose of this Section, the term “roofing” shall mean the primary covering for roofs.
(1) Roofs shall be protected with roofing, including flashing, installed so as to
(a) effectively shed water,
(b) prevent the ingress of water and moisture into building assemblies and occupied space, and
(c) minimize the ingress of water due to ice damming into building assemblies.
(2) Compliance with Sentence (1) shall be demonstrated by conforming to
(a) this Section, or
(b) Part 5.
(1) Methods described in CSA A123.51, “Asphalt shingle application on roof slopes 1:6 and steeper,” are permitted to be used for the installation of asphalt shingles in lieu of the methods described in this Section.
(1) A solar collector system is permitted to be installed above roofing materials conforming to Sentence .(1).
9.26.2.Roofing Materials
(1) Where materials used for the preparation of the substrate for roofing are covered in the scope of a standard listed in Table .-A, they shall conform to that standard.
(2) Where roofing materials are covered in the scope of a standard listed in Table .-B, they shall conform to that standard.
Table 9.26.2.1.-A Materials for Preparation of the Substrate for Roofing Forming Part of Sentence 9.26.2.1.(1)
| Type of Material | Standards |
|---|---|
| Sheathing Membranes | CAN / CGSB -51.32-M, “ Sheathing , Membrane , Breather Type ” |
| Primers | CGSB 37-GP-9Ma, “Primer, Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asph alt Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing” |
Table .-B Roofing Materials Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
[TABLE:1] Notes to Table .-B:
(1) For the purpose of this Subsection, ASTM D3019 / D3019M shall only apply to the non-fibered and non-asbestos-fibered types (I and III) of asphalt roll roofing.
(1) Materials listed in Tables .-A and .-B shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer's written instructions. (See Sentence .(1) of Division A)
(1) Nails used for roofing shall be corrosion-resistant roofing or shingle nails conforming to
(a) ASTM F1667, “Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples,” or
(b) CSA B111, “Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.”
(2) Nails shall have sufficient length to penetrate through or 12 mm into, roof sheathing.
(3) Nails used with asphalt roofing shall have a head diameter of not less than 9.5 mm and a shank thickness of not less than 2.95 mm.
(4) Nails used with wood shingles or shakes shall have a head diameter of not less than 4.8 mm and a shank thickness of not less than 2.0 mm and shall be stainless steel, aluminum or hot-dipped galvanized. (See Note A-.(4))
(1) Staples used to apply asphalt or wood shingles shall be corrosion-resistant and shall be driven with the crown parallel to the eaves.
(2) Staples used with asphalt shingles shall be not less than 19 mm long, 1.6 mm diam or thickness, with not less than a 25 mm crown, except that an 11 mm crown may be used as provided in Sentence .(2).
(3) Staples used with wood shingles shall be not less than 29 mm long, 1.6 mm diam or thickness, with not less than a
9.26.3.Slope of Roof Surfaces
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), the slopes on which roof coverings may be applied shall conform to Table .
(2) Asphalt and gravel or coal tar and gravel roofs may be constructed with lower slopes than required in Sentence (1) when effective drainage is provided by roof drains located at the lowest points on the roofs.
(3) Profiled metal roof cladding systems specifically designed for low-slope applications are permitted to be installed with lower slopes than required in Sentence (1), provided they are installed in conformance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations.
(4) Except where back-slope will not adversely affect adjacent supported or supporting constructions due to water ingress, roofs and constructions that effectively serve as roofs shall be constructed with sufficient slope away from
(a) exterior walls, and
(b) guards that are connected to the roof, or to a construction that effectively serves as a roof, by more than pickets or posts. (See Notes A-.(1), A-. and A-.(4))
(5) The slope required in Sentence (4) shall be sufficient to maintain a positive slope
(a) after expected shrinkage of the building frame, where these surfaces are supported by exterior walls and on exterior columns, and (See Note A-.(4))
(b) once design loading is taken into consideration, where these surfaces are cantilevered from exterior walls.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Sentence .(2).
(2) See Sentence .(3).
9.26.4.Flashing at Intersections
(1) Except where the omission of flashing will not adversely affect adjacent supported or supporting constructions, flashing shall be installed at junctions between roofs and
(a) walls that rise above the roof, and
(b) guards that are connected to the roof by more than pickets or posts.
(1) Sheet metal flashing shall consist of not less than
(a) 1.73 mm thick sheet lead,
(b) 0.33 mm thick galvanized steel,
(c) 0.33 mm thick copper,
(d) 0.35 mm thick zinc, or
(e) 0.48 mm thick aluminum.
(1) Where sloping surfaces of shingled roofs intersect to form a valley, the valley shall be flashed.
(2) Valley flashing shall be installed over continuous sheathing.
(3) Closed valleys shall not be used with rigid shingles on slopes of less than 1 in 1.2.
(3.1) Closed valley flashing shall consist of sheet metal, self sealing composite membranes consisting of polyethylene and bituminous material or one layer of either Type S smooth surface roll roofing or Type M mineral surface roll roofing (mineral surface down) not less than 600 mm wide, and nails shall not penetrate the flashing within 75 mm ofits edge or 124 mm of the bottom of the valley centre line.
(4) Open valleys shall be flashed with at least
(a) one layer of sheet metal not less than 600 mm wide, or
(b) 2 layers of roll roofing.
(5) The bottom layer of roofing required in Sentence (4) shall consist of at least Type S smooth roll roofing or Type M mineral surface roll roofing (mineral surface down) not less than 457 mm wide, centred in the valley and fastened with nails spaced not more than 450 mm o.c. located 25 mm away from the edges.
(6) The top layer of roofing required in Sentence (4) shall consist of at least Type M mineral surface roll roofing (mineral surface up), 914 mm wide, centred in the valley, applied over a 100 mm wide strip of cement along each edge of the bottom layer, and fastened with a sufficient number of nails to hold it in place until the shingles are applied.
(1) The intersection of shingle roofs and masonry walls or chimneys shall be protected with flashing.
(2) Counter flashing required in Sentence (1) shall be embedded not less than 25 mm in the masonry and shall extend not less than 150 mm down the masonry and lap the lower flashing not less than 100 mm.
(3) Flashing along the slopes of a roof described in Sentence (1) shall be stepped so that there is not less than a 75 mm head lap in both the lower flashing and counter flashing.
(4) Where the roof described in Sentence (1) slopes upwards from the masonry, the flashing shall extend up the roof slope to a point equal in height to the flashing on the masonry, but not less than 1.5 times the shingle exposure.
(1) The intersection of shingle roofs and walls clad with other than masonry shall be protected with flashing.
(2) Flashing required in Sentence (1) shall be installed so that it extends up the wall not less than 75 mm behind the sheathing paper, and extends not less than 75 mm horizontally.
(3) Along the slope of the roof, the flashing required in Sentence (1) shall be stepped with not less than a 75 mm head lap.
(1) The intersection of built-up roofs with masonry walls or chimneys shall have a cant strip at the intersection and a roofing membrane shall be mopped over the cant strip and not less than 150 mm up the wall.
(2) Counter flashing installed over the intersection referred to in Sentence (1) shall be embedded not less than 25 mm in the masonry, and shall be of sufficient length to extend down not less than 150 mm, lapping the membrane on the masonry not less than 100 mm.
(1) The intersection of built-up roofs with walls clad with other than masonry shall have a cant strip at the intersection.
(2) The roofing membrane shall be mopped over the cant strip referred to in Sentence (1).
(3) Flashing plies shall extend not less than 150 mm up the wall referred to in Sentence (1) behind the sheathing paper.
(1) Except as otherwise permitted in Sentence (5), chimney saddles shall be installed where the upper side of a chimney on a sloping roof is more than 750 mm wide.
(2) Chimney saddles shall be covered with sheet metal or roofing material of weight and quality equivalent to the roofing.
(3) Saddles shall be flashed where they intersect the roof.
(4) The intersection of the saddle and the chimney shall be flashed and counterflashed as described in Article .
(5) A chimney saddle need not be installed if the intersection between the chimney and roof is protected by sheet metal flashing that extends up the chimney to a height equal to at least one-sixth the width of the chimney, but not less than 150 mm, and up the roof slope to a point equal in height to the flashing on the chimney, but not less than 1.5 times the shingle exposure.
(6) Flashing described in Sentence (5) at the chimney shall be counterflashed as required by Article .
9.26.5.Eave Protection for Shingles and Shakes
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), eave protection shall be provided on shingle, shake or tile roofs, extending from the edge of the roof a minimum of 900 mm up the roof slope to a line not less than 300 mm inside the inner face of the exterior wall.
(2) Eave protection is not required
(a) over unheated garages, carports and porches,
(b) where the roof overhang exceeds 900 mm measured along the roof slope from the edge ofthe roofto the inner face of the exterior wall,
(c) on roofs of asphalt shingles installed in accordance with Subsection .,
(d) on roofs with slopes of 1 in 1.5 or greater, or
(e) in regions with 3 500 or fewer degree-days.
(1) Eave protection shall be laid beneath the starter strip and shall consist of
(a) No. 15 asphalt-saturated felt laid in two plies lapped 480 mm and cemented together with lap cement,
(b) Type M or S roll roofing laid with not less than 100 mm head and end laps cemented together with lap cement, (c) glass fibre or polyester fibre coated base sheets, or
(d) self-sealing composite membranes consisting of modified bituminous coated material.
9.26.6.Underlay Beneath Shingles
(1) Except as required in Sentence (2), when underlay is used beneath shingles, it shall be
(a) asphalt-saturated sheathing paper weighing not less than 0.195 kg/m², or
(b) No. 15 plain or perforated asphalt-saturated felt. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Underlay used beneath wood shingles shall be breather type.
(1) When used with shingles, underlay shall be installed parallel to the eaves with head and end lap of not less than 50 mm.
(2) The top edge of each strip of underlay referred to in Sentence (1) shall be fastened with sufficient roofing nails to hold it in place until the shingles are applied.
(3) The underlay referred to in Sentence (1) shall overlap the eave protection by not less than 100 mm. (See Article . for underlay beneath wood shakes.)
9.26.7.Asphalt Shingles on Slopes of 1 in 3 or Greater
(1) Coverage shall be not less than 2 thicknesses of shingle over the entire roof, disregarding cutouts.
(1) A starter strip shall be installed along the lower edge of the roof so that it extends approximately 12 mm beyond the eaves and rake of the roof and fastened along the bottom edge with nails spaced not more than 300 mm o.c.
(2) Starter strips shall be
(a) at least Type M mineral-surfaced roll roofing not less than 300 mm wide,
(b) shingles of the same weight and quality as those used as a roof covering with tabs facing up the roof slope, or (c) pre-manufactured starter strips installed with sealant at the eaves.
(3) Starter strips need not be provided where eave protection of not less than Type M mineral-surfaced roll roofing is provided or self-sealing composite membranes consisting of polyethylene and bituminous material is provided.
(1) Shingles shall have a head lap of not less than 50 mm.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), shingles shall be fastened with at least 4 nails or staples for 1 m wide shingles so that no nails or staples are exposed.
(2) Where staples with an 11 mm crown are used, shingles shall be fastened with at least 6 staples.
(3) Fasteners may be reduced for narrower shingles in proportion to the width of the shingle or when shingles incorporating interlocking devices are used.
(4) Fasteners referred to in Sentences (1) and (2) shall be located 25 mm to 40 mm from each end of each strip shingle with other fasteners equally spaced between them.
(5) Fasteners referred to in Sentences (1) and (2) shall be located not less than 12 mm above the tops ofthe cutouts.
(1) Shingle tabs shall be secured by a spot of plastic cement not exceeding 25 mm diam under the centre of each tab or by interlocking devices or self-sealing strips.
(1) Shingles on hips and ridges shall be applied so they extend not less than 100 mm on either side of the hip or ridge, and shall be lapped not less than 150 mm.
(2) Shingles referred to in Sentence (1) shall be fastened with nails or staples on each side located not more than 25 mm from the edge and 25 mm above the butt of the overlying shingle.
(1) Eave protection shall conform to Subsection .
(1) Flashing shall conform to Subsection .
(1) Except for the first 2 courses, coverage shall be not less than 3 thicknesses of shingle over the entire roof, disregarding cutouts.
(1) A starter strip shall be installed as in Article .
(2) Starter strips required in Sentence (1) shall be laid in a continuous band of cement not less than 200 mm wide.
(1) Shingle tabs shall be secured with cold application cement applied at the rate of not less than 0.5 L/m² of cemented area, or hot application asphalt applied at the rate of 1 kg/m² of cemented area.
(1) The first course of shingles shall be secured by a continuous band of cement along the eaves applied so that the width of the band equals the shingle exposure plus 100 mm.
(2) The succeeding courses of shingles shall be secured by a continuous band of cement applied so that the width of the band equals the shingle exposure plus 50 mm.
(3) The band required in Sentence (2) shall be located not more than 50 mm above the butt of the overlying course of shingles.
(1) Shingles on hips and ridges shall be not less than 300 mm wide applied to provide triple coverage.
(2) Shingles referred to in Sentence (1) shall be cemented to the roof shingles and to each other with a coat of cement and fastened with nails or staples located 40 mm above the butt of the overlying shingle and 50 mm from each edge.
(1) Flashing shall conform to Subsection .
(1) Shingles shall be fastened in accordance with Article .
9.26.9.Wood Roof Shingles
(1) Decking for wood shingled roofs may be continuous or spaced.
(1) Western cedar shingles shall be not less than No. 2 grade.
(2) Eastern white cedar shingles shall be not less than B (clear) grade.
(1) Wood shingles shall be not less than 400 mm long and not less than 75 mm nor more than 350 mm wide.
(1) Shingles shall be spaced approximately 6 mm apart and offset at the joints in adjacent courses not less than 40 mm so that joints in alternate courses are staggered.
(1) Shingles shall be fastened with 2 nails or staples located approximately 20 mm from the sides of the shingle and 40 mm above the exposure line.
(1) The exposure of wood roof shingles shall conform to Table .
Table 9.26.9.6. Exposure of Wood Shingles Forming Part of Sentence 9.26.9.6.(1)
| Roof Slope | Maximum Exposure, mm | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| No . 1 or A Grade Length of Shingle , mm | No . 2 or B Grade Length of Shingle , mm | |||||
| 400 | 450 | 600 | 400 | 450 | 600 | |
| < 1 in 3 | 100 | 115 | 165 | 90 | 100 | 140 |
| ≥ 1 in 3 | 125 | 140 | 190 | 100 | 115 | 165 |
(1) Flashing shall conform to Subsection .
(1) Eave protection shall conform to Subsection .
9.26.10.Cedar Roof Shakes
(1) Shakes shall be not less than 450 mm long and not less than 100 mm nor more than 350 mm wide with a butt thickness of not more than 32 mm and not less than 9 mm.
(1) Where eave protection is not provided, an underlay conforming to the requirements in Article . for wood shingles shall be laid as a strip not less than 900 mm wide along the eaves.
(2) A strip of material similar to that described in Sentence (1) not less than 450 mm wide shall be interlaid between each course of shakes with the bottom edge of the strip positioned above the butt line at a distance equal to double the exposure of the shakes.
(3) Interlaid strips referred to in Sentence (2) shall be lapped not less than 150 mm at hips and ridges in a manner at will prevent water from reaching the roof sheathing.
(1) Shakes shall be spaced 6 mm to 9 mm apart and the joints in any one course shall be separated not less than 40 mm from joints in adjacent courses.
(1) Shakes shall be fastened with nails located approximately 20 mm from the sides of the shakes and 40 mm above the exposure line.
(1) The exposure of wood shakes shall not exceed
(a) 190 mm for shakes not less than 450 mm long, and
(b) 240 mm for shakes not less than 600 mm long.
(1) Flashing shall conform to Subsection .
(1) Eave protection shall conform to Subsection .
(1) Shakes shall be not less than No. 1 or Handsplit grade.
9.26.11.Built-Up Roofs
(1) The quantities of bituminous materials used on built-up roofs shall conform to Table .
Table 9.26.11.1. Quantities of Bitumen for Built-Up Roofs Forming Part of Sentence 9.26.11.1.(1)
| Type of Roof | Amount of Bitumen per Square Metre of Roof Surface | |
|---|---|---|
| Mopping Coats Betwee n Layers | Flood Coat | |
| Asphalt and aggregate | 1 kg | 3 kg |
| Coal-tar and aggregate | 1.2 kg | 3.6 kg |
| Cold process roofing | 0.75 L cold process cement | 2 L cold process top coating |
(1) Coal-tar products and asphalt products shall not be used together in built-up roof construction.
(1) Bitumen roofing felts shall be at least No.15 felt.
(1) Aggregate used for surfacing built-up roofs shall be clean, dry and durable and shall consist of particles of gravel, crushed stone or air-cooled blast furnace slag having a size of from 6 mm to 15 mm.
(2) The minimum amount of aggregate surfacing per square metre of roof surface shall be 15 kg gravel or crushed stone or 10 kg crushed slag.
(1) Flashing for built-up roofs shall conform to Subsection .
(1) Built-up roofing shall consist of not less than 3 three mopped-down layers of roofing felt flood coated with bitumen.
(1) In hot process applications each layer of bitumen-saturated felt shall be laid while the bitumen is hot, with each layer overlapping the previous one.
(2) The full width under each lap referred to in Sentence (1) shall be coated with bitumen so that in no place does felt touch felt.
(3) Felt shall be laid free of wrinkles and shall be rolled directly into the hot bitumen and broomed forward and outward from the centre to ensure complete adhesion.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), built-up roofing applied over wood, plywood, OSB or waferboard roof sheathing shall be laid over an additional base layer of felt laid dry over the entire roof deck with not less than a 50 mm headlap and a 50 mm sidelap between each sheet.
(2) Where plywood, OSB or waferboard roof sheathing is used, the dry layer of felt required in Sentence (1) may be omitted when the joints are taped and the sheathing is primed with asphalt.
(1) Roofing shall be securely attached to the decking or where insulation is applied above the deck, the insulation shall be securely attached to the deck before the first layer of felt is fastened to the insulation.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (4), a cant strip shall be provided at the edges of roofs.
(2) At least 2 plies of the roofing membrane shall be carried over the top of the cant strip.
(3) Flashing shall extend over the top of the cant strip and be shaped to form a drip.
(4) The cant strip required in Sentence (1) need not be provided where a gravel stop is installed at the edge of roofs.
(5) The roofing membranes shall be carried over the edge of the roof before the gravel stop referred to in Sentence (4) is fastened and 2 plies of roofing membrane mopped to the top surface of the gravel stop before the flood coat is applied.
(6) The gravel stop referred to in Sentence (4) shall extend over the edge of the roof to form a drip or shall be flashed so that the flashing extends over the edge to form a drip.
9.26.12.Selvage Roofing
(1) Wide selvage asphalt roofing shall provide double coverage over the entire roof surface.
(1) Plies of selvage roofing shall be cemented together to ensure a watertight joint.
9.26.13.Sheet Metal Roofing
(1) Sheet metal roofing shall be not less than
(a) 0.33 mm thick galvanized steel,
(b) 0.46 mm thick copper,
(c) 0.46 mm thick zinc, or
(d) 0.48 mm thick aluminum.
(1) Where sheet metal roofing is not supported by roof decking but spans between spaced supports, the panels shall be designed to support the specified live loads for roofs.
9.26.14.Glass Reinforced Polyester Roofing
(1) Where glass reinforced polyester roofing panels are not supported by roof decking but span between spaced supports, the panels shall be designed to support the specified roof loads.
9.26.15.Hot Applied Rubberized Asphalt Roofing
(1) Hot applied rubberized asphalt roofing shall be installed in accordance with CAN/CGSB-37.51-M, “Application for Hot Applied Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and Waterproofing”.
9.26.16.Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet Roofing
(1) Polyvinyl chloride sheet applied roofing membrane shall be installed in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-55M, “Application of Sheet Applied Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Membrane.”
9.26.17.Concrete Roof Tiles
(1) Concrete roof tiles shall be installed according to CAN/CSA-A220 Series, “Concrete Roof Tiles.” (See Note A- .(1))
9.26.18.Roof Drains and Downspouts
(1) When roof drains are provided they shall conform to Part 7.
(1) Where downspouts are provided and are not connected to a sewer, extensions shall be provided to carry rainwater away from the building in a manner which will prevent soil erosion.
Section 9.27.Cladding
9.27.1.Application
(1) Where lumber, wood shingles, shakes, fibre-cement shingles, planks and sheets, plywood, OSB, waferboard, hardboard, vinyl, insulated vinyl, polypropylene, aluminum or steel, including trim and soffits, are installed as cladding on wood-frame walls or above-ground flat insulating concrete form walls exposed to precipitation, the cladding assembly shall comply with
(a) Subsections . to ., or
(b) Part 5.
(2) Where stucco is installed as cladding on wood-frame walls, above-ground flat insulating concrete form walls or masonry walls exposed to precipitation, the cladding assembly shall comply with
(a) Subsections . to ., and Section 9.28., or
(b) Part 5.
(3) Where masonry serves as cladding on wood-frame walls, above-ground flat insulating concrete form walls or masonry walls exposed to precipitation, the cladding assembly shall comply with
(a) Subsections . to ., and Section 9.20., except for masonry veneer, which shall be attached to above-ground flat insulating concrete form walls in accordance with Sentence .(2), or
(b) Part 5.
(4) Where asphalt shingles are installed as cladding on wood-frame walls exposed to precipitation, the cladding assembly shall comply with
(a) Subsections . and . to ., or
(b) Part 5.
(5) Where an exterior insulation finish system is installed as cladding on wood-frame, masonry, cold-formed steel stud, above-ground flat insulating concrete form or cast-in-place concrete walls exposed to precipitation, the cladding assembly shall comply with
(a) Subsections ., . to . and ., or
(b) Part 5. (See Note A-.(5))
(6) Where cladding materials other than those described in Sentences (1) to (5) are installed, or where the cladding materials described in Sentences (1) to (5) are installed on substrates other than those identified in Sentences (1) to (5), the materials and installation shall comply with Part 5.
9.27.2.Required Protection from Precipitation (See Note A-9.27.2.)
(1) Except where exterior walls are protected from precipitation or where it can be shown that precipitation ingress will not adversely affect occupant health or safety, exterior walls shall be designed and constructed to
(a) minimize the ingress of precipitation into the assembly, and
(b) prevent the ingress of precipitation into interior space. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Except where exterior walls are protected from specific mechanisms of deterioration, such as mechanical impact and ultraviolet radiation, exterior walls shall be designed and constructed to minimize the likelihood of their required performance being reduced to an unacceptable level as a result of those mechanisms.
(1) Reserved.
(2) Reserved.
(3) Reserved.
(4) Exterior walls exposed to precipitation shall be protected against precipitation ingress by an exterior cladding assembly consisting of a first plane of protection and a second plane of protection, where such walls enclose spaces of residential occupancy or spaces that directly serve spaces of residential occupancy. (See Note A-.(4))
(5) Reserved.
(6) Reserved.
(1) Where walls required to provide protection from precipitation comprise cladding assemblies with first and second planes of protection,
(a) the first plane of protection shall
(i) consist of cladding, with appropriate trim, accessory pieces and fasteners, and
(ii) be designed and constructed to minimize the passage of rain and snow into the wall by minimizing holes and managing precipitation ingress caused by kinetic energy of raindrops, surface tension, capillarity, gravity, and air pressure differences, (See Subsection .)
(b) the second plane of protection shall be designed and constructed to (See Subsection .)
(i) intercept all rain and snow that gets past the first plane of protection, and
(ii) effectively dissipate any rain or snow to the exterior, and
(c) the protection provided by the first and second planes of protection shall be maintained
(i) at wall penetrations created by the installation of components and services such as windows, doors, ventilation ducts, piping, wiring and electrical outlets, and
(ii) at the interface with other wall assemblies.
(1) A clearance of not less than 200 mm shall be provided between finished ground and cladding that is adversely affected by moisture, such as untreated wood, plywood, OSB, waferboard and hardboard.
(2) A clearance of not less than 50 mm shall be provided between a roof surface and cladding that is adversely affected by moisture, such as untreated wood, plywood, OSB, waferboard and hardboard.
9.27.3.Second Plane of Protection
(1) The second plane of protection shall consist of a drainage plane having an appropriate inner boundary and flashing to dissipate rainwater to the exterior.
(2) Except for cladding systems conforming to Subsection ., the inner boundary of the drainage plane shall comply with Articles . to .
(3) The protection provided by the second plane of protection shall be maintained
(a) at wall penetrations created by the installation of components and services such as windows, doors, ventilation ducts, piping, wiring and electrical outlets, and
(b) at the interface with other wall assemblies.
(4) Flashing material and its installation shall comply with Articles . and .
(1) Sheathing membranes shall conform to the performance requirements of CAN/CGSB-51.32-M, “Sheathing, Membrane, Breather Type.”
(1) Except as provided in Articles . to ., at least one layer of sheathing membrane shall be applied beneath siding, stucco or masonry veneer.
(2) Sheathing membrane required in Sentence (1) shall be applied so that joints are lapped not less than 100 mm.
(3) Where sheathing membrane required in Sentence (1) is applied horizontally, the upper sheets shall overlap the lower sheets.
(1) Where non-wood-based rigid exterior insulating sheathing, or exterior insulating sheathing with an integral sheathing membrane is installed, a separate sheathing membrane is not required.
(2) Where insulating sheathing is installed as provided in Sentence (1),
(a) sheathing panels subject to moisture deterioration shall be sealed at all joints, and
(b) the joints of sheathing panels not subject to moisture deterioration shall be
(i) sealed at all joints, or
(ii) lapped or tongue and groove, and detailed to ensure drainage of water to the exterior. (See Note A-.(2))
(1) Except as provided in Article ., where no sheathing is used, at least 2 layers of sheathing membrane shall be applied beneath the cladding. (See Article . and Note A-.(1))
(2) All joints in the sheathing membrane required in Sentence (1) shall occur over framing, and the membrane shall be fastened to the framing with roofing nails or staples spaced not more than 150 mm along the edges ofthe outer layer of sheathing membrane.
(3) Wall sheathing is permitted to be used in lieu of one layer of sheathing membrane required in Sentence (1), and the thickness need not conform to Table .-A.
(1) Sheathing membrane is permitted to be omitted beneath cladding when the joints in the cladding are formed to effectively prevent the passage of wind and rain in conformance with Sentence (2) or (3), as applicable.
(2) Cladding consisting of sheets of plywood, hardboard, OSB, waferboard or fibre cement is considered to meet the requirements of Sentence (1), provided the cladding is applied so that
(a) all edges are directly supported by framing,
(b) the vertical joints between adjacent sheets are sealed and
(i) covered with battens,
(ii) shiplapped, or
(iii) otherwise matched to provide weathertight joints, and
(c) the horizontal joints between adjacent sheets are sealed and
(i) shiplapped, or
(ii) otherwise matched to provide weathertight joints.
(3) Metal siding consisting of sheets of metal is considered to meet the requirements of Sentence (1) where the joints between sheets are of the locked-seam type.
(1) Flashing shall consist of not less than
(a) 1.73 mm thick sheet lead,
(b) 0.33 mm thick galvanized steel,
(c) 0.46 mm thick copper,
(d) 0.46 mm thick zinc,
(e) 0.48 mm thick aluminum, or
(f) 1.02 mm thick vinyl.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), flashing shall be installed at
(a) every horizontal junction between cladding elements,
(b) every horizontal offset in the cladding, and
(c) every horizontal line where the cladding substrates change and where
(i) the substrates differ sufficiently for stresses to be concentrated along that line, or
(ii) the installation of the cladding on the lower substrate may compromise the drainage of moisture from behind the cladding above. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Flashing need not be installed as described in Sentence (1)
(a) where the upper cladding elements overlap the lower cladding elements by not less than 25 mm,
(b) where,
(i) the cladding above and below the joint is installed outboard of a drained and vented air space, and (See Clause .(1)(a))
(ii) the horizontal detail is constructed so as to minimize the ingress of precipitation into the air space, or
(c) at horizontal construction joints in stucco, where
(i) the joint is finished with an expansion-contraction strip, and
(ii) the cladding is installed outboard of a drained and vented air space. (See Clause .(1)(a))
(3) Flashing shall be installed over exterior wall openings where the vertical distance from the bottom of the eave to the top of the trim is more than one-quarter of the horizontal overhang of the eave. (See Note A-.(3))
(4) Flashing described in Sentences (1) and (3) shall
(a) extend not less than 50 mm upward inboard of the sheathing membrane or sheathing installed in lieu of the sheathing membrane, (See Article .)
(b) have a slope of not less than 6% toward the exterior after the expected shrinkage of the building frame,
(c) terminate at each end with an end-dam
(i) with a height in millimetres not less than 25 mm or 1/10 the value of the 1-in-5 driving rain wind pressure in Pa, and
(ii) at the height defined in Subclause (c)(i), extending to the face of the adjacent cladding,
(d) lap not less than 10 mm vertically over the building element below, and
(e) terminate in a drip offset not less than 5 mm outward from the outer face of the building element below. (See Note A-.(4))
(5) Where the sills of windows and doors installed in exterior walls are not self-flashing, flashing shall be installed between the underside of the window or door and the wall construction below. (See Note A-.(5))
9.27.4.Sealants
(1) Sealant shall be provided where required to prevent the entry of water into the structure.
(2) Sealant shall be provided between masonry, siding or stucco and the adjacent door and window frames or trim, including sills unless such locations are completely protected from the entry of rain.
(3) Sealant shall be provided at vertical joints between different cladding materials unless the joint is suitably lapped or flashed to prevent the entry of rain. (See Articles ., . and .)
(1) Sealants shall be
(a) non-hardening type suitable for exterior use,
(b) selected for their ability to resist the effects of weathering, and
(c) compatible with and adhere to the substrate to which they are applied. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Sealants shall conform to
(a) ASTM C834, “Standard Specification for Latex Sealants,”
(b) ASTM C920, “Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants,”
(c) ASTM C1184, “Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants,” or
(d) ASTM C1311, “Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.”
(3) Backer rod shall conform to ASTM C1330, “ Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid-Applied Sealants.” (See Note A-.(1))
9.27.5.Attachment of Cladding
(1) Except as permitted by Sentences (2) to (5), cladding shall be fastened to the framing members or furring members, or to blocking between the framing members.
(2) Vertical lumber, stucco lath or reinforcing, vertically applied vinyl siding, vertically applied insulated vinyl siding, and polypropylene siding are permitted to be attached to sheathing only where the sheathing consists of not less than
(a) 14.3 mm lumber,
(b) 12.5 mm plywood, or
(c) 12.5 mm OSB or waferboard.
(3) Vertically applied metal siding and wood shingles and shakes are permitted to be attached to the sheathing only where the sheathing consists of not less than
(a) 14.3 mm lumber,
(b) 7.5 mm plywood, or
(c) 7.5 mm OSB or waferboard.
(4) Where wood shingles or shakes are applied to sheathing which is not suitable for attaching the shingles or shakes, the shingles or shakes are permitted to be attached to a wood lath not less than 38 mm by 9.5 mm thick securely nailed to the framing and applied as described in Article .
(5) Cladding, trim and furring members are permitted to be attached to the web fastening strips of flat wall insulating concrete form units using screws in accordance with Sentence .(2)
(1) Blocking for the attachment of cladding shall be not less than 38 mm by 38 mm lumber securely nailed to the framing and spaced not more than 600 mm o.c.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence .(4), furring for the attachment of cladding shall be not less than 19 mm by 38 mm lumber when applied over sheathing.
(2) When applied without sheathing, furring referred to in Sentence (1) shall be not less than
(a) 19 mm by 64 mm lumber on supports spaced not more than 400 mm o.c., or
(b) 19 mm by 89 mm lumber on supports spaced not more than 600 mm o.c.
(3) Furring referred to in Sentence (1) shall be
(a) securely fastened to the framing, and
(b) spaced not more than 600 mm o.c.
(1) Nail or staple size and spacing for the attachment of cladding and trim to wood framing, furring members or blocking shall conform to Table .-A.
(2) Screw size and spacing for the attachment of cladding, trim and furring members to the web fastening strips of flat wall insulating concrete form (ICF) units shall conform to Table .-B where the 1-in-50 hourly wind pressure (HWP) is less than or equal to 0.60 kPa. (See Note A-.(2))
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .-A:
(1) The minimum fastener length need not exceed the minimum fastener penetration depth required by Article .
(2) The maximum spacing of 400 mm o.c. applies to nails and staples used to attach horizontally applied vinyl, insulated vinyl and polypropylene siding, unless a greater spacing is permitted in an evaluation report prepared by an accredited certification organization.
Table .-B Attachment of Cladding to Flat Wall ICF Units where the 1-in-50 HWP ≤ 0.60 kPa Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
[TABLE:1] Notes to Table .-B:
(1) Wood shakes and wood shingles are permitted to be attached to horizontal wood furring members in accordance with Table .- A. The wood furring members shall be attached to the web fastening strips of flat wall ICF units with screws not less than 4.2 mm in diameter spaced horizontally not more than 400 or 450 mm o.c. (two horizontal spacing options are given to accommodate the 150 and 200 mm o.c. horizontal spacing options for web fastening strips).
(2) Two horizontal spacing options are given to accommodate the 150 mm o.c. and 200 mm o.c. horizontal spacing options for web fastening strips. The maximum vertical spacing of screws or masonry ties, as applicable, shall be 400 mm.
(3) Screws must be long enough to penetrate through the web fastening strips by a minimum of 6 mm.
(4) See also Subsection . for requirements on the support of masonry veneer.
(1) Nails or staples for the attachment of cladding and wood trim shall be corrosion-resistant and shall be compatible with the cladding material.
(1) Fasteners for metal cladding shall be positioned to permit expansion and contraction of the cladding.
(2) Fasteners for vinyl siding, insulated vinyl siding and polypropylene siding shall be installed in the centre of the slots of the nail hem.
(1) Fasteners for shakes and shingles shall penetrate through the nail-holding base or not less than 19 mm into the framing.
(2) Fasteners for vinyl cladding, insulated vinyl cladding and polypropylene cladding shall penetrate through the nail-holding base or not less than 32 mm into the framing.
(3) Fasteners for cladding other than that described in Sentences (1) and (2) shall penetrate through the nail-holding base or not less than 25 mm into the framing.
9.27.6.Lumber Siding
(1) Lumber siding shall be sound, free of knot holes, loose knots, through checks or splits.
(1) Drop, rustic, novelty, lapped board and vertical wood siding shall be not less than 14.3 mm thick and not more than 286 mm wide.
(2) Bevel siding shall be
(a) not less than 5 mm thick at the top, and
(b) not less than
(i) 12 mm thick at the butt for siding 184 mm or less in width, and
(ii) 14.3 mm thick at the butt for siding wider than 184 mm.
(3) Bevel siding shall be not more than 286 mm wide.
(1) Lumber siding shall prevent water from entering at the joints by the use of lapped or matched joints or by vertical wood battens.
(2) Siding shall overlap not less than 1 mm per 16 mm width of lumber, but not less than
(a) 9.5 mm for matched siding,
(b) 25 mm for lapped bevel siding, or
(c) 12 mm for vertical battens.
9.27.7.Wood Shingles and Shakes
(1) Shingles and shakes shall conform to,
(a) CSA O118.1, “Western Red Cedar Shakes and Shingles,” or
(b) CSA O118.2, “Eastern White Cedar Shingles.”
(2) Western cedar shakes shall be not less than No. 1 or Handsplit grade, and western cedar shingles not less than No. 2 grade, except that No. 3 grade may be used for undercoursing.
(3) Eastern white cedar shingles shall be at least B (clear) grade, except that C grade may be used for undercoursing.
(1) Shingles and shakes shall be not less than 65 mm or more than 350 mm wide.
(1) Shingles or shakes shall be fastened with nails located approximately 20 mm from each edge and not less than 25 mm above the exposure line for single-course applications, or approximately 50 mm above the butt for double-course applications.
(1) In single-course application, joints in succeeding courses shall be offset not less than 40 mm so that joints in any 2 of 3 consecutive courses are staggered.
(2) In double-course application, joints in the outer course shall be offset from joints in the under-course by not less than 40 mm, and joints in succeeding courses shall be offset not less than 40 mm.
(1) When lath is used with double-course application (See Sentence .(4)), it shall be spaced according to the exposure and securely fastened to the framing.
(2) The butts ofthe under-course of the application referred to in Sentence (1) shall rest on the top edge ofthe lath.
(3) The outer course of the application referred to in Sentence (1) shall be fastened to the lath with nails of sufficient length to penetrate through the lath.
(4) The butts ofthe shingles or shakes shall be so located that they project not less than 12 mm below the bottom edge ofthe lath referred to in Sentence (1).
(5) If wood lath is not used, the butts ofthe under-course shingles or shakes ofthe application referred to in Sentence
(1) shall be located 12 mm above the butts ofthe outer course.
(1) The exposure and butt thickness of shingles and shakes shall conform to Table .
Table 9.27.7.6. Exposure and Thickness of Wood Shingles and Shakes Forming Part of Sentence 9.27.7.6.(1)
| Shake or Shingle Len gth, mm | Maximum Exposure, mm | Minimum Butt Thickness, mm | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Single Coursing | Double Coursing | ||
| 400 | 190 | 305 | 10 |
| 450 | 216 | 356 | 11 |
| 600 | 292 | 406 | 13 |
9.27.8.Plywood
(1) Plywood cladding shall be exterior type conforming to
(a) ANSI/HPVA HP-1, “American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood,”
(b) CSA O121, “Douglas fir plywood,”
(c) CSA O151, “Canadian softwood plywood,” or
(d) CSA O153, “Poplar plywood.”
(1) Plywood cladding shall be not less than 6 mm thick when applied directly to sheathing.
(2) When applied directly to framing or over furring strips, plywood cladding thickness shall conform to Table .
(3) The thickness of grooved or textured plywood cladding shall be measured at the point of least thickness.
Table 9.27.8.2. Minimum Plywood Cladding Thickness Forming Part of Sentences 9.27.8.2.(2) and 9.27.10.2.(2)
| Spacing of Supports, mm | Minimum Thickness, mm | |
|---|---|---|
| Face Grain Parallel to Supports | Face Grain at Right Angles to Supports | |
| 400 | 8 | 6 |
| 600 | 11 | 8 |
(1) The edges of plywood cladding shall be treated with a suitable paint or sealer.
(1) Plywood applied in panels shall have all edges supported.
(2) Not less than a 2 mm gap shall be provided between panels referred to in Sentence (1).
(3) Vertical joints in cladding referred to in Sentence (1) shall be protected with batten strips or sealant when the plywood joints are not matched.
(4) Horizontal joints in cladding referred to in Sentence (1) shall be lapped not less than 25 mm or shall be suitably flashed.
(1) Plywood applied in horizontal lapped strips shall have not less than a 2 mm gap provided at the butted ends, which shall be caulked.
(2) The horizontal joints of siding described in Sentence (1) shall be lapped not less than 25 mm.
(3) Wedges shall be inserted under all vertical butt joints and at all corners when horizontal lapped plywood is applied without sheathing.
9.27.9.Hardboard
(1) Hardboard cladding shall conform to ANSI A135.6, “Engineered Wood Siding.”
(1) Hardboard cladding shall be not less than
(a) 9.5 mm thick when applied over sheathing that provides continuous support or over furring or framing members not more than 400 mm o.c., or
(b) 11.1 mm thick when applied over furring or framing members not more than 600 mm o.c.
(2) Where hardboard cladding is grooved, the grooves shall not extend more than1.5 mm into the minimum required thickness. (See Note A-.(2))
(1) Hardboard cladding applied in panels shall have all edges supported with not less than a 5 mm gap provided between sheets.
(2) Vertical joints in cladding described in Sentence (1) shall be protected with batten strips or sealant when the joints are not matched.
(3) Horizontal joints in cladding described in Sentence (1) shall be lapped not less than 25 mm or shall be suitably flashed.
(1) Hardboard applied in horizontal lapped strips shall have not less than a 5 mm gap provided at the butted ends, which shall be sealed or otherwise protected with suitable mouldings.
(2) The horizontal joints of siding described in Sentence (1) shall overlap not less than 1 mm per 16 mm width of siding board but not less than 9.5 mm for matched joint siding or 25 mm for lapped siding.
(1) Not less than 3 mm clearance shall be provided between hardboard cladding and door or window frames.
9.27.10.OSB and Waferboard
(1) OSB and waferboard cladding shall conform to CSA O437.0, “OSB and Waferboard.”
(1) OSB conforming to O-2 grade shall be not less than 6.0 mm thick where applied directly to sheathing.
(2) OSB conforming to O-2 grade applied directly to framing or over furring strips shall conform to the thickness shown for plywood in Table . (See Note A-.(2))
(3) OSB conforming to O-1 grade and waferboard conforming to R-1 grade shall be not less than 7.9 mm thick where applied directly to sheathing.
(4) Where applied directly to framing or over furring strips, OSB conforming to O-1 grade and waferboard conforming to R-1 grade shall be not less than
(a) 9.5 mm thick on supports spaced not more than 400 mm o.c., and
(b) 12.7 mm thick on supports spaced not more than 600 mm o.c.
(1) OSB and waferboard applied in panels shall have all edges supported and treated with a primer or sealer.
(2) Not less than a 3 mm gap shall be provided between sheets in cladding described in Sentence (1).
(3) Vertical joints in cladding described in Sentence (1) shall be protected with batten strips or sealant when the OSB and waferboard joints are not matched.
(4) Horizontal joints in cladding described in Sentence (1) shall be lapped not less than 25 mm or shall be suitably flashed.
(1) Not less than a 3 mm clearance shall be provided between OSB and waferboard cladding and door or window frames.
9.27.11.Metal
(1) Steel sheet cladding, including horizontal and vertical strip steel siding, flashing and trim accessories, shall (a) have a minimum thickness of 0.33 mm, and
(b) conform to CSSBI 23M, “Standard for Residential Steel Cladding.” (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Horizontal and vertical strip aluminum siding, including flashing and trim accessories, shall conform to CAN/CGSB-93.2-M, “Prefinished Aluminum Siding, Soffits and Fascia, for Residential Use.” (See Note A-.(2) and (3))
(3) Aluminum sheet cladding shall conform to CAN/CGSB-93.1-M, “Sheet, Aluminum Alloy, Prefinished, Residential,” and shall have a thickness of not less than 0.58 mm, except that siding supported by backing or sheathing shall have a thickness of not less than 0.46 mm. (See Note A-.(2) and (3))
9.27.12.Vinyl Siding, Insulated Vinyl Siding and Vinyl Soffits
(1) Vinyl siding shall conform to ASTM D3679, “Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Siding.”
(2) Insulated vinyl siding shall conform to ASTM D7793, “Standard Specification for Insulated Vinyl Siding.”
(3) Rigid vinyl soffits shall conform to ASTM D4477, “Standard Specification for Rigid (Unplasticized) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Soffit.”
(4) Where vinyl siding, insulated vinyl siding or rigid vinyl soffits are required to have aflame-spread rating, the rating shall be determined in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.2, “Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Coverings, and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies.”
(1) The attachment of vinyl siding and insulated vinyl siding shall conform to the requirements in Subsection .
9.27.13.Polypropylene Siding
(1) Polypropylene siding shall conform to ASTM D7254, “Standard Specification for Polypropylene (PP) Siding.”
(2) Where polypropylene siding is required to have aflame-spread rating, the rating shall be determined in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.2, “Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Coverings, and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies.”
(1) The attachment of polypropylene siding shall conform to the requirements in Subsection .
9.27.14.Exterior Insulation Finish Systems
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), this Subsection applies to exterior insulation finish systems (EIFS) that
(a) are covered in the scope of CAN/ULC-S716.1, “Standard for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) – Materials and Systems,” and
(b) have a geometrically defined drainage cavity with a minimum cavity depth of 6 mm and an open area equal to not less than 13% of the area of a full-size EIFS panel. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) EIFS that are not covered by Sentence (1) shall comply with Part 5.
(1) The materials used in EIFS shall conform to CAN/ULC-S716. 1, “Standard for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) – Materials and Systems.”
(2) The substrate on which the EIFS is installed shall
(a) be compatible with that particular system, and (See Note A-.(2)(a))
(b) comply with the structural requirements for sheathing materials stated in Section 9.23.
(1) The design of an exterior insulation finish system shall comply with CAN/ULC-S716.3, “Standard for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) – Design Application.”
(2) The installation of an exterior insulation finish system shall comply with CAN/ULC-S716.2, “Standard for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) – Installation of EIFS Components and Water Resistive Barrier.”
Section 9.28.Stucco
9.28.1.General
(1) Sheathing shall be provided beneath stucco applied over wood-frame walls except as permitted in Article .
(2) Where applied beneath stucco, sheathing shall conform to Subsection .
(1) Stucco lath or reinforcing shall be used to attach stucco to any substrate other than masonry.
(2) Stucco lath or reinforcing shall be used to attach stucco to masonry where
(a) the masonry is soft-burned tile or brick of less strength than the stucco, or
(b) the masonry surface is not sound, clean and sufficiently rough to provide a good key.
(3) Stucco applied over masonry chimneys shall be reinforced.
(1) Stucco finish shall not be applied over concrete masonry units less than one month old unless the units have been cured by the autoclave process.
(1) Stucco shall be not less than 200 mm above finished ground level except when it is applied over concrete or masonry.
(1) Flashing and caulking used with stucco shall conform to Subsections . and ., except that if aluminum flashing is used, it shall be separated from the stucco by an impervious membrane or coating. (See Article . for caulking around window frames.)
9.28.2.Stucco Materials
(1) Portland cement shall conform to CSA A3001, “Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete.”
(1) Aggregate shall be clean, well-graded natural sand or sand manufactured from crushed stone, gravel or air-cooled blast furnace slag and shall contain no significant amounts of deleterious material.
(2) Aggregate grading shall conform to Table .
Table 9.28.2.2. Aggregate Grading for Stucco Forming Part of Sentence 9.28.2.2.(2)
| Sieve Sizes, mm | % Aggregate Passing Si eve | |
|---|---|---|
| Maximum | Minimum | |
| 4 | — | 100 |
| 2 | — | 90 |
| 1 | 90 | 60 |
| 0.5 | 60 | 45 |
| 0.25 | 30 | 10 |
| 0.125 | 5 | — |
(1) Water shall be clean and free of significant amounts of deleterious material.
9.28.3.Fasteners
(1) Fasteners for stucco lath or reinforcing shall be corrosion-resistant and of a material other than aluminum.
(1) Nails for stucco lath or reinforcing shall be not less than 3.2 mm diam with a head diameter of not less than 11.1 mm.
(2) Staples for stucco lath or reinforcing shall be not less than 1.98 mm diam or thickness.
(3) Staples and nails for attaching stucco lath or reinforcing to vertical surfaces shall be of sufficient length to penetrate 25 mm into framing members or to the full depth of the sheathing where the sheathing is used for attachment.
(4) On horizontal surfaces nails for stucco lath or reinforcing shall be not less than 38 mm long.
9.28.4.Stucco Lath
(1) Rib lath or expanded metal stucco mesh shall be
(a) copper-alloy steel coated with rust-inhibitive paint after fabrication, or
(b) galvanized.
(2) Woven or welded wire mesh shall be galvanized.
(1) Sheathing need not be provided beneath stucco where not less than 1.19 mm diam galvanized wire is applied horizontally to the framing at vertical intervals of not more than 150 mm, or where paper-backed welded wire metal lath is used.
(1) Stucco lath shall conform to Table .
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Note A-Table .
(1) Stucco lath shall be held not less than 6 mm away from the backing by means of suitable self-furring devices.
(1) Stucco lath shall be applied with the long dimension horizontal.
(2) Horizontal and vertical joints in stucco lath shall be lapped not less than 50 mm.
(3) End joints of stucco lath shall be staggered and shall occur over framing members.
(4) External corners of stucco lath shall be reinforced with a vertical strip of lath or reinforcing extending not less than 150 mm on both sides of the corner, or the lath or reinforcing shall extend around corners not less than 150 mm.
(1) Stucco lath shall be fastened in conformance with Subsection .
(2) Fasteners on vertical surfaces shall be spaced not more than
(a) 150 mm o.c. vertically and 400 mm o.c. horizontally, or
(b) 100 mm o.c. vertically and 600 mm o.c. horizontally.
(3) Nailing patterns other than those required in Sentence (2) are permitted to be used provided there are at least 20 fasteners per square metre of wall surface.
(4) Fasteners on horizontal surfaces shall be spaced not more than
(a) 150 mm o.c. along the framing members when members are spaced not more than 400 mm o.c., and
(b) 100 mm o.c. along the framing members when members are spaced not more than 600 mm o.c.
9.28.5.Stucco Mixes
(1) Stucco mixes shall conform to Table .
Table 9.28.5.1. Stucco Mixes Forming Part of Sentence 9.28.5.1.(1)
| Materials, volume | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Portland Cement | Masonry Cement | Lime | Aggregate |
| 1 | — | 0.25 to 1 | 3.25 to 4 parts per part of cementitious material |
| 1 | 1 | — |
(1) Pigment if used shall consist of pure mineral oxides inert to the action of sun, lime and cement.
(2) Pigment shall not exceed 6% of the Portland cement by weight.
(1) Materials shall be thoroughly mixed before and after water is added.
(2) Stucco shall be applied not later than 3 h after the initial mixing.
9.28.6.Stucco Application
(1) The base for stucco shall be maintained above freezing.
(2) Stucco shall be maintained at a temperature of not less than 10 °C during application and for not less than 48 h afterwards.
(1) Stucco shall be applied with at least 2 base coats and one finish coat, providing a total thickness of not less than 15 mm, measured from the face of the lath or face of the masonry where no lath is used.
(1) The first coat shall be not less than 6 mm thick, measured from the face of the lath or masonry, fully embedding the lath.
(2) The surface of the first coat shall be scored to provide a key with the second coat.
(1) The second coat shall be not less than 6 mm thick.
(2) The surface of the second coat shall be lightly roughened to provide a key with the finish coat if the finish coat is other than stone dash.
(1) When the finish coat is other than stone dash, the base shall be dampened but not saturated before the finish coat is applied.
(2) The thickness of the finish coat shall be not less than 3 mm.
(3) When a stone dash finish is used, the stone shall be partially embedded in the second coat before the second coat starts to set or stiffen.
Section 9.29.Interior Wall and Ceiling Finishes
9.29.1.General
(1) A wall or ceiling finish shall also conform to the appropriate requirements in Sections 9.10. and 9.11. in addition to the requirements in this Section.
9.29.2.Waterproof Wall Finish
(1) Waterproof finish shall be provided to a height of not less than
(a) 1.8 m above the floor in shower stalls,
(b) 1.2 m above the rims of bathtubs equipped with showers, and
(c) 400 mm above the rims of bathtubs not equipped with showers.
(1) Waterproof finish shall consist of ceramic, plastic or metal tile, sheet vinyl, tempered hardboard, laminated thermosetting decorative sheets or linoleum.
9.29.3.Wood Furring
(1) Wood furring for the attachment of wall and ceiling finishes shall conform to Table .
Table 9.29.3.1. Size and Spacing of Furring Forming Part of Sentence 9.29.3.1.(1)
| Maximum Spacing of Furring, mm | Minimum Size of Furring, mm | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Maximum Spacing of Furring Supports | |||
| Continuous Supports | 400 mm o .c. | 600 mm o .c. | |
| 300 | 19 × 38 | 19 × 38 | 19 × 64 |
| 400 | 19 × 38 | 19 × 38 | 19 × 64 |
| 600 | 19 × 38 | 19 × 64 | 19 × 89 |
(1) Furring shall be fastened to the framing or to wood blocks with not less than 51 mm nails.
9.29.4.Plastering
(1) Application of plaster wall and ceiling finishes, including installation of metal or gypsum lath, shall conform to CSA A82.30-M, “Interior Furring, Lathing and Gypsum Plastering.”
9.29.5.Gypsum Board Finish (Taped Joints)
(1) The requirements for application of gypsum board in this Subsection apply to the single layer application of gypsum board to wood furring or framing using nails or screws.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), gypsum board applications not described in this Subsection shall conform to CSA A82.31-M, “Gypsum Board Application.”
(3) The application of gypsum board to flat insulating concrete form (ICF) walls shall conform to ASTM C840, “Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.” (See Note A-.(3))
(1) Gypsum products shall conform to
(a) CAN/CSA-A82.27-M, “Gypsum Board”,
(b) ASTM C1178 / C1178M, “Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel,” or
(c) ASTM C1396 / C1396M, “Standard Specification for Gypsum Board,” except that the flame-spread rating of gypsum board shall be determined in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102, “Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.”
(1) Maximum spacing of supports for gypsum board applied as a single layer shall conform to Table .
Table 9.29.5.3. Spacing of Supports for Gypsum Board Forming Part of Sentence 9.29.5.3.(1)
| Thickness, mm | Orientation of Board to Framing | Maximum Spacing of Supports, mm o.c. | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Walls | Ceilings | |||
| Painted Finish | Water-Based Texture Finish | |||
| Gypsum board conforming to Sentence 9.29.5.2 .(1) ( except Sections 9 and 12 of ASTM C 1396 / C1396M) | ||||
| 9.5 | parallel | — | — | — |
| perpendicular | 400 | 400 | — | |
| 12.7 | parallel | 600 | 400 | — |
| perpendicular | 600 | 600 | 400 | |
| 15.9 | parallel | 600 | 400 | — |
| perpendicular | 600 | 600 | 600 | |
| Gypsum board conforming to Clause 9.29.5.2 .(1)(b) ( only Section 12 of ASTM C 1396 / C1396M) | ||||
| 12.7 | parallel | 600 | 400 | — |
| perpendicular | 600 | 600 | 600 |
(1) Gypsum board supporting insulation shall be not less than 12.7 mm thick.
(1) The length of fasteners for gypsum board shall conform to Table ., except that lesser depths of penetration are permitted for assemblies required to have afire-resistance rating provided it can be shown, on the basis of fire tests, that such depths are adequate for the required rating
Table 9.29.5.5. Fastener Penetration into Wood Supports Forming Part of Sentence 9.29.5.5.(1)
| Required Fire-Resistance Rating of Assembly | Minimum Penetration, mm | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Walls | Ceilings | |||
| Nails | Screws | Nails | Screws | |
| Not required | 20 | 15 | 20 | 15 |
| 45 min | 20 | 20 | 30 | 30 |
| 1 h | 20 | 20 | 45 | 45 |
| 1.5 h | 20 | 20 | 60 | 60 |
(1) Nails for fastening gypsum board to wood supports shall conform to
(a) ASTM F1667, “Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes and Staples,” or
(b) CSA B111, “Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.”
(1) Screws for fastening gypsum board to wood supports shall conform to ASTM C1002, “ Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.”
(1) For single-layer application on a ceiling, nails shall be spaced
(a) not more than 180 mm o.c. on ceiling supports, or
(b) every 300 mm o.c. along ceiling supports, in pairs about 50 mm apart.
(2) Where the ceiling sheets are supported by the wall sheets around the perimeter of the ceiling, this support may be considered as equivalent to nailing at this location.
(3) Except as required by Sentence (4), for single-layer application on walls, nails shall be spaced
(a) not more than 200 mm o.c. on vertical wall supports, or
(b) every 300 mm o.c. along vertical wall supports, in pairs about 50 mm apart.
(4) For single-layer application on walls, where gypsum board provides required bracing in braced wall pane ls, lateral support for studs, or fire protection, nails shall be spaced not more than 200 mm o.c. on
(a) vertical wall supports, and
(b) top and bottom plates. (See Article . and Section 9.10.)
(5) The uppermost nails on vertical wall supports shall be not more than 200 mm below the ceiling.
(6) Nails shall be located not less than 10 mm from the side or edge of the board.
(7) Nails shall be driven so that the heads do not puncture the paper.
(1) For single-layer application on a ceiling, screws shall be spaced not more than 300 mm o.c. on ceiling supports.
(2) Where the ceiling sheets are supported by the wall sheets around the perimeter of the ceiling, this support may be considered as equivalent to screwing at this location.
(3) Except as required by Sentence (4), for single-layer application on walls, screws shall be spaced
(a) not more than 300 mm o.c. on vertical wall supports where the supports are more than 400 mm o.c., or
(b) not more than 400 mm o.c. on vertical wall supports where the supports are not more than 400 mm o.c.
(4) Except as provided in Sentence (5),for single-layer application on walls, where gypsum board provides required bracing in braced wall panels, lateral support for studs, or fire protection, screws shall be spaced not more than 300 mm o.c. on
(a) vertical wall supports, and
(b) top and bottom plates. (See Article . and Section 9.10.)
(5) Where afire-resistance rating is determined based on Table 1 of MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-3, “Fire and Sound Resistance Tables,” Sentence (4) need not apply for the purpose of fire protection.
(6) Screws shall be located not less than 10 mm from the edge of the board.
(7) Screws shall be driven so that the heads do not puncture the paper.
(1) In cold weather, heat shall be provided to maintain a temperature not below 10 °C for 48 h prior to taping and finishing and maintained for not less than 48 h thereafter.
9.29.6.Plywood Finish
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), the minimum thickness of plywood interior finish shall conform to Table .
(2) A manufacturing tolerance of –0.4 mm may be applied to the thicknesses listed in Table .
(3) No minimum thickness is required where plywood is applied over continuous backing.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) Thickness limits shall apply to the net effective thickness (NET) of grooved, striated, textured and/or embossed panels and to the actual thickness of flat panels.
(1) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), where plywood for interior finish is grooved, the grooves shall not extend through the face ply and into the plies below the face ply unless the groove is supported by framing or furring.
(2) If the grain of the face ply is at right angles to the supporting members, the groove is permitted to extend into the plies below the face ply provided the thickness of the plywood exceeds the value shown in Table . by an amount equal to not less than the depth of penetration of the grooves into the plies below the face ply.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), nails for attaching plywood finishes shall not be less than 38 mm casing or finishing nails spaced not more than 150 mm o.c. along edge supports and 300 mm o.c. along intermediate supports, except that staples providing equivalent lateral resistance may also be used.
(2) Where plywood finish provides required bracing in braced wall panels, the plywood shall be fastened in accordance with the fastening requirements for sheathing stated in Sentence .(2).
(1) All plywood edges shall be supported by furring, blocking or framing.
9.29.7.Hardboard Finish
(1) Hardboard shall conform to CAN/CGSB-11.3-M, “Hardboard.”
(1) Hardboard shall be not less than
(a) 3 mm thick where applied over continuous backing,
(b) 6 mm thick when applied over supports spaced not more than 400 mm o.c., and
(c) 9 mm thick when applied over supports spaced not more than 600 mm o.c.
(1) Nails for fastening hardboard shall be casing or finishing nails not less than 38 mm long, spaced not more than 150 mm o.c. along edge supports and 300 mm o.c. along intermediate supports.
(1) All hardboard edges shall be supported by furring, blocking or framing where the backing is not continuous.
9.29.8.Insulating Fibreboard Finish
(1) Insulating fibreboard shall conform to CAN/ULC-S706.1, “Standard for Wood Fibre Insulating Boards for Buildings.”
(1) Insulating fibreboard sheets shall be not less than 11.1 mm thick on supports not more than 400 mm o.c.
(2) Insulating fibreboard tile shall be not less than 12.7 mm thick on supports spaced not more than 400 mm o.c.
(1) Nails for fastening fibreboard sheets shall be not less than 2.6 mm shank diameter casing or finishing nails of sufficient length to penetrate not less than 20 mm into the supports.
(2) Nails shall be spaced not more than 100 mm o.c. along edge supports and 200 mm o.c. along intermediate supports.
(1) All fibreboard edges shall be supported by blocking, furring or framing.
9.29.9.Particleboard, OSB or Waferboard Finish
(1) Particleboard finish shall conform to ANSI A208. 1, “Particleboard.”
(2) OSB or waferboard finish shall conform to
(a) CSA O325, “Construction sheathing,” or
(b) CSA O437.0, “OSB and Waferboard.”
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), the minimum thickness of O-2 grade OSB used as an interior finish shall conform to that shown for plywood in Table .
(2) Thicknesses listed in Table . shall permit a manufacturing tolerance of –0.4 mm.
(3) No minimum thickness is required where O-2 grade OSB is applied over continuous backing.
(4) OSB conforming to O-1 grade, waferboard conforming to R-1 grade and particleboard shall be
(a) not less than 6.35 mm thick on supports not more than 400 mm o.c.,
(b) not less than 9.5 mm thick on supports not more than 600 mm o.c., and
(c) not less than 6.35 mm thick on supports not more than 600 mm o.c. in walls where blocking is provided at mid-wall height.
(5) OSB conforming to CSA O325, “Construction sheathing,” shall meet the minimum panel mark of
(a) W16, on supports not more than 400 mm o.c.,
(b) W24, on supports not more than 600 mm o.c., and
(c) W16, on supports not more than 600 mm o.c. where blocking is provided at mid-wall height.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), nails for fastening particleboard, OSB or waferboard shall be not less than 38 mm casing or finishing nails spaced not more than 150 mm o.c. along edge supports and 300 mm o.c. along intermediate supports.
(2) Where OSB or waferboard provides required bracing in braced wall panels, the OSB or waferboard shall be fastened in accordance with the fastening requirements for sheathing stated in Sentence .(2).
(1) All particleboard, OSB or waferboard edges shall be supported by furring, blocking or framing.
9.29.10.Wall Tile Finish
(1) Ceramic tile shall be set in a mortar base or applied with an adhesive.
(2) Plastic tile shall be applied with an adhesive.
(1) When ceramic tile is applied to a mortar base the cementitious material shall consist of one part Portland cement to not more than one-quarter part lime by volume.
(2) The cementitious material described in Sentence (1) shall be mixed with not less than 3 nor more than 5 parts of aggregate per part of cementitious material by volume.
(3) Mortar shall be applied over metal lath or masonry.
(4) Ceramic tile applied to a mortar base shall be thoroughly soaked and pressed into place forcing the mortar into the joints while the tile is wet.
(1) Adhesives to attach ceramic and plastic tile shall be applied to the finish coat or brown coat of plaster that has been steel-trowelled to an even surface or to gypsum board or to masonry provided the masonry has an even surface.
(1) Ceramic and plastic tile installed on walls around bathtubs or showers shall be applied over moisture-resistant backing.
(1) The joints between wall tiles and a bathtub or shower shall be suitably caulked with material conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.22-M, “Mildew Resistant Sealing Compound for Tubs and Tiles.”
Section 9.30.Flooring
9.30.1.General
(1) Finished flooring shall be provided in all residential occupancies.
(1) Finished flooring in bathrooms, kitchens, public entrance halls, laundry and general storage areas shall consist of resilient flooring, felted-synthetic-fibre floor coverings, concrete, terrazzo, ceramic tile, mastic or other types of flooring providing similar degrees of water resistance. (See Note A-.(1))
(1) Wood sleepers supporting finished flooring over a concrete base supported on the ground shall be not less than 19 mm by 38 mm and shall be treated with a wood preservative.
(1) Finished flooring shall have a surface that is smooth, even and free from roughness or open defects.
9.30.2.Panel-Type Underlay
(1) A panel-type underlay shall be provided under resilient flooring, parquet flooring, ceramic tile, felted-synthetic-fibre floor coverings or carpeting laid over lumber subflooring. (See Sentence .(1))
(2) Panel-type underlay shall be provided under resilient flooring, parquet flooring, felted-synthetic-fibre floor coverings or carpeting on panel-type subflooring whose edges are unsupported. (See Article .)
(3) Panel-type underlay shall be provided under ceramic tile applied with adhesive.
(4) Panel-type underlay shall be provided under resilient flooring on waferboard or strandboard subflooring.
(1) Panel-type underlay shall be not less than 6 mm thick and shall conform to
(a) ANSI A208.1, “Particleboard,”
(b) CAN/CGSB-11.3-M, “Hardboard,”
(c) ANSI/HPVA HP-1, “American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood,”
(d) CSA O121, “Douglas fir plywood,”
(e) CSA O151, “Canadian softwood plywood,”
(f) CSA O153, “Poplar plywood,” or
(g) CSA O437.0, “OSB and Waferboard.”
(1) Panel-type underlay shall be fastened to the subfloor with staples, annular grooved flooring nails or spiral nails, spaced not more than 150 mm o.c. along the edges and 200 mm o.c. both ways at other locations.
(2) Nails for panel-type underlay shall be not less than 19 mm long for 6 mm thick underlay and 22 mm long for 7.9 mm thick underlay.
(3) Staples for panel-type underlay shall
(a) have not less than a 1.2 mm shank diameter or thickness with a 4.7 mm crown, and
(b) be not less than
(i) 22 mm long for 6 mm underlay, and
(ii) 28 mm long for 7.9 mm and 9.5 mm underlay.
(1) Where panel-type underlay is required to be installed over plywood, OSB or waferboard, the joints in the underlay shall be offset not less than 200 mm from the joints in the underlying subfloor.
(1) Underlay beneath resilient or ceramic floors applied with an adhesive shall have all holes or open defects on the surface patched so that the defects will not be transmitted to the finished surface.
9.30.3.Wood Strip Flooring
(1) The thickness of wood strip flooring shall conform to Table .
Table 9.30.3.1. Thickness of Wood Strip Flooring Forming Part of Sentence 9.30.3.1.(1)
| Type of Flooring | Maximum Joist Spacing, mm | Minimum Thickness of Flooring, mm | |
|---|---|---|---|
| With Subfloor | No Subfloor | ||
| Matched hardwood | 400 | 7.9 | 19.0 |
| ( interior use only ) | 600 | 7.9 | 33.3 |
| Matched softwood | 400 | 19.0 | 19.0 |
| (interior or exterior use) | 600 | 19.0 | 31.7 |
| Square edge softwood ( exterior use only ) | 400 | — | 25.4 |
| 600 | — | 38.1 |
(1) Wood strip flooring shall not be laid parallel to lumber subflooring unless a separate underlay is provided.
(2) If wood strip flooring is applied without a subfloor, it shall be laid at right angles to the joists so that the end joints are staggered and occur over supports or are end matched.
(3) If the flooring is end matched, it shall be laid so that no 2 adjoining strips break joints in the same space between supports and each strip bears on no fewer than 2 supports.
(1) When nails are used, wood strip flooring shall be toe nailed or face nailed with not less than one nail per strip at the spacings shown in Table ., except that face nailed strips of more than 25 mm in width shall have at least 2 nails per strip.
(2) Face nails shall be countersunk.
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .:
(1) See Article .
(1) Staples are permitted to be used to fasten wood strip flooring not more than 7.9 mm in thickness and not more than 50 mm in width provided the staples
(a) are not less than 29 mm long,
(b) have a shank diameter of not less than 1.19 mm,
(c) have a crown of not less than 4.7 mm, and
(d) are spaced not more than 400 mm o.c.
(2) Staples are permitted to be used to fasten wood strip flooring not more than 19 mm in thickness and not more than 83 mm in width provided the staples
(a) are not less than 51 mm long,
(b) have a shank diameter of not less than 1.82 mm,
(c) have a crown of not less than 12.7 mm, and
(d) are spaced not more than 400 mm o.c.
9.30.4.Parquet Flooring
(1) Adhesive used to attach parquet block flooring shall be suitable for bonding wood to the applicable subfloor material.
9.30.5.Resilient Flooring
(1) Resilient flooring used on concrete slabs supported on ground shall consist of asphalt, rubber, unbacked vinyl or vinyl with an inorganic type backing.
(2) Flooring described in Sentence (1) shall be attached to the base with a suitable waterproof and alkali-resistant adhesive.
9.30.6.Ceramic Tile
(1) Ceramic tile shall be set in a mortar bed or applied to a sound smooth base with a suitable adhesive.
(2) Panel-type subfloor to which ceramic tile is to be applied with adhesive shall have its edges supported according to Article .
Section 9.31.Plumbing Facilities
9.31.1.Scope
(1) This Section applies to the plumbing facilities and plumbing sys tems within dwelling units.
(2) In occupancies other than dwelling u nits, plumbing facilities, grab bars, floor drains, and floor and wall finishes around urinals shall conform to Subsection . (See also Section 3.8. regarding barrier-free plumbing facilities.)
(3) Medical gas piping systems shall conform to Subsection .
9.31.2.General
(1) The construction, extension, alteration, renewal or repair of plumbing systems and sewage disposal systems shall conform to Part 7.
(1) Metal pipes in contact with cinders or other corrosive material shall be protected by a heavy coating of bitumen or other corrosion protection.
(1) When provided, grab bars shall be capable of resisting a load of not less than 1.3 kN applied vertically or horizontally.
9.31.3.Water Supply and Distribution
(1) Every dwelling unit shall be supplied with a water distribution sy stem where a drinking water system is available.
(1) Where a water distribution system is available, piping for hot and cold water shall be connected to every kitchen sink, lavatory, bathtub, shower, slop sink and laundry area.
(2) Piping for cold water shall be run to every water closet.
9.31.4.Required Facilities
(1) A kitchen sink, lavatory, bathtub or shower, and water closet shall be provided for every dwelling unit where a water distribution system is available.
(1) Laundry facilities or a space for laundry facilities shall be provided in every dwelling unit or grouped elsewhere in the building in a location conveniently accessible to occupants of every dwel ling unit.
(1) Where a water distribution system is available a hot water supply shall be provided in every dwelling unit.
(2) A water distribution system supplying hot water to plum bing fixtures shall conform to the requirements in Subsection .
(1) Where gravity drainage to a sewer, drainage ditch or dry well is possible, a floor drain shall be installed in a basement forming part of a dwelling unit.
9.31.5.Reserved
9.31.6.Service Water Heating Facilities
(1) Where hot water is required to be supplied in accordance with Article ., equipment shall
(a) provide an adequate supply of hot water, and
(b) be installed in conformance with Part 7.
(1) Where a hot water supply is required by Article ., equipment shall be installed to provide to every dwelling unit an adequate supply of service hot water with a temperature range from 45 °C to 60°C.
(2) An electric storage-type service water heater shall have a minimum set storage temperature of 60°C.
(1) Every service water heater and its installation shall conform to Part 7.
(2) Reserved
(3) Where the building is in a location where the spectral response acceleration, Sa(0.2), is greater than 0.55, service water heaters shall be secured to the structure to resist overturning. (See Note A-.(3))
(1) Where storage tanks for service water heaters are of steel, they shall be coated with zinc, vitreous enamel (glass lined), hydraulic cement or other corrosion-resistant material.
(1) Fuel-burning service water heaters shall be connected to a chimney flue conforming to Section 9.21.
(1) Heating coils of service water heaters shall not be installed in a flue or in the combustion chamber of a boiler or furnace heating a building.
Section 9.32.Ventilation
9.32.1.General
(1) This Section applies to the ventilation of rooms and spaces in residential occupancies.
(2) Ventilation of all other occupancies shall comply with Part 6.
(3) A storage garage for up to 4 motor vehicles that serves a resid ential occupancy may be considered to be part of that occupancy.
(1) Every residential occupancy shall incorporate
(a) provisions for non-heating-season ventilation in accordance with Subsection ., and
(b) except as required by Sentences(2)and(3), if supplied with electrical power and a heating system, provisions for heating-season ventilation in accordance with Part 6.
(2) A self-contained heating-season ventilation system serving a single dwelling unit shall comply with Subsection
(1) Exhaust ducts or vents connected to laundry-drying equipment shall discharge directly to the outdoors.
(2) Exhaust ducts connected to laundry-drying equipment shall be
(a) independent of other exhaust ducts,
(b) accessible for cleaning, and
(c) constructed of a smooth corrosion-resistant material. (See Note A-.(2))
(3) Where collective venting of multiple installations of laundry-drying equipment is used, the ventilation system shall
(a) be connected to a common exhaust duct that is vented by one central exhaust fan, and incorporates one central lint trap,
(b) include an interlock to activate the central exhaust fan when laundry-drying equipment is in use, and
(c) where required by Article ., be provided with make-up air.
9.32.2.Non-Heating-Season Ventilation
(1) The non-heating-season ventilation required by Clause .(1)(a) shall be supplied by (a) natural ventilation in accordance with Article ., or
(b) a mechanical ventilation system in accordance with Article .
(1) The unobstructed openable ventilation area to the outdoors for rooms and spaces in residential buildings ventilated by natural means shall conform to Table .
(2) Where a vestibule opens directly offa living or dining room within a dwelling unit, ventilation to the outdoors for such rooms may be through the vestibule.
(3) Openings for natural ventilation other than windows shall provide protection from the weather and insects.
(4) Screening shall be of corrosion-resistant material.
Table 9.32.2.2. Natural Ventilation Forming Part of Sentence 9.32.2.2.(1)
| Location | Minimum Unobstructed Area | |
|---|---|---|
| Within a dwelling unit | Bathrooms or water-closet rooms | 0.09 m² |
| Unfinished basement space | 0.2% of the floor area | |
| Dining rooms, living rooms, bedrooms, kitchens, combined ro oms, dens, recreation rooms and all other finished rooms | 0.28 m² per room or combination of rooms | |
| Other than within a dwelling unit | Bathrooms or water-closet rooms | 0.09 m² per water closet |
| Sleeping areas | 0.14 m² per occupant | |
| Laundry rooms, kitchens, r ecreation rooms | 4% of the floor area | |
| Corridors, storage rooms and other similar public rooms or spaces | 2% of the floor area | |
| Unfinished basement space not used on a shared basis | 0.2% of the floor area |
(1) Where a habitable room or space is not provided with natural ventilation as described in Article . and is mechanically cooled, its non-heating-season mechanical ventilation system shall
(a) have the capacity to exhaust air from inside the room or space, or to introduce outdoor air into that room or space, at a rate conforming with Table ., or
(b) comply with Subsection .
(2) In applying Clause (1)(a),
(a) at least one bedroom in each dwelling unit shall be designated as the master bedroom,
(b) air change rates for any combined living/dining or family/dining space shall be determined as if the spaces were individual rooms,
(c) where a basement incorporates rooms ofthe types designated in Table ., the assigned air change rate for each room shall be as specified for those types of rooms,
(d) basement areas used for other purposes that exceed 2/3 of the total basement floor area shall be assigned an air change rate of 10 L/s,
(e) basement areas used for other purposes that are 2/3 of the total basement floor area or less shall be assigned an air change rate of 5 L/s, and
(f) other habitable rooms, other than spaces intended solely for access, egress, storage, or service equipment, shall be assigned an air change rate of 5 L/s.
(3) Where a habitable room or space is not provided with natural ventilation as described in Article . and is not mechanically cooled, the non-heating-season mechanical ventilation system shall have the capacity to exhaust indoor air from the room or space or to introduce outdoor air to that room or space at a rate of one air change per hour.
(4) A non-heating-season mechanical ventilation system shall be designed and installed in conformance with good practice such as that described in the ASHRAE Handbooks and Standards, the HRAI Digest, the Hydronics Institute Manuals and the SMACNA Manuals.
Table 9.32.2.3. Air Change Rate Forming Part of Clause 9.32.2.3.(1)(a)
| Room or Space | Rate , L/s |
|---|---|
| Master bedroom | 10 |
| Other bedrooms | 5 |
| Living room | 5 |
| Dining room | 5 |
| Family room | 5 |
| Recreation room | 5 |
| Basement | 10 |
| Kitchen | 5 |
| Bathroom or water closet ro om | 5 |
| Laundry room | 5 |
| Utility room | 5 |
| Other habitable rooms | 5 |
9.32.3.(See Note A-9.32.1.2.(2))
(1) The heating-season ventilation required by Clause .(1)(b) shall be provided by a mechanical ventilation system complying with
(a) good practice such as that described in CAN/CSA-F326-M,“Residential Mechanical Ventilation Systems,力
(b) for dwelling units with 5 or fewer bedrooms, the balance of this Subsection, or
(c) Part 6. (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Mechanical ventilation systems complying with the balance of this Subsection shall incorporate at least the following components:
(a) a principal ventilation system complying with Article .,
(b) supplemental exhaust fans complying with Article .,and
(c) protection against depressurization in accordance with Article .
(1) Aspects of mechanical ventilation systems not specifically described in this Subsection shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with good practice such as that described in the ASHRAE Handbooks and Standards, the HRAI Digest, the HRAI Residential Mechanical Ventilation Manual, the Hydronics Institute Manuals and the SMACNA Manuals.
(2) Ventilation system equipment installed to meet the requirements of this Section shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and recommendations except that, where such instructions and recommendations are in conflict with the requirements of this Subsection, the requirements of this Subsection shall govern.
(3) Except where mounted on concrete foundations, fans and heat recovery ventilators shall be isolated from structural components by resilient mountings to minimize the transmission of noise and vibration to occupied spaces.
(4) Where flow-regulating dampers are required,
(a) they shall be adjustable and accessible without requiring the removal of fans, motors or insulating materials, or the use of specialized tools, and
(b) a device on the outside of the duct or device in which they are installed shall indicate the position of the damper.
(5) Ventilation equipment shall be accessible for inspection, maintenance, repair and cleaning.
(6) Ventilation equipment installed in unheated spaces shall be installed so as to avoid condensation of moisture on fans and motors, in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions.
(1) The principal ventilation system shall incorporate the following components:
(a) a principal ventilation fan complying with this Article, and
(b) except as permitted by Article .,provision for the introduction of outdoor air to the dwelling unit, in conformance with Article . or9..
(2) The principal ventilation fan shall be capable of operating at an exhaust capacity complying with Table ., referred to hereinafter as the “normal operating exhaust capacity.” (See Note A-.(2))
Table 9.32.3.3. Normal Operating Exhaust Capacity of Principal Ventilation Fan Forming Part of Sentence 9.32.3.3.(2)
| Number of Bedrooms in Dwelling Un it | Normal Operating Exhaust Capacity of Principal Ventilati on Fan, L/s | |
|---|---|---|
| Minimum | Maximum | |
| 1 | 16 | 24 |
| 2 | 18 | 28 |
| 3 | 22 | 32 |
| 4 | 26 | 38 |
| 5 | 30 | 45 |
| More than 5 | System must comply with Clause 9.32.3.1 .(1)(a) |
(3) The requirement for a principal ventilation fan may be satisfied by a single fan, by the exhaust side ofa heat recovery ventilator, or by a group of fans, provided all fans in the group are controlled simultaneously by a controller complying with Sentences (5) to (7). (See Note A-.(3))
(4) The components of the principal ventilation system shall be approved by their manufacturer for continuous operation.
(5) The principal ventilation fan shall be controlled by a manual switch located within the living area of the dwelling unit and clearly marked VENTILATION FAN. (See Note A-.(5))
(6) If all controls serving the principal ventilation fan are in the “off” position, the principal ventilation system shall not operate.
(7) The requirement for a manual switch stated in Sentence (5) can be satisfied by a manual override incorporated in a dehumidistat or other automatic control, provided
(a) the automatic control is located within the living area of the dwelling unit, and
(b) the manual override is clearly marked VENTILATION FAN.
(8) Where the principal ventilation fan is controlled by a dehumidistat or other automatic control in addition to the manual switch required by Sentence (5), the manual switch shall be capable of activating the fan regardless of the setting of the automatic control.
(9) Where an exhaust air intake for the principal ventilation fan is connected directly to the return side of the duct system of a forced air heating system or other forced air distribution system, it shall be connected, where applicable, not less than 1 m upstream from the connection of the outdoor air supply duct required by Sentence .(5).
(10) Exhaust air intakes for principal ventilation fans located in kitchens, bathrooms and water-closet rooms shall be located in the ceiling or on the wall not less than 2 m above the floor. (See Note A-.(10))
(1) Where outdoor air is to be introduced to the dwelling unit through a forced air heating system, the provision of outdoor air shall comply with this Article.
(2) Where the actual normal operating exhaust capacity of the fan installed to satisfy the requirement for a principal ventilation fan exceeds the maximum outdoor airflow permitted by Table . for a mixed air temperature of 15°C or exceeds the minimum acceptable return air temperature specified by the manufacturer of the furnace, whichever is less, then either
(a) the system shall incorporate a means for tempering outdoor air introduced to the heating system ducts so that a mixed air temperature of 15°C or the minimum acceptable return air temperature specified by the manufacturer of the furnace, whichever is less, is achieved when the outdoor air is at the January 2.5% temperature and the indoor air temperature is 22°C, or
(b) this Article shall be considered to be no longer applicable and the mechanical ventilation system shall comply with either Clause .(1)(a) or with Article .
(3) For the purposes of Table .,the furnac e airflow shall be determined
(a) by operating the forced air heating system's circulation fan at the rate chosen to satisfy Clause (9)(a) when measuring the return airflow in the furnace return air plenum immediately upstream of the connection of the outdoor air supply duct required by Sentence (5) and then adding this return airflow measurement to the actual normal operating exhaust capacity of the fan installed to satisfy the requirement for a principal ventilation fan, or
(b) by using the manufacturer's rated flow for the furnace for 150 Pa static pressure and the wiring configuration necessary to achieve the flow specified in Clause (9)(a). Table9.. Maximum Outdoor Airflow Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
| January 2.5% Temperature as per Supplementary Standard SB -1, °C | Maximum Outdoor Airflow for lndicated Mixed Temperature, L/s | |||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | 0 | 0 | -10 | -10 | -10 | -20 | -20 | -20 | -30 | -30 | -30 | -40 | -40 | -40 | -50 | -50 | -50 | |
| Minimum Mixed Air Temperature , °C | 15 | 10 | 5 | 15 | 10 | 5 | 15 | 10 | 5 | 15 | 10 | 5 | 15 | 10 | 5 | 15 | 10 | 5 |
| Furnace Airflow , L/s | ||||||||||||||||||
| 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| 100 | 32 | 55 | 77 | 22 | 38 | 53 | 17 | 29 | 40 | 13 | 23 | 33 | 11 | 19 | 27 | 10 | 17 | 24 |
| 200 | 64 | 109 | 155 | 44 | 75 | 106 | 33 | 57 | 81 | 27 | 46 | 65 | 23 | 39 | 55 | 19 | 33 | 47 |
| 300 | — | — | — | 66 | 113 | 159 | 50 | 86 | 121 | 40 | 69 | 98 | 34 | 58 | 82 | 29 | 50 | 71 |
| 400 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 54 | 92 | 131 | 45 | 77 | 110 | 39 | 67 | 94 |
| 500 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 49 | 83 | 118 |
(4) Linear interpolation is permitted in using Table .
(5) An outdoor air supply duct shall be installed between the outdoors and the furnace return air plenum and shall be connected
(a) not less than 3 m upstream of the plenum connection to the furnace, as measured along the length of the duct, or
(b) through an acceptable mixing device installed in the return air plenum.
(6) The outdoor air supply duct required by Sentence (5) shall incorporate a flow-regulating damper.
(7) Where the outdoor air supply duct required by Sentence (5) is not connected to an outdoor air supply fan, it shall be connected downstream of all return branch connections.
(8) Where the outdoor air supply duct required by Sentence (5) is connected to an auxiliary outdoor air supply fan, the auxiliary outdoor air supply fan shall be
(a) approved by the manufacturer for the handling ofuntempered outdoor air if it will be handling untempered outdoor air,
(b) approved by the manufacturer for continuous operation, and
(c) designed to provide an outdoor air supply flow within ±10% of the actual normal operating exhaust capacity of the exhaust fan installed to satisfy the requirement for a principal ventilation fan.
(9) The principal ventilation fan control required by Sentence .(5) shall be wired in such a way that
(a) activation of the principal ventilation fan automatically activates the forced air heating system's circulation fan to provide an airflow not greater than the space-heating airflow,
(b) where applicable, activation of the principal ventilation fan automatically activates the auxiliary outdoor air supply fan described in Sentence (8),and
(c) the auxiliary outdoor air supply fan does not operate when the principal ventilation fan is not operating.
(10) With the principal ventilation fan operating at its normal operating exhaust capacity, the airflow in the outdoor air supply duct shall be measured and the flow-regulating damper required by Sentence (6)shall be adjusted and permanently fixed so that the airflow in the outdoor air supply duct is within ±10% of the actual normal operating exhaust capacity of the principal ventilation fan.
(11) The airflow measurements required by Sentences(3)and(10)shall be done using a method accurate to within ±15% of the flow rate being measured.
(12) All connections between the ventilation system and the heating system shall be in accordance with Articles . and9..
(1) Where outdoor air is to be introduced to the dwelling unit through means other than a forced air heating system, the provision of outdoor air shall comply with this Article.
(2) An outdoor air supply fan shall be installed with a rated capacity within ±10% of the actual normal operating exhaust capacity of the exhaust fan installed to satisfy the requirement for a principal ventilation fan.
(3) The principal ventilation fan control required by Sentence .(5) shall be wired in such a way that
(a) activation of the principal ventilation fan automatically activates the outdoor air supply fan required by Sentence (2), and
(b) the outdoor air supply fan does not operate when the principal ventilation fan is not operating.
(4) The outdoor air supply fan shall be connected to the outdoors through an outdoor air supply duct.
(5) The outdoor air supply duct required by Sentence (4)shall incorporate a flow-regulating damper.
(6) With the principal ventilation fan operating at its normal operating exhaust capacity, the airflow in the outdoor air supply duct shall be measured and the flow-regulating damper required by Sentence (5)shall be adjusted and permanently fixed so that the airflow in the outdoor air supply duct is within ±10% of the actual normal operating exhaust capacity of the principal ventilation fan.
(7) The airflow measurements required by Sentence (6)shall be done using a method accurate to within ±15% of the flow rate being measured.
(8) Except where a heat recovery ventilator is used to supply the outdoor air, the outdoor air shall be tempered to at least 12°C before being circulated to habitable spaces.
(9) Any tempering device installed to comply with Sentence (8)shall be installed in accordance with Articles . and9..
(10) Except as provided in Sentence (11), outdoor air shall be distributed by a system of trunk and branch supply ducts, from the outdoor air supply fan required by Sentence (2) to
(a) each bedroom
(b) any storey, including basements and heated crawl spaces, without a bedroom, and
(c) if there is no storey without a bedroom, to the principal living area.
(11) In a dwelling unit in which there is no storey without a bedroom, if an exhaust air intake for the principal ventilation fan is located in the principal living area and the principal ventilation fan has no more than 2 exhaust air intakes located in other rooms, distribution of outdoor air to the principal living area is not required.
(12) All branch supply ducts that are not fitted with diffusers with adjustable balance stops shall be supplied with balancing dampers that
(a) can be fixed in their adjusted positions, and
(b) include devices to indicate the positions ofthe dampers.
(13) The air supply outlets through which outdoor air is delivered to the rooms shall be located in the ceiling or in a wall at not less than 2 m above the floor and shall be designed and installed to promote diffusion across the ceiling.
(14) Provision shall be made for the free flow of air to or from all rooms by leaving gaps beneath doors, using louvred doors or installing grilles in doors.
(1) A ventilation system with no provision for the introduction of outdoor air to the dwelling unit may only be used where the dwelling unit
(a) contains no solid-fuel-burning appliance, no fireplace of other than dire ct-vented type, and no other fuel-fired space- or water-heating appliance of other than direct-vented or mechan ically vented types, and
(b) has a forced air distribution system with a circulation fan with a rated capacity equal to at least 5 times the actual normal operating exhaust capacity of the fan installed to satisfy the requirement for a principal ventilation fan, a supply side that complies with Sentences9..(10)to(12), and a return side that complies with Articles
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), a supplemental exhaust fan with a rated capacity not less than 50 L/s shall be installed in each kitchen.
(2) A supplemental exhaust fan is not required in a kitchen where the only exhaust air intake for the principal ventilation fan is located in that kitchen.
(3) A supplemental exhaust fan is not required in a kitchen where the principal ventilation fan draws from that kitchen and other rooms, provided
(a) the principal ventilation fan can be switched to a high exhaust rate equal to not less than 2.5 times the minimum normal operating exhaust capacity specified in Table ., and
(b) the high exhaust rate of the principal ventilation fan, as described in Clause (a),is activated by a manual switch in the kitchen labeled “KITCHEN EXHAUST.”
(4) Where an exhaust air intake for the principal ventilation fan is not located in a bathroom or water-closet room, a supplemental exhaust fan with a rated capacity not less than 25 L/s shall be installed in that bathroom or water-closet room.
(5) Where the intake for a supplemental exhaust fan other than a cooking appliance exhaust fan serving a cooktop is installed in a kitchen, it shall be installed in the ceiling or on the wall at not less than 2 m above the floor.
(6) A supplemental exhaust fan required by this Article shall be controlled by a manual switch located in the room served by the fan.
(7) Where a kitchen or bathroom is exempted from the requirement to install a supplemental exhaust fan by virtue of Sentence (2) or (3), the principal ventilation fan shall be controlled by a manual switch located in the kitchen or bathroom and wired in parallel with the manual switch required by Sentence .(5).
(8) Where a supplemental exhaust fan required by this Article is controlled by a dehumidistat or other automatic control in addition to the manual switch required by Sentence (6),the manual switch shall be capable of activating the fan regardless of the setting of the automatic control.
(1) This Article applies to
(a) dwelling units that contain a fuel-fired space-heating appliance or fuel-fired water-heating appliance of other than direct-vented or mechanically vented types, and
(b) ancillary spaces that contain an exhaust device, where the space is not within a dwelling unit in a house with a secondary suite and where the house with a secondary suite contains a fuel-fired space-heating appliance or fuel- fired water-heating appliance of other than direct-vented or mechanically vented types.
(2) Except as provided in Sentences(6)to(8),any mechanical air exhausting device, other than the principal ventilation fan operating at a rate not greater than the maximum permitted by Table ., shall be provided with outdoor makeup air supplied by a fan rated to deliver outdoor air to the dwelling unit at a rate
(a) not less than the exhaust capacity of the device, and
(b) not greater than that exhaust capacity plus 10%.
(3) An outdoor makeup air supply fan required by Sentence (2)shall be wired so that it is activated whenever the device for which it supplies outdoor makeup air is activated.
(4) The outdoor makeup air required by Sentence (2)shall be
(a) introduced to a normally unoccupied area in the dwelling unit, or
(b) tempered to at least 12°C before being introduced to occupied areas or to a supply duct system.
(5) If the outdoor makeup air required by Sentence (2) is not tempered upstream of the supply fan, the supply fan required by Sentence (2)shall be approved by the manufacturer for the handling ofuntempered outdoor air.
(6) The provision of makeup air as described in Sentence (2)is not required in a dwelling unit with solid-fuel-burning appliances, where all other fuel-fired appliances are direct-vented or mechanically vent ed.
(7) The provision of makeup air as described in Sentence (2)is not required if it can be shown using the test procedures in CAN/CGSB-51.71, “Depressurization Test,” that the maximum depressurization levels to which fuel-fired space- or water-heating appliances and their venting systems will be exposed will not exceed the limits set out in CAN/CGSB- 51.71 for the categories of fuel-fired appliances and venting systems installed in the dwelling unit.
(8) The provision of makeup air as described in Sentence (2)is not required for mechanical exhausting devices operating a subfloor depressurization system installed for the purpose of reducing the risk of radon ingress.
(1) Article . applies to every building that
(a) contains a residential occupancy, and contains a fuel-burning appliance or a storage garage, or
(b) contains a residential occupancy and is served by a forced-air fuel-burning appliance not contained within the building.
(2) Articles . and . apply to every building.
(1) A carbon monoxide alarm shall be installed in a suite of residential occupancy where
(a) a fuel-burning appliance or a flue is installed in the suite,
(b) a forced-air fuel-burning appliance provides heated air directly to the suite,
(c) a fuel-burning appliance or a flue is located in a room, suite or area that shares a common wall or floor or ceiling assembly with the su ite, or
(d) a storage garage shares a common wall or floor or ceiling assembly with the suite.
(2) Where a carbon monoxide alarm is required by Sentence (1) to be installed in a suite of residential occupancy, other than a suite that consists of a combined living and sleeping area, a carbon monoxide alarm shall be installed
(a) adjacent to each sleeping room in the suite, and
(b) on each storey without a sleeping room in the suite.
(3) Where a carbon monoxide alarm is required by Sentence (1) to be installed in a suite of residential occupancy that consists of a combined living and sleeping area, a carbon monoxide alarm shall be installed in the combined living and sleeping area.
(4) In addition to the carbon monoxide alarms required to be installed in a su ite of residential occupancy in accordance with Sentence (2), a carbon monoxide alarm shall be installed in each sleeping room within the suite where the sleeping room
(a) contains a fuel-burning appliance or a flue, or
(b) shares a common wall or floor or ceiling assembly
(i) with a room, suite or area that is located outside the suite and contains a fuel-burning appliance or a flue, (ii) with a storage garage, or
(iii) that is adjacent to an attic or crawl space to which the storage garage is also adjacent.
(5) Carbon monoxide alarm s shall be installed in public corridors serving suite s of residential oc cupancy where the corridor is directly heated by a forced-air fuel-burning appliance.
(6) Where carbon monoxide alarms are required by Sentence (5) to be installed in a p ublic corridor, the carbon monoxide alarms shall be installed such that
(a) there is at least one carbon monoxi de alarm in each portion of a divided corridor, and
(b) each carbon monoxide alarm in an undivided portion of a corridor is spaced not more than 25 m apart.
(1) A carbon monoxide alarm shall be installed in service rooms or other areas ofa building where the service room or other area
(a) contains a fuel-burning appliance used for bu ilding services or laundry drying equipment, and
(b) is not located within a suite of residential occupancy.
(1) The carbon monoxide alarms required by Articles . and . shall
(a) except as permitted in Sentence (2), be permanently connected to an electrical circuit and shall have no disconnect switch between the overcurrent device and the carbon monoxide alarm,
(b) in case the regular power supply to the carbon monoxide alarm is interrupted, be provided with a battery as an alternative power source that can continue to provide power to the carbon monoxide alarm for a period of not less than 8 h in the standby condition, followed by the operation of the carbon monoxide alarm for an alarm signal for at least 12 h,
(c) be wired so that
(i) activation of one carbon monoxide alarm within a suite of residential occupancy will activate all carbon monoxide alarms within the suite,
(ii) activation of one carbon monoxide alarm within a house with a secondary suite will activate all carbon monoxide alarms within the house with a secondary suite including their common spaces, and
(iii) activation of one c arbon monoxide alarm located in a public corridor serving suites of residential occupancy will activate all carbon monoxide alarms within the corridor,
(d) be audible within sleeping rooms when the intervening doors are closed, where located adjacent to a sleeping room in a suite of residential occupancy, and
(e) conform to
(i) CAN/CSA-6.19, “Residential Carbon Monoxide Alarming Devices,” or
(ii) UL 2034, “Single and Multiple Station Carbon Monoxide Alarms.”
(2) Where the building is not supplied with electrical power, carbon monoxide alarms are
(a) are permitted to be battery operated, and
(b) need not have a visual signaling component.
(3) Except as permitted in Sentence (2), the carbon monoxide alarms required by Articles . and . shall have a visual signalling component conforming to the requirements in . (Light, Color and Pulse Characteristics) of NFPA 72, “National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code”.
(4) The luminous intensity for visual signaling components required by Sentence (3) that are installed in sleeping rooms or combined living and sleeping areas shall be a minimum of 175 cd.
(5) The visual signaling component required by Sentence (3) need not
(a) be integrated with the carbon monoxide alarm provided it is interconnected to it,
(b) be on battery backup, or
(c) have synchronized flash rates, when installed in a dwelling unit.
(6) The carbon monoxide alarms required by Articles . and . shall be installed
(a) at the manufacturer’s recommended height, or
(b) in the absence of specific instructions, on or near the ceiling.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (4), capacity ratings for required fans shall be determined in accordance with
(a) CAN/CSA-C260-M, “Rating the Performance of Residential Mechanical Ventilating Equipment,” or
(b) HVI Publication 916, “Airflow Test Procedure.”
(2) Sound ratings for fans shall be determined in accordance with
(a) CAN/CSA-C260-M, “Rating the Performance of Residential Mechanical Ventilating Equipment,” or
(b) HVI Publication 915, “Loudness Testing and Rating Procedure.”
(3) Capacity ratings for fans shall be measured at the external static pressure differentials shown in Table .-A.
Table 9.32.3.10.-A Minimum External Static Pressure Differential for Rating of Fans Forming Part of Sentence 9.32.3.10.(3)
| Fan Configuration or Application | Minimum External Static Pressure Differential to be Used in Determining Rated Capacity |
|---|---|
| Fans installed with ducts connected on both sides, any application | 100 Pa (0.4 inch water column ) |
| Fans installed with ducts on one side only, used as the principal ventilation fan in exhaust-only systems permitted by Article 9.32.3.6 . | 62 Pa (0.25 inch water column ) |
| Other required fans | 25 Pa (0.1 inch water column ) |
(4) Fans in heat recovery ventilators used to provide one or more required fans shall have their airflow at normal temperature rated in accordance with CAN/CSA-C439, “Standard laboratory methods oftest for rating the performance of heat/energy-recovery ventilators.”
(5) Where a heat recovery ventilator is used to provide one or more required fans, it shall have a low-temperature ventilation reduction factor of not less than 50% when tested in accordance with CAN/CSA-C439, “Standard laboratory methods oftest for rating the performance of heat/energy-recovery ventilators,” at an outdoor temperature at least as low as the outdoor design temperature for the location where the ventilation system is to be installed, but the outdoor design temperature need not be lower than -25°C.
(6) Fans, including make-up air supply fans, installed to satisfy Articles9.. to9.. with less than 1 m of duct between themselves and the visible interior surfaces of rooms other than unfinished basements, furnace rooms, utility rooms and attics, shall have a sound rating complying with Table .-Bwhen operating at the required flow rate.
(7) Mechanical ventilation devices shall conform to CSA C22.2 No. 113, “Fans and Ventilators.”
Table .-B Maximum Sound Rating for Fans Forming Part of Sentence .(6)
| Fan Application | Maximum Sound Rating, sones | |
|---|---|---|
| Rated according to CAN / CSA -C260-M | Rated according to HVI 915 | |
| Principal exhaust fan | 2.0 | 2.5 |
| Supplemental exhaust fans installed in bathrooms and their make-up air fans | 2.5 | 3.5 |
| Supplemental exhaust fans installed in kitchens and their make-up air fans | no rating required | no rating required |
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (6), ventilation ducts and their fittings shall conform to the requirements of Article ., except that exhaust ducts serving only a bathroom or water-closet room are permitted to be of combustible material, provided they are reasonably airtight and constructed of a material impervious to water.
(2) Exhaust ducts shall not discharge into heated or unheated enclosed spaces.
(3) Where an exhaust duct passes through an unheated space or is not separated from an unheated space by an insulated building assembly, the duct shall be insulated to not less than RSI 0.5.
(4) Where a duct carrying outdoor air that is not tempered and not mixed with indoor air passes through heated space, it shall be
(a) insulated to not less than RSI 0.5, and
(b) provided with a vapour barrier.
(5) All exhaust intakes located within 3 m horizontally of a cooktop shall be equipped with a grease filter at the intake end.
(6) Ductwork for cooking appliance exhaust fans shall
(a) be of noncombustible, corrosion-resistant material,
(b) lead directly to the outdoors with no connections to other exhaust fans or ducts, and
(c) be equipped with a grease filter at the intake end.
(7) All ductwork shall be installed to avoid crushing and shall be permanently supported to prevent sagging.
(8) Joints in all ventilation system ducting shall be sealed with mastic, metal foil duct tape or the manufacturers' specified sealants.
(9) Except where the size of a duct can be determined using Table .-Aor Table .-B,duct sizes shall be determined according to Subsection .
(10) In using Table .-A,
(a) when sizing branch ducts, “maximum length of duct” refers to the physical length of the duct from the interior grille served by that branch duct to the exterior hood,
(b) when sizing a trunk duct, “maximum length of duct” refers to the physical length of the duct from the interior grille of the longest branch served by that trunk to the exterior hood,
(c) outdoor air supply ducts shall be sized as trunk ducts,
(d) “maximum airflow in duct” refers to the maximum airflow rate that a given section of duct (branch or trunk) must provide to satisfy the ventilation system design, and
(e) “fan's external static pressure” refers to the external static pressure at which the fan is rated to achieve the maximum airflow rate that the fan is required or intended to provide.
(11) Where flexible duct is used, it may be sized by choosing the next higher diameter in Table .-Aor by choosing the diameter for a duct twice as long as the actual length.
(12) Where rectangular duct is used in place of round duct, it shall be selected according to Table .-B.
Table 9.32.3.11.-A Equivalent Duct Sizes Forming Part of Sentence 9.32.3.11.(9)
| Fan 's External Static Pressure, Pa | Duct Diameter, mm | Maximum Airflow in Duct , L/s | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 7 | 15 | 25 | 35 | 50 | 75 | 100 | ||
| Maximum Length of Duct , m | ||||||||
| 25 | 75 100 125 150 175 200 | 6 25 60 60 60 60 | 1 6 17 42 60 60 | 0 2 6 16 34 60 | 0 1 3 8 18 35 | 0 0 1 4 9 18 | 0 0 0 2 4 8 | 0 0 0 1 2 5 |
| 50 | 75 100 125 150 175 200 | 16 60 60 60 60 60 | 4 16 47 60 60 60 | 1 6 18 44 60 60 | 0 3 9 23 49 60 | 0 1 5 12 25 48 | 0 0 2 5 12 22 | 0 0 1 3 7 13 |
| 62.5 | 75 100 125 150 175 200 | 22 60 60 60 60 60 | 5 21 60 60 60 60 | 2 8 24 58 60 60 | 1 4 12 31 60 60 | 0 2 6 15 33 60 | 0 1 3 7 15 29 | 0 0 1 4 9 17 |
| 100 | 75 100 125 150 175 200 | 38 60 60 60 60 60 | 9 36 60 60 60 60 | 3 14 41 60 60 60 | 1 7 22 53 60 60 | 0 3 11 27 57 60 | 0 1 5 12 27 51 | 0 1 3 7 15 30 |
| 150 | 75 100 125 150 175 200 | 59 60 60 60 60 60 | 14 57 60 60 60 60 | 5 22 60 60 60 60 | 2 11 34 60 60 60 | 1 6 17 42 60 60 | 0 2 8 20 42 60 | 0 1 4 11 24 46 |
Table .-B Equivalent Duct Sizes Forming Part of Sentences .(9) and (12)
| Required Round Duct Size, mm | Permitted Equivalent Rectangular Duct Size, mm | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Stack Duct | 100 mm Depth | 125 mm Depth | 150 mm Depth | |
| 75 | 75 × 150 | 50 × 100 | — | — |
| 100 | 75 × 250 | 75 × 100 | 75 × 125 | 75 × 150 |
| 125 | 75 × 250 | 125 × 100 | 100 × 125 | 100 × 150 |
| 150 | 75 × 300 | 200 × 100 | 150 × 125 | 125 × 150 |
| 175 | 75 × 350 | 275 × 100 | 200 × 125 | 175 × 150 |
| > 175 | Design to Subsection 9.33.4. |
(1) This Article shall apply to heat recovery ventilators installed to provide one or more of the fans required by this Subsection.
(2) Two or more heat recovery ventilators shall not be connected in parallel airflow to a common air supply duct, unless specifically permitted by the manufacturer.
(3) Two or more heat recovery ventilators shall not be connected in parallel airflow to a common downstream exhaust duct.
(4) All start-up procedures recommended by the manufacturer, including air balancing and airflow determination, shall be followed.
(5) A means for the free flow of condensate shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations or, in their absence, a condensate drain of at least 1/2 inch nominal pipe size pitched in the direction of flow and complete with a trap or condensate pump of sufficient capacity shall be installed and connected to the dwelling unit's drain, waste and vent system.
(6) The heat recovery ventilator and all condensate lines shall be installed in a space where the ambient temperature will not adversely affect the operation of the system.
(1) Intake openings shall be located so as to avoid contamination of the ventilation air from other local sources such as automobile exhaust and exhaust from the building or adjacent buildings.
(2) The distance from the bottom of an air intake opening to finished ground or to any nearer and lower permanent horizontal surface shall be not less than 450 mm or the depth of expected snow accumulation, whichever is greater.
(3) The distance separating air intakes for mechanical ventilation from exhaust outlets that are potential sources of contaminants, such as gas vents or oil fill pipes, shall be not less than 1 800 mm.
(4) Except as provided in Sentences(5)and (6), exhaust outlets that discharge air containing moisture, such as bathroom ventilation and clothes dryer exhaust outlets, shall be located at least 1 800 mm from air intakes and vented soffits.
(5) Where an exhaust outlet referred to in Sentence (4) is located within a soffit, the soffit shall either be unvented, or if vented, the full depth of the soffit shall be blocked for a distance of 1 800 mm on each side of the exhaust outlet.
(6) Where an exhaust outlet referred to in Sentence (4) is located in a side wall less than 1 800 mm from a soffit, a section of the soffit above the exhaust outlet shall be unvented, or if vented, the full depth of the soffit shall be blocked in accordance with the widths stipulated in Table .-A, centred over the location of the outlet.
Table 9.32.3.13.-A Widths of Unvented or Blocked Soffits Where Exhaust Outlets Are Less Than 1 800 mm from a Soffit Forming Part of Sentence 9.32.3.13.(6)
| Distance Between Exhaust Outlet and Soffit, mm | Total Width of Unvented or Blocked Soffit Cent red Over Location of Exhaust Outlet, mm |
|---|---|
| 1 to 300 | 3 600 |
| 301 to 600 | 3 400 |
| 601 to 900 | 3 100 |
| 901 to 1 200 | 2 700 |
| 1 201 to 1 500 | 2 000 |
| 1 501 to 1 799 | 1 000 |
(7) Air intakes shall be clearly labeled as such for identification from locations outside the dwelling unit.
(8) The distance from the bottom of an exhaust outlet to finished ground or to any nearer and lower permanent horizontal surface shall be not less than 100 mm.
(9) Where air intake and exhaust openings are in exposed locations, provision shall be made to protect them from the entry of precipitation by the use of louvres, weather cowls or other suitable protection.
(10) Air intake openings shall incorporate screens or grilles to protect against the entry of animals and insects.
(11) Except for exhaust outlets serving heat recovery ventilators, exhaust outlets shall incorporate backdraft dampers.
(12) An exhaust outlet that does not incorporate a backdraft damper located at the building envelope shall incorporate a screen located at the building envelope to protect against the entry of animals.
(13) Screens, grilles and filters installed in air intake and exhaust openings shall be easily removable for cleaning purposes, without the need for special tools.
(14) Where screens or grilles are installed in air intake and exhaust openings, the net free area of the air intake or exhaust opening shall be equal to or greater than the required cross-sectional area of the duct served or such openings shall comply with Table .-B.
(15) Screens and grilles shall be of corrosion-resistant material.
Table .-B Area of Openings with Screens or Grilles Forming Part of Sentence .(14)
| Mesh Size of Screen or Grille, mm | Area of Opening |
|---|---|
| Less than 4 | 3 times required area of duct served |
| 4 to 6 | 2 times required area of duct served |
| Larger than 6 | Required area of duct served |
Section 9.33.Heating and Air-Conditioning
9.33.1.General
(1) This Section applies to the design and installation of
(a) heating systems, including requirements for combustion air, and ai r-conditioning systems serving only one dwelling unit, and
(b) radiant heating systems in houses with a secondary suite including their common spaces.
(2) The design and installation of heating systems, including requirements for combustion air, and air-conditioning systems other than those described in Sentence (1) shall conform to Part 6. (See Note A-.(2) and Subsection .)
(2.1) Repairs or component replacements that change the capacity or extent of safety of an existing heating, ventilating or air-conditioning system and that alter the method of operation shall conform to this Code.
(3) Air duct distribution systems serving one of the dwelling units in a house with a secondary suite shall not be directly interconnected with other parts of the house.
9.33.2.Required Heating Systems
(1) Residential buildings intended for use in the winter months on a continuing basis shall be equipped with heating facilities conforming to this Section.
9.33.3.Design Temperatures
(1) At the outside design temperature, required heating facilities shall be capable of maintaining an indoor air temperature of not less than
(a) 22°C in all living spaces,
(b) 18°C in unfinished basements,
(c) 18°C in common service rooms, ancillary spaces and exits in houses with a secondary suite, and
(d) 15°C in heated crawl spaces.
(1) The outdoor conditions to be used in designing heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems shall be the appropriate values for the location as set out in MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, “Climatic and Seismic Data,” using 2.5 percent design temperature criteria.
9.33.4.General Requirements for Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems
(1) Heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems, including related mechanical refrigeration systems, shall be designed, constructed and installed to conform to good engineering practice appropriate to the circumstances such as described in
(a) the ASHRAE Handbooks and Standards,
(b) CSA F280, “Determining the required capacity of residential space heating and cooling appliances,” and the outside winter design temperatures shall conform to MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, “Climatic and Seismic Data,”
(c) CAN/CSA-F326-M, “Residential Mechanical Ventilation Systems,” r1 (d) the NFPA Standards,
(e) the HRAI Digest,
(f) the Hydronics Institute Manuals, and
(g) the SMACNA Manuals. (See also Subsection . for the design of systems that also provide ventilation.)
(1) The design and installation of hydronic heating systems shall conform to
(a) CSA B214, “Installation code for hydronic heating systems”, or
(b) good engineering practice appropriate to the circumstances such as described in Article .
(1) Each dwelling unit shall be provided with a temperature control in accordance with Article . (See Note A- .(1))
(1) Equipment forming part ofa heating or air-conditioning system, with the exception of embedded pipes or ducts, shall be installed with provision for access for inspection, maintenance, repair and cleaning.
(1) Equipment forming part ofa heating or air-conditioning system that may be adversely affected by freezing temperatures and that is located in an unheated area shall be protected from freezing.
(1) Heating and cooling systems shall be designed to allow for expansion and contraction of the heat transfer fluid and to maintain the system pressure within the rated working pressure limits of all components of the system.
(1) Mechanical systems and equipment shall be designed and installed to accommodate the maximum amount of structural movement provided for in the construction of the building.
(2) Where the building is in a location where the spectral acceleration, Sa(0.2), is greater than 0.55, heating and air-conditioning equipment with fuel or power connections shall be secured to the structure to resist overturning and displacement. (See Note A-.(3))
(1) Asbestos shall not be used in air distribution systems or equipment.
(1) Systems serving garages, and systems serving other occupied parts ofa dwelling unit but located in or running through a garage, shall be designed and constructed in a manner such that means are not provided for the transfer of contaminants from the garage into other spaces in the dwelling unit.
9.33.5.Heating and Air-Conditioning Appliances and Equipment
(1) The heating system capacity shall be based on the heating load calculated in accordance with Sentence .(1).
(2) Where a cooling system is installed, the cooling system capacity shall be based on the cooling load calculated in accordance with Sentence .(1).
(3) The oversizing and undersizing of heating and cooling equipment capacities shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of CSA F280, “Determining the required capacity of residential space heating and cooling appliances.”
(1) The design and installation of earth energy systems shall conform to CAN/CSA-C448.2, “Design and installation of earth energy systems for residential and other small buildings,” where such systems use groundwater, submerged heat exchangers or ground heat exchangers to serve,
(a) a house with or without a secondary unit, or,
(b) a building, other than a house with or without a secondary unit, where the conditioned space is not more than 1 400 m².
(2) Except for a house with or without a s econdary unit, the design and installation of earth energy systems shall conform to CAN/CSA-C448.1, “Design and installation of earth energy systems for commercial and institutional buildings,” where such systems use groundwater, submerged heat exchangers or ground heat exchangers to condition a floor space area more than 1 400 m².
(1) The design, construction and installation, including the provision of combustion air, of solid-fuel-burning appliances and equipment, including stoves, cooktops, ovens and space heaters, shall conform to CSA B365, “Installation Code for Solid-Fuel-Burning Appliances and Equipment.” (See Note A-.(1))
(2) Solid fuel-burning stoves,furnaces and hydronic heating systems designed to burn solid fuels, other than coal, shall conform to the particulate emission limits of,
(a) CSA B415.1, “Performance Testing of Solid-Fuel-Burning Heating Appliances”, or
(b) the “Standards of Performance for New Residential Wood Heaters”, set out in Subpart AAA of Part 60 of Title 40 of the Code of Federal Regulations, published by the United States Environmental Protection Agency, as it read on March 16, 2015. (See Note A-.(2))
(1) Fireplaces shall conform to Section 9.22.
9.33.6.Air Duct Systems
(1) The requirements of this Subsection apply to the design, construction and installation of air duct distribution systems serving heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems that serve an individual dwelling unit within the scope of Part 9.
(2) Air duct distribution systems in which the rated heat input exceeds 120 kW shall conform to Part 6 and Subsection .
(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) to(6.2)and in Article ., all ducts, duct connectors, associated fittings and plenums used in air duct systems shall be constructed of steel, aluminum alloy, copper, clay or similar noncombustible material.
(2) Ducts, associated fittings and plenums are permitted to contain combustible material provided they
(a) conform to the appropriate requirements for Class 1 duct materials in CAN/ULC-S110,“Standard Methods of Test for Air Ducts,力
(b) conform to Article . and Subsection .,
(c) are not used in vertical runs serving more than 2 storeys, and
(d) are not used in air duct systems in which the air temperature may exceed 120°C.
(3) Duct sealants shall have aflame-spread rati ng of not more than 25 and a smoke developed classification of not more than 50.
(4) Duct connectors that contain combustible materials and that are used between ducts and air outlet units shall
(a) conform to the appropriate requirements for Class 1 air duct materials in CAN/ULC-S110,“Standard Methods of Test for Air Ducts,力
(b) be limited to 4 m in length,
(c) be used only in horizontal runs, and
(d) not penetrate required fire separati ons.
(5) Combustible ducts that are part of a duct system carrying only ventilation air and that are contained entirely within a dwelling unit need not comply with the requirements of Sentences(1)to(4).
(6) Except as provided in Sentences .(2) and(3),ducts that are part of a return-air duct system and that are contained entirely within a dwelling unit need not comply with the requirements of Sentences(1)to(4).
(6.1) All ductwork and fittings shall be constructed and installed in conformance with SMACNA Manuals and ASHRAE Handbooks.
(6.2) All duct materials and fittings shall be
(a) suitable for exposure to the temperature and humidity of the air being conveyed, and
(b) resistant to corrosion due to contaminants in the air being conveyed in the duct.
(7) Materials referred to in Sentences(1)to (6.2), when used in a location where they may be subjected to excessive moisture, shall
(a) have no appreciable loss of strength when wet, and
(b) be corrosion-resistant
(1) Tape used for sealing joints in air ducts, plenums and other parts of air duct systems shall meet the flame-resistance requirements for fabric in CAN/ULC-S109, “Standard Method for Flame Tests of Flame-Resistant Fabrics and Films.”
(1) Reserved.
(2) Reserved.
(3) Reserved.
(4) Reserved.
(5) Except as permitted in Sentences (6) and (7), foamed plastic insulation shall not be used as part ofan air duct or for insulating an air duct.
(6) Foamed plastic insulation conforming to Article . is permitted to be used to insulate a galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum air duct, provided
(a) the foamed plastic insulation applied to supply ductwork is not less than 3 m from the fur nace bonnet,
(b) the temperature within the ductwork where the insulation is installed is not greater than 50°C,
(c) duct joints are taped with a product conforming to Sentence .(1),
(d) return air plenums are separated from the foamed plastic insulation, and
(e) the foamed plastic insulation is protected in accordance with Article .
(7) Foamed plastic insulation is permitted to be used in a ceiling space that acts as a return air plenum provided the foamed plastic insulation is protected from exposure to the plenum in accordance with Sentence .(4).
(8) Reserved.
(9) Linings of ducts shall be installed so that they will not interfere with the operation of volume or balancing dampers or of fire dampers,fire stop flaps and other closures.
(1) Galvanized steel or aluminum supply ducts shall conform to Table .
(2) The design of fittings for ducts shall conform to ANSI/SMACNA 006, “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible,” except that metal thicknesses shall conform to Table .
Table 9.33.6.5. Minimum Metal Thickness of Ducts Forming Part of Article 9.33.6.5.
| Type of Duct | Maximum Diameter, mm | Maximum Width or Depth, mm | Minimum Metal Thickness, mm | |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Duct Material | ||||
| Galvanized Steel | Aluminum | |||
| Round ducts serving single dwelling un it s | 125 or less | — | 0.254 | 0.30 |
| Round | 350 | — | 0.33 | 0.30 |
| over 350 | — | 0.41 | 0.41 | |
| Rectangular, enclosed | — | 350 | 0.33 | 0.30 |
| — | over 350 | 0.41 | 0.41 | |
| Rectangular, not enclosed, with required clearance up to 12 mm | — | 350 | 0.33 | 0.41 |
| — | over 350 | 0.41 | 0.48 | |
| Rectangular, not enclosed, with required clearance of more than 12 mm | — | 350 | 0.41 | 0.41 |
| — | over 350 | 0.48 | 0.48 |
(1) Where the installation of heating supply ducts in walls and floors creates a space between the duct and construction material, the space shall be firestopped with nonc ombustible material at each end.
(2) Ducts shall be securely supported by metal hangers, straps, lugs or brackets, except that, where zero clearance is permitted, wooden brackets are permitted to be used.
(3) All round duct joints shall be tight-fitting and lapped not less than 25 mm.
(4) Rectangular duct connections shall be made with S and drive cleats or equivalent mechanical connections.
(4.1) Rectangular panels in plenums and ducts more than 300 mm wide shall be shaped to provide sufficient stiffness.
(5) Duct systems shall have no openings other than those required for the proper operation and maintenance of the system.
(1) Air duct systems serving garages shall not be interconnected with other parts of the dwelling unit.
(2) Trunk supply ducts shall not be nailed directly to wood members.
(3) Branch ducts shall be supported at suitable spacings to maintain alignment and prevent sagging.
(4) Ducts passing through unheated spaces shall have all joints taped or otherwise sealed to ensure that the ducts are airtight throughout their length.
(5) Combustible ducts in concrete slabs-on-ground that are connected to a furnace supply plenum shall be located not closer than 600 mm to that plenum and not less than 600 mm from its connection to a riser or register.
(6) Ducts in or beneath concrete slabs-on-ground shall be watertight and corrosion-, decay-, and mildew-resistant.
(7) Underground ducts shall
(a) be constructed to provide interior drainage from and access to all low points,
(b) not be connected directly to a sewer, and
(c) be installed and constructed of materials in conformance with ASHRAE Handbooks, SMACNA Manuals and the HRAI Digest.
(8) Where a supply duct or return duct is not protected by an insulated exterior wall or where the duct is exposed to an unheated space it shall be insulated to provide a thermal resistance of not less than RSI 2.1.
(9) Where a supply duct or return duct is located in an unconditioned space or outdoors, all joints ofthe ductwork shall be sealed to a Class A seal level in accordance with the SMACNA, “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”.
(10) Where a supply duct is located in a conditioned space, the ductwork shall be sealed to a Class C seal level in accordance with the SMACNA, “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”.
(11) A clean-out or pump-out connection shall be provided in an underground duct system at every low point of the duct system.
(1) Reserved.
(2) Where the plenum clearance is 75 mm or less, the clearance between a supply duct and combustible material shall
(a) be equal to the required plenum clearance within 450 mm of the plenum, and
(b) be not less than 12 mm at a distance of 450 mm or more from the plenum, except that this clearance may be reduced to zero beyond a bend or offset in the duct sufficiently large to shield the remainder of the supply duct from direct radiation from the furnace heat exchanger. (See Note A-.(2))
(3) Where the plenum clearance is more than 75 mm but not more than 150 mm, the clearance between a supply duct and combustible material shall be
(a) equal to the required plenum clearance within a horizontal distance of 1.8 m of the plenum, and
(b) not less than 12 mm at a horizontal distance of 1.8 m or more from the plenum, except that this distance may be reduced to zero beyond a bend or offset in the duct sufficiently large to shield the remainder of the duct from direct radiation from the furnace heat exchanger. (See Note A-.(3))
(4) Where the plenum clearance is more than 150 mm, the clearance between a supply duct and combustible material shall be
(a) equal to the required plenum clearance within a horizontal distance of 1 m of the plenum,
(b) not less than 150 mm within a horizontal distance between 1 m and 1.8 m from the plenum, and
(c) not less than 25 mm at a horizontal distance of 1.8 m or more from the plenum, except that this distance may be reduced to 8 mm beyond a bend or offset in the duct sufficiently large to shield the remainder of the supply duct from direct radiation from the furn ace heat exchanger. (See Note A-.(4))
(5) Where a register is installed in a floor directly over a pipeless furnace, a double-walled register box with not less than 100 mm between walls, or a register box with the warm-air passage completely surrounded by the cold-air passage, shall be permitted in lieu of the clearances listed in Sentences (2) to(4).
(1) All branch supply ducts for residential systems shall be equipped with volume control dampers at the boot to permit balancing or shall be fitted with a diffuser incorporating an adjustable and lockable volume control device that can be set in a fixed position.
(1) Reserved.
(2) Combustible grilles, diffusers and other devices for the supply and return air openings installed in walls and ceilings shall have aflame-spread rati ng of
(a) not more than 200 in bathrooms, and
(b) not more than 150 in rooms or spaces other than bathrooms.
(1) Supply, return and exhaust air openings in rooms or spaces shall be protected by grilles having openings of a size that will not allow the passage of a 15 mm diameter sphere.
(2) Outdoor air intakes and exhaust outlets at the building exterior shall be designed or located so that the air entering the building system will not contain more contaminants than the normal exterior air.
(3) Exterior openings for outdoor air intakes and exhaust outlets shall be shielded from the entry of snow and rain and shall be fitted with corrosion-resistant screens of mesh having openings not larger than 15 mm, except where climatic conditions may require larger openings.
(4) Screens required in Sentence (3) shall be accessible for maintenance.
(1) In a dwelling unit, a warm-air supply outlet shall be provided in each finished room that is located adjacent to unheated space.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3),when a room described in Sentence (1)is located adjacent to exterior walls, such outlet shall be located so as to bathe at least one exterior wall or window with warm air, except in bathrooms, utility rooms or kitchens, where this may not be practical.
(3) Where the heating system is also designed to provide ventilation air, ceiling outlets or outlets located high on interior walls are permitted to be installed, provided the outlets are designed for this purpose and are installed with diffusers.
(4) At least one warm-air supply outlet shall be provided for each 40 m2 of floor surface area in unfinished basements serving dwelling units, and it shall be located so as to provide adequate distribution of warm air throughout the basement.
(5) At least one warm-air supply outlet shall be provided for each 80 m2 of floor surface area in heated crawl spaces serving dwelling units, and it shall be located so as to provide adequate distribution of warm air throughout the crawl space.
(6) Except for pipeless furnaces and floor furnaces, the capacity of warm-air supply outlets serving dwelling units shall be not less than the design heat loss from the area served and shall not exceed 3 kW per outlet.
(7) In basements and heated crawl spaces, the calculated heat gain from the supply ducts and plenum surfaces is permitted to be considered in calculating the design heat loss.
(8) The temperature of supply air at warm-air supply outlets shall not exceed 70°C.
(9) Warm-air supply outlets located in finished areas shall be provided with diffusers and adjustable openings and shall not be located on a furnace p lenum.
(10) Air duct systems serving storage garages shall not be interconnected with other parts of the bu ilding.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), where an exhaust-only system is installed, the principal ventilation fan control required by Sentence .(5) shall be wired in such a way that, where applicable, activation of the principal ventilation fan automatically activates the circulation fan of the forced air distribution system required by Clause (1)(b)at its rated capacity.
(3) Interlocking the forced air distribution system's circulation fan with the principal ventilation fan as required by Sentence (2)is not required where the forced air distribution system is equipped with a control that automatically activates the circulation fan at user-selected intervals.
(1) The return-air system shall be designed to handle the entire air supply.
(1.1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3), return ducts shall be constructed of material having a surface flame- spread rating of not more than 150.
(2) Where any part of a return duct will be exposed to radiation from the furnace heat exchanger or other radiating part within the furnace, such part of a return duct directly above or within 600 mm of the outside furnace casing shall be noncombustible.
(3) Return ducts serving solid-fuel-burning furnaces shall be constructed of noncombustible material.
(4) Combustible return ducts shall be lined with noncom bustible material
(a) below floor registers,
(b) at the bottom of vertical ducts, and
(c) under furnaces having a bottom return.
(5) Spaces between studs or joists used as return ducts shall be separated from the unused portions of such spaces by tight-fitting metal stops or wood blocking.
(6) A vertical return duct shall have openings to return air on not more than one floor.
(6.1) A public corridor shall comply with Sentences .(4) and (5).
(7) The return-air system shall be designed so that the negative pressure from the circulating fan cannot
(a) affect the furnace combustion air supply, nor
(b) draw combustion products from joints or openings in the furnace or flue pipe.
(7.1) Return-air from a dwelling unit shall not be recirculated to any other dwelling unit.
(1) Air filters for air duct systems shall conform to the requirements for Class 2 air filter units as described in CAN/ULC-S111, “Standard Method of Fire Tests for Air Filter Units.”
(2) When electrostatic-type filters are used, they shall be installed so as to ensure that the electric circuit is automatically de-energized when filter access doors are opened or, in dwelling units, when the furnace circulation fan is not operating.
(3) When odour removal equipment of the adsorption type is used it shall be
(a) installed to provide access so that adsorption material can be reactivated or renewed, and
(b) protected from dust accumulation by air filters installed on the inlet side.
(1) Where an exhaust duct passes through or is adjacent to unheated space, the duct shall be insulated to prevent moisture or condensation in the duct.
(2) Exhaust outlets shall be designed to prevent back draft under wind conditions.
(3) Exhaust ducts directly connected to laundry drying equipment shall be independent of other exhaust duct s.
(4) Exhaust systems shall discharge directly to the outdoors.
9.33.7.Radiators and Convectors
(1) Every steam or hot water radiator and convector located in a recess or concealed space or attached to the face of a wall of combustible construction shall be provided with a noncombustible lining or backing.
(1) The exposed surface temperature of a steam or hot water radiator shall not exceed 70°C unless precautions are taken to prevent human contact.
9.33.8.Piping for Heating and Cooling Systems
(1) Piping shall be made from materials designed to withstand the effects of temperatures and pressures that may occur in the system. (See Articles ., . and ., and Sentence .(3)for fire safety requirements.)
(2) Every pipe used in a heating or air -conditioning system shall be installed to allow for expansion and contraction due to temperature changes.
(3) Supports and anchors for piping in a heating or air-conditioning system shall be designed and installed to ensure that undue stress is not placed on the supporting structure.
(1) Insulation and coverings on pipes shall be composed of material suitable for the operating temperature of the system to withstand deterioration from softening, melting, mildew and mould.
(2) Insulation and coverings on pipes in which the temperature of the fluid exceeds 120°C
(a) shall be made of noncombustible material, or
(b) shall not flame, glow, smoulder or smoke when tested in accordance with ASTM C411, “Standard Specification for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation,” at the maximum temperature to which such insulation or covering is to be exposed in service.
(3) Except as provided in Sentence (6),where combustib le insulation is used on piping in a horizontal or vertical service space, the insulation and coverings on such pipes shall have afl ame-spread rating throughout the material of not more than
(a) 25 in buildings of noncombustible construction, and
(b) 75 in buildings of combustible construction.
(4) Except as provided in Sentence (6),insulation and coverings on piping located in rooms and spaces other than the service spaces described in Sentence (3)shall have aflame-spread rating not more than that required for the interior finish for the ceiling of the room or space.
(5) Pipes that are exposed to human contact shall be insulated so that the exposed surface does not exceed 52°C. (See Note A-.(3))
(6) No flame-spread rating or smoke developed classification limitations are required where combustible insulation and coverings are used on piping when such piping is
(a) located within a concealed space in a wall,
(b) located in a floor slab, or
(c) enclosed in a noncombustibl e raceway or conduit.
(1) Clearances between combustible material and bare pipes carrying steam or hot water shall conform to Table .
Table 9.33.8.3. Clearance Between Steam or Hot Water Pipes and Combustible Material Forming Part of Sentence 9.33.8.3.(1)
| Steam or Water Temperature (T), °C | Minimum Clearance, mm |
|---|---|
| T ≤ 95 | no clearance required |
| 95 < T ≤ 120 | 15 |
| T > 120 | 25 |
(1) Where a pipe carrying steam or hot water at a temperature above 120°C passes through a combustible floor, ceiling or wall, the construction shall be protected by a sleeve of metal or other noncombustibl e material not less than 50 mm larger in diameter than the pipe.
(2) Unprotected steam or hot water pipes that pass through a storage space shall be covered with not less than 25 mm thickness of noncombustible insulation to prevent direct contact with the material stored.
9.33.9.Refrigerating Systems and Equipment for Air-Conditioning
(1) Where a cooling unit is combined with a fuel-fired furnace in the same duct system, the cooling unit shall be installed
(a) in parallel with the heating furnace,
(b) upstream of the furnace, provided the furnace is designed for such application, or
(c) downstream of the furnace, provided the cooling unit is designed to prevent excessive temperature or pressure in the refrigeration system.
9.33.10.Chimneys and Venting Equipment
(1) Except as provided in Articles9.. and ., the products of combustion from oil-, gas- and solid-fuel- burning appliances, including stoves, cooktops, ovens and space heaters, shall be vented in conformance with the applicable appliance installation standard listed in Sentences .(1) and .(1).
(1) Factory-built chimneys serving solid-fuel-burning appliances, and their installation, shall comply with Sentence
(1) Masonry or concrete chimneys shall conform to Section 9.21.
Section 9.34.Electrical Facilities
9.34.1.General
(1) Where electrical services are available, electrical facilities shall be provided for every building in conformance with this Section.
(1) Entrance switches, meters, panel boxes, splitter boxes, time clocks and other similar equipment shall not be located in any public area unless adequate precautions are taken to prevent interference with the equipment.
(1) Recessed lighting fixtures shall not be located in insulated ceilings unless the fixtures are designed for such installations.
(1) Except for dwe lling units and except as required in Sentence (2), optical fibre cables and electrical wires and cables installed in buildings permitted to be of combustible construct ion shall
(a) not convey flame or continue to burn for more than 1 min when tested in conformance with the Vertical Flame Test in Clause . of CSA C22.2 No. 0.3, “Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables,” (FT1 Rating), or
(b) be located in
(i) totally enclosed noncombustible raceways, (See Note A-.(1)(b)(i))
(ii) masonry walls,
(iii) concrete slabs, or
(iv) totally enclosed non metallic raceways conforming to Clause .(1)(b).
(2) Where a concealed space in a floor or ceiling assembly is used as aplenum, electrical wires and cables within the plenum shall conform to Clause .(1)(a).
9.34.2.Lighting Outlets
(1) An exterior lighting outlet with fixture controlled by a wall switch located within the building shall be provided at every entrance to buildings of residential occupancy.
(2) The exterior lighting outlet with fixture required by Sentence (1) may be controlled by a wall switch or panel accessible to authorized personnel only, where it serves,
(a) a building entrance serving multiple suites of residential occupancy,
(b) multiple dwelling unit entrances,
(c) hotels, or
(d) motels.
(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), a lighting outlet with fixture controlled by a wall switch shall be provided in kitchens, bedrooms, living rooms, utility rooms, laundry rooms, dining rooms, bathrooms, water-closet rooms, vestibules and hallways in dwellin g units.
(2) Where a receptacle controlled by a wall switch is provided in bedrooms or living rooms, such rooms need not conform to the requirements of Sentence (1).
(1) Every stairway shall be lighted.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), 3-way wall switches located at the head and foot of every stairway shall be provided to control at least one lighting outlet with fixture for stairways with 4 or more risers in dwelling units and houses with a secondary suite including their common spaces.
(3) The stairway lighting for basements that do not contain finished space or lead to an outside entrance or built-in garage and which serve not more than one dwelling unit is permitted to be controlled by a single switch located at the head of the stairs.
(1) A lighting outlet with fixture shall be provided for each 30 m² or fraction thereof of floor area in unfinished basements.
(2) The outlet required in Sentence (1) nearest the stairs shall be controlled by a wall switch located at the head of the stairs.
(1) A lighting outlet with fixture shall be provided in storage rooms.
(1) A lighting outlet with fixture shall be provided for an attached, built-in or detached garage or carport.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), outlets required in Sentence (1) shall be controlled by a wall switch near the doorway.
(3) Where the outlet and fixture required in Sentence (1) are ceiling mounted above an area not normally occupied by a parked car, or are wall mounted, a fixture with a built-in switch is permitted to be used.
(4) Where a carport is lighted by a light at the entrance to a dwelling unit, additional carport lighting is not required.
(1) Every public or service area in buildings, including a recreational camp and a camp f or housing of workers, shall have lighting outlets with fixtures controlled by a wall switch or panel to illuminate such areas.
(2) When provided by incandescent lighting, illumination required in Sentence (1) shall conform to Table . (See Article . for lighting in means of egress.)
(3) When other types of lighting are used, illumination equivalent to that shown in Table . shall be provided.
Table 9.34.2.7. Lighting for Public Areas Forming Part of Sentences 9.34.2.7.(2) and (3)
| Room or Space | Minimum Illumination, lx | Minimum Lighting Power Density, W/m 2 of floor area (incandescent lighting) |
|---|---|---|
| Storage rooms | 50 | 5 |
| Service rooms and laundry areas | 200 | 20 |
| Garages | 50 | 5 |
| Public water closet rooms | 100 | 10 |
| Service hallways and stairways | 50 | 5 |
| Recreation rooms | 100 | 10 |
| Hallways, corridors, stairways and sleeping areas in recreational camps and camps for housing of worke rs | 100 | 10 |
| Kitchen in recreational camps and camps for h ousing of workers | 500 | 50 |
| All other rooms in recreational camps and c amps for housing of workers | 250 | 25 |
9.34.3.Emergency Lighting
(1) Emergency lighting shall conform to Subsection .
Section 9.35.Garages and Carports
9.35.1.Scope
(1) This Section applies to garages and carports serving not more than one dwelling unit.
(1) The construction of a garage or carport shall conform to the requirements for other buildings in this Part except as provided in this Section.
9.35.2.General
(1) Where a roofed enclosure used for the storage or parking of motor vehicles has more than 60 percent of the total perimeter enclosed by walls, doors or windows, the enclosure shall be considered a garage.
(1) Where an attached or built-in garage is provided, the garage floor shall be sloped to drain liquids to the outdoors.
9.35.3.Foundations
(1) Except as permitted in this Subsection,foundations conforming to Sections 9.12. and 9.15. shall be provided for the support of carport and garage super-structures, including that portion beneath garage doors.
(2) Detached garages of less than 55 m2 floor area and not more than 1 storey in height that are not of masonry or masonry veneer construction are permitted to be supported on
(a) wood mud sills, or
(b) a concrete floor slab having a minimum thickness of not less than 100 mm.
(1) In clay-type soils subject to significant movement with a change in soil moisture content, the foundation depth of carports or garages connected to a dwelling unit directly or by a breezeway shall be approximately the same depth as the foundation of the main bui lding.
(2) Where slab-on-ground construction is used, a construction joint shall be provided between the main building slab and a slab serving an attached garage, breezeway or carport.
(3) Except as provided in Section 9.12.,foundations for attached unheated garages or carports shall be below frost level.
(1) Detached garages of less than 55 m² floor area and not more than 1 storey in height that are not of masonry or masonry veneer construction need not conform with the foundation drainage requirements stated in Section 9.14. where the finished ground level is at or near the elevation of the garage’s floor and where the ground slopes away from the building.
(1) Piers for the support of carport columns shall extend not less than 150 mm above ground level.
(2) Piers referred to in Sentence (1) shall project not less than 25 mm beyond the base of the column but in no case be less than 190 mm by 190 mm in size.
9.35.4.Walls and Columns
(1) Interior finish need not be applied to garage and carport walls.
(1) Columns for garages and carports shall conform to Section 9.17., except that 89 mm by 89 mm wood columns may be used.
(1) Garage or carport walls and columns shall be anchored to the foundation to resist wind uplift in conformance with Subsection ., except that where a garage is supported on the surface of the ground, ground anchors shall be provided to resist wind uplift.
Section 9.36.Reserved
Section 9.37.Cottages
9.37.1.Scope
(1) This Section applies to buildings of residential occupancy used or intended to be used as seasonal recreational buildings.
(2) The buildings described in Sentence (1) shall comply with all the requirements of this Part, except where they are specifically exempted in this Section.
9.37.2.General
(1) Except as provided in Subsection . and Articles . and ., buildings used or intended to be used as seasonal recreational buildings need not comply with Sections 9.5. to 9.7. and 9.9. to 9.11.
(2) Flooring need not comply with Section 9.30., but tight-fitting floors shall be provided to support the live and dead loads.
(3) Except as provided in Sentence (4), thermal insulation, vapour barrier, air barrier construction, interior finishes, plumbing, heating, mechanical ventilation, air-conditioning and electrical facilities, need not be provided, but where any of these are provided, they shall comply with the requirements of this Part.
(4) Where heating and air-conditioning are provided, Article . need not be complied with.
(1) Continuous perimeter foundation walls are not required, but when they are provided, they shall comply with the requirements of this Part.
(2) Where unit masonry columns are used, the height of such columns shall not exceed,
(a) in the case of hollow masonry units, 4 times the least dimension of the units,
(b) in the case of solid masonry units or hollow units with voids filled with concrete, 10 times the least dimension of the column, or
(c) where the column is reinforced with at least four 13 mm diam bars and filled with concrete, 18 times the least dimension of the column.
(3) Columns in excess of the height limitations of Clauses (2)(a) to (c) shall be designed in accordance with Part 4.
(1) Where foundations below ground level and concrete floors on ground are used, they shall comply with Section 9.13.
(1) Every dwelling unit within the scope of this Section shall be provided with a s moke alarm in accordance with Subsection .
9.37.3.Tourist Accommodation
(1) Where buildings are used or intended to be used for seasonal tourist accommodation or for rent, they shall comply with Sections 9.5. to 9.8. in addition to the requirements of this Section.
Section 9.38.Log Construction
9.38.1.General
(1) Logs that are sound and free of fractures may be used for foundations, beams, posts and similar members, provided it can be shown by a structural analysis or tests or previous experience that the strength of the member is adequate for its intended purposes.
(1) The portion of any log coming in contact with masonry or concrete at or below grade shall be treated with a wood preservative to prevent decay.
(1) All exterior joints between logs shall be rendered water-tight by methods such as machined joints, oakum packing, cement parging, chinking, caulking or a combination of these.
9.38.2.Walls
(1) Walls may be built of natural or manufactured logs.
(1) Walls made of logs in a horizontal position shall have interlocking intersections that will prevent the collection of water in the joints, or the horizontal logs shall butt to a vertical corner post to which the horizontal logs shall be firmly attached.
(1) Each log in a horizontal position shall be scribed as close as possible to its bearer and fastened to the bearer in at least three places throughout its length, by dowels, continuous machined joints, vertical framing members or interlocking intersections or any combination of these, but in no case shall the distance between fastenings exceed 1 800 mm.
(1) Each log in a wall built of vertical logs shall be scribed to fit as closely as possible to the adjacent logs.
(1) Logs used in a vertical position shall have a plate at the top and a plate at the bottom and the plates shall be at least as wide as the largest end diameter of any of the logs.
9.38.3.Lintels
(1) Logs placed in vertical position shall be supported over window and door openings by lintels meeting the requirements of Tables .-L and .-A to .-D.
(1) At every opening in a wall made of logs in a horizontal position where shrinkage can occur there shall be a clearance between the rough buck header and the lintel log of not less than 13 mm in width for each 300 mm of height to allow for settlement.
Section 9.39.Park Model Trailers
9.39.1.Scope
(1) This Section applies to manufactured buildings designed and constructed in conformance with CAN/CSA-Z241 Series, “Park model trailers,” and used or intended to be used as a seasonal recreational building of residential occupancy.
9.39.2.General
(1) Except as provided in Subsection ., a manufactured building used or intended to be used as a seasonal recreational building of residential occupancy is deemed to comply with this Code if it is designed and constructed in conformance with CAN/CSA-Z241 Series, “Park model trailers.”
9.39.3.Requirements
(1) The requirements of this Code shall apply to building components designed and constructed outside the place of manufacture of a building described in Article .
(1) Buildings described in Article . shall comply with Section 9.10. where the building is,
(a) used or intended to be used for seasonal tourist accommodation, or
(b) leased or intended to be leased.
(1) Buildings described in Article . shall be supported and anchored in conformance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
(1) Buildings described in Article . shall comply with Article .
Section 9.40.Reinforced Concrete Slabs
9.40.1.Scope
(1) This Section applies to
(a) reinforced concrete slabs that are suspended over cold rooms in basements, and are supported by foundation walls along the perimeter of the slab with no additional interior supports, and
(b) slabs in which the clear span between supporting walls is not more than 2.5 m along the shortest dimension of the slab.
(2) Slabs for conditions other than described in Sentence (1) shall be designed in accordance with Part 4.
(3) This Section does not apply to reinforced concrete slabs intended to support motor vehicles.
(1) Concrete shall conform to Section 9.3.
(1) Reinforcing steel shall conform to Grade 400 in CSA G30.18, “Carbon steel bars for concrete reinforcement.”
(1) Concrete shall be cast against formwork in accordance with CSA A23.1, “Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction.”
(2) The slab shall be not less than 125 mm thick.
(3) The slab shall be reinforced with 10M bars spaced not more than 200 mm o.c. in each direction, with 30 mm clear cover from the bottom of the slab to the first layer of bars, and the second layer of bars laid directly on top of the lower layer in the opposite direction.
(4) The slab shall bear not less than 75 mm on the supporting foundation walls and be anchored to the walls with 600 mm × 600 mm 10M bent dowels spaced at not more than 600 mm o.c.
(5) Exposed slabs shall be sloped to effectively shed water away from the exterior wall.
Section 9.41.Additional Requirements for
9.41.1.Scope
(1) This Section applies where proposed construction in respect of an existing build ing will result in any of the following changes of use of all or part of the building:
(a) a change of the major occupancy of all or part of a building that is designated with a “Y” in Table . of Division C,
(b) a suite of a Group C major occupancy is converted into more than one suite of a Group C major o ccupancy,
(c) a farm building or part ofa farm building is changed to another major occupancy other than a Group G major occupancy,
(d) a building or part ofa building is changed to a post-disaster building,
(e) the use of a building or part ofa building is changed and the previous major occupancy of the b uilding or part oft building cannot be determined, or
(f) a farm building or part ofa farm building is changed to a Group G, Division 1 major o ccupancy.
(2) For the purposes of this Section and Sentences .(1) and .(4), the changes of use set out in Clauses (1)(b) to (f) are also deemed to constitute a change in major occupancy.
(3) The requirements of this Section are in addition to the requirements of other Parts of the Code as they apply to the proposed construction.
9.41.2.Additional Construction
(1) Where proposed construction will result in a change of use described in Clauses .(1)(a) to (f), additional construction shall be required in order that the building or part of a building subject to the change of use conforms to the requirements of Subsections . and . to ., Section 9.6., Article . Sentences .(2) and .(1) and (3), Articles . and ., Subsection . and Sections 9.31., 9.32. and 9.34. as they apply to the new major occupancy that the building or part of a building is to support.
(2) For the purposes of this Article, existing buildings shall be classified as to their construction and occupancy as provided for in Sentence .(1).
(1) The performance level of a building after construction shall not be less than the performance level of the building prior to constructio n.
(2) For the purposes of Sentence (1), reduction of performance level shall be determined in accordance with Articles ., . and .
(3) Where the proposed const ruction would reduce the performance level of an existing building, compensating construction shall be required in conformance with Articles ., ., . and .
(4) Section 11.5. applies in respect of the requirements of Sentences .(1), (3) and (4).
[TABLE:0] Notes to Table .-A:
(1) Deflection criteria is L/240, where “L” is the clear span of the lintel.
(2) Linear interpolation is permitted between ground snow loads and between lintel depths.
(3) 10M stirrups are required at a maximum d/2 spacing for spans greater than 1 200 mm, where “d” is the distance from the top of the lintel to the level of the bottom reinforcing bar in the lintel.
Table .-B Maximum Allowable Clear Spans for Lintels in Flat Loadbearing Insulating Concrete Form (ICF) Walls(1)(2)(3) (1-15M Bottom Bar) Forming Part of Sentences .(1) and .(3)
[TABLE:1] Notes to Table .-B:
(1) Deflection criteria is L/240, where “L” is the clear span of the lintel.
(2) Linear interpolation is permitted between ground snow loads and between lintel depths.
(3) 10M stirrups are required at a maximum d/2 spacing for spans greater than 1 200 mm, where “d” is the distance from the top of the lintel to the level of the bottom reinforcing bar in the lintel.
Table .-C Maximum Allowable Clear Spans for Lintels in Flat Loadbearing Insulating Concrete Form (ICF) Walls(1)(2)(3) (2-15M Bottom Bar) Forming Part of Sentences .(1) and .(3)
[TABLE:2] Notes to Table .-C:
(1) Deflection criteria is L/240, where “L” is the clear span of the lintel.
(2) Linear interpolation is permitted between ground snow loads and between lintel depths.
(3) 10M stirrups are required at a maximum d/2 spacing for spans greater than 1 200 mm, where “d” is the distance from the top of the lintel to the level of the bottom reinforcing bar in the lintel.
Table .-A Maximum Spans for Floor Joists – General Cases(1) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1) and (2), .(1) and .(1) to (3)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Joist Size, mm | Maximum Span, m | ||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| With Strapping (2) | With Bridging | With Strapping (2) and Bridging | |||||||||
| Joist Spacing, mm | Joist Spacing, mm | Joist Spacing, mm | |||||||||
| 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | |||
| Douglas Fir – Larch (includes Douglas Fir and Western Larch) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.13 3.23 3.88 4.57 5.21 | 1.97 3.07 3.69 4.34 4.95 | 1.73 2.73 3.51 4.13 4.71 | 2.19 3.44 4.18 4.86 5.49 | 1.99 3.12 3.92 4.57 5.16 | 1.73 2.73 3.59 4.29 4.85 | 2.19 3.44 4.37 5.05 5.66 | 1.99 3.12 4.07 4.70 5.28 | 1.73 2.73 3.59 4.39 4.92 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.00 3.09 3.71 4.38 4.99 | 1.85 2.91 3.53 4.16 4.75 | 1.66 2.62 3.36 3.96 4.52 | 2.09 3.29 4.00 4.66 5.26 | 1.90 2.99 3.76 4.38 4.94 | 1.66 2.62 3.44 4.11 4.65 | 2.09 3.29 4.19 4.84 5.43 | 1.90 2.99 3.90 4.51 5.06 | 1.66 2.62 3.44 4.20 4.72 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.90 2.78 3.38 4.14 4.80 | 1.69 2.41 2.93 3.58 4.16 | 1.38 1.97 2.39 2.93 3.39 | 1.95 2.78 3.38 4.14 4.80 | 1.69 2.41 2.93 3.58 4.16 | 1.38 1.97 2.39 2.93 3.39 | 1.95 2.78 3.38 4.14 4.80 | 1.69 2.41 2.93 3.58 4.16 | 1.38 1.97 2.39 2.93 3.39 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 1.90 | 1.77 | 1.61 | 2.03 | 1.84 | 1.61 | 2.03 | 1.84 | 1.61 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 1.81 | 1.63 | 1.33 | 1.88 | 1.63 | 1.33 | 1.88 | 1.63 | 1.33 | |
| Hem – Fir (includes Western Hemlock and Amabilis Fir) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.08 3.18 3.82 4.50 5.14 | 1.93 3.03 3.64 4.28 4.89 | 1.71 2.69 3.46 4.08 4.65 | 2.16 3.39 4.12 4.80 5.42 | 1.96 3.08 3.87 4.51 5.09 | 1.71 2.69 3.54 4.23 4.78 | 2.16 3.39 4.31 4.98 5.59 | 1.96 3.08 4.02 4.64 5.21 | 1.71 2.69 3.54 4.33 4.86 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.00 3.09 3.71 4.38 4.99 | 1.85 2.91 3.53 4.16 4.75 | 1.66 2.62 3.36 3.96 4.52 | 2.09 3.29 4.00 4.66 5.26 | 1.90 2.99 3.76 4.38 4.94 | 1.66 2.62 3.44 4.11 4.65 | 2.09 3.29 4.19 4.84 5.43 | 1.90 2.99 3.90 4.51 5.06 | 1.66 2.62 3.44 4.20 4.72 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.90 2.99 3.60 4.24 4.84 | 1.77 2.78 3.42 4.03 4.60 | 1.61 2.43 2.95 3.61 4.19 | 2.03 3.19 3.88 4.51 5.10 | 1.84 2.90 3.61 4.24 4.79 | 1.61 2.43 2.95 3.61 4.19 | 2.03 3.19 4.06 4.68 5.26 | 1.84 2.90 3.61 4.37 4.90 | 1.61 2.43 2.95 3.61 4.19 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 1.90 | 1.77 | 1.61 | 2.03 | 1.84 | 1.61 | 2.03 | 1.84 | 1.61 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 1.81 | 1.68 | 1.39 | 1.96 | 1.71 | 1.39 | 1.96 | 1.71 | 1.39 |
Table .-A (Cont'd) Maximum Spans for Floor Joists – General Cases(1) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1) and (2), .(1) and .(1) to (3)
[TABLE:4] Notes to Table .-A:
(1) Spans apply only where the floors serve residential areas as described in Table ., or the uniformly distributed live loa d on the floor does not exceed that specified for residential areas as described in Table .
(2) See Sentence .(5) for alternatives to strapping.
Table .-B Maximum Spans for Floor Joists – Special Cases(1) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1) and (2), .(2) and .(4) and (6)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Joist Size, mm | Maximum Span, m | ||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Joists with Ceilings Attach ed to Wood Furring | Joists with Concrete Topping | ||||||||||
| Without Bridging | With Bridging | With or Without Bridging (2) | |||||||||
| Joist Spacing, mm | Joist Spacing, mm | Joist Spacing, mm | |||||||||
| 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | |||
| Douglas Fir – Larch (includes Douglas Fir and Western Larch) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.19 3.44 4.24 4.98 5.67 | 1.99 3.12 3.99 4.69 5.34 | 1.73 2.73 3.59 4.29 4.88 | 2.19 3.44 4.52 5.47 6.19 | 1.99 3.12 4.11 5.20 5.89 | 1.73 2.73 3.59 4.58 5.54 | 2.19 3.44 4.52 5.77 6.83 | 1.99 3.12 4.11 5.24 6.37 | 1.73 2.73 3.59 4.58 5.58 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.09 3.29 4.06 4.78 5.44 | 1.90 2.99 3.83 4.50 5.12 | 1.66 2.62 3.44 4.11 4.68 | 2.09 3.29 4.33 5.24 5.93 | 1.90 2.99 3.93 4.98 5.64 | 1.66 2.62 3.44 4.31 5.00 | 2.09 3.29 4.33 5.37 6.24 | 1.90 2.99 3.81 4.65 5.40 | 1.66 2.55 3.11 3.80 4.41 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.95 2.78 3.38 4.14 4.80 | 1.69 2.41 2.93 3.58 4.16 | 1.38 1.97 2.39 2.93 3.39 | 1.95 2.78 3.38 4.14 4.80 | 1.69 2.41 2.93 3.58 4.16 | 1.38 1.97 2.39 2.93 3.39 | 1.72 2.45 2.98 3.65 4.23 | 1.49 2.12 2.58 3.16 3.66 | 1.21 1.73 2.11 2.58 2.99 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 2.03 | 1.84 | 1.61 | 2.03 | 1.84 | 1.61 | 2.03 | 1.84 | 1.61 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 1.88 | 1.63 | 1.33 | 1.88 | 1.63 | 1.33 | 1.66 | 1.44 | 1.17 | |
| Hem – Fir (includes Western Hemlock and Amabilis Fir) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.16 3.39 4.18 4.92 5.60 | 1.96 3.08 3.94 4.63 5.27 | 1.71 2.69 3.54 4.23 4.82 | 2.16 3.39 4.46 5.39 6.10 | 1.96 3.08 4.05 5.13 5.81 | 1.71 2.69 3.54 4.52 5.47 | 2.16 3.39 4.46 5.69 6.74 | 1.96 3.08 4.05 5.17 6.28 | 1.71 2.69 3.54 4.52 5.50 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.09 3.29 4.06 4.78 5.44 | 1.90 2.99 3.83 4.50 5.12 | 1.66 2.62 3.44 4.11 4.68 | 2.09 3.29 4.33 5.24 5.93 | 1.90 2.99 3.93 4.98 5.64 | 1.66 2.62 3.44 4.39 5.25 | 2.09 3.29 4.33 5.53 6.54 | 1.90 2.99 3.93 4.88 5.66 | 1.66 2.62 3.26 3.99 4.63 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.03 3.19 3.94 4.63 5.27 | 1.84 2.90 3.61 4.36 4.96 | 1.61 2.43 2.95 3.61 4.19 | 2.03 3.19 4.17 5.08 5.74 | 1.84 2.90 3.61 4.42 5.13 | 1.61 2.43 2.95 3.61 4.19 | 2.03 3.02 3.68 4.50 5.22 | 1.83 2.62 3.18 3.89 4.52 | 1.50 2.14 2.60 3.18 3.69 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 2.03 | 1.84 | 1.61 | 2.03 | 1.84 | 1.61 | 2.03 | 1.84 | 1.61 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 1.96 | 1.71 | 1.39 | 1.96 | 1.71 | 1.39 | 1.74 | 1.50 | 1.23 |
Table .-B (Cont'd) Maximum Spans for Floor Joists – Special Cases(1) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1) and (2), .(2) and .(4) and (6)
[TABLE:6] Notes to Table .-B:
(1) Spans apply only where the floors serve residential areas as described in Table ., or the uniformly distributed live loa d on the floor does not exceed that specified for residential areas as described in Table .
(2) No bridging is assumed for spans for floor joists with concrete topping.
Table .-C Maximum Spans for Ceiling Joists – Attic Not Accessible by a Stairway Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1) and .(2)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Joist Size, mm | Maximum Span, m | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Joist Spacing, mm | |||||
| 300 | 400 | 600 | |||
| Douglas Fir – Larch (includes Douglas Fir and Western Larch) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.41 5.37 7.05 9.01 10.96 | 3.10 4.88 6.41 8.18 9.96 | 2.71 4.26 5.60 7.15 8.70 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.27 5.14 6.76 8.63 10.50 | 2.97 4.67 6.14 7.84 9.54 | 2.59 4.08 5.36 6.85 8.34 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.17 4.89 5.95 7.27 8.44 | 2.88 4.23 5.15 6.30 7.31 | 2.42 3.46 4.20 5.14 5.97 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 3.17 | 2.88 | 2.51 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 3.06 | 2.78 | 2.34 | |
| Hem – Fir (includes Western Hemlock and Amabilis Fir) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.36 5.29 6.96 8.88 10.81 | 3.06 4.81 6.32 8.07 9.82 | 2.67 4.20 5.52 7.05 8.58 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.27 5.14 6.76 8.63 10.50 | 2.97 4.67 6.14 7.84 9.54 | 2.59 4.08 5.36 6.85 8.34 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.17 4.98 6.55 8.36 10.18 | 2.88 4.53 5.95 7.60 9.01 | 2.51 3.95 5.19 6.34 7.36 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 3.17 | 2.88 | 2.50 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 3.06 | 2.78 | 2.43 |
Table .-C (Cont'd) Maximum Spans for Ceiling Joists – Attic Not Accessible by a Stairway Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1) and .(2)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Joist Size, mm | Maximum Span, m | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Joist Spacing, mm | |||||
| 300 | 400 | 600 | |||
| Spruce – Pine – Fir (includes Spruce (all species except Coast Sitka Spruce), Jack Pine, Lodgepole Pine, Balsam Fir and Alpine Fi r) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.22 5.06 6.65 8.50 10.34 | 2.92 4.60 6.05 7.72 9.40 | 2.55 4.02 5.28 6.74 8.21 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.11 4.90 6.44 8.22 10.00 | 2.83 4.45 5.85 7.47 9.09 | 2.47 3.89 5.11 6.52 7.94 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.06 4.81 6.32 8.07 9.82 | 2.78 4.37 5.74 7.33 8.93 | 2.43 3.82 5.02 6.34 7.36 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 3.06 | 2.78 | 2.43 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 2.94 | 2.67 | 2.33 | |
| Northern Species (includes any Canadian Species covered by the NLGA Standard Grading Rules) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.88 4.53 5.95 7.60 9.25 | 2.61 4.11 5.40 6.90 8.40 | 2.28 3.59 4.72 6.03 7.34 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.81 4.42 5.81 7.42 9.03 | 2.55 4.02 5.28 6.74 8.21 | 2.23 3.51 4.61 5.89 7.17 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.74 4.31 5.67 7.19 8.34 | 2.49 3.92 5.09 6.23 7.23 | 2.18 3.42 4.16 5.08 5.90 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 2.74 | 2.49 | 2.18 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 2.67 | 2.43 | 2.03 |
Table .-D Maximum Spans for Roof Joists – Specified Roof Snow Loads 1.0 to 2.0 kPa Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1), .(1) and .(2)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Joist Size, mm | Maximum Span, m | ||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Specified Snow Load, kPa | |||||||||||
| 1.0 | 1.5 | 2.0 | |||||||||
| Joist Spacing, mm | Joist Spacing, mm | Joist Spacing, mm | |||||||||
| 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | |||
| Douglas Fir – Larch (includes Douglas Fir and Western Larch) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.71 4.26 5.60 7.15 8.70 | 2.46 3.87 5.09 6.49 7.90 | 2.15 3.38 4.44 5.67 6.91 | 2.37 3.72 4.89 6.24 7.60 | 2.15 3.38 4.44 5.67 6.91 | 1.88 2.95 3.88 4.96 6.03 | 2.15 3.38 4.44 5.67 6.91 | 1.95 3.07 4.04 5.15 6.27 | 1.71 2.68 3.53 4.50 5.48 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.59 4.08 5.36 6.85 8.34 | 2.36 3.71 4.87 6.22 7.57 | 2.06 3.24 4.26 5.44 6.40 | 2.27 3.57 4.69 5.98 7.28 | 2.06 3.24 4.26 5.44 6.62 | 1.80 2.83 3.72 4.74 5.50 | 2.06 3.24 4.26 5.44 6.62 | 1.87 2.94 3.87 4.94 6.00 | 1.63 2.57 3.38 4.22 4.90 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.49 3.56 4.33 5.29 6.14 | 2.16 3.08 3.75 4.58 5.32 | 1.76 2.51 3.06 3.74 4.34 | 2.14 3.06 3.72 4.55 5.28 | 1.85 2.65 3.22 3.94 4.57 | 1.51 2.16 2.63 3.22 3.73 | 1.91 2.72 3.31 4.05 4.70 | 1.65 2.36 2.87 3.51 4.07 | 1.35 1.92 2.34 2.86 3.32 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 2.51 | 2.28 | 1.99 | 2.20 | 1.99 | 1.74 | 1.99 | 1.81 | 1.58 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 2.41 | 2.08 | 1.70 | 2.07 | 1.79 | 1.46 | 1.84 | 1.60 | 1.30 | |
| Hem – Fir (includes Western Hemlock and Amabilis Fir) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.67 4.20 5.52 7.05 8.58 | 2.43 3.82 5.02 6.41 7.80 | 2.12 3.33 4.38 5.60 6.81 | 2.33 3.67 4.82 6.16 7.50 | 2.12 3.33 4.38 5.60 6.81 | 1.85 2.91 3.83 4.89 5.95 | 2.12 3.33 4.38 5.60 6.81 | 1.93 3.03 3.98 5.09 6.19 | 1.68 2.65 3.48 4.44 5.41 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.59 4.08 5.36 6.85 8.34 | 2.36 3.71 4.87 6.22 7.57 | 2.06 3.24 4.26 5.44 6.62 | 2.27 3.57 4.69 5.98 7.28 | 2.06 3.24 4.26 5.44 6.62 | 1.80 2.83 3.72 4.75 5.77 | 2.06 3.24 4.26 5.44 6.62 | 1.87 2.94 3.87 4.94 6.01 | 1.63 2.57 3.38 4.32 5.25 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.51 3.95 5.20 6.53 7.57 | 2.28 3.59 4.62 5.65 6.56 | 1.99 3.10 3.77 4.61 5.35 | 2.20 3.45 4.54 5.61 6.51 | 1.99 3.14 3.97 4.86 5.64 | 1.74 2.67 3.24 3.97 4.60 | 1.99 3.14 4.09 5.00 5.80 | 1.81 2.85 3.54 4.33 5.02 | 1.58 2.37 2.89 3.53 4.10 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 2.51 | 2.28 | 1.99 | 2.20 | 1.99 | 1.74 | 1.99 | 1.81 | 1.58 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 2.43 | 2.18 | 1.78 | 2.12 | 1.88 | 1.53 | 1.93 | 1.67 | 1.36 |
Table .-D (Cont'd) Maximum Spans for Roof Joists – Specified Roof Snow Loads 1.0 to 2.0 kPa Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1), .(1) and .(2)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Joist Size, mm | Maximum Span, m | ||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Specified Snow Load, kPa | |||||||||||
| 1.0 | 1.5 | 2.0 | |||||||||
| Joist Spacing, mm | Joist Spacing, mm | Joist Spacing, mm | |||||||||
| 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | |||
| Spruce – Pine – Fir (includes Spruce (all species except Coast Sitka Spruce), Jack Pine, Lodgepole Pine, Balsam Fir and Alpine Fi r) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.55 4.02 5.28 6.74 8.21 | 2.32 3.65 4.80 6.13 7.46 | 2.03 3.19 4.19 5.35 6.52 | 2.23 3.51 4.61 5.89 7.17 | 2.03 3.19 4.19 5.35 6.52 | 1.77 2.79 3.66 4.68 5.69 | 2.03 3.19 4.19 5.35 6.52 | 1.84 2.90 3.81 4.86 5.92 | 1.61 2.53 3.33 4.25 5.17 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.47 3.89 5.11 6.52 7.94 | 2.24 3.53 4.64 5.93 7.21 | 1.96 3.08 4.05 5.18 6.30 | 2.16 3.40 4.46 5.70 6.94 | 1.96 3.08 4.05 5.18 6.30 | 1.71 2.69 3.54 4.52 5.50 | 1.96 3.08 4.05 5.18 6.30 | 1.78 2.80 3.68 4.70 5.73 | 1.56 2.45 3.22 4.11 5.00 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.43 3.82 5.02 6.41 7.57 | 2.20 3.47 4.56 5.65 6.56 | 1.93 3.03 3.77 4.61 5.35 | 2.12 3.33 4.38 5.60 6.51 | 1.93 3.03 3.97 4.86 5.64 | 1.68 2.65 3.24 3.97 4.60 | 1.93 3.03 3.98 5.00 5.80 | 1.75 2.75 3.54 4.33 5.02 | 1.53 2.37 2.89 3.53 4.10 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 2.43 | 2.20 | 1.93 | 2.12 | 1.93 | 1.68 | 1.93 | 1.75 | 1.53 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 2.33 | 2.12 | 1.85 | 2.04 | 1.85 | 1.59 | 1.85 | 1.68 | 1.41 | |
| Northern Species (includes any Canadian Species covered by the NLGA Standard Grading Rules) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.28 3.59 4.72 6.03 7.34 | 2.07 3.26 4.29 5.48 6.67 | 1.81 2.85 3.75 4.79 5.82 | 1.99 3.14 4.12 5.27 6.41 | 1.81 2.85 3.75 4.79 5.82 | 1.58 2.49 3.27 4.18 5.09 | 1.81 2.85 3.75 4.79 5.82 | 1.65 2.59 3.40 4.35 5.29 | 1.44 2.26 2.97 3.80 4.62 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.23 3.51 4.61 5.89 7.17 | 2.03 3.19 4.19 5.35 6.52 | 1.77 2.79 3.66 4.68 5.58 | 1.95 3.07 4.03 5.15 6.26 | 1.77 2.79 3.66 4.68 5.69 | 1.55 2.43 3.20 4.09 4.80 | 1.77 2.79 3.66 4.68 5.69 | 1.61 2.53 3.33 4.25 5.17 | 1.41 2.21 2.91 3.68 4.27 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.18 3.42 4.28 5.23 6.07 | 1.98 3.05 3.71 4.53 5.26 | 1.73 2.49 3.03 3.70 4.29 | 1.90 2.99 3.68 4.50 5.22 | 1.73 2.62 3.19 3.90 4.52 | 1.50 2.14 2.60 3.18 3.69 | 1.73 2.69 3.28 4.01 4.65 | 1.57 2.33 2.84 3.47 4.03 | 1.33 1.90 2.32 2.83 3.29 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 2.18 | 1.98 | 1.73 | 1.90 | 1.73 | 1.51 | 1.73 | 1.57 | 1.37 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 2.09 | 1.81 | 1.48 | 1.80 | 1.56 | 1.27 | 1.60 | 1.38 | 1.13 |
Table .-E Maximum Spans for Roof Joists – Specified Roof Snow Loads 2.5 and 3.0 kPa Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1), .(1) and .(2)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Joist Size, mm | Maximum Span, m | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Specified Snow Load, kPa | ||||||||
| 2.5 | 3.0 | |||||||
| Joist Spacing, mm | Joist Spacing, mm | |||||||
| 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | |||
| Douglas Fir – Larch (includes Douglas Fir and Western Larch) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.99 3.14 4.12 5.27 6.41 | 1.81 2.85 3.75 4.79 5.82 | 1.58 2.49 3.27 4.18 5.09 | 1.88 2.95 3.88 4.96 6.03 | 1.71 2.68 3.53 4.50 5.48 | 1.49 2.34 3.08 3.93 4.79 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.91 3.01 3.95 5.05 6.14 | 1.74 2.73 3.59 4.59 5.46 | 1.52 2.39 3.14 3.84 4.46 | 1.80 2.83 3.72 4.75 5.78 | 1.63 2.57 3.38 4.32 5.05 | 1.43 2.25 2.90 3.55 4.12 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.74 2.48 3.01 3.69 4.28 | 1.50 2.15 2.61 3.19 3.70 | 1.23 1.75 2.13 2.61 3.03 | 1.60 2.29 2.79 3.41 3.95 | 1.39 1.98 2.41 2.95 3.42 | 1.13 1.62 1.97 2.41 2.79 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 1.85 | 1.68 | 1.47 | 1.74 | 1.58 | 1.38 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 1.68 | 1.45 | 1.19 | 1.55 | 1.34 | 1.10 | |
| Hem – Fir (includes Western Hemlock and Amabilis Fir) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.97 3.10 4.07 5.20 6.32 | 1.79 2.81 3.70 4.72 5.75 | 1.56 2.46 3.23 4.12 5.02 | 1.85 2.91 3.83 4.89 5.95 | 1.68 2.65 3.48 4.44 5.41 | 1.47 2.31 3.04 3.88 4.72 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.91 3.01 3.95 5.05 6.14 | 1.74 2.73 3.59 4.59 5.58 | 1.52 2.39 3.14 4.01 4.68 | 1.80 2.83 3.72 4.75 5.78 | 1.63 2.57 3.38 4.32 5.25 | 1.43 2.25 2.95 3.72 4.32 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.85 2.91 3.72 4.55 5.28 | 1.68 2.65 3.22 3.94 4.57 | 1.47 2.16 2.63 3.22 3.73 | 1.74 2.74 3.44 4.20 4.88 | 1.58 2.45 2.98 3.64 4.22 | 1.38 2.00 2.43 2.97 3.45 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 1.85 | 1.68 | 1.47 | 1.74 | 1.58 | 1.38 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 1.76 | 1.52 | 1.24 | 1.62 | 1.40 | 1.15 |
Table .-E (Cont'd) Maximum Spans for Roof Joists – Specified Roof Snow Loads 2.5 and 3.0 kPa Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1), .(1) and .(2)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Joist Size, mm | Maximum Span, m | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Specified Snow Load, kPa | ||||||||
| 2.5 | 3.0 | |||||||
| Joist Spacing, mm | Joist Spacing, mm | |||||||
| 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | |||
| Spruce – Pine – Fir (includes Spruce (all species except Coast Sitka Spruce), Jack Pine, Lodgepole Pine, Balsam Fir and Alpine Fi r) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.88 2.96 3.89 4.97 6.05 | 1.71 2.69 3.54 4.52 5.50 | 1.49 2.35 3.09 3.94 4.80 | 1.77 2.79 3.66 4.68 5.69 | 1.61 2.53 3.33 4.25 5.17 | 1.41 2.21 2.91 3.71 4.52 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.82 2.86 3.76 4.81 5.85 | 1.65 2.60 3.42 4.37 5.31 | 1.44 2.27 2.99 3.82 4.64 | 1.71 2.69 3.54 4.52 5.50 | 1.56 2.45 3.22 4.11 5.00 | 1.36 2.14 2.81 3.59 4.37 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.79 2.81 3.70 4.55 5.28 | 1.62 2.56 3.22 3.94 4.57 | 1.42 2.16 2.63 3.22 3.73 | 1.68 2.65 3.44 4.20 4.88 | 1.53 2.40 2.98 3.64 4.22 | 1.34 2.005 2.43 2.97 3.45 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 1.79 | 1.62 | 1.42 | 1.68 | 1.53 | 1.34 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 1.72 | 1.56 | 1.29 | 1.62 | 1.46 | 1.19 | |
| Northern Species (includes any Canadian Species covered by the NLGA Standard Grading Rules) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.68 2.65 3.48 4.44 5.41 | 1.53 2.40 3.16 4.04 4.91 | 1.34 2.10 2.76 3.53 4.29 | 1.58 2.49 3.27 4.18 5.09 | 1.44 2.26 2.97 3.80 4.62 | 1.26 1.98 2.60 3.32 4.04 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.64 2.59 3.40 4.34 5.28 | 1.49 2.35 3.09 3.94 4.76 | 1.31 2.05 2.70 3.35 3.89 | 1.55 2.43 3.20 4.09 4.97 | 1.41 2.21 2.91 3.71 4.40 | 1.23 1.93 2.53 3.10 3.59 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.60 2.45 2.98 3.65 4.23 | 1.46 2.12 2.58 3.16 3.66 | 1.21 1.73 2.11 2.58 2.99 | 1.51 2.26 2.76 3.37 3.91 | 1.37 1.96 2.39 2.92 3.39 | 1.12 1.60 1.95 2.38 2.76 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 1.60 | 1.46 | 1.27 | 1.51 | 1.37 | 1.20 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 1.46 | 1.26 | 1.03 | 1.34 | 1.16 | 0.95 |
Table .-F Maximum Spans for Roof Rafters – Specified Roof Snow Loads 1.0 to 2.0 kPa Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1), .(1) and .(2)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Rafter Size, mm | Maximum Span, m | ||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Specified Snow Load, kPa | |||||||||||
| 1.0 | 1.5 | 2.0 | |||||||||
| Rafter Spacing, mm | Rafter Spacing, mm | Rafter Spacing, mm | |||||||||
| 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | |||
| Douglas Fir – Larch (includes Douglas Fir and Western Larch) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.41 5.37 7.05 9.01 10.96 | 3.10 4.88 6.41 8.18 9.96 | 2.71 4.26 5.60 7.15 8.70 | 2.98 4.69 6.16 7.87 9.58 | 2.71 4.26 5.60 7.15 8.70 | 2.37 3.72 4.89 6.24 7.40 | 2.71 4.26 5.60 7.15 8.70 | 2.46 3.87 5.09 6.49 7.90 | 2.15 3.38 4.44 5.62 6.52 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.27 5.14 6.76 8.30 9.63 | 2.97 4.67 5.88 7.19 8.34 | 2.59 3.95 4.80 5.87 6.81 | 2.86 4.49 5.74 7.02 8.14 | 2.59 4.08 4.97 6.08 7.05 | 2.27 3.34 4.06 4.96 5.76 | 2.59 4.08 5.06 6.19 7.18 | 2.36 3.60 4.38 5.36 6.22 | 2.06 2.94 3.58 4.38 5.08 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.65 3.78 4.61 5.63 6.53 | 2.30 3.28 3.99 4.88 5.66 | 1.87 2.68 3.26 3.98 4.62 | 2.24 3.20 3.89 4.76 5.52 | 1.94 2.77 3.37 4.12 4.78 | 1.58 2.26 2.75 3.37 3.91 | 1.98 2.82 3.43 4.20 4.87 | 1.71 2.44 2.97 3.64 4.22 | 1.40 1.99 2.43 2.97 3.44 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 3.17 | 2.88 | 2.42 | 2.77 | 2.50 | 2.04 | 2.51 | 2.21 | 1.80 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 2.56 | 2.22 | 1.81 | 2.17 | 1.88 | 1.53 | 1.91 | 1.65 | 1.35 | |
| Hem – Fir (includes Western Hemlock and Amabilis Fir) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.36 5.29 6.96 8.88 10.81 | 3.06 4.81 6.32 8.07 9.82 | 2.67 4.20 5.52 7.05 8.58 | 2.94 4.62 6.08 7.76 9.45 | 2.67 4.20 5.52 7.05 8.58 | 2.33 3.67 4.82 6.16 7.28 | 2.67 4.20 5.52 7.05 8.58 | 2.43 3.82 5.02 6.41 7.80 | 2.12 3.33 4.38 5.54 6.42 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.27 5.14 6.76 8.63 10.11 | 2.97 4.67 6.14 7.54 8.75 | 2.59 4.08 5.04 6.16 7.15 | 2.86 4.49 5.90 7.36 8.54 | 2.59 4.08 5.21 6.37 7.40 | 2.27 3.50 4.26 5.20 6.04 | 2.59 4.08 5.31 6.49 7.53 | 2.36 3.71 4.60 5.62 6.52 | 2.06 3.08 3.75 4.59 5.33 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.17 4.67 5.68 6.95 8.06 | 2.83 4.04 4.92 6.02 6.98 | 2.31 3.30 4.02 4.91 5.70 | 2.76 3.95 4.80 5.87 6.81 | 2.39 3.42 4.16 5.08 5.90 | 1.95 2.79 3.40 4.15 4.82 | 2.44 3.48 4.23 5.18 6.01 | 2.11 3.01 3.67 4.48 5.20 | 1.72 2.46 2.99 3.66 4.25 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 3.17 | 2.88 | 2.51 | 2.77 | 2.51 | 2.14 | 2.51 | 2.28 | 1.89 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 2.68 | 2.32 | 1.90 | 2.27 | 1.96 | 1.60 | 2.00 | 1.73 | 1.41 |
Table .-F (Cont'd) Maximum Spans for Roof Rafters – Specified Roof Snow Loads 1.0 to 2.0 kPa Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1), .(1) and .(2)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Rafter Size, mm | Maximum Span, m | ||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Specified Snow Load, kPa | |||||||||||
| 1.0 | 1.5 | 2.0 | |||||||||
| Rafter Spacing, mm | Rafter Spacing, mm | Rafter Spacing, mm | |||||||||
| 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | |||
| Spruce – Pine – Fir (includes Spruce (all species except Coast Sitka Spruce), Jack Pine, Lodgepole Pine, Balsam Fir and Alpine Fi r) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.22 5.06 6.65 8.50 10.34 | 2.92 4.60 6.05 7.72 9.40 | 2.55 4.02 5.28 6.74 8.21 | 2.81 4.42 5.81 7.42 9.03 | 2.55 4.02 5.28 6.74 8.21 | 2.23 3.51 4.61 5.89 7.17 | 2.55 4.02 5.28 6.74 8.21 | 2.32 3.65 4.80 6.13 7.46 | 2.03 3.19 4.19 5.35 6.52 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.11 4.90 6.44 8.22 10.00 | 2.83 4.45 5.85 7.47 9.06 | 2.47 3.89 5.11 6.38 7.40 | 2.72 4.28 5.62 7.18 8.74 | 2.47 3.89 5.11 6.52 7.66 | 2.16 3.40 4.41 5.39 6.25 | 2.47 3.89 5.11 6.52 7.80 | 2.24 3.53 4.64 5.82 6.76 | 1.96 3.08 3.89 4.75 5.52 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 3.06 4.67 5.68 6.95 8.06 | 2.78 4.04 4.92 6.02 6.98 | 2.31 3.30 4.02 4.91 5.70 | 2.67 3.95 4.80 5.87 6.81 | 2.39 3.42 4.16 5.08 5.90 | 1.95 2.79 3.40 4.15 4.82 | 2.43 3.48 4.23 5.18 6.01 | 2.11 3.01 3.67 4.48 5.20 | 1.72 2.46 2.99 3.66 4.25 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 3.06 | 2.78 | 2.43 | 2.67 | 2.43 | 2.12 | 2.43 | 2.20 | 1.93 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 2.78 | 2.41 | 1.97 | 2.35 | 2.04 | 1.66 | 2.07 | 1.79 | 1.47 | |
| Northern Species (includes any Canadian species covered by the NLGA Standard Grading Rules) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.88 4.53 5.95 7.60 9.25 | 2.61 4.11 5.40 6.90 8.40 | 2.28 3.59 4.72 6.03 7.01 | 2.51 3.95 5.20 6.64 8.08 | 2.28 3.59 4.72 6.03 7.26 | 1.99 3.14 4.12 5.11 5.93 | 2.28 3.59 4.72 6.03 7.34 | 2.07 3.26 4.29 5.48 6.40 | 1.81 2.85 3.68 4.51 5.23 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.81 4.42 5.81 7.24 8.40 | 2.55 4.02 5.13 6.27 7.27 | 2.23 3.44 4.19 5.12 5.94 | 2.46 3.86 5.00 6.12 7.10 | 2.23 3.51 4.33 5.30 6.15 | 1.95 2.91 3.54 4.33 5.02 | 2.23 3.51 4.41 5.40 6.26 | 2.03 3.14 3.82 4.67 5.42 | 1.77 2.56 3.12 3.82 4.43 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.62 3.74 4.56 5.57 6.46 | 2.27 3.24 3.94 4.82 5.60 | 1.85 2.65 3.22 3.94 4.57 | 2.22 3.16 3.85 4.71 5.46 | 1.92 2.74 3.33 4.08 4.73 | 1.57 2.24 2.72 3.33 3.86 | 1.95 2.79 3.40 4.15 4.82 | 1.69 2.42 2.94 3.60 4.17 | 1.38 1.97 2.40 2.94 3.41 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 2.74 | 2.49 | 2.11 | 2.40 | 2.18 | 1.90 | 2.18 | 1.93 | 1.57 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 2.22 | 1.93 | 1.57 | 1.88 | 1.63 | 1.33 | 1.66 | 1.44 | 1.17 |
Table .-G Maximum Spans for Roof Rafters – Specified Roof Snow Loads 2.5 and 3.0 kPa Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1) and .(1)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Rafter Size, mm | Maximum Span, m | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Specified Snow Load, kPa | ||||||||
| 2.5 | 3.0 | |||||||
| Rafter Spacing, mm | Rafter Spacing, mm | |||||||
| 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | |||
| Douglas Fir – Larch (includes Douglas Fir and Western Larch) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.51 3.95 5.20 6.64 8.08 | 2.28 3.59 4.72 6.03 7.23 | 1.99 3.14 4.12 5.08 5.90 | 2.37 3.72 4.89 6.24 7.60 | 2.15 3.38 4.44 5.67 6.65 | 1.88 2.95 3.83 4.68 5.43 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.41 3.76 4.58 5.60 6.50 | 2.19 3.26 3.96 4.85 5.63 | 1.86 2.66 3.24 3.96 4.59 | 2.27 3.46 4.21 5.15 5.98 | 2.06 3.00 3.65 4.46 5.17 | 1.71 2.45 2.98 3.64 4.23 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.79 2.55 3.10 3.80 4.41 | 1.55 2.21 2.69 3.29 3.82 | 1.26 1.80 2.20 2.68 3.12 | 1.64 2.35 2.86 3.49 4.05 | 1.42 2.03 2.47 3.02 3.51 | 1.16 1.66 2.02 2.47 2.87 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 2.30 | 2.00 | 1.63 | 2.12 | 1.84 | 1.50 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 1.73 | 1.50 | 1.22 | 1.59 | 1.38 | 1.12 | |
| Hem – Fir (includes Western Hemlock and Amabilis Fir) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.48 3.90 5.13 6.55 7.97 | 2.25 3.54 4.66 5.95 7.12 | 1.97 3.10 4.07 5.01 5.81 | 2.33 3.67 4.82 6.16 7.50 | 2.12 3.33 4.38 5.60 6.55 | 1.85 2.91 3.77 4.61 5.34 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.41 3.79 4.80 5.87 6.81 | 2.19 3.42 4.16 5.08 5.90 | 1.91 2.79 3.40 4.15 4.82 | 2.27 3.57 4.42 5.40 6.27 | 2.06 3.14 3.83 4.68 5.43 | 1.80 2.57 3.12 3.82 4.43 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.21 3.15 3.83 4.68 5.53 | 1.91 2.73 3.32 4.06 4.71 | 1.56 2.23 2.71 3.31 3.84 | 2.03 2.90 3.52 4.31 5.00 | 1.76 2.51 3.05 3.73 4.33 | 1.43 2.05 2.49 3.05 3.54 | |
| Commercial | 38 × 89 | 2.33 | 2.09 | 1.71 | 2.20 | 1.93 | 1.57 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 1.81 | 1.57 | 1.28 | 1.66 | 1.44 | 1.18 |
Table .-G (Cont'd) Maximum Spans for Roof Rafters – Specified Roof Snow Loads 2.5 and 3.0 kPa Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1) and .(1)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Rafter Size, mm | Maximum Span, m | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Specified Snow Load, kPa | ||||||||
| 2.5 | 3.0 | |||||||
| Rafter Spacing, mm | Rafter Spacing, mm | |||||||
| 300 | 400 | 600 | 300 | 400 | 600 | |||
| Spruce – Pine – Fir (includes Spruce (all species except Coast Sitka Spruce), Jack Pine, Lodgepole Pine, Balsam Fir and Alpine Fi r) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.37 3.73 4.90 6.26 7.62 | 2.15 3.39 4.45 5.69 6.92 | 1.88 2.96 3.89 4.97 5.90 | 2.23 3.51 4.61 5.89 7.17 | 2.03 3.19 4.19 5.35 6.52 | 1.77 2.79 3.66 4.68 5.43 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.29 3.61 4.74 6.06 7.06 | 2.08 3.28 4.31 5.27 6.11 | 1.82 2.86 3.52 4.30 4.99 | 2.16 3.40 4.46 5.59 6.49 | 1.96 3.08 3.96 4.84 5.62 | 1.71 2.66 3.23 3.96 4.59 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.21 3.15 3.83 4.68 5.43 | 1.91 2.73 3.32 4.06 4.71 | 1.56 2.23 2.71 3.31 3.84 | 2.03 2.90 3.52 4.31 5.00 | 1.76 2.51 3.05 3.73 4.33 | 1.43 2.05 2.49 3.05 3.54 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 2.25 | 2.05 | 1.77 | 2.12 | 1.93 | 1.63 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 1.87 | 1.62 | 1.33 | 1.72 | 1.49 | 1.22 | |
| Northern Species (includes any Canadian species covered by the NLGA Standard Grading Rules) | Select Structural | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.12 3.33 4.38 5.60 6.69 | 1.93 3.03 3.98 4.99 5.79 | 1.68 2.65 3.33 4.08 4.73 | 1.99 3.14 4.12 5.27 6.15 | 1.81 2.85 3.75 4.59 5.33 | 1.58 2.49 3.07 3.75 4.35 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 2.07 3.26 3.99 4.88 5.66 | 1.88 2.84 3.46 4.23 4.90 | 1.62 2.32 2.82 3.45 4.00 | 1.95 3.02 3.67 4.49 5.21 | 1.77 2.61 3.18 3.89 4.51 | 1.49 2.13 2.60 3.17 3.68 | |
| No. 3 | 38 × 89 38 × 140 38 × 184 38 × 235 38 × 286 | 1.77 2.52 3.07 3.76 4.36 | 1.53 2.19 2.66 3.25 3.77 | 1.25 1.78 2.17 2.66 3.08 | 1.63 2.32 2.82 3.45 4.01 | 1.41 2.01 2.45 2.99 3.47 | 1.15 1.64 2.00 2.44 2.83 | |
| Construction | 38 × 89 | 2.01 | 1.74 | 1.42 | 1.85 | 1.60 | 1.31 | |
| Standard | 38 × 89 | 1.50 | 1.30 | 1.06 | 1.38 | 1.19 | 0.98 |
Table .-H Maximum Spans for Built-up Floor Beams Supporting Not More than One Floor(1)(2) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(3), .(3) and .(1)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Supported Length, m (3)(4) | Maximum Span, m (5)(6) | ||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Size of Built-up Beam, mm | |||||||||||
| 3 – 38 × 184 | 4 – 38 × 184 | 5 – 38 × 184 | 3 – 38 × 235 | 4 – 38 × 235 | 5 – 38 × 235 | 3 – 38 × 286 | 4 – 38 × 286 | 5 – 38 × 286 | |||
| Douglas Fir – Larch (includes Douglas Fir and Western Larch) | Select Structural | 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 | 3.36 3.12 2.94 2.79 2.67 2.54 2.41 | 3.70 3.44 3.23 3.07 2.94 2.83 2.73 | 3.99 3.70 3.48 3.31 3.17 3.04 2.94 | 4.30 3.99 3.75 3.52 3.29 3.11 2.95 | 4.73 4.39 4.13 3.92 3.75 3.59 3.40 | 5.09 4.73 4.45 4.23 4.04 3.89 3.75 | 5.23 4.84 4.41 4.09 3.82 3.60 3.42 | 5.66 5.34 5.03 4.72 4.41 4.16 3.95 | 5.99 5.66 5.41 5.14 4.92 4.65 4.41 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 | 2.97 2.65 2.42 2.24 2.10 1.98 1.88 | 3.42 3.06 2.80 2.59 2.42 2.28 2.17 | 3.82 3.42 3.13 2.89 2.71 2.55 2.42 | 3.63 3.24 2.96 2.74 2.56 2.42 2.29 | 4.19 3.75 3.42 3.17 2.96 2.79 2.65 | 4.68 4.19 3.82 3.54 3.31 3.12 2.96 | 4.21 3.76 3.44 3.18 2.98 2.81 2.66 | 4.86 4.35 3.97 3.67 3.44 3.24 3.07 | 5.43 4.86 4.44 4.11 3.84 3.62 3.44 | |
| Hem – Fir (includes Western Hemlock and Amabilis Fir) | Select Structural | 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 | 3.32 3.08 2.90 2.75 2.63 2.49 2.28 | 3.65 3.39 3.19 3.03 2.90 2.79 2.69 | 3.93 3.65 3.44 3.27 3.12 3.00 2.90 | 4.24 3.93 3.70 3.47 3.24 2.95 2.70 | 4.66 4.33 4.08 3.87 3.70 3.53 3.35 | 5.03 4.66 4.39 4.17 3.99 3.83 3.70 | 5.16 4.76 4.35 4.02 3.66 3.32 3.04 | 5.61 5.27 4.96 4.65 4.35 4.10 3.87 | 5.93 5.61 5.34 5.07 4.85 4.58 4.35 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 | 3.11 2.78 2.54 2.35 2.20 2.07 1.97 | 3.55 3.21 2.93 2.72 2.54 2.39 2.27 | 3.82 3.55 3.28 3.04 2.84 2.68 2.54 | 3.80 3.40 3.11 2.88 2.69 2.54 2.41 | 4.39 3.93 3.59 3.32 3.11 2.93 2.78 | 4.88 4.39 4.01 3.71 3.47 3.27 3.11 | 4.41 3.95 3.60 3.34 3.12 2.94 2.79 | 5.10 4.56 4.16 3.85 3.60 3.40 3.22 | 5.70 5.10 4.65 4.31 4.03 3.80 3.60 |
Table .-H (Cont'd) Maximum Spans for Built-up Floor Beams Supporting Not More than One Floor(1)(2) Forming Part Sentences .(1), .(3), .(3) and .(1)
[TABLE:18] Notes to Table .-H:
(1) Beam spans apply only where the floors serve residential areas as described in Table ., or the uniformly distributed l ive load on the floors does not exceed that specified for residential areas as described in Table .
(2) When the floors have a concrete topping of not more than 51 mm, the spans must be multiplied by 0.8.
(3) Supported length means half the sum of the joists spans on both sides of the beam.
(4) Straight interpolation may be used for other supported lengths.
(5) Spans are clear spans between supports. For total span, add two bearing lengths.
(6) 3-ply beams with supported lengths greater than 4.2 m require minimum bearing length of 114 mm. All other beams require minimum bearing length of 76 mm.
Table .-I Maximum Spans for Built-up Floor Beams Supporting Not More than Two Floors(1)(2) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(3), .(3) and .(1)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Supported Length, m (3)(4) | Maximum Span, m (5)(6) | ||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Size of Built-up Beam, mm | |||||||||||
| 3 – 38 × 184 | 4 – 38 × 184 | 5 – 38 × 184 | 3 – 38 × 235 | 4 – 38 × 235 | 5 – 38 × 235 | 3 – 38 × 286 | 4 – 38 × 286 | 5 – 38 × 286 | |||
| Douglas Fir – Larch (includes Douglas Fir and Western Larch) | Select Structural | 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 | 2.80 2.55 2.33 2.16 2.00 1.82 1.67 | 3.08 2.86 2.69 2.49 2.33 2.20 2.08 | 3.32 3.08 2.90 2.75 2.60 2.45 2.33 | 3.49 3.12 2.85 2.64 2.38 2.17 2.00 | 3.93 3.60 3.29 3.04 2.85 2.68 2.51 | 4.24 3.93 3.68 3.40 3.18 3.00 2.85 | 4.05 3.62 3.30 2.99 2.69 2.45 2.26 | 4.67 4.18 3.82 3.53 3.30 3.08 2.83 | 5.16 4.67 4.27 3.95 3.69 3.48 3.30 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 | 2.22 1.99 1.81 1.68 1.57 1.48 1.40 | 2.56 2.29 2.09 1.94 1.81 1.71 1.62 | 2.87 2.56 2.34 2.17 2.03 1.91 1.81 | 2.72 2.43 2.22 2.05 1.92 1.81 1.72 | 3.14 2.80 2.56 2.37 2.22 2.09 1.98 | 3.51 3.14 2.86 2.65 2.48 2.34 2.22 | 3.15 2.82 2.57 2.38 2.23 2.10 1.99 | 3.64 3.25 2.97 2.75 2.57 2.43 2.30 | 4.07 3.64 3.32 3.07 2.88 2.71 2.57 | |
| Hem – Fir (includes Western Hemlock and Amabilis Fir) | Select Structural | 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 | 2.76 2.51 2.15 1.90 1.70 1.56 1.44 | 3.04 2.82 2.65 2.40 2.15 1.95 1.79 | 3.27 3.04 2.86 2.72 2.56 2.35 2.15 | 3.43 2.97 2.56 2.26 2.03 1.86 1.72 | 3.88 3.55 3.24 2.85 2.56 2.32 2.14 | 4.18 3.88 3.62 3.35 3.08 2.79 2.56 | 3.99 3.34 2.88 2.55 2.30 2.11 1.96 | 4.60 4.12 3.65 3.21 2.88 2.62 2.42 | 5.09 4.60 4.20 3.87 3.46 3.14 2.88 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 | 2.33 2.08 1.90 1.76 1.65 1.55 1.44 | 2.69 2.41 2.20 2.03 1.90 1.79 1.70 | 3.01 2.69 2.45 2.27 2.13 2.00 1.90 | 2.85 2.55 2.33 2.15 2.01 1.86 1.72 | 3.29 2.94 2.68 2.49 2.33 2.19 2.08 | 3.68 3.29 3.00 2.78 2.60 2.45 2.33 | 3.30 2.96 2.70 2.50 2.30 2.11 1.96 | 3.82 3.41 3.12 2.88 2.70 2.54 2.41 | 4.27 3.82 3.48 3.22 3.02 2.84 2.70 |
Table .-I (Cont'd) Maximum Spans for Built-up Floor Beams Supporting Not More than Two Floors(1)(2) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(3), .(3) and .(1)
[TABLE:20] Notes to Table .-I:
(1) Beam spans apply only where the floors serve residential areas as described in Table ., or the uniformly distributed li ve load on the floors does not exceed that specified for residential areas as described in Table .
(2) When the floors have a concrete topping of not more than 51 mm, the spans must be multiplied by 0.8.
(3) Supported length means half the sum of the joists spans on both sides of the beam.
(4) Straight interpolation may be used for other supported lengths.
(5) Spans are clear spans between supports. For total span, add two bearing lengths.
(6) 3-ply beams require minimum bearing length of 114 mm. 4-ply and 5-ply beams with supported lengths greater than 3 m require minimum bearing length of 114 mm. All other beams require minimum bearing length of 76 mm.
Table .-J Maximum Spans for Built-up Floor Beams Supporting Not More than Three Floors(1)(2) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(3), .(3) and .(1)
| Commercial Designation | Grade | Supported Length, m (3)(4) | Maximum Span, m (5)(6) | ||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Size of Built-up Beam, mm | |||||||||||
| 3 – 38 × 184 | 4 – 38 × 184 | 5 – 38 × 184 | 3 – 38 × 235 | 4 – 38 × 235 | 5 – 38 × 235 | 3 – 38 × 286 | 4 – 38 × 286 | 5 – 38 × 286 | |||
| Douglas Fir – Larch (includes Douglas Fir and Western Larch) | Select Structural | 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 | 2.38 2.13 1.88 1.66 1.50 1.38 1.28 | 2.74 2.46 2.24 2.08 1.88 1.71 1.58 | 2.95 2.74 2.51 2.32 2.17 2.05 1.88 | 2.91 2.60 2.24 1.99 1.80 1.65 1.53 | 3.36 3.00 2.74 2.49 2.24 2.04 1.89 | 3.75 3.36 3.06 2.84 2.65 2.44 2.24 | 3.37 2.92 2.53 2.25 2.04 1.88 1.75 | 3.89 3.48 3.18 2.81 2.53 2.31 2.14 | 4.35 3.89 3.56 3.29 3.02 2.75 2.53 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 | 1.85 1.66 1.51 1.40 1.31 1.23 1.17 | 2.14 1.91 1.74 1.62 1.51 1.42 1.35 | 2.39 2.14 1.95 1.81 1.69 1.59 1.51 | 2.26 2.02 1.85 1.71 1.60 1.51 1.43 | 2.61 2.34 2.13 1.98 1.85 1.74 1.65 | 2.92 2.61 2.39 2.21 2.07 1.95 1.85 | 2.63 2.35 2.14 1.99 1.86 1.75 1.66 | 3.03 2.71 2.48 2.29 2.14 2.02 1.92 | 3.39 3.03 2.77 2.56 2.40 2.26 2.14 | |
| Hem – Fir (includes Western Hemlock and Amabilis Fir) | Select Structural | 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 | 2.22 1.85 1.61 1.43 1.30 1.19 1.11 | 2.70 2.35 2.02 1.78 1.61 1.47 1.36 | 2.91 2.70 2.43 2.14 1.92 1.74 1.61 | 2.64 2.21 1.92 1.71 1.56 1.44 1.34 | 3.31 2.79 2.40 2.13 1.92 1.76 1.63 | 3.70 3.31 2.89 2.54 2.28 2.08 1.92 | 2.98 2.50 2.18 1.95 1.77 1.64 1.53 | 3.78 3.14 2.71 2.40 2.18 2.00 1.85 | 4.29 3.78 3.24 2.86 2.58 2.35 2.18 |
| No. 1 and No. 2 | 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6.0 | 1.94 1.74 1.58 1.43 1.30 1.19 1.11 | 2.24 2.00 1.83 1.69 1.58 1.47 1.36 | 2.51 2.24 2.05 1.89 1.77 1.67 1.58 | 2.37 2.12 1.92 1.71 1.56 1.44 1.34 | 2.74 2.45 2.24 2.07 1.92 1.76 1.63 | 3.06 2.74 2.50 2.32 2.17 2.04 1.92 | 2.75 2.46 2.18 1.95 1.77 1.64 1.53 | 3.18 2.84 2.60 2.40 2.18 2.00 1.85 | 3.56 3.18 2.90 2.69 2.51 2.35 2.18 |
Table .-J (Cont'd) Maximum Spans for Built-up Floor Beams Supporting Not More than Three Floors(1)(2) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(3), .(3) and .(1)
[TABLE:22] Notes to Table .-J:
(1) Beam spans apply only where the floors serve residential areas as described in Table ., or the uniformly distributed l ive load on the floors does not exceed that specified for residential areas as described in Table .
(2) When the floors have a concrete topping of not more than 51 mm, the spans must be multiplied by 0.8.
(3) Supported length means half the sum of the joists spans on both sides of the beam.
(4) Straight interpolation may be used for other supported lengths.
(5) Spans are clear spans between supports. For total span, add two bearing lengths.
(6) 3-ply beams with supported lengths greater than 4.2 m require minimum bearing length of 152 mm. All other beams require minimum bearing length of 114 mm.
Table .-K Maximum Spans for Glue-Laminated Floor Beams – 20f-E Grade(1) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(3), .(3) and .(1)
[TABLE:23] Notes to Table .-K:
(1) Spans apply only where the floors serve residential areas as described in Table ., or the uniformly distributed live load on the floor does not exceed that specified for residential areas as described in Table .
(2) Supported length means half the sum of the joist spans on both sides of the beam.
(3) Straight interpolation may be used for other supported lengths.
(4) Spans are valid for glued-laminated timber conforming to CAN/CSA-O122 and CSA O177.
(5) Spans are clear spans between supports. For total span, add two bearing lengths.
(6) Provide a minimum bearing length of 89 mm. (Alternatively, the bearing length may be designed in accordance with Part 4.)
(7) Top edge of beam assumed to be fully laterally supported by joists.
Table .-L Maximum Spans for Built-up Ridge Beams and Lintels Supporting the Roof and Ceiling Only – No. 1 or No. 2 Grade Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(4), .(1), .(1) and (3) and .(2)
[TABLE:24] Notes to Table .-L:
(1) Beam and lintel spans are calculated based on a maximum supported length of 4.9 m. Spans may be increased by 5% for supported lengths of not more than 4.3 m, by 10% for supported lengths of not more than 3.7 m, and by 25% for supported lengths of not more than 2.4 m.
(2) For ridge beams, supported length means half the sum of the rafter, joist or truss spans on both sides of the beam. For lintels, supported length means half the sum of truss, roof joist or rafter spans supported by the lintel plus the length of the overhang beyond the lintel.
(3) Provide a minimum bearing length of 76 mm.
Table .-A Maximum Spans for Steel Beams Supporting a Roof and One Floor in Dwelling Units Where Beams Support Exterior Stud Walls With Brick Veneer – 1.0 kPa Specified Roof Design Snow Load Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
[TABLE:25] Notes to Table .-A:
(1) Supported roof length means half the sum of the roof framing spans on both sides of the beam.
(2) Supported floor length means half the sum of the floor framing spans on both sides of the beam.
Table .-B Maximum Spans for Steel Beams Supporting a Roof and One Floor in Dwelling Units Where Beams Support Interior Stud Walls or Exterior Stud Walls With Siding – 1.0 kPa Specified Roof Design Snow Load Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
[TABLE:26] Notes to Table .-B:
(1) Supported roof length means half the sum of the roof framing spans on both sides of the beam.
(2) Supported floor length means half the sum of the floor framing spans on both sides of the beam.
Table .-C Maximum Spans for Steel Beams Supporting a Roof and One Floor in Dwelling Units Where Beams Support Exterior Stud Walls With Brick Veneer – 1.5 kPa Specified Roof Design Snow Load Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
[TABLE:27] Notes to Table .-C:
(1) Supported roof length means half the sum of the roof framing spans on both sides of the beam.
(2) Supported floor length means half the sum of the floor framing spans on both sides of the beam.
Table .-D Maximum Spans for Steel Beams Supporting a Roof and One Floor in Dwelling Units Where Beams Support Interior Stud Walls or Exterior Stud Walls With Siding – 1.5 kPa Specified Roof Design Snow Load Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
[TABLE:28] Notes to Table .-D:
(1) Supported roof length means half the sum of the roof framing spans on both sides of the beam.
(2) Supported floor length means half the sum of the floor framing spans on both sides of the beam.
Table .-E Maximum Spans for Steel Beams Supporting a Roof and One Floor in Dwelling Units Where Beams Support Exterior Stud Walls With Brick Veneer – 2.0 kPa Specified Roof Design Snow Load Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
[TABLE:29] Notes to Table .-E:
(1) Supported roof length means half the sum of the roof framing spans on both sides of the beam.
(2) Supported floor length means half the sum of the floor framing spans on both sides of the beam.
Table .-F Maximum Spans for Steel Beams Supporting a Roof and One Floor in Dwelling Units Where Beams Support Interior Stud Walls or Exterior Stud Walls With Siding – 2.0 kPa Specified Roof Design Snow Load Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
[TABLE:30] Notes to Table .-F:
(1) Supported roof length means half the sum of the roof framing spans on both sides of the beam.
(2) Supported floor length means half the sum of the floor framing spans on both sides of the beam.
Table .-G Maximum Spans for Steel Beams Supporting a Roof and One Floor in Dwelling Units Where Beams Support Exterior Stud Walls With Brick Veneer – 2.5 kPa Specified Roof Design Snow Load Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
[TABLE:31] Notes to Table .-G:
(1) Supported roof length means half the sum of the roof framing spans on both sides of the beam.
(2) Supported floor length means half the sum of the floor framing spans on both sides of the beam.
Table .-H Maximum Spans for Steel Beams Supporting a Roof and One Floor in Dwelling Units Where Beams Support Interior Stud Walls or Exterior Stud Walls With Siding – 2.5 kPa Specified Roof Design Snow Load Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
[TABLE:32] Notes to Table .-H:
(1) Supported roof length means half the sum of the roof framing spans on both sides of the beam.
(2) Supported floor length means half the sum of the floor framing spans on both sides of the beam.
Table -I Maximum Spans for Steel Beams Supporting a Roof and One Floor in Dwelling Units Where Beams Support Exterior Stud Walls With Brick Veneer – 3.0 kPa Specified Roof Design Snow Load Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
[TABLE:33] Notes to Table -I:
(1) Supported roof length means half the sum of the roof framing spans on both sides of the beam.
(2) Supported floor length means half the sum of the floor framing spans on both sides of the beam.
Table -J Maximum Spans for Steel Beams Supporting a Roof and One Floor in Dwelling Units Where Beams Support Interior Stud Walls or Exterior Stud Walls With Siding – 3.0 kPa Specified Roof Design Snow Load Forming Part of Sentence .(1)
[TABLE:34] Notes to Table -J:
(1) Supported roof length means half the sum of the roof framing spans on both sides of the beam.
(2) Supported floor length means half the sum of the floor framing spans on both sides of the beam.
Table .-A Sizes for Spruce-Pine-Fir No. 2 Grade Exterior Wall Studs With Brick Veneer(1)(2) Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
[TABLE:35] Legend-Stud Size and Spacing A = 38 × 140 mm at 400 mm on centre C = two 38 × 140 mm studs at 400 mm on centre B = 38 × 140 mm at 300 mm on centre D = two 38 × 140 mm studs at 300 mm on centre Notes to Table .-A:
(1) A roof dead load of 0.5 kPa has been assumed. The Table does not apply where the stud supports additional loads from heavy roofing materials such as concrete tiles or clay roofing tiles.
(2) Wall construction shall conform to the requirements of Sentence .(2).
Table .-B Sizes for Spruce-Pine-Fir No. 2 Grade Exterior Wall Studs With Siding(1)(2) Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
[TABLE:36] Legend-Stud Size and Spacing A = 38 × 140 mm at 400 mm on centre C = two 38 × 140 mm studs at 400 mm on centre B = 38 × 140 mm at 300 mm on centre D = two 38 × 140 mm studs at 300 mm on centre Notes to Table .-B:
(1) A roof dead load of 0.5 kPa has been assumed. The Table does not apply where the stud supports additional loads from heavy roofing materials such as concrete tiles or clay roofing tiles.
(2) Wall construction shall conform to the requirements of Sentence .(2).
Table .-C Sizes for Northern Species No. 2 Grade Exterior Wall Studs With Brick Veneer(1)(2) Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
[TABLE:37] Legend-Stud Size and Spacing A = 38 × 140 mm at 400 mm on centre C = two 38 × 140 mm studs at 400 mm on centre B = 38 × 140 mm at 300 mm on centre D = two 38 × 140 mm studs at 300 mm on centre Notes to Table .-C:
(1) A roof dead load of 0.5 kPa has been assumed. The Table does not apply where the stud supports additional loads from heavy roofing materials such as concrete tiles or clay roofing tiles.
(2) Wall construction shall conform to the requirements of Sentence .(2).
Table .-D Sizes for Northern Species No. 2 Grade Exterior Wall Studs With Siding(1)(2) Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
[TABLE:38] Legend-Stud Size and Spacing A = 38 × 140 mm at 400 mm on centre C = two 38 × 140 mm studs at 400 mm on centre B = 38 × 140 mm at 300 mm on centre D = two 38 × 140 mm studs at 300 mm on centre Notes to Table .-D:
(1) A roof dead load of 0.5 kPa has been assumed. The Table does not apply where the stud supports additional loads from heavy roofing materials such as concrete tiles or clay roofing tiles.
(2) Wall construction shall conform to the requirements of Sentence .(2).
Table .-A Minimum Number of 38 × 89 mm Spruce-Pine-Fir Stud Posts in Exterior Stud Walls Supporting Girder Trusses and Roof Beams(1)(2)(3) Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
[TABLE:39] Notes to Table .-A:
(1) A roof dead load of 0.62 kPa has been assumed.
(2) Roof beams require a minimum bearing length of 89 mm.
(3) Girder trusses require a minimum bearing length of 89 mm unless otherwise specified by the truss manufacturer.
Table .-B Minimum Number of 38 × 140 mm Spruce-Pine-Fir Stud Posts in Exterior Stud Walls Supporting Girder Trusses and Roof Beams(1)(2)(3) Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
[TABLE:40] Notes to Table .-B:
(1) A roof dead load of 0.62 kPa has been assumed.
(2) Roof beams require a minimum bearing length of 140 mm.
(3) Girder trusses require a minimum bearing length of 140 mm unless otherwise specified by the truss manufacturer.
Table .-C Minimum Number of 38 × 89 mm Northern Species Stud Posts in Exterior Stud Walls Supporting Girder Trusses and Roof Beams(1)(2)(3) Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
[TABLE:41] Notes to Table .-C:
(1) A roof dead load of 0.62 kPa has been assumed.
(2) Roof beams require a minimum bearing length of 89 mm.
(3) Girder trusses require a minimum bearing length of 89 mm unless otherwise specified by the truss manufacturer.
Table .-D Minimum Number of 38 × 140 mm Northern Species Stud Posts in Exterior Stud Walls Supporting Girder Trusses and Roof Beams(1)(2)(3) Forming Part of Sentence .(2)
[TABLE:42] Notes to Table .-D:
(1) A roof dead load of 0.62 kPa has been assumed.
(2) Roof beams require a minimum bearing length of 140 mm.
(3) Girder trusses require a minimum bearing length of 140 mm unless otherwise specified by the truss manufacturer.
Table .-A Maximum Spans for Douglas Fir – Larch Lintels – No. 1 or No. 2 Grade – Non-Structural Sheathing(1) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1), .(1) and (3)
[TABLE:43] Notes to Table .-A:
(1) Where structural sheathing is used, lintel spans may be increased by 15%. Structural sheathing consists of a minimum 9.5 mm thick structural panel conforming to CSA O121, CSA O151, CSA O325 or CSA O437.0 fastened with at least two rows of fasteners to the exterior face of the lintel, and a single row to the top plates and studs. Fasteners shall conform to Table .-A.
(2) A single piece of 89 mm thick lumber may be used in lieu of 2 pieces of 38 mm thick lumber on edge.
(3) If floor joists span the full width of the building without support, lintel spans shall be reduced by 15% for “Roof, ceiling and 1 storey”, by 20% for “Roof, ceiling and 2 storeys”, and by 25% for “Roof, ceiling and 3 storeys”.
(4) For ends of lintels fully supported by walls, provide minimum bearing length of 38 mm for lintel spans up to 3 m, or minimum bearing length of 76 mm for lintel spans greater than 3 m.
(5) Spans for 0.6 m tributary width are calculated for lintels in end walls that support only a 0.6 m width of roof and ceiling, but do not support roof joists, roof rafters or roof trusses.
(6) Lintel spans are calculated based on a maximum floor joist, roof joist or rafter span of 4.9 m and a maximum roof truss span of 9.8 m. Lintel spans may be increased by 5% if rafter and joist spans are not more than 4.3 m and roof truss spans are not more than 8.6 m. Spans may be increased by 10% if rafter and joist spans are not more than 3.7 m and roof trusses are not more than 7.4 m.
(7) Spans apply only where the floors serve residential areas as described in Table ., or the uniformly distributed live load does not exceed that specified for residential areas as described in Table .
Table .-B Maximum Spans for Hem – Fir Lintels – No. 1 or No. 2 Grade – Non-Structural Sheathing(1) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1), .(1) and (3)
[TABLE:44] Notes to Table .-B:
(1) Where structural sheathing is used, lintel spans may be increased by 15%. Structural sheathing consists of a minimum 9.5 mm thick structural panel conforming to CSA O121, CSA O151, CSA O325 or CSA O437.0 fastened with at least two rows of fasteners to the exterior face of the lintel, and a single row to the top plates and studs. Fasteners shall conform to Table .-A.
(2) A single piece of 89 mm thick lumber may be used in lieu of 2 pieces of 38 mm thick lumber on edge.
(3) If floor joists span the full width of the building without support, lintel spans shall be reduced by 15% for “Roof, ceiling and 1 storey”, by 20% for “Roof, ceiling and 2 storeys”, and by 25% for “Roof, ceiling and 3 storeys”.
(4) For ends of lintels fully supported by walls, provide minimum bearing length of 38 mm for lintel spans up to 3 m, or minimum bearing length of 76 mm for lintel spans greater than 3 m.
(5) Spans for 0.6 m tributary width are calculated for lintels in end walls that support only a 0.6 m width of roof and ceiling, but do not support roof joists, roof rafters or roof trusses.
(6) Lintel spans are calculated based on a maximum floor joist, roof joist or rafter span of 4.9 m and a maximum roof truss span of 9.8 m. Lintel spans may be increased by 5% if rafter and joist spans are not more than 4.3 m and roof truss spans are not more than 8.6 m. Spans may be increased by 10% if rafter and joist spans are not more than 3.7 m and roof trusses are not more than 7.4 m.
(7) Spans apply only where the floors serve residential areas as described in Table ., or the uniformly distributed live load does not exceed that specified for residential areas as described in Table .
Table .-C Maximum Spans for Spruce – Pine – Fir Lintels – No. 1 or No. 2 Grade – Non-Structural Sheathing(1) Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1), .(1) and (3)
[TABLE:45] Notes to Table .-C:
(1) Where structural sheathing is used, lintel spans may be increased by 15%. Structural sheathing consists of a minimum 9.5 mm thick structural panel conforming to CSA O121, CSA O151, CSA O325 or CSA O437.0 fastened with at least two rows of fasteners to the exterior face of the lintel, and a single row to the top plates and studs. Fasteners shall conform to Table .-A.
(2) A single piece of 89 mm thick lumber may be used in lieu of 2 pieces of 38 mm thick lumber on edge.
(3) If floor joists span the full width of the building without support, lintel spans shall be reduced by 15% for “Roof, ceiling and 1 storey”, by 20% for “Roof, ceiling and 2 storeys”, and by 25% for “Roof, ceiling and 3 storeys”.
(4) For ends of lintels fully supported by walls, provide minimum bearing length of 38 mm for lintel spans up to 3 m, or minimum bearing length of 76 mm for lintel spans greater than 3 m.
(5) Spans for 0.6 m tributary width are calculated for lintels in end walls that support only a 0.6 m width of roof and ceiling, but do not support roof joists, roof rafters or roof trusses.
(6) Lintel spans are calculated based on a maximum floor joist, roof joist or rafter span of 4.9 m and a maximum roof truss span of 9.8 m. Lintel spans may be increased by 5% if rafter and joist spans are not more than 4.3 m and roof truss spans are not more than 8.6 m. Spans may be increased by 10% if rafter and joist spans are not more than 3.7 m and roof trusses are not more than 7.4 m.
(7) Spans apply only where the floors serve residential areas as described in Table ., or the uniformly distributed live load does not exceed that specified for residential areas as described in Table .
Table .-D Maximum Spans for Glued-Laminated Timber Lintels – 20f-E Stress Grade – Exterior Walls – Roof and Ceiling Load Only Forming Part of Sentences .(1), .(1), .(1) and (3)
[TABLE:46] Notes to Table .-D:
(1) Spans are valid for glued-laminated timber conforming to CAN/CSA-O122 and CSA O177.
(2) Provide a minimum bearing length of 89 mm. (Alternatively, the bearing length may be calculated in accordance with Part 4.)
(3) Top edge of lintel assumed to be fully laterally supported.
(4) Supported length means half the length of trusses or rafters, plus the length of overhang beyond the wall.
(5) For intermediate supported lengths, straight interpolation may be used. Change of Use